Home

Bose® Speaker EQ Preset List – Stereo Bank

1. N Sc ZA MIESO YO 2 TE METE MTE o all A U D J 3 SOHZAITER L gt nr 3 3 3 p 5 5 5 5 879 Pe POWE Bm ma N HUN 10 10 10 Fa GL UN Lo NA Rear panel Panneau R ckseite Panel posterior L XRinputs Channels 1 and 2 1 Entr es XR Canaux 1 et 2 1 X F EHng nge Kan le 1 und 2 1 Entradas XLR Canales 1 y 2 2 Configuration switch 2 S lecteur de configuration 2 Konfigurationsschalter 2 Selector de configuraci n 3 Configuration Switch chart Diagramme au sdlecteur de Erl uterung des 3
2. 16
3. em p me won 4 Win lt 000000000 000000000 0000000000 0000000000 gt 0000000 0000000 00000 mm extus E TOT 5 i EEEH me BAS mu SS 000000 0000000 2000000 0000 E A 000000 win 4 208 0000 0000 5889 0000 2888 1000 a 0000000 0000 CIE q x B jaa 0000 0000 0000 deals 0000 f B onog SEE 0000 SS NE 0000 0000 0000 E o B 000000 _ 88 u _ pa S P8 olg SY SIE E Sle cil B cJ eis Y SUS 3B d m ag Deag SEE gt ERE E SES ES Bi sg Y 88 S s YE Ya A E 5 b p gt 00000000 84 5 00000000 E 00000000 E tal W EE gd an Y EM Bee Ko GN pi Eje ARE Gap
4. Mixing board Console de mixage Mischpult Mezclador Ch 1 input Eingang Kanal 1 Ch 2 input Entr e Canal 2 Eingang Kanal 2 Entrada Canal 2 A E O y dp Stereo b Audio niveau ligne Audio de nivel de lin a Full range loudspeakers Enceintes de plein registre Vollbereichlautsprecher Bocinas de gama llena Line level audio Audio niveau ligne Linepegel Audio Audio de nivel de lin a Line level audio Linepegel Audio 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 subwoofer 0000 000000 000000 000000 1 parallel mode 000000 IX 000000 000000 Ch 1 input Entr e Canal 1 iamp m Entr
5. Mischpult Mezclador Aktivweiche Crossover activo Active crossover 7 S parateur activ Mixing board Console de mixage B Audio niveau ligne Linepegel Audio Audio de nivel de lin a Line level audio Enceintes de plein registre Vollbereichlautsprecher Full range loudspeakers Bocinas de gama llena 2 Stereo b Line level audio Audio niveau ligne Linepegel Audio PLX amp stereo mode 1 CEST TM Entr e Canal 1 1
6. 000009000000 ardid ono q a 000000000000 O0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 oo O00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 LX7 Console Typical Starting Out Control Positions Page 30 Dimensions Abmessungen Dimensions Dimensioni Dimensiones yenpunos 2 503MM 19 8 77MM 3 31MM 1 2 32 INPUT 1059MM 41 4 24 INPUT 856MM 33 7 16 INPUT 653MM 25 7 PACKED WEIGHT 16ch 18 2kg 40165 24ch 21 8kg 48lbs 32ch 23 0kg 50lbs Page 31 Specifications Technische Daten Specifications Specifiche Especificaciones Noise Measured RMS 22Hz to 22kHz Bandwidth Mic E I N unity gain 1500 source impedance Mix Output 24 inputs routed to mix faders at unity muted Mix Output 24 inputs routed to mix faders down Input to Direct output at unity gain Input to Direct output at 40dB gain Crosstalk kHz typical Fader attenuation Aux attenuation Pan isolation Adjacent channel crosstalk
7. E 1 E Boi E E xt sme pee E
8. 16 Intercom Channels Balanced mode SW1 set to BAL position 16 Intercom Channels Unbalanced mode SW1 set to UNBAL position 16 Speaker d 17 DIMENSIONS 17 Introduction Thank you for purchasing the Audiocom SS 1002 SS 2002 SS 2002RM Intercom Speaker Station We hope the many design features of this product will satisfy your intercommunication requirements for many years to come To get the most out of your new intercom station please take a few moments to look through this booklet before using the Intercom Speaker Station for the first time Description The Intercom Speaker Stations may be used with a headset or with the built in speaker and the panel microphone or an optional gooseneck microphone Another alternative 15 to use headphones and either the built in panel microphone or an optional goose neck microphone As an alternative to a headset a telephone style handset may also be used The SS 1002 15 a single channel station the SS 2002 amp SS 2002RM provide switch selectable access to either of two intercom channels Both the SS 1002 and 55 2002 come in three versions to suit a variety of applications The 5 box is a portable version It has a carrying handle and dual loop through intercom connectors which perm
9. SMA E AYN m ANO NS i SM E r gam E E E E p 00000000 BBS 2 15 56 38 88 SRS E ca C3 E pac E E 000 7
10. 11 4 RAS iia 11 5 DIGITAL 11 6 1 11 7 _ 11 8 ISP aee DEDI 11 99 key nennen 11 10 DISPLAY 11 11 MULTI JOG control 11 42 switch PLAY OFF REC 11 4 PHONES jack and LEVEL control 11 14 REC LEVEL 5 11 45 7 11 10 ERASE 11 17 STOP 12 49 12 49 PAUSE 12 0 12 0 12 22 FADER 12 2 2 Rear panel uni 12 ANALOG IN L R UNBALANCED 12 0 ANALOG OUT L R UNBALANCED 12 DIGITAL COAXIAL IN OUT 12 26 DIGITAL OPTICAL IN OUT 12 2 3 Remote control unit 12 POWERkey 12 12 Number keys 0 through 10 and a TO
11. arat 12 1 12 12 Q DISPLAY key 12 MENU key 12 Q ENTER 12 12 4 12 12 0 FINALIZE key 12 Table of Contents B ERASE key 12 RECORD key 12 6 SYNC REC 13 4 REC MUTE 13 4 SEARCHkeys 13 6 SKIP keys 13 47 5 13 PAUSE 13 6 PLAY key 13 2 3 1 Use of the remote control unit 13 2 4 Connections 13 2 5 Timer operations 13 2 5 1 Setting the clock 13 2 5 2 Setting the timer 14 2 5 3 Using the timer 14 3 Playback operations 3 1 Simple playback operations 15 3 1 1 Time display modes
12. 15 3 1 2 Track Search nein 15 3 1 3 Playback modes 15 3 2 Programmed order playback 16 3 3 Repeat play iens 16 4 Recording 41 Input selection 17 4 1 1 Signal volume 17 4 1 2 Input monitoring 17 4 1 3 Frequency conversion 17 4 2 Basic recording 18 4 2 1 Playing back tracks 18 4 2 2 Time display while recording 18 4 2 3 Manual track division 19 4 2 4 Restricting the number of tracks 19 4 2 5 lt EUll GISG nai e cete 19 4 3 Advanced recording 19 4 3 1 Synchronized recording 19 4 3 2 Automatic track division 21 4 3 3 SCMS and the CD RW700 22 4 3 4 22 4 3 5 Rec mute function 23 4 3 6 and fade out 23 44 Rehearsal cocaina 23 4 4 1 Rehearsal for synchronized recording 24 4 4 2 Rehearsal for track division 25 5 After recording 5 1 FinallZing eem 26 5 1 1 Unfinalizing CD RW discs 26 5 2 A ein
13. gt amp 664 9 OSPIRIT 0 00 QOOOOOO ana f uu oooooo 00000 DO NOT USE unbalanced mics with 48V switched on as they may be damaged by the phantom power volt age Balanced dynamic mics and leads can normally be used with 48V switched on contact your microphone manufacturer for guidance Mics should always be plugged in and all output faders set to minimum before switching 48V ON to avoid damage to external equipment OY Phones The PHONES output appears on a 3 pole 1 4 jack suitable for head phones with an impedance of 2000 or higher TB LEVEL A balanced input is provided for a Talkback microphone The signal may be routed selectively to Aux 1 2 or 3 4 which might typically be used for per formers foldback or Mix L R by pressing the appropriate switches The signal level is adjusted by the TB LEVEL control STEREO RETURNS Two balanced Stereo Returns are available for the outputs of effects units and are mixed directly to the Mix L R busses at a level set by the or RET 2 controls If a mono source is used plugging into the Left jack only automatically feeds to the signal to both Left and Right QD m seves The rotary control sets the level of the 2 Track Tape input which is routed to the headphones monitor outputs and meters or directly to the Mix out put
14. 26 5 2 1 Erasing tracks eene 26 5 2 2 Erasing a whole disc 27 5 2 3 Refreshing a disc 27 6 Reference and specifications 6 1 Troubleshooting 28 6 2 Specifications 28 TASCAM CD RW700 5 1 Introduction The CD RW700 CD rewritable recorder allows you to make your own CDs from a variety of sources other CDs MD recordings analog cassette tapes and records Tracks can be recorded all at one time or added until the disc is finalized allowing it to be played on CD players Some models of CD player may be unable to play certain discs produced using the CD RW700 A variety of sophisticated features are incorporated in the CD RW700 allowing a wide degree of flexi bility The CD RW700 provides analog unbalanced audio inputs and outputs for connection to 10 dBV equip ment In addition coaxial and optical inputs and outputs are provided for recording from and playing back to suitably equipped digital audio equipment The analog and digital signals may be mixed allow ing unprecedented versatility while recording 24 bit digital to analog and analog to digital con verters provide excellent recording and playback quality A sampling frequency convertor is incorporated allowing the recording of CDs from digital audio sources which are at freq
15. revise las entradas Aseg rese de que exista la se al y cambie los Gables en las entrades Conede la se al a dro canal u cto anplificador para confinmar su fundonamiento TROUBLESHOOTING No sound continued gt INDICATION SIGNAL LEDs RESPONDING TO SIGNAL LEVEL If the geen SIGNAL 20 dB and 10 dB indicators are lighting nomrally the fault is somewhere between the anp and the speaker Checkthe speaker wiring for breaks Try another speaker and cable gt INDICATION CLIP LEDs BRIGHT AND STEADY The 15 in protective muting One second of muting is when the arrpis tumed on or off e Overbeating will cause protective muting The fan will be running at full speed and the chassis will be hot to the touch sound should resurre within a minute as the anplifier cools to a safe operating temperature Check for proper ventilation If the fan isn t running at all the anplifier requires senidng gt INDICATION CLIP LED FLASHING e If the red CLIP indicator flashes when signal is applied the output may be shorted Check the speaker wiring for stray Strands or breaks in the insulation D PANNAGE Pas cle son site gt INDICATION DEL DE SIGNAL FONCTIONNENT NORMALEMENT e Si les DEL SIGNAL 2083 el 100B fondioment nomralerrert le prodlerre se situe entre la del amdificateur e le hautpaneur V rifiez l int grit du de
16. 3 Press the MULTI JOG control ER or the ENTER key on the remote control unit The hours value will start flashing 4 Turn the MULTI JOG control or use the remote control unit SKIP keys D to set the current hour TASCAM CD RW700 13 2 Features of the CD RW700 Timer operations 5 Press the MULTI JOG control the ENTER key to confirm the hour setting The minutes value starts flashing The unit uses the 24 hour e clock where 1 p m is represented by 5 etc 6 Turn the MULTI JOG control or use the remote control unit SKIP keys to set the current min utes 7 Press the MULTI JOG control or the ENTER key to confirm the minute setting and return to the standby mode The unit now shows the current time in standby mode and the colon between the hours and the minutes flash once per second If the unit is disconnected from the power supply for an ddr of time the clock must be reset the t 1 iin zt message appears when power 15 For this reason if connect ing the unit through a power distributor we suggest that you use an unswitched outlet on the distributor 2 5 2 Setting the timer Once the clock has been set following the procedure above the timer can be set The procedure below sets the time at which the unit will turn on and off 1 Make sure the unit is turned on and a disc is inserted 2 Press the MENU ed e or until the dis play shows 1 i MEF 3 Pr
17. Page 15 SECCION MASTER O MASTERS DE AUXILIARES Cada una de las seis salidas de auxiliar disponen de un control de nivel master y un interruptor AFL asociado AFL DE AUXILIAR Igual que los interruptores PFL de los canales puede monitorizar cada salida de auxiliar pulsando el bot n AFL Esto env a la senal de salida de auxiliar al moni tor o a los auriculares reemplazando cualquier sefial existente normalmente el monitor recibe MIX SUB o 2TK ver m s arriba Los medidores tambi n cam bian de la fuente seleccionada a la se al PFL AFL y el LED PFL AFL se ilumina para indicar que hay un bot n PFL AFL pulsado soltar el bot n el monitor vuelve a la fuente anterior ED INDICADOR DE ALIMENTACION Este LED se ilumina para mostrar que la consola est alimentaci n est conecta da y que la fuente de alimentaci n interna opera correctamente MEDIDORES BARGRAPH Los medidores de picos bargraph con 3 colores monitorizan las cuatro salidas de Subgrupo y la fuente seleccionada de Monitor Auriculares 2TK Mono Mix o Grupos ofreci ndole un aviso constante de los picos excesivos en la se al que pueden causar saturaci n Procure mantener la se al dentro de los segmentos mbar a niveles de pico para obtener el mejor comportamiento Si el nivel de salida es demasiado bajo y casi no se ve en los medidores el nivel de ruido de fondo puede ser significante Preoc pese de ajustar los niveles de entrada para una m
18. ans pan exnv Dims lt gt va N udavd NO 81 21 VL EL O3H31S uv1IINIS 0 61 91 91 SLNANI O3H3IS 419 JH 03 41 J18VN3 Ad snd 14371 915 sna LHDIY XIN sna 1337 XIN s3ssna xnv 8 HO 3198VN3 Tdd 1H3SNI 1 1 153410 1 1SOd 103810 i 1 NEM SSVd HOIH ZHOOL A8v Page 29 SPIRIT FOLIO 221122270222 MM SPIRIT FOLIO MAIN OUTPUTS AUX AUX 2 AUX3 By Soundcraft SUB R L MIX R O o L L MIX INSERT MONITOR MONO SUM 15 1 L M 9 2TK LINE LINE LINE LINE INS INS INS 9 10 11 PHONES 3 oo 20 SENS _ ER p a 9 6 LEVEL a 5 LEVEL 3 7 3 7 Q y d E 2 2 48V Q 1 9 1 9 60dBu 10 0 10 se xe 525 po SUB SUP v oO E 05 13 14 17 18 C WO ees ur ie n 15 16 19 20 m s 2 2 1 Aw REF O 0 O 2 8 15 15 5 15 T2k GAIN GAIN 10 22dB 0 22dB R O MIX SUB Q 240 6kHz 37 37 Q 2Q 37 0 5 5 S 9 5 o c T3 5
19. tre utilis sur un bateau 6 Avvertenza Italiano Per ridurre il pericolo di incendi o scosse elettriche non esporre l apparecchio alla pioggia o all umidit PERICOLO DI SCOSSE ELETTRICHE NON APRIRE ATTENZIONE PER RIDURRE IL PERICOLO DI SCOSSE ELETTRICHE NON RIMUOVERE IL COPERCHIO O IL PANNELLO POSTERIORE NON SONO PRESENTI PARTI SOSTITUIBILI DALL UTENTE PER L ASSISTENZA CONTATTATE IL PERSONALE QUALIFICATO seguenti simboli di AVVERTENZA sono apposti sul pannello posteriore del PANARAY System Digital Controller Il simbolo del fulmine all interno di un triangolo equilatero ha lo scopo di avvertire gli utenti della presenza di tensione pericolosa non isolata all interno dell apparecchio il cui livello tale da costituire un potenziale rischio di scos sa elettrica Il simbolo del punto esclamativo all interno del triangolo equilatero riportato sull apparecchio ha lo scopo di informare gli utenti della presenza di impor tanti istruzioni di funzionamento e manutenzione nella documentazione forni ta con il prodotto Importanti norme di sicurezza 1 Leggete attentamente le istruzioni riportate di seguito 2 Prestate attenzione alle avvertenze riportate sull apparecchio e nel manuale di istruzioni Non utilizzate questo apparecchio vicino a fonti di umidit o acqua Utilizzate esclusivamente un panno asciutto per pulire l apparecchio Non ostruite le aperture di ventilazione
20. Das eingebaute Netzger t enth lt keine Komponenten die vom Benutzer gewaretet werden m ssen Eventuelle Serviceleistungen d rfen nur von qualifiziertem Fachpersonal oder dem SPIRIT Fachmann durchgef hrt werden PRECAUTIONS CETTE APPAREIL DOIT IMP RATIVEMENT TRE RELI LA TERRE En aucune circonstance la terre ne doit etre d con nect e du c ble secteur Les conducteurs du c ble secteur sont identifi s comme suit Vert Jaune Terre Bleu Neutre Brun Phase Pour viter tout risque d incendie remplacez le fusible uniquement par un fusible de la valeur correcte indiqu e sur l alimentation L alimentation interne ne contient pas de pi ces acces sibles par l utilisateur R f rez vous du personnel qualifi NORME DI SICUREZZA ATTENZIONE QUESTO APPARECCHIO VA COLLE GATO A TERRA In nessun caso il collegamento di terra va staccato da quello dell alimentazione cavi sono colorati come segue Terra Verde e Giallo Neutro Blu Vivo Marrone In caso i colori siano diversi operare come segue O Verde e Giallo va collegato al terminale E o con il simbolo di terra O Cavo Blu va collegato al terminale Marrone va collegato al terminale L Assicurarsi che questi codici colore siano rispettati in caso di sostituzione della presa Questo apparecchio pu operare con diverse tensioni grazie al porta fusibile regolabile su 4 posizioni E importante
21. E If speed of sound 550 m sec EE 150m 5Om 100m 3 BOn e 100m 330 0 35ec delay should be 0 36 gt 50m Delay Tower ea ia ii i ii i i i i i i i i i i le Cl d Page 20 SPIRIT FOLIO APPLICATION 2 MULTISPEAKER APPLICATIONS This configuration demonstrates how multiple speaker configurations can be driven by the FOLIO SX 20 ERI lt r DBRT ERE BLU GRAPHIC EQ ON INSERT 99 0 oo of 2 o foo o eo of o o o foo oo elo 8 2 flo eG uis 000 5 0 e y QUO 15 19 L L LINE
22. Foor ben IE ios oss p Ue o MEL a Gate 3 Compressor ig Fy x E 2 Bi El oos od Elo d 9 Fater frs P Shel Lo Compressor 2 ion a al EN sss sons Dos Dos Gate hato roma id Dia SA A Bam E sem ren El es Qo dos 5 tor Gae Shel Hi 1 Jo Qu a ma LE E boas opus qa 0 sw Qoi Dos 8 E Panes 17 2 Shel Lo qe gel Ora a Des D E om bres 1c Xo don CH 2 8 4 Pose She Hi p Shell Dos INPUTS 94 Brem Boe 8 8 Drm do do 794 je RET Shell Lo Senstivty Din de ea m oy B opan 0 El oes ous 5 BL Mme ood imn ous Sen 1 9 ihe 9 19 Dre MATRIX Fm 15 9 L w 5 ions MIXER 1 Q ne 7 Qo Qo os Channel 1 processing is duplicated for channels 2 to 8 DIGITOOL MX DSP OUTPUT SIGNAL PATH Symbolic r Paragraphic EQ Compressor e 11 Filter 2 p Delay a IE 2 be L bypass I MATRIX
23. LF ON A EN 30Hz OdB Ch 1 1 Ch 2 30 HZ EN 1 IFON 3 A 5 6 20Hz 30 40 5060 80100 200 300400500 1 kHz LFOFF Ch 17 a Ch 2 E LFOFF 3 A 5 6 20Hz 30 40 5060 80100 200 300400500 1 kHz FEATURES amp SETUP Input filter WHET IT 15 The low frequency LF filter rolls off signals below either 30 Hz or 50 Hz This improves bass performance by limiting sub audio cone motion naking more power available for the speakers rated frequency range The filter settings for each channel are controlled individually through the DIP Switch settings shown When the filter is tumed off a 5Hzroaloff protects against DC or deep sub audo inputs WHEN TO USE IT OR NOT As a rule your speakers will sound better with proper filtering Unless you already have filtering ina preceding device match the setting to the low frequency rating of your speakers Vented bass reflex ported etc speakers are espedally sensitive to cone over excursion at frequendes below their rated limit The 50 Hzfilter works well with most compact ful range speakers and has a slight boost at 100 Hz for greater full ness The Hzfilter is intended for subwoofers and large full range cabinets The off pasition Should be used only for applications such as studio playback monitoring Where you need to know if there are unanted sub audio signals present inyour mix CARACT RISTIQUES ET LE
24. Bridged mono Mono port Monobriickenbetrieb Mono puente FEATURES amp SETUP Bridge mono mode WHET IT 15 Bridged nono mode combines the power of both amp channels into one speaker resulting in twice the voltage swing four times the peak power and approximately three times the sustained power of a single channel This mode uses Channel 1 s input gain control input filter and dip limiter Channel 2 s have no effect The BRIDGE LED on the front panel indicates when the arrp is in bridged mono node WHEN TO USE IT OR NOT Use bridged nono to deliver the power of both channels to a single amp or 4 ohmload Set switch position 7 to BRIDGE MONO ON Use Channel 1 s inputs and connect the speaker as shown BRIDGED MONO PRECAUTIONS This mode puts a high demand on the anplifier and speaker Excessive clipping may cause Protective nuting or speaker Clarrage Be sure the speaker has a sufficient power rating Output voltages greater than 100 volts ms are available between the anplifier s bridged terminals NEC CLASS 3 wiring methods as specified in accordance with national and local codes must used to connect the speaker CARACT RISTIQUES ET LEUR UTILISATION Mode mono DESCRIPTION Le rrode port nono combine la puissance des deux canaux pour Utilisation sur un seul haut paneur doublant la tension quadruplart la puissance de cr te et donnant ermron le triple del
25. leistet wird Ein Schaltkreis bervvacht de Stromaufnahme der Transistoren und l st sch tzende Reduktion der Leistung nur dann aus wenn sie auch tats chlich ben tigt wird Der Ausgangskreis wird w hrend ber steuerungen aktiv reduziert umeine weiche und schnelle Wiederherstellung des Signals zu erm glichen Diese Schutzschaltung steuert zus tdich einen proportional arbeitenden Spitzen begrenzer der die tats chliche St rke der bersteuerung mi t und entsprechend reagiert Die syntretrischen Eing nge ver wenden hochqualitative 0 1 Ein gangswiderstande f r beste St rge r uschunterdr ckung Die Pr zisions bauteile die in den Eingangsfiltem Verwendung finden eine akkuraten Betrieb Abschalten Der Verst rker schaltet de Ausgangskreise stumm sobald de Netzversorgung abgeschaltet wurde um hierdurch Ausschaltger usche wirksam zu unterdr cken Schwer wiegende Fehler verursachen ein Ausschalten des Netzteiles die hohe Schaltgeschwindigkeit des Netzteils schaltet innerhalb weniger Mikroselc unden ab um Schaden zu begrenzen OPERACI N INTERNA Audio de alto rendimiento Los transistores de potenda de alta velod dad corMerten esta energ a DC en una salida de audio de rango compl eto que va a las bodinas dise o de alta y una salida especial de doble sentido corrige errores en anbos lados de las temi nales de las bodinas mejorando la e
26. 802 1 speaker Panaray system 802 1 speaker 1800 VI amplifier with 4 EQ card MB4 speaker MBA speaker digital controller Amplifier 802 11 speaker pairs Each driver shall have rated impedance of 80 and shall be wired in series parallel resulting in composite nominal impedance of 80 The loudspeaker system sensitivity shall be 87dB SPL in the 40Hz to 300Hz frequency range with measurements referenced to 1W 2 85V pink noise input at 1m The dispersion shall be omnidirectional at 802 11 speaker Amplifier MB4 speaker 4 speaker all frequencies below 200Hz The power handling capacity of the loudspeaker shall be 200W continuous pink noise band limited from 40Hz to 300Hz The loudspeaker shall be a vented enclosure tuned at 45Hz The input connectors of the Panaray MB4 speaker shall consist of two parallel Speakon NL4 receptacles DIMENSIONS The enclosure of the M B4 loudspeaker shall be composed of high density M ultiFiber multi layer wood particle panel with high impact foamed polypropylene end caps Its outer dimensions shall be 18 1 D x 10 2 W x 26 7 H 45 cm x 25 9 cm x 67 8 cm Its weight shall be 45 Ib 20 kg The loudspeaker shall be the Panaray M B4 modular bass loudspeaker The loudspeaker system shall be used with a separate system controller to be connected to the input s of the system power a
27. 8021 CH2 High 8021 CH2 Full Range 502B CH2 Low MB4 CH2 Low 47 48 13 2 Bose Speaker EQ Preset List Stereo Bank PANARAY 802 Series ll loudspeaker Stereo Presets 802IISTK AWCS 8021ISTK HF PANARAY 802 Series Ill loudspeaker Stereo Presets 802111 502B 802 1 502 802 1 4 802 5 8021 HF 802115 802115 502 802115 502 802115 4 802 Series Il loudspeaker Preset Descriptions Stacked 802 Series Il loudspeakers bi amped with AWCS Note Limiting is assigned to outputs 3 and 4 for protection of the AWCS Stacked 802 Series loudspeakers bi amped 112Hz 802 Series Ill loudspeaker Preset Descriptions 802 Series Ill loudspeaker Full Range EQ 802 Series II loudspeaker bi amped with 502 B loudspeaker 802 Series Ill loudspeaker bi amped with 502 loudspeaker 802 Series loudspeaker bi amped with MB4 802 Series II loudspeaker bi amped with AWCS Note Limiting is assigned to outputs 3 and 4 for protection of the AWCS 802 Series loudspeaker bi amped 0 125Hz Stacked 802 Series loudspeaker EQ Stacked 802 Series loudspeakers bi amped with 502B Stacked 802 Series loudspeakers bi amped with 502BEX Stacked 802 Series loudspeakers bi amped with MB4 Output 1 80211 CH1 High 80211 CH1 High Output 1 80211 CH1 Full Range 802111 CH1 High 80211 CH1 High 80211 CH1 Hi
28. GRAPHIC EQ ZONE 4 FRA m yy e s Es 5 E Er eM Z3 WV Pb zs 3 1 5 o mH gt 3 E C y a a a m z y gt La N 3 i i ZONE 5 j 200000 m RADIO MICS SATA BE CD PLAYER KEYBOARD EFFECTO Page 23 Recording Studio Aufnahme Studio Stdio d enregistrement Studi di regristrazione 777777555555 Estudio de grabaci n STUDIO SPEAKERS i Y Y J l l l TALKBACK MIC HEADPHONE 7 SPLITTER AMF l gt CONTROL INSTRUMENTS amp VOCALS ALTERNATIVE METHOD OF RECORDING USING 16 TRACKS FED FROM DIRECT OUTPUTS Omm ETESESETES 1 mo PTS CREE 2570 PLAYBACK FROM amp TRACK NPU 15 o 222 7 E EA pie wh dr NE MEE A REC RAE A Seas uo rd 224 A zy gt 25 a 5 h i m mz 40000000 FUE T i E XE m MIN m ye JIDUNOS viet i MONITOR CHANNEL SECTION UX6 SECTION EFFECTS Page 24 Theatre Einsatz im Theater Theatre Teatro Teatros
29. Keep the mixer clean using a soft dry brush and an occasional wipe with a damp cloth or ethyl alcohol Do not use any other solvents which may cause damage to paint or plastic parts O Avoid placing drinks or smoking materials on or near the mixer Sticky drinks and cigarette ash are frequent causes of damage to faders and switches Regular care and inspection will be rewarded by a long life and maximum reliability GLOSSARY AFL After Fade Listen a function that allows the operator to monitor the post fade signal in a auxiliary send balance balanced clipping DAT dB decibel channel independently of the main mix an output from the console comprising a mix of signals from channels and groups derived independently of the main stereo group mixes Typically the feeds to the mix are implemented on rotary level controls the relative levels of the left and right channels of a stereo signal a method of audio connection which balances the signal between two wires and a screen which carries no signal Any interference is picked up equally by the two wires but out of phase resulting in cancellation of the interference signal the onset of severe distortion in the signal path usually caused by the peak signal voltage being limited by the circuit s power supply voltage Digital Audio Tape a cassette based digital recording format a ratio of two voltages or signal levels expressed by the equation dB 20Log o
30. Mics should always plugged in and all output faders s 36 _ 4 set to minimum before switching the Phantom Power 2 AR ON to avoid damage to external equipment O 0 TITO O 2 POWER INDICATOR PE Se n This LED lights to show when power is connected to the console 3 BARGRAPH METERS Go The three colour peak reading BARGRAPH METERS normally follow the 8 POST A Monitor selection to show the level of the MIX RIGHT and MIX LEFT outputs oo giving you a constant warning of excessive peaks in the signal which might cause overloading Aim to keep the signal just touching the amber segments at peak lev 3 W 9 els for best performance 11 T 8 Similarly if the output level is too low and hardly registering at all on the meters the level of background noise may become significant Take care to set up the input levels for best performance When any PFL switch is pressed the meters switch to show the selected PFL signal on both meters in mono 4 2TKLEVEL The rotary control sets the level of the 2 Track Tape input which is routed to the headphones monitor outputs and meters These inputs on RCA phono con nectors are an ideal to connect the playback of a tape machine for monitoring 5 MIX UB When this switch is released the meters and headphones monitor the Mix sig nal Alternatively pressing the switch selects the SUB mix as the monitor source 6 27K
31. ON _ gt d Zo sc A e PRO 1600 WATT EO L amp S D P AS AAA PS PY PR EN f OFE E n A lan gt N Front panel Panneau avant 1 Power switch 1 Cornrrance rrarche an Netzschalter 1 Intemuptor de encendido 2 Cooling vents 2 Bouches de ventilation Abl uft ffnungen 2 Rejillas de vertilaci n 3 Gain control Channel 1 4 CLIP 10 dB 20 dB and SIGNAL indicator LEDs both channels 5 Gain control Channel 2 6 POWER BRIDGE and PARALLEL indicator LEDs Commende de gain Canal 1 4 DAs CLIP c tage 10 dB 20dB ex SIGNAL tous les deux canaux 5 Commande de gain Canal 2 6 DE s POWER alimentation BRIDGE Node nono port et Pegelsteller Kanal 1 LED Arzeige f r CLIP 10 dB 20dB und SIGNAL beide Kanale Pegelsteller Kanal 2 LED Arzeige f r POWER Betrieb BRIDGE Moro 3 Control de gananda Canal 1 4 Indicadores LED de CLIP 20 dB y SIGNAL dos canales 5 Control de gananda Canal 2 6 Indicadores LED de POVVER encendido BRIDGE PARALLEL erxr es parall les Br ckenschaltung und puenteado en nono y 7 Handles PARALLEL PARALLEL entradas paralelas 7 Poign es Eingangsparallelschaltung Giffe 7 Asas INTRODUCTION AVANT PROPOS 7 EINF HRUNG INTRODUCCI N
32. RF Frequency Range 72MHz 72 05 75 95MHz 216MHz 216 025 216 975 MHz Transmitter Stability 50 PPM Output Power 72MHz 8000uV at 3 meters 216MHz 100mW Max allowed by FCC Signal to Noise ratio 72MHz Wide band channels 60dB Narrow 54dB 216MHz Wide band channels 50dB Narrow 44dB Antenna 72MHz Telescoping Rubber Ducky Front Mount Remote Base or Coaxial Dipole 216MHz Telescoping Whip Front Mount Remote Base Ground Plane or Coaxial Dipole Available Channels 72MHz 17 wide band 40 narrow band 216MHz 19 wide band 38 narrow band Modulation is automatically switched when changing between narrow and wide band channels Frequency Response 12 50Hz to 17kHz 3dB 216 50Hz to 8kHz 3dB Specifications subject to change without notice RF Power Selection Full 1 2 1 4 Physical Dimensions 8 W x 8 D x 1 75 H 20 3cm W x 20 3cm D x 4 45cm Optional rack mount brackets Weight 3 10 1 4 kg Power 16 VAC 850mA Audio Input 1 F XLR 1 4 Phone 50 600 ohms balanced bbdBm 4dBm selectable adjustable Audio Input 2 Phono 10k 50 ohms unbalanced 10dBm 20dBm selectable adjustable Audio Output Mix Phono 10k ohms unbalanced 10dBm Headphone Output 250mW 32 ohms 3 5MM stereo Controls Mix Process Contour Headphone Level Tone RF Power Output and ON OFF Visual Indicators Audio input levels 1 2 and post processed modulation level channel RF power test tone o
33. b MAIN FOH PA Front of House If speed of sound 330 m eec 5 D 150m 50m 100m 3 150m 100m 550 0 5862 US Le delay should O 5e gt uic d as Delay Tower OLD AMP WW WW a GRAPHIC EQ La AMP GRAPHIC EQ GRAPHIC EQ a 2 STAGE BAND INPUTS 17 24 Cedar enc tem FHE GE al SMUT SNA DR o ce AU RE ld E KEYBOARDS Page 25 Linking two LX7s Verbinden zweier LX7 Couplage de deux LX7 Funzionamento in link di due LX7 Enlace de dos LX7 MET 4B 52 RUE Ed E 0 22 98 1 CAO 45 1538 AC MASTER ERO qe DE A gt 370 APPROPRIATE AUX SEND FADER AT MIN 26 System Block Diagram Block Diagramm Synoptique Diagramma a blocchi Diagrama de Bloques del Sistema o2 Y 2 2 e 448V a E 9 5 2 Y 253222 MASTER MIC LINE 100Hz sxx5 p GAIN 2855500 i INSERT FADER ENABLE oe MONITOR SELECT MX gt aia i e Q o 19 11 azem E gt 0 lt 2TRK TO A HIG
34. disc is loaded the display shows iii When the disc has been loaded the display indicators show CD R NO TOC or CD RW NO TOC as appropriate 2 Press the RECORD key 00 or D The unit enters record ready mode as shown by the REC and pause indicators on the display As the unit enters pecore ready mode the display shows Mou DIPL Optimum Power Control as the anit prepares to record on the disc 3 Adjust the level of the source s following the guidelines in 4 1 1 Signal volume The red OVER indicators on the meters should never light Unlike analog equipment digital audio units produce extremely unpleasant sounds when dis torted and there is no headroom after the 0 mark If recording digitally from a the volume set in the menu should be ti ci This will maintain all the dynamic range of the source CD without clipping Only boost the signal if the source is exceptionally quiet 18 TASCAM CD RW700 An analog signal input at nominal level with no cut or boost from the volume controls is equivalent to a reading of 16 dB on the meters on other words 0 is equivalent to 16 dBFS 4 Press the PLAY key 48 or or the PAUSE key 49 or D to start recording Note that there is no need to cue up the recording position the unit always finds the next available location on the disc and start recording to it 5 Press the PAUSE key 49 or to pause recording te
35. el EY 1000 gal EO ua BG J E E LZ y D XE UN ceid i 00000000 E Jal de del da de di gg EE gg S ogg gg eg AUDIO INPUTS 8 AUDIO OUTPUTS 8 RS 232 PORT RS 485 PORT CV INPUTS 4 100 240 VAC 50 60 Hz DIGITOOL MX SYSTEM LEVEL BLOCK DIAGRAM AUDIO CIRCUITS AD DA DSPX2 DATA amp CONTROL HOST PROCESSOR PWM 8 bit A D Converter 8 MEG FLASH on TEMPERATURE SENSOR PANEL DISPLAY amp CONTROLS DIGITOOL MX ANALOG INPUT SIGNAL PATH EACH CHANNEL SWITCH BALANCED AUDIO IN 0 i PAD PHANTOM SUPPLY CONTROL c ni LINE TRIM CONVERTER MIC GAIN CHASSIS GND DIGITOOL MX ANALOG OUTPUT SIGNAL PATH EACH CHANNEL CONTROL FROM DSP BALANCED AUDIO OUT CONVERTER FILTER CHASSIS GND 17 DIGITOOL MX INPUT amp DSP SIGNAL PATH Symbolic rLevels Fou 1 Filter Gate Shelf Hr Parametric 1 Shelf Lo rn Fou Qa Input Sensitivit lr El 0 Bypass LJ Bypass LJ Bypass 0 Bypass Lj Bypass E Bypass E Phantom m Bypass yg Thresh Desa ie mes Dut 4 gt roan IE Cue Qr rie E gt ES a ena ous ES MES ES IE Hous
36. 9 lt gt used instead of the cables The 2 JB 2 provides a means of combining two channels while also allowing the 4 9 9 single channels to be continued BP 2000 Gs O directly from the junction box BP 1000 BP 1000 HEADSET LINES HEADSET LINES Figure 5 Typical connections using one SPS 2001 Power Supply for two intercom channels The two program sources are monitored independently by their intercom channels All audio program and intercom is monitored as a monaural mix in the SPS 2001 speaker The US2000A is set for monaural speaker output default SPS 2001 1 1 channel cable Power Supply 2 2 channel cable SPK1000 Combine Isolate Switch 7 Powered Speaker set to Isolate Y 5 Y cable opeaker inter connect cables p US2000A Program input Master Station cable From 2 audio sources To all stations To all stations on channel 1 on channel 2 BP 1000 A BP 1000 A BP 1000 1y BP 1000 1 A 2 20 Y y BP 2000 ES Note A JB 2 Junction Box may be 9 lt used instead of the Y cables The 2 JB 2 provides a means of combining two channels while also allowing the 4 4 9 single channels to be continued BP 2000 Gs directly from the junction box BP 1000 BP 1000 e oo oo e e HEADSET LINES HEADSET LINES Figure 6 Adding an SPK1000 to the example in Figure 5 The two p
37. INSTALLER SUR PROGRAMMABLE AUDIO IN2 INS ge IN8 H 5 SH Si IN 1 SUPPORT DE MONTAGE SEULEMENT MULTI PROCESSOR vi 5 M ls SH gens CONTROL 1 Ir E E w Ai 1 T T dr 100v 240 fMk es Hz 50 WATTS IA EA OUT 1 OUT OUT 3 OUT 4 OUT5 OUT 8 INITJEOMPLIES WITH THE LIMITS IA CLASS SH l t uU Morc iu CDMPUTING DEVICE PURSUANT A DIVISION OF HEAVEY ELECTRONICS COMP MERIDIAN MS MADE IN U S A SUBPART J OF FCC RULES AUDIO OUTPUTS 5 IEC CONNECTOR This receptacle is for the IEC line cord included that provides AC power to the unit Never break off the ground pin on any equipment It is provided for your safety If the outlet used does not have a ground pin a suitable grounding adapter should be used and the third wire should be grounded properly To prevent the risk of shock or fire hazard always be sure that the mixer and all associated equipment is properly grounded Note for UK only If the colors of the wires in the mains lead of this unit do not correspond with the colored markings identifying the terminals in your plug proceed as follows 1 The wire that is colored green and yellow must be connected to the terminal that is marked by the letter E the earth symbol colored green or colored green and yellow 2 The wire that is colored blue must be connected to the terminal that is marked with the letter N
38. Products and accessories Bose Panaray MA12 modular line array loudspeaker _ Oo BOSE PROFESSIONAL SYSTEMS DIVISION COMPLETE COMMERCIAL SOLUTIONS Customer 2 Project Products Installation After sales focus pd you Duy fanagement and accessories services services rs caa rro rum m oS eee 1 arra e A nee ae 8 NUT gm Bose Panaray MA12 modular line array loudspeaker TECHNICAL INFORMATION Maximum acoustic output 113dB SPL 1m A single MA12 produces cylindrical waves above 2kHz Please be careful extrapolating SPL at greater distances as a true cylindrical source falls off at 3dB per doubling of distance and a conventional spherical source falls off at 6dB per doubling of distance inverse square law Sensitivity 88dB SPL 1W Im Frequency range 155Hz to 12kHz 3dB 100Hz to 16kHz 10dB Dispersion 6dB point average 1 4kHz Horizontal 160 Vertical coverage is a band of constant height as shown above REPRESENTATION OF DISPERSION 1 4kHz 6dB point average Long term power handling 300W continuous Impedance 8Q nominal Mechanical specifications Dimensions 5 1 D x 4 2 W x 38 7 H 13 cm x 10 7 cm x 98 4 cm Weight 20 Ib 9 kg Available colors white and black Connectors two parallel wired NL4 connectors and one two posi
39. aa peavey com 2001 Printed in the U S A 11 01 cousrics Peavey Listen to This QSC User Manual Manuel de l utilisateur Bedi enhandbuch Manual del Usuario PLX Series Amplifiers Rev c Explanation of graphical symbols The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence uninsul ated dangerous voltage within the product s endosure that may be of suffident magnitude to constitute a riskof electric shockto humars The edarretion point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the users to the presence of inportart operating and maintenance serv d ng instructions in the literature accompary ng the product RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION To reduce the risk of electric shock do not remove the cover No user serviceable parts inside Refer servicing to qualified service personnel WARNING To prevent fire or electric shock do not expose this equipment to rain or nois ture Explication des symboles graphiques Le syrrbole dair avec pointe de fl che l int rieur dun triangle quilat ral est utilis pour alerter l utilisateur de la pr sence l int rieur du coffret de tension non isol e dangereuse danpleur suffisante pour constituer un risque de choc dectrique pour l tre hurrain Le point d exdarration l int rieur qdun triange quilat
40. ocaurs only during actual dipping Each channel has its own dip lirriter and you can switch it on or off independently as shown at left WHEN TO USE IT OR NOT When driving ful range speakers dip liniting reduces high frequency distortion caused by bass overloads It also protects higher frequency Crivers fromexcess overdrive and harsh dipping harrronics When driving subwoofers some users let theanqiifier dip without limiting because it gives extra punch to kick drums and similar souncs CAUTION Clip lirritirxy reduces extrerre overdchive peaks allowing higher average signal level without aucible distortion However increasing the gain with the clip lirrrier engaged until Clipping is again auctble can double the average output power Be careful not to exceed the power rating of your speakers CARACTERISTIQUES ET LEUR UTILISATION Liniteur cr tenment DESCRIPTION Quand le signal audio d passe la capacit de puissance du drait de sortie del anplificateur le signal est cr t tronquant les pointes de la fome donde Le drait limiteur d c terrert d tecte cette condition et r cit rapiderrent le gain de l arrdificateur pour minimiserla surtersion Afin de pr server le maxiimumede la danique du signal le lirriteur ne reste en fonction que pour la dur e Chaque canal est mni de son propre lirriteur que vous pouvez activer et d sactiver ind pendarr
41. seinen eigenen Limiter der wahlweise oder abgeschaltet werden kann siehe Zeichnung EINSATZ DES LIMITERS Bei der Verwendung von Breitband Lautsprechersysterren reduziert der Einsatz eines Spitzenbegrenzers de Hochfreouierzverzerrungen welche von bersteuerungen im Bassbereich ver usadt werden Auiserdemwerden die hart geklippten Hanmonischen Einige Anwender bevorzugen aber die bersteuerung des Verst rkers um bei Sub Woofer Systemen zus tdich Punch f r die Bass Drumoder hnlich perkussi ve Instrumente zu erhalten ACHTUNG Der Einsatz eines Spitzenbegrenzers erm glicht signal ohne horbare Verzer rungen Eine Erhohung der Verstarkung nit eingeschalt etem Clip Lirrrter kann die durch schnitHiche Ausgangsleistung auf das Doppelte erh hen Bitte achten Sie daher darauf die Leistungsangaben Ihrer Laut sprecher nicht zu berschreiten CARACTERISTICAS Y AJUSTES Linitador de picos QU ES Cuando la se al de audio estimula el de salida dal amplificador m s all de su capaci dad potenda se satura con los picos de la fonra de onde H limitador de picos detecta este fen meno y r pidamente reduce la gananda para minimizar la cantidad de sobresaturad n Para conservar las din nices del pogana al la limitad n s lo ocurrira durante el instante rrisrro de la saturaci n Cada canal tiene su propio limitador de picos usted los puede adivar o desactivar ind
42. 4 Pour le nettoyage utilisez un chiffon sec 5 N obstruez aucun des orifices de ventilation Choisissez un emplacement conforme aux instructions du fabricant Pour assurer le bon fonctionnement de l appareil et le prot ger contre tout risque de surchauffe placez celui ci un endroit et dans une position qui ne compromette pas sa ventilation 6 Ne posez pas l appareil proximit de sources de chaleur telles que radiateurs bouches de chauffage puls po le ou autres appareils amplificateurs y compris d gageant de la chaleur 7T Pour votre s curit ne d branchez pas la liaison de terre sur la prise secteur Cette prise comporte deux broches m les et une broche femelle de mise la terre Cette derni re sert vous prot ger Si la fiche quipant votre appareil ne correspond pas votre prise secteur murale faites appel un lectricien qualifi pour qu il effectue son remplacement 8 Evitez que le cordon d alimentation ne soit pi tin ou pinc en particulier au niveau de la prise d un bloc multiprises ou de sa sortie de l appareil 9 N utilisez que les accessoires pr conis s par le fabricant 10 N utilisez qu un rack un meuble un support ou une table pr conis par le fabricant ou vendu pour tre utilis avec l appareil Si l appareil est plac l int rieur d un rack d placez celui ci avec prudence afin d viter qu il n occasionne des blessures en se renversant 11 Faites effectuer tous les trav
43. 5029 A Speaker Mono with 5028 Speaker Mono Controller Inputs 502B speaker Mono Ch 1 Mono Mono from mixer Low freq Ch 2 No input Mono from 502A speaker Controller Default Output Routing mixer Ds Ch 1 Ch2 Ch3 Ch4 Routing 502A speaker 502A speaker 5028 speaker 502B speaker Mono Mono Mono Mono High freq High freq Low freq Low freq Limiter Off Off Off Off Delay Off Off Off Off 19 5 3 PRESET Button Bass Array Bank Bass Array Presets Example 1 2x Broadside Bass Array PANARAY System Digital Controller Display Bass Array MBA 2XBS180Hz Preset Description Preset MBA 2x Broadside Bass Array Controller Inputs Ch 1 Mono source Controller Default Output Routing Mono from mixer Ch 1 Ch 2 Ch 3 Ch 4 Routing MBA 1 MBA 2 N A N A Mono Mono Limiter Off Off Off Off Delay Off Off Off Off Example 2 2x Endfire Bass Array PANARAY System Digital Controller Display Bass Array MB4 2XEF180Hz Preset Description 0 240V 50 60 2 300W Preset 4 2x Endfire Bass Array Controller Inputs Chel Mono source Controller Default Output Routing Mono from Ch 1 Ch 2 Ch 3 Ch 4 mixer Routing MB4 1 MB4 2 N A N A Mono Mono Limiter Off Off Off Off Delay On On Off Off 20 5 3 PRESET Button Bass Array Bank Example 2 4x Endfire Bass Array PANARAY System Digital Controller Display Bass Arr
44. Channel Mute Fader cut off rel O mark Aux Send pots offness Frequency Response Mic Line Input to any output 20Hz 20kHz THD N Mic sens 30dBu 20dBu at all outputs kHz CMRR Typical max gain kHz Typical any gain 50Hz Input amp Output Impedance Mic Input Line Input Stereo Input 2TK Return Mix Aux Direct Outputs and Insert Sends Input amp Output Levels Mic Input max level Line Input max level Stereo Input max level 2TK Return Headphones 2000 Weight Exc power supply unit 129dBu lt 80dBu lt 100dBu lt 90dBu lt 80dBu gt 95dB gt 80dB gt 75dB gt 80dB gt 90dB gt 90dB gt 80dB lt IdB 0 00696 gt 80dB gt 60dB 1 8 2 10kQ 8 6k 2 12kQ 750 22dBu 22dBu 22dBu gt 30dBu 150mW 3 4 kg 7 5 lb 3 0 kg 6 6 Ib Soundcraft Harman International Industries Ltd Cranborne House Cranborne Road Potters Bar Hertfordshire 6 U K Tel 44 0 1707 665000 Fax 44 0 1707 660742 http www spiritbysoundcraft com http www soundcraft com HA Harman International Company Soundcraft USA FREE Air Park Business Center 12 bs u 1449 Donelson Pike 89 336 EEC Nashville TN 37217 USA and LVD 73 23 EEC Tel 1 615 360 0707 Fax 1 615 360 0273 and 93 68 EEC Toll Free within USA only 800 255 4363 For further details contact the address on the left Issue 3 Part No 7 0188 TASCAM 7 TEAC Professional
45. DIMENSIONS All dimensions are in millimetres inches in brackets in 3 15 inc conns 20 14 AAA SAS SS 440 0 17 32 gt 479 0 18 86 gt RACK MOUNT OPTION 25 E P 440 0 17 32 gt 483 0 19 FITTING THE RACK MOUNT OPTION The FOLIO SX may be rack mounted using the optional rack mounting kit which requires only a posidriv screwdriver and pliers for installation The procedure is as follows 1 Remove the moulded side cheeks by releasing 3 screws each side 1 Remove the base panel by releasing 10 screws noting the small cutout at the front edge norma 1 Carefully release the power connector by sqeezing the moulded side clips with pliers note that you do not have to disconnect the wiring and reposition it in the cutout on the bottom edge of the panel see illustration Rear of fascia 1 Replace the base panel with the cutout at the rear of the desk positioned over the power connector Power Supply Connector Location 1 Fit the rack mount side brackets with the mounting flanges to the front of the desk Page 26 SPIRIT FOLIO APPENDIX 1 TYPICAL CONNECTING LEADS Balanced Line Mix L amp R Sub L amp R Aux Stereo Inputs Tip Tip RING SLEEVE SLEEVE RING TIP Sleeve Sleeve lt 1 1 IE Tip 1 RING SLEEVE Sleev
46. Esquerra del selector de A i siama configuration Konfigurationsschalters configuraci n 5 kon 1 4 Entr es TRS Canaux 1 et 2 4 Stereoklinken Kan le 1 und 2 4 Entradas TRS Canales 1 y 2 plus Channel 2 5 Sortie Speakon Canal 1 plus 5 Speakon Ausgang Kanal 1 mit 5 Salida Speakon Canal 1 con 6 La gt 2 Kanal 2 Canal 2 7 Binding Cha T 6 Sortie Speakon Canal 2 6 Speakon Ausgang Kanal 2 6 Salida Speakon Canal 2 1 2 7 Sorties sur bomes 7 Ausgangsklentrer Kan le 1 7 Salidas postes de arrame Canaux 1 et 2 und 2 8 Cooling air inlet verts amp Rejillas de ventilaci n Bouches de vertilation Lufteinla ffnung 9 Serial number label 9 Ftiqueta del n mero de serie 9 tiquette du num ro en s rie 9 Seriennummer 10 AC power cable 10 Cable de alimentaci n 10 d alimentation secteur 10 Netzkabel CLIPLIMTERCP CIPLIMTEROF n aredeob df has as desonedeob GIPLIMTERON CHD GIPLIMTERON C D NN NOTANNEN BR NOAH E FEATURES amp SETUP dip liniter WHET IT 15 When the audio signal drives the arrps output circuit beyond its power Gapability it dips flattening the peaks of the waveform The dipliniter detects this and quid y reduces the gain to mininize the amount of Overdiive To preserve as much of the programoynanics as possible limiting
47. FS1B FLUSH FreeSpace 3 Bass Mono Presets FS3 100Hz LP FS3 150Hz LP FreeSpace 360 Mono Presets FS360 HARD FS360 SOFT FS360 DECK Model 32 loudspeaker Preset Descriptions Model 32 loudspeaker Full Range EQ Model 32 loudspeaker bi amped with MB4 Model 32 loudspeaker bi amped with FS3 Model 32 loudspeaker bi amped with FS1B Model 32 loudspeaker bi amped with 502 BEX loudspeaker FreeSpace Model 1B loudspeaker Preset Descriptions FreeSpace Model 1B loudspeaker 100Hz Low Pass FreeSpace Model 1B loudspeaker Surface Mount EQ FreeSpace Model 1B loudspeaker Flush Mount EQ FreeSpace 3 Bass Preset Descriptions FreeSpace 3 Bass 100Hz Low Pass FreeSpace 3 Bass 150Hz Low Pass FreeSpace 360 loudspeaker Preset Descriptions FS360 loudspeaker inground hard EQ FS360 loudspeaker inground soft EQ FS360 loudspeaker deck EQ Output 1 M32 Mono Full Range M32 Mono High M32 Mono High M32 Mono High M32 Mono High Output 1 Output 1 Output 1 FS360 Mono Full Range FS360 Mono Full Range FS360 Mono Full Range Output 2 M32 Mono Full Range M32 Mono High M32 Mono High M32 Mono High M32 Mono High Output 2 Output 2 Output 2 FS360 Mono Full Range FS360 Mono Full Range FS360 Mono Full Range Output 3 M32 Mono Full Range MB4 Mono Low FS3 Mono Low FS1B Low 502BEX Mono Low Output 3 Output 3 Output 3 FS360 Mono Full Ran
48. Haushaltsgebrauch oder hnlichen generellen Gebrauch festgelegt sind Declaracion de Conformidad QSC Audio Products Inc dedara bajo su propia responsabilidad que el producto anteriommente mendonado cumple con el Concejo Directivo 89 336 del 3 de Mayo de 1989 en la amonizad n las leyes de los Estados Miembros que se reladonan la corrpatibilidad electrorragn tica corro tambi n a los requerimientos del producto anronizado con la nomna EN 55013 reladonados a los l mites y m todos de medidas de perturbaciones de radio que son caracter sticas de los receptores de la radiodifusi n y equipo asodado y la EN 55020 reladonada con la inmunidad electrorragn tica de receptores de radiodifusi n y equipo asociado CBC Audio Products Inc aderr s dedara bajo su propia responsabilidad que el producto ya mendonado cumple con el Concejo Directivo 72 23 EEC del 19 de Febrero de 1973 en la anronizad n de la leyes de los Estados Miembros reladonados al equipo el ctrico para uso dentro de dertos l mites de voltaje y el Concejo Directivo 93 69 EEC del 22 de de 1993 el cual reforma la dirediva previarrerte mendonada corro tambi n los requerimientos de la del producto arrronizado EN 60065 reladonado a los requerimientos de seguridad de los dra el ctricos que se operan en aparatos electr nicos reladonados para el hogar y sinilanmente para uso general Power Power 4 ch
49. La position neutre est rep r e par un d clic central O insert point Linsert point sbilanciato pre EQ e un interruzione nel percorso del segnale lungo il canale che permette a limiters compressori EQ speciali o altre unit di trattamento del segnale di essere aggiunte al percorso L Insert un jack a 3 poli gauge che e normalmente bypassato Send pu essere usato come pre fade alternativo uscita diretta pre EQ se necessario con un cavo che metta in corto circuito l anello e la punta del jack per non inter rompere il segnale Direct ovr canali 1 16 hanno una Uscita Diretta dedicata Direct Output che con sente il collegamento diretto ad apparecchi esterni es registratori o unit di effetti I livello dell uscita diretta pre fade pu essere controllato pre mendo il tasto PFL sul relativo canale per mandare il segnale ai monitor e agli indicatori DIR PRE Le uscite dirette sui canali 1 16 sono normalmente POST FADER per l uso con mandate di effetti o per controllare il livello di registrazione con i fader in applicazioni da studio Per la registrazione dal vivo le uscite possono essere impostate singolarmente come PRE FADER premendo questo tasto cosi da non influenzare il livello dell uscita diretta con il fader del mix PA principale Q EQUALIZZATORE L Equalizzatore EQ permette una accurata manipolazione del suono spe cialmente per migliorarlo in applicazioni PA dove il segnale originale s
50. Monobr ckenbetrieb Mono puente CONNECTIONS Speakon Outputs The PLX amplifier offers a choice of output connections with two Neutrik NLAMD Speakon jacks and two pairs of touchproof binding posts The Speakon connector is designed spedally for high power speaker connections It locks in place preverts shock hazard and assures the correct polarity The upper Speakon has both Channel 1 and Channel 2 outputs so itis espedally useful for parallel bi anp or bridged mono operation see on page 12 The other Speakon carries only Channel 25 output See the illustrations at left For easier insertion use the newer ste NL4FC Speakon connectors with quiddock thumb latches SPEAKER CABLING Larger wire sizes and shorter lengths minimize both loss of power and degradation of dan ping factor Do not place speaker cables next to input wiring WARNING To prevent electric shock do not operate the plifier with any of the conduc tor portion of the speaker wire exposed CONNEXIONS Sorties Speakon Cet amplificateur PLX offre un choix de connecteurs de sortie avec deux prises Neutrik Speakon NLAMD et deux paires de bomes prot g es Les prises Speakon sont congues sp dfiquerrert pour la connexion de haut parleurs de haute puissance Ales verrouillent en place pr viennent les risques de choc lectrique et assurert le brandherrert avec polarit correcte La
51. Playback modes Continue Trim 4 4 Rehearsal 0 frames 21mm 284 5m 6 5mm 0 8 m 0 3 89 98mm OU TASCAM CD RW700 9 2 Features of the CD RW700 CD RW700 DIGITAL RC RW700 REMOTE CONTROL UNIT 10 TASCAM CD RW700 2 Features of the CD RW700 Front panel 2 1 Front panel D POWER switch STANDBY ON The power switch is used to switch the unit between standby mode the time from the internal clock is displayed and on full operational mode When the unit is turned on the display shows 2 Disc tray Discs should be placed label side upwards in the disc tray When a disc 15 110 x unit the display briefly shows Readi with a flash ing period following e ord Reading as the unit determines the contents of the disc OPEN CLOSE key Use this S to o and close the disc tray The dis play shows EH when the tray is opening and vien the tray is closing RHSL key Use this key when recording to set and adjust the start point of a recording session or the start of a track on the recorded disc See 4 4 Rehearsal for details 5 DIGITAL DIRECT When this is active any digital audio signals input to t
52. Pressing the 2TK switch selects the 2TK input as the monitor source instead of the MIX or SUB signal see MIX SUB above 7 MONITOR PHONES LEVEL This control sets the output level to the MONITOR LEFT amp RIGHT outputs If HEADPHONES are plugged into the PHNS jack the Monitor outputs are cut off and the knob then sets the headphone listening level When the PHONES are unplugged the Monitor output is restored AUX MASTERS Each Aux output has a master output level control and associated AFL switch Page 14 SPIRIT FOLIO 16 7 R 2TK PFL 49 7 3 7 PHONES 2 8 FEE 1 9 10 48V POWER O O 5 OsO um REF C gt 0 O 2 8 O 30 E Yd O s O 0 0 AFL uu X o o POST A o uo o So AL PRE 45 6 7 S 0 10 B 1 9 S 0 10 SUB MONO SUM L SUB L MIX R 5 6 9 AUX AFLs Just like the PFL switches on the channels you can monitor each AUX out put by pressing the AFL switch This routes the AUX output signal to the MONITOR or PHONES replacing any existing signal normally the Monitor receives either MIX SUB or 2TK see above The METERS also switch from the selected source to display the PFL AFL signal and the PFL AFL LED lights to warn that a PFL or AFL switch is pressed When you release the switch the Monitor swaps back to the previous source AUX 2 POS
53. est n ajustados en est reo y no en nono TROUBLESHOOTING Problem hum The PowerWave supply eliminates intemal humfields but AC trarsfonrers in other devices may cause hum Move cabling and signal sources to identify hot spots in the system Cables with faulty shielding are a frequent entry point for hum Problem hiss Unplug the amplifier input to confirmthat the hiss is coming fromthe source or a device upstream erratic or popping noises indicate an electronic faut in the offending unit To keep the noise floor low operate the prirrary signal source at full level without dipping and avoid boosting the signal further between the source and the anplifier Problem squeals and feedback Microphone feedback should be controlled with mixer controls If noise continues to build up with zero Mic gain there is a serious fault inthe signal processors or cables Working in succession fromthe signal source towards the amplifier check each devicein the signal path by reducing its gain or unplugging it D PANNAGE FEHLERBEHEBUNG Probleme rorfierrert Problem Brummen Le d alimentation PowerVVave lirrine les charrps rragn tiques internes mais il est possible que les blocs d alimentations d autres appareils g nerert du bruit sous fome de rorflerrert hun D amp dacez les c bles et ou les appareils du systerre afin de localiser les sources de bruit Les calles avec un blindage d fectueux s
54. for correct operation Do not mount the unit in a rack tilted 5 or more from the vertical position TASCAM CD RW700 7 1 Introduction Environmental considerations If the mounting surface is more than 5 degrees away from the horizontal it will not open or close The voltage supplied to the unit should match the voltage as printed on the rear panel If you are in any doubt regarding this matter consult an electrician When transporting the unit always use the original packing materials For this reason we strongly rec ommend that you save all the packing materials that came with the CD RW700 in case you need to trans port it in the future In addition when transporting the unit you should tape the disc tray closed using an adhesive tape that will not spoil the finish of the unit 1 4 1 Beware of condensation If the unit or a compact disc is moved from a cold to a warm place or used after a sudden temperature change there is a danger of condensation vapor in the air could condense on the internal mechanism making correct operation impossible To prevent this or if this occurs leave the player for one or two hours with the power turned on then turn the power off and on again 1 4 2 Never use a stabilizer or printable discs Using commercially available CD stabilizers or printable recordable discs with this player will dam age the mechanism and cause it to malfunction Never use a disc that has had
55. haut parleur Essayez un autre cable et un autre haut parleur gt INDICATION DEL CLIP ALLUMEES EN CONTINU L anplificateur est en mode protection La mise en sourdine pour une seconde est lors de la en tersion et hors tension del andificateur Lasurchauffe entraine la mise en sourdine de l anplificateur Le ventilateur toumera alors pleine vitesse et le cP ssis sera chaud au contact le son devrait revenir sit t l arrplificateur refroidi terrp rature nomale d utilisation Assurez une vertilation suffisante Si le ventilateur ne tourrait pes l arrpglificateur serait d fectueux gt INDICATION DEL CLIP CLIGNOTE Si laDH CLIPdigocte lors de la pr sence de signal la sortie de l arrplificateur est court drauit e V rifiez l int grit du c blage FEHLERBEHEBUNG Kein Ton Fortsetzung gt ANZEICHEN SIGNAL AN ZEIGEN LEUCHTEN NORMAL e Wenn die gr ne SIGNAL 200B und 10B LEDs nomal auf leuchten liegt der Fehler an anderer Stelle zwischen Verst rker und Lautsprecher berpr fen Sie de Lautsprecher eitungen auf Unterbrechungen Schiefsen Sie einen anderen Lautsprecher mit anderen Kabeln an ANZEICHEN CLIP ANZEIGE LEUCHTET HELL UND GLEICHM RIG Die Schucschaltung hat den Verstarker abgeschaltet Eine Abschaltung von einer Sekunde Dauer ist beim Ein oder Ausschalten norrral berhitzung f hrt zu einer Abschalt ung des Verst rkers
56. is only avaiable in the 72MHz band accesses 17 wide band channels and uses a SEEK button to change channels Audio quality and charging capabilities are the same Differences between the LR 500 and LR 400 include SEEK and channel UP and DOWN buttons are behind the door on the LR 400 versus protruding through the door on the LR 500 Also the LR 500 is programmable See page 25 for LR 500 programming features Other than these differences instructions for use of Listen s LR 400 and LR 500 receivers and their specifications are identical Open the front access door by gripping the two tabs with your thumb and index finger Select Battery Type CAUTION If you are using b 52 has un any battery type other than rechargeable Nickel Metal channel UF as a DOWN and SEEK button only and Hydride NiMH batteries make sure the BATTERY SELECT buttons behind it is located switch is in the alkaline position located in the battery the door behind the compartment and labeled BATTERY SELECT remove batteries front door to access this switch The product is shipped from the factory in the alkaline position The LR 500 has channel UP DOWN and SEEK buttons To use NiMH batteries before placing in unit change protruding through the door the battery switch to NiMH BATTERY SELECT Switch With batteries removed use a pen or small screwdriver to select the battery type Preparing Listen Receivers for Use Remov
57. nine aoe the message changes from 2unc and the sampled data loops in a a four second loop The display shows kid Els where is the current sec ond of the Joop 7 Stop the source 8 Turn the MULTI JOG control 17 to adjust the E o the onn He E shows Where can be a number between i rang i and changes back to the 5 ric ia Ei display when the loop restarts Every time the trim value is changed the loop starts replaying from the new start point 9 When the new start point has been set press the STOP key 47 or D 10 Cue up the source material to the original point set in step 2 11 Press the RECORD key 20 or to enter record ready mode and then press the SYNC REC key 29 or 12 Start playing the source material The unit starts recording with the start point being determined by the trim value NOTE If a trim setting is made for the sync start this will apply to all sync starts and track divisions made in the future until the value is reset using the procedure above 4 4 2 Rehearsal for track division In the same way that the automatic threshold may produce a false trigger starting recording at the wrong point the automatic threshold may produce false track divisions By rehearsing the point at which the track division is to be made it is possible to trim the division point so that it corresponds to a the track division which is actually required 1 Load a reco
58. number keys REPEAT key Use this key to change between the various repeat modes when playing back see 3 3 Repeat play Q DISPLAY key Use this key to switch between the different display modes available equivalent to AO MENU key Repeated presses of this key cycle through the differ ent menu items used to set parameters equivalent to 9 O ENTER key Pressing this key 1s equivalent to pressing the MULTI JOG control AD to confirm an entry O FADER key Use this key to start fade in recordings or to start a fade out when recording equivalent to 92 MONITOR key Use this key to output the signals received at the cur rently selected input s through the outputs when not recording or in record ready mode PLAY MODE key Use this key to choose between the different play back modes single play continue play etc FINALIZE key Use this key to finalize recordable discs See 1 2 Finalizing and 5 1 Finalizing for details equiv alent to 15 9 ERASE key Use this key with CD RW discs only to erase tracks or a whole disc or to refresh a bad disc or to unfinalize a finalized disc See 5 2 Erasing for details equivalent to 16 RECORD key Use this key to enter record ready mode equivalent to 20 2 Features of the CD RW700 Connections SYNC REC key Use this key to turn synchronized recording on and off equivalent to 29 See 4 3
59. por un minuto mientras el anqdifi cador vuelve a una temperatura adecuada de operad n Revise si existe la verti laci n necesaria Si el ventilador no se mueve el amplificador necesita nanteniniento gt INDICACI N EL INDICADOR LED DE PARPADEA e sto sucede cuando entra una se al la salida del amplificador puede estar en corto circuito Vaya alos cables de las bodnas y revise si tienen alambres sueltos Oaverias enel aislaniento 7 N 7 N N o 9 C 7 TROUBLESHOOTING Problem distorted sound gt INDICATION CLIP LED FLASHING e If the red CLIPindcator flashes before all three signal indicators the load impedance 15 aonarrally low or shorted Unplug each speaker one by one at the amplifier Vf the CLIP LED goes out when you disconnect a cable that cable or speaker is shorted Try another cade end speaker to locate the faut gt INDICATION CLIP INDICATOR NOT FLASHING This could be caused by a faulty speaker or loose connection Check the wiring and try another speaker Thesignal source may be dipping Keep the gain controls at least halfway up so that the source does not have to be Problem no channel separation e Checkthe yellow PARALLEL or BRIDGE MONO LEDs on the front panel which indicate the switch settings on the back of the arrplifier Neither should be lit in dual channel bi armp or stereo use where differe
60. s del control SENS ED ENTRADA DE LINEA Acepta jacks de 1 4 TRS de 3 polos Utilice esta entrada de alta impedancia para otras fuentes que no sean micr fonos como por ejemplo teclados cajas de rit mos sintetizadores magnet fonos o guitarras Esta entrada es BALANCEADA para ofrecer una bajo nivel de ruido e inmunidad frente a las interferencias sin embargo puede utilizar fuentes no balanceadas cableando los conectores tal como se muestra aunque deber mantener la longitud de los cables tan corta como le sea posible Observe que el anillo debe ser masa si la fuente es no ba lanceada El nivel de entrada se ajusta a trav s del control SENS Desconecte cualquier conexi n MIC cuando use la entrada LINEA del mismo canal SENS Sensibilidad Este bot n regula la cantidad de se al fuente enviada al resto del mezclador Si se sube demasiado la se al distorsionar al saturar el canal Si se baja demasia do el nivel del ruido de fondo ser m s apreciable y no tendr suficiente nivel a la salida del mezclador Con el control en la marca U se aplica ganancia unidad para la entrada de l nea Algunos equipos sobre todo los dom sticos operan a niveles m s bajos I OdBV que los profesionales y por lo tanto requieren mayor ganancia para ofre cer el mismo nivel de salida Vea Configuraci n y Soluci n de Problemas en la p gina 9 para aprender c mo ajustar correctamente SENS FILTRO PASA ALTO A 100 HZ Pulsa
61. stallation This equ ppment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause hamrful inker ference to radio communications However there is no guar antee that interference will notoccurina particular installa tion If this equipment does cause hamrful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by tumingthe equi pmentoff and on the useris encouragedtotry to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures e Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna e Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver e Connecttheedquiprentinto anouleton a circuit different fromthat to which the receiver is connected e Consultthe dealer or an experienced radio TVtechnician for help Declaration of Conformity QSC Audio Products Inc dedares as its sole responsibility that the above narred product is in compliance with the Gound Directive 89 336 of May 1989 on the hbarrronization of the laws of the Member States relating to eectrorragnetic compatibility as well as requirements of the harrronized product standard EN 55013 related to the limits and the methods of measurement of radio disturbance characteristics of broadcast receivers and associated equipment and EN 55020 related to the electromagnetic immunity of broadcast receivers and assodated equipment Audio Products
62. 1 Synchronized recording for details REC MUTE key Use this key when recording to mute the input signal for about four seconds and then to enter record ready mode see 4 3 5 Rec mute function D SEARCH keys Use these keys to move the playback position inside a track SKIP keys Use these keys to move between tracks when playing back equivalent to turning AD They are also used to set the parameter values etc STOP key Use this key to stop playback or recording equiva lent to 47 PAUSE key Use this key to pause playback or recording equiva lent to 19 PLAY key Use this key to start playback or enter record mode from record ready mode equivalent to 48 2 3 1 Use of the remote control unit When using the remote control unit make sure There is a clear unobstructed path between the remote control unit and the remote sensor 7 on the main unit The remote control unit is located within 5 m 15 ft of the main unit and is pointing at approxi mately right angles 330 to the front panel When fitting or replacing the batteries e Always make sure that both batteries are replaced together Do not mix old and new batteries Do not mix batteries of different types e Always make sure that the batteries are located with the correct polarity the positive terminals of the batteries should match the markings inside the battery compartment and the negative
63. 394 TOP HAT 2X INPUT CONNECTOR lt GRILLE PARTIALLY SHOWN 3 75 gt 2X 4 00 T S C RIGHT SIDE 10 53 LEFT SIDE 0001243 A 9 12 02 Manufacturing tolerances are 0 13 and 1 INPUT SM109z sn CE PIN 1 PIN 1 S EAW WHITINSVILLE MA USA NEUTRIK NL 4 MPR S EAW One Main Street Whitinsville MA 01588 508 234 6158 Toll Free 800 992 5013 EAW products are continually improved specifications are therefore subject to change without notice DIMENSIONAL DRAWING A amp E SPECIFICATIONS The 2 way full range loudspeaker system shall incorporate a 10 in LF transducer and a 1 4 in voice coil compression driver The LF transducer shall be mounted in a vented enclosure tuned for optimum low frequency response The HF transducer shall be loaded on a axis symmetrical 1 in exit Wave Guide Plate with a nominal conical beamwidth of 100 An internal passive filter net work shall provide all acoustical crossover and system equalization requirements System frequency response shall vary no more than 3 dB from 100 Hz to 19 kHz measured on axis The loudspeaker shall produce a sound pressure level SPL of 95 dB SPL on axis at 1 meter with a power input of 1 watt and shall be capable of producing a peak output of 126 dB SPL on axis at 1 meter The loudspeaker shall handle 300 watts of
64. 4 to 40 dBFS Off below 40 dBFS INPUT ANALOG TRIM RANGE 6 to 6 dB Software controlled LINE SENSITIVITY SETTINGS 30 dBu 24 dBu Software selectable 18 dBu 12 dBu The sensitivity setting determines the maximum input signal that results in a full scale digital input 0 dBFS MIC GAIN RANGE 15 to 50 dB 1 2 dB steps INPUT IMPEDANCE 6 6k Q0 Electronically balanced PHANTOM POWER 24 Volts CMRR 55 dB CROSSTALK 290 dB 1 kHz DYNAMIC RANGE 104 dB A weighted 150 Ohm input termination OUTPUT OUTPUT FULL SCALE SETTINGS 24 dBu 18 dBu Software selectable 12 dBu 6 dBu The sensitivity setting determines the maximum oufput signal that results from a full scale digital signal 0 dBFS OUTPUT IMPEDANCE 1020 Electronically balanced MINIMUM LOAD IMPEDANCE 600 Q Maximum output 6000 22 5 dBu DYNAMIC RANGE 109 dB A weighted ANALOG INPUT TO OUTPUT TOTAL HARMONIC DISTORTION NOISE 0 01 96 20 Hz to 20 kHz 22 kHz BW filter 4 dBu signal with 20 dB headroom FREQUENCY RESPONSE 20 Hz to 20 kHz 0 5 dBr referenced at 1 kHz DYNAMIC RANGE 103 dB A weighted 150 Ohm input termination LATENCY 1 4 mS Propagation delay from input to output DIGITAL SAMPLE RATE 44 1 kHz 48 kHz 96 kHz QUANTIZATION 24 bit 256 x over sampled Delta sigma Analog to Digital and Digital to Analog DIGITAL PROCESSING 132 Mips Uses two ADI SHARC processors 48 bit accumulators MASTER CPU CLOCK SPEED 6 MHz DSP CYCLE SPEED 66 MHz CONTROL RS 48
65. 502B Mono Low Output 4 502A Mono Full Range 502B Mono Low MB4 Mono Low AWCS Mono Low 502A Mono High 8021 Mono Full Range 502B Mono Low MB4 Mono Low AWCS Mono Low 8021 High 80211 Full Range 502B Mono Low Bose Speaker EQ Preset List Mono Bank PANARAY 802 Series Il loudspeaker Mono Presets 802IISTK AWCS 8021ISTK HF PANARAY 802 Series Ill loudspeaker Mono Presets 802111 802111 502B 802 1 502 802 1 4 802 5 8021 HF 802115 802115 502 802115 502 802115 4 802 Series Il loudspeaker Preset Descriptions Stacked 802 Series loudspeakers biamped with AWCS Note Limiting is assigned to outputs 3 and 4 for protection of the AWCS Stacked 802 Series loudspeakers biamped 112Hz 802 Series Ill loudspeaker Preset Descriptions 802 Series loudspeaker Full Range EQ 802 Series Ill loudspeaker bi amped with 502B loudspeaker 802 Series Ill loudspeaker bi amped with 502BEX loudspeaker 802 Series II loudspeaker bi amped with MB4 802 Series II loudspeaker bi amped with AWCS Note Limiting is assigned to outputs 3 and 4 for protection of the AWCS 802 Series Ill loudspeaker bi amped 0 125Hz Stacked 802 Series III loudspeaker EQ Stacked 802 Series loudspeakers bi amped with 502B loudspeaker Stacked 802 Series IIl loudspeakers bi amped with 502BEX loudspeaker Stacked 802 Series IIl
66. AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE LENGTH OF THIS WARRANTY Some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts so the above limitation may not apply to you Exclusions of Damages PEAVEY S LIABILITY FOR ANY DEFECTIVE PRODUCT IS LIMITED TO THE REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF THE PRODUCT AT PEAVEY S OPTION IF WE ELECT TO REPLACE THE PRODUCT THE REPLACEMENT MAY BE A RECONDITIONED UNIT PEAVEY SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES BASED ON INCONVENIENCE LOSS OF USE LOST PROFITS LOST SAVINGS DAMAGE TO ANY OTHER EQUIPMENT OR OTHER ITEMS AT THE SITE OF USE OR ANY OTHER DAMAGES WHETHER INCIDENTAL CONSEQUEN TIAL OR OTHERWISE EVEN IF PEAVEY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages so the above limitation or exclu sion may not apply to you This Warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may also have other rights which vary from state to state If you have any questions about this warranty or service received or if you need assistance in locating an Authorized Service Center please contact the Peavey International Service Center at 601 483 5365 Peavey Canada Ltd at 905 475 2578 Features and specifications subject to change without notice 21 80303050 RGHITEGTURAL Peavey Electronics Corporation e 711 A Street e Meridian MS 39301 601 483 5376 Fax 601 486 1678 http
67. B 0 r EAA 1 2 3 20 50 100 200 500 1 2k 5k 10k 20k Ref 2 5 dBu Hz DigiTool MX RELATIVE interchannel Phase ooo A O Hz DigiTool MX Input Cross Talk with 52 dB of Mic Gain 0 20 40 d 60 B Hz 10k 20k 2k 5k DigiTool MX FFT 1k Hz 20 dBFS dBFS 20 WARRANTY WARRANTY Architectural Acoustics PEAVEY ELECTRONICS CORPORATION LIMITED WARRANTY Effective Date July 1 1998 What This Warranty Covers Your Peavey Warranty covers defects in material and workmanship in Peavey products purchased and serviced in the U S A and Canada What This Warranty Does Not Cover The Warranty does not cover 1 damage caused by accident misuse abuse improper installation or operation rental product modification or neglect 2 damage occurring during shipment 3 damage caused by repair or service performed by persons not authorized by Peavey 4 products on which the serial number has been altered defaced or removed 5 products not pur chased from an Authorized Peavey Dealer Who This Warranty Protects This Warranty protects only the original retail purchaser of the product How Long This Warranty Lasts The Warranty begins on the date of purchase by the original retail purchaser The duration of the Warranty is as follows Product Category Duration MediaMatrix DPU Excluding Frames Cinema Processors Power Amplifiers Pre Amplifiers Mixers Electronic Crossovers and
68. Ch 2 Source 2 from mixer 1 2 Controller Default Output Routing Ch 1 Ch 2 Ch3 Ch4 Routing 802 111 speaker 502 speaker 402 Il speaker 4 speaker Source 1 Source 1 Source 2 Source 2 High freq Low freq High freq Low freq Limiter Off Off Off Off Delay Off Off Off Off Example 2 Dual Mono PANARAY System Digital Controller Display 402 11 speaker Source 2 High freq 1 502A 502B 2 402 Preset Description Preset 1 502 A Speaker with 502B Speaker Mono Preset 2 402 lII Controller Inputs Ch 1 Mono source from Y cable Mono from Ch 2 Mono source from Y cable mixer Controller Default Output Routing Ch 1 Ch 2 Ch3 Ch4 Routing 502A 502B 40211 40211 High freq Low freq Full range Full range Limiter Off Off Off Off Delay Off Off Off Off 402 11 speake High freq 502A speaker High freq EA A 100 240V AC 50 50Hz MBA speaker Source 2 Low freq Zone 2 502B speaker Source 1 Low freq Zone 1 802 11 speaker Source 1 High freq pee 402 1 speaker Full range Single Zone 502B speaker Full range 23 6 0 DELAY Button Pressing the DELAY button provides access to four independent output delays There is a single delay line available on each of the controller s four out puts The delay function is always available regard less of the mo
69. Channel 2 Audio Power Denotes shield Pin 6 Channel 2 Audio Power Shield Earth ground Y CABLE WIRING OSA 1 Both wires Shield eere e Shield Use second drain wire if available or add an extra section of wire Standard cables are generally constructed using a male connector at one end and a female connector at the other end This allows several cables to be interconnected to create longer cable runs Audiocom master stations speaker stations and belt packs also typically provide both a male and female Neutrik connector for each intercom channel This permits loop through connection of several intercom stations using the standard cables Audiocom power supplies use a 3 pin male Neutrik connector for each channel Audiocom wallplates use male Neutrik connectors Figure 11 Audiocom cable wiring diagrams 13 Power Up Make sure any local power supplies are plugged in then turn on the power switches of any phantom power supplies PS 2001L SPS 2001 etc Sidetone Adjustment The SS 1002 SS 2002 and SS 2002RM use full duplex audio the same as conventional telephone lines in which the talk and listen audio are sent and received on the same wires Thus when you talk you also here your own voice back as with a telephone If you are using the built in speaker for listening and a either a panel microphone or handheld microphone for talkback you could experience unwanted feedback since the microp
70. DISPLAY OBJECTS The PROGRAM WHEEL also functions to select items on the screen If the cursor is over an object on the screen it may be selected by pressing the PROGRAM WHEEL This will either take you to an appropriate screen or enable additional options within the display PARAMETER CONTROLS To the right of the display are three undefined encoder controls The function for these controls are indicated in the display along the right side of the screen adjacent to the encoders Figure 1 illustrates the function for each control within the Mix View panel which is described in the next section The front panel screen consists of four primary views They are Mix Route Edit and Utilities The Mix View is the default view Edit Route and Utilities are accessed through the Mix view MUS Mix box provides a quick view Highlighting and selecting ofthe relative levels ofeach Controls the level of the corner box enters the channel for the selected mix the selected output utility view 0dE Leucls i te Controls the selected lt Input to output Master matrix level Master level control for the entire system Indicates the currently selected input Only the selected mix is visible in the mix view There are eight views one for each mix Figure 1 The Mix View is the primary view from which all other functions are accessed The Mix View is considered to be the main view from which other views and co
71. Der L fter l uft mit h chster Geschwindigkeit und das Chassis f hlt sich hei an Der Ton sollte innerhalb einer Minute zur ckkehren sobald der Verst rker wieder eine nomale Betriebeterrperatur erreicht hat berpr fen Sie ob eine einvvandfreie K hlung m glich ist Falls der L fter nicht l uft mus der Verst rker zur Reparatur eingeschickt werden gt ANZEICHEN CLIP LED BLINKT Wennderote CLIPLED ba an liegendem Eingangssignal blinkt kann der Verst rkerausgang kurz geschlossen sein berpr fen Sie de Ansdlu skermmen auf eventuell herausstehende Dr hte oder Br che der Isolation BUSQUEDADEAVERIAS No hay sonido conin ed n gt INDICACI N EL INDICADOR LED DE SIGNAL Y LOS INDI CADORES DE NIVELES SE ENCIENDAN AL DETECTAR EL NIVEL DE LA SE AL e Si los indicadores LED verdes de SIGNAL 20c0B y 10 cB pana dean la falla ocure entre el arrpglificacor y las bod nas Revise los cables de las bodres e intente cambiadas cambiarlos cables Y INDICACI N LOS INDICADORES CLIP PERMANECEN ENCENDIDOS anplificador est haciendo un en rrucecirriento mute de protecd n Un segundo de asilendamerto mute es normal cuando se enr dende o se apaga el amplificador H sobrecelertamierto puede causar enmuded miento de po tecci n H ventilador estar fun donando a su m xima velocidad y anraz n o caja del amplificador estar Caliente al tacto sonido se suspender
72. Equalizers 5 years Loudspeakers 5 years Microphones 2 years Frames 1 year Speaker Components incl speakers baskets drivers diaphragm replacement kits and passive crossovers and all Accessories 1 year What Peavey Will Do We will repair or replace at Peavey s discretion products covered by warranty at no charge for labor or materials If the prod uct or component must be shipped to Peavey for warranty service the consumer must pay initial shipping charges If the repairs are covered by warranty Peavey will pay the return shipping charges How To Get Warranty Service 1 Take the defective item and your sales receipt or other proof of date of purchase to your Authorized Peavey Dealer or Authorized Peavey Service Center OR 2 Ship the defective item prepaid to Peavey Electronics Corporation International Service Center 412 Highway 11 amp 80 East Meridian MS 39301 or Peavey Canada Ltd 95 Shields Court Markham Ontario Canada L3R 9T5 Include a detailed descrip tion of the problem together with a copy of your sales receipt or other proof of date of purchase as evidence of warranty cover age Also provide a complete return address OR 3 MediaMatrix Frames needing repair should be shipped prepaid to Peavey Electronics Corporation International Service Center 412 Highway 11 amp 80 East Meridian MS 39301 Limitation of Implied Warranties ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
73. Installate l apparecchio conformemente a quanto indicato nelle istruzioni fornite dal produttore Al fine di garantire il corretto funzionamento del prodotto e di proteggerlo da un riscaldamento eccessivo collo cate l apparecchio in una posizione tale da non ostacolarne la corretta aerazione 6 Non installate l apparecchio vicino a fonti di calore quali radiatori stufe o altri appa rati compresi gli amplificatori che generano calore 7 Non manomettete la spina dotata di massa Shuko progettata per la vostra sicurezza Una spina Shuko composta da due terminali e da un terzo terminale a forca per la massa aggiunto per garantire un pi elevato livello di sicurezza Se la spina fornita in dotazione non adatta alle vostre prese a muro contattare un tecni per sostituire le prese 8 Collocate il cavo di alimentazione in modo da evitare che venga calpestato o piega to in particolare in corrispondenza delle spine delle prese multiple e dei punti dove questo esce dall apparecchio 9 Utilizzate esclusivamente gli accessori specificati dal produttore 10 Utilizzate esclusivamente con supporti mobili piedistalli staffe o ripiani specificati dal produttore o forniti in dotazione con l apparecchio Quando utilizzate un suppor to mobile prestate attenzione durante gli spostamenti dell insieme carrello apparec chio per evitare danni fisici causati da un possibile ribaltamento 11 Per le riparazioni rivolgetevi al personale di assis
74. Instruktionen in der Bedienungsanleitung aufmerksam machen die Handhabung und Wartung des Produkts betreffen VORSICHT Risiko Elektrischer Schlag Nicht ffnen VORSICHT Um das Risiko eines elektrischen Schlages zu vermeiden nicht die Abdeckung enfernen Es befinden sich keine Teile darin die vom Anwender repariert werden k nnten Reparaturen nur von qualifiziertem Fachpersonal durchf hren lassen ACHTUNG Um einen elektrischen Schlag oder Feuergefahr zu vermeiden sollte dieses Ger t nicht dem Regen oder Feuchtigkeit ausgesetzt werden Vor Inbetriebnahme unbedingt die Bedienungsanleitung lesen Read This IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS WARNING When using electric products basic cautions should always be followed including the following a de gt 10 EN 13 14 15 16 Read these instructions Keep these instructions Heed all warnings Follow all instructions Do not use this apparatus near water For example near or in a bathtub swimming pool sink wet basement etc Clean only with a dry cloth Do not block any of the ventilation openings Install in accordance with manufacturer s instructions It should not be placed flat against a wall or placed in a built in enclosure that will impede the flow of cooling air Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators heat registers stoves or other apparatus including amplifiers that produce heat Do not defeat the safety purp
75. LINE LINE LINE 16 20 R R VOCAL amp INSTRUMENT SOURCES SEE PAGE 4 APPLICATION 3 PLACES 0F WORSHIP This mono configuration uses the Mono output to drive the main speaker system and an induction loop for the hard of hearing Aux sends are used for monitors and effects and Mix L amp R feed a cassette or DAT machine to record the occa sion if required INDUCTION MUSIC amp VOICE MONITORS BRIDGED IN MONO LOOP INDUCTION LOOP EQ bcd TETT CASSETTE OR DAT MACHINE O INSTRUMENT SOURCES SEE PAGE 4 HEADPHONES Page 21 SPIRIT FOLIO o APPLICATION 4 RECORDING The direct outputs on channels 8 may be used to feed a multitrack recorder as shown The direct outputs should be set to PRE so that they are unaffected by fader position The Mix outputs are used for a preliminary stereo mix on a DAT recorder HEADFHONES ARTISTS FOLDBACK m IE ICH craruicea CONTROL MONO ROOM HEADPHONES STUDIO CONTKOL ROOM CASSETTE RECORDER DAT RECORDER EFFECTS AUX 3 SIMILAR coe DIRECT TO M T INPUTS SET
76. LT3202 loudspeaker Cluster EQ LT3202 loudspeaker bi amped with MB4 LT3202 loudspeaker bi amped with 502BEX loudspeaker Output 1 LT3202 CH1 Full Range LT3202 CH1 Full Range LT3202 CH1 High LT3202 CH1 High Output 2 LT3202 CH2 Full Range LT3202 CH2 Full Range LT3202 CH2 High LT3202 CH2 High Output 3 LT3202 CH1 Full Range L T3202 CH1 Full Range MBA CH1 Low 502BEX CH1 Low Output 4 LT3202 CH2 Full Range LT3202 CH2 Full Range MB4 CH2 Low 502BEX CH2 Low Bose Speaker EQ Preset List Stereo Bank PANARAY LT4402 loudspeaker Mono Presets 74402 LT4402CLUSTER LT4402 MB4 LT4402 502BEX PANARAY LT9702 loudspeaker Mono Presets LT9702 LT97O2C LUSTER LT9702 MB4 LT9702 502BEX FreeSpace Model 8 loudspeaker Mono Presets 8 M8 MB4 M8 FS3 M8 FS1B LT4402 loudspeaker Preset Descriptions LT4402 loudspeaker Full Range EQ LT4402 Cluster EQ LT4402 loudspeaker bi amped with MB4 LT4402 loudspeaker bi amped with 502 BEX loudspeaker LT9702 loudspeaker Preset Descriptions LT9702 loudspeaker Full Range EQ LT9702 Cluster EQ LT9702 loudspeaker bi amped with MB4 LT9702 loudspeaker bi amped with 502BEX loudspeaker Model 8 loudspeaker Preset Descriptions Model 8 loudspeaker Full Range EQ Model 8 loudspeaker bi amped with MB4 Model 8 loudspeaker bi amped with FreeSpace 3 loudspeaker Model 8 loudspeaker bi amp
77. MONO OUTPUT LINE LEVEL SOURCES LOUDSPEAKER Page 4 SPIRIT FOLIO WIRING UP Please refer to pages 27 28 for additional wiring details MIC INPUT The mic input accepts XLR type connectors and is designed to suit a wide range of BALANCED or UNBALANCED low level signals whether from delicate vocals requiring the best low noise performance or close miked drum kits needing maximum Balanced Mic XLR headroom Professional dynamic condenser or ribbon mics are best because these will be LOW IMPEDANCE While you can use low cost HIGH IMPEDANCE mics 1 Screen you do not get the same degree of immunity to interference on the microphone cable 2 Hot ve 3 Cold ve and as a result the level of background noise may be higher If you turn the PHAN TOM POWER on the socket provides a suitable powering voltage for professional condenser mics Unbalanced Mic XLR DO NOT use UNBALANCED sources with the phantom power switched on The voltage on pins 2 amp 3 of the XLR connector may cause serious damage BALANCED dynamic mics may normally be used with phantom power switched on contact your microphone manufacturer for guidance 1 Screen The input level is set using the input SENS knob The LINE input offers the same gain range as the MIC input but at a higher input impedance This is suitable for most line level sources and provides the gain needed for lower level keyboards and
78. Mikrofon Signal anliegt Durch Dr cken des Schalters wird die Phantom Spannung auf alle MIC XLR Eing nge geschaltet Die zugeh rige LED leuchtet wenn die Phantom Spannung geschaltet wird Schlie en Sie niemals unsymmetrische Mikrofone an wenn die Phantom Spannung 48V eingeschaltet ist besteht Gefahr einer Besch digung im Mischpult Dynamische Mikrofone und Leitungen k nnen nor malerweise mit Phantom Spannung betrieben werden Wir empfehlen Ihnen beachten Sie die Bedienungsanleitung Ihres Mikrofons oder informieren Sie sich beim entsprechenden Hersteller Alle erforderlichen Mikrofone sollten eingesteckt und die Ausgangsfader heruntergepegelt sein bevor der 48 V Schalter bet tigt wird Hierdurch werden Besch digungen am externen Equipment verhindert PHONES Der Kopfh rer Anschlu ist als 6 3 mm Klinkenstecker Buchse ausgelegt Die Eingangsimpedanz dieses Anschlusses betr gt 200 oder h her TB LEVEL Anweisungen f r die Musiker k nnen ber die Aux 1 2 oder Aux 3 4 oder ber die Mix L R Ausg nge erteilt werden wenn ein sogenanntes Talkback Mikrofon angeschlossen wird hierzu der entsprechende Schalter gedr ckt sein Der Anschlu ist symmetrisch ausgelegt Der Kommando Signal Pegel wird mit dem TB LEVEL Regler eingestellt Q STEREO RETURNS Zwei symmetrische Stereo Returns stehen f r den Anschlu von Effekt Ger ten zur Verf gung und die Return Signale k nnen direkt auf die Mix L R Busse
79. Monitor Schalter gedr ckt Kopfh rer Verzerrungen Ist die Eingangs Impedanz geringer als 200 Q Ist der Monitor und Phones Pegel zu hoch eingestellt Note Les r glages initiaux doivent tre consid r s comme un point de d part pour votre mix est important de rap peler que beaucoup de facteurs affectent le son durant un concert bar exemple la taille de l audience Vous tes pr ts maintenant d marrer votre mixage Celui ci doit tre fait progressivement en coutant soigneusement chaque l ment du mix et en surveillant les afficheurs Si une surcharge apparait baissez doucement le fader de la voie appropri e jusqu descen dre sous la partie rouge ou baissez le niveau g n ral Probl mes de fonctionnement Pas de tension pr sente e Le courant secteur est il bien pr sent V rifiez la prise avec un autre appareil le cordon secteur est il bien connect V rifiez le fusible Sj une seule Led de mise sous tension est allum e consultez votre revendeur Le microphone ne fonctionne pas Le 48V est il mis en service 2 e La prise est elle bien branch e sur l entr e micro e Lec ble micro est il un cable sym trique trois con ducteurs Les afficheurs ne visualisent aucun signal e Le gain d entr e a t il t r gl correctement voir au dessus La source est elle bien connect e l embase spondant au bon niveau de signal e Avez vo
80. Mono Presets Preset Description Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Preset Preset Preset Preset Mono Preset Name Preset Description Default Default Default Default Stereo Preset Preset Description Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 a Preset Preset Preset Preset Stereo Preset Name Preset Description Default Default Default Default Bass Array Preset Description Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Preset Preset Preset Preset Bass Array Preset Name Preset Description Default Default Default Default 38 13 1 Bose Speaker EQ Preset List Mono Bank PANARAY 402 Series loudspeaker Mono Presets 4021 5028 4021 4 4021 AWCS 4021 HF PANARAY 402 Series Il loudspeaker Mono Presets 4021 4021 5028 4021 502 40211 4 4021 5 4021 402 Series I loudspeaker Preset Descriptions 402 Series loudspeaker Full Range EQ 402 Series loudspeaker bi amped with 502 B loudspeaker 402 Series loudspeaker bi amped with MB4 402 Series loudspeaker bi amped with AWCS Note Limiting is assigned to outputs 3 and 4 for protection of the AWCS 402 Series loudspeaker bi amped 160Hz 402 Series loudspeaker Preset Descriptions 402 Series loudspeaker Full Range EQ 402 Series 11 loudspeaker bi amped with 502B loudspeaker 402 Series 11 loudspeaker bi amped with 502BEX loudspeaker 402 Series 11 loudspeaker bi amped with MB4 402 Series 11 loudspeaker bi am
81. Neutrik or Switchcraft Pin 1 Common Pin 2 Channel Audio Power 4 Denotes twisted pair Pin 3 Channel Audio Power E Shield Earth ground TYPICAL 2 CHANNEL CABLE WIRING Denotes shield 4 4 3 3 6 6 5 5 1 1 Both wires Shield m Shield Cable Type 22AWG Stranded 3 Pair Twisted wire with Shield Connector Type 6 Pin XLR Audio Neutrik only not compatible with 6 pin Switchcraft Pin 1 Channel 1 amp 2 Common Pin 2 No connection Pin 3 Channel 1 Audio Power S Denotes twisted pair Pin 4 Channel 1 Audio Power Pin 5 Channel 2 Audio Power Denotes shield Pin 6 Channel 2 Audio Power Shield Earth ground Y CABLE WIRING Chi 2 1 4 Case 3 6 5 3 Ch2 2 1 Both wires A e Shield Use second drain wire if available or add an extra section of wire Standard cables are generally constructed using a male connector at one end and a female connector at the other end This allows several cables to be interconnected to create longer cable runs Audiocom master stations speaker stations and belt packs also typically provide both a male and female Neutrik connector for each intercom channel This permits loop through connection of several intercom stations using the standard cables Audiocom power supplies use a 3 pin male Neutrik connector for each channel Audiocom wallplates use male Neutrik connectors Figure 3 Cable Wiring Diagrams for Audiocom
82. POST EQ unless the EQ bypassed using the switch see above and are normally POST FADE for use as effects sends or additional submixes Aux s amp 2 and 3 amp 4 may if required be switched in pairs to PRE FADE by pressing the respective PRE switch for use as fold back or monitor feeds Aux s 5 amp 6 always remain POST FADE QD pan This control sets the amount of the channel signal feeding the Left and Right MIX buses allowing you to move the source smoothly across the stereo image When the control is turned fully right or left you are able to route the signal at unity gain to either left or right outputs individually MUTE All outputs from the channel except inserts are active when the MUTE Switch is released and muted when the switch is down allowing levels to be pre set before the signal is required QD Faner The 100mm FADER allows precise balancing of the various source signals being mixed to the Master Section You get most control when the input Sensitivity is set up correctly giving full travel on the fader See the Setting Up amp Troubleshooting section on page 20 for help in setting a suitable sig nal level QD routine The channel signal may be routed to the main stereo MIX or pairs of group busses 1 2 3 4 by pressing the respective switches with the channel sig nal fed proportionately to left 1 3 or right 2 4 depending on the posi tion of the PAN control 11 The channel signal may als
83. SEEK button for less than one second Listen Do this three or more times and decide which audio channel sounds best because you won t have channel verification otherwise Continue to do this until you get back to the best sounding audio channel You can electronically lock it into the selected channel by pressing and holding the same SEEK button for five or more seconds Press and hold the SEEK button again for five seconds to unlock You re set Close the front access door 2h LR 400 and LR 500 Display Receivers Select the channel to match the transmission channel by pressing the UP and DOWN buttons At 72MHz each LR 400 and LR 500 receiver operates on 17 wide band channels and 40 narrow band channels Letters Wide Band Channels Numbers Narrow Band Channels At 216MHz receivers operate on 19 wide band channels and 38 narrow bands Channels starting with 2 are wide band and channels beginning with 1 or 3 are narrow band channels Please refer to the Frequency Compatibility Tables Section Pages 28 31 for specific frequencies and compatibility with other manufacturers m NOTE Operating on narrow band channel will have more noise 2b continued LR 400 and 18 500 Test the audio If a trans mitter is broadcasting on that channel you will be able to hear the audio If the signal is too weak the audio will be muted squelched 2h continued LR 400 and LR 500 Find audio transmission Anothe
84. SERVICE GROUNDING a ELECTRODE SYSTEM NEC ART 250 PART H NEC NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE 15 Lightning For added protection for this product during a lightning storm or when it is left unattended and unused for long periods of time unplug it from the wall outlet and disconnect the antenna or cable system This will prevent damage to the product due to lightning and power line surges 16 Power Lines An outside antenna system should not be located in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other electric light or power circuits or where it can fall into such power lines or circuits When installing an outside antenna system extreme care should be taken to keep from touch ing such power lines or circuits as contact with them might be fatal 17 Overloading Do not overload wall outlets extension cords or integral convenience receptacles as this can result in risk of fire or electric shock 18 Object and Liquid Entry Never push objects of any kind into this product through openings as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short out parts that could result in a fire or electric shock Never spill liquid of any kind on the product 19 Servicing Do not attempt to service this product yourself as open ing or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltage or other hazards Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel 20 Damage Requiring Service Unplug this product from the wall outlet and refer s
85. SLEEVE EE SPIRIT FOLIO Tip Ring Tip Sleeve Ring Sleeve Tip Ring Sleeve 1 2 1 2 2 3 1 2 5 1 2 Tip gt King Sleeve 1 2 5 Tip Ring Tip Sleeve Ring Sleeve Tip Ring Sleeve Note for every doubling of headphones the load impedance is halved Do not go below ZOOR Tip Left Tip Sleeve Ring Sleeve Tip Right Sleeve 1 2 Left Tip 3 Ring Sleeve 1 2 Right 22 King Tip Sleeve Ring Sleeve Tip Ring Sleeve Tip Tip Sleeve Sleeve Tip Sleeve 1 2 Tip 5 Sleeve 1 2 Centre Tip Screen Ring Centre Screen Page 28 SPIRIT FOLIO SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAM exnv LXNV Jud exnv Jud 1S0d 1SOd exnv H exnv YVTIWIS Xnv 0c l SLNdNI O3431S Lxnv En oS XIN 1 i o3 71 XIIN XIN OL ans Ac Ht Ino 1HbId ans ans uaavd 127 y Ino 1441 ans 1437 ans im A 14W 1W4d 318VN3 y y o Y dd ai 718 09 ip 1 5 1 Fh Y 54 ID SINOHd 14V 14d H313W 1 14V 14d LT u MOVulz 1 no ONOW ONOW y a LHDIY XIN u3avJ 1H3SNI XIIN ee 1331 XIN 1H3SNI XIIN dalSsVviN snd sna
86. Sie auch ausschlie lich symmetrische Kabel zur WWeiterverbindung auch nur ein einiges unsymmet risches Kabel das Gesantsignal unsynrretrisch werden latst was m glicherweise Brummen verursachen Kann BITTE BEACHTEN SIE Schalten Sie den Parallelbetrieb aus wenn zwei separate Signale eingespeist werden sollen CARACTERISTICAS Y AJUSTES Mcab cb paralelas QU ES intempo Parallel Inout le pamite operar el amplificador en modo paralelo la misma se al hada arrbos canales sin necesidad de utilizar un cable tipo Y Cada canal controla su propia carga de bod nes con gananda independiente filtros y limitador de picos Ajuste los selectores 4 5 y 6 en la posici n de ON para acoplar las entradas Coloque los interruptores en la posici n de CFF para trabajar en el modo est reo bianplificado cualquier otro nodo de 2 canales indicador LED arrarillo para el modo PARALLEL del panel frontal le advierte cuando el interruptor ha sido ajustado en el modo paralelo Con las entradas en paralelo usted puede usar los conectores de la otra entada para erMar la se al a otros 5 Lo que com nmente se llama una cadena daisy CU NDO USARLO Utilice la entada paralela cuando se alimentan dos bocinas con una sola se al de entrada modo paralelo mientras se mantiene control separacb de la gananda los filtros yla lirritaci n de ambos canales
87. The LR 500 and LR 400 are designed to work with either mono or stereo connectors NOTE Listen receivers accept mono or stereo jacks Turn the receiver on by rotating the volume knob counter clockwise The red LED should activate and on the LR 400 and LR 500 the LCD display should illuminate If they do not check to ensure you have installed charged batteries and that the batteries have been installed with the proper polarity LED should light up solid red when unit is on Turn volume knob counter clockwise to turn unit on Operating Listen Receivers 22 Make sure the unit is by rotating the volume knob to ON when an earpiece or headset is plugged into the unit Listen receivers use the cable of the earphone or headset as a receiving antenna CAUTION Don t blow out your ears Slightly rotate the volume knob to turn the unit ON while keeping the volume turned down Then adjust volume after listening to earphone Select channel match the receiver s channel to the transmission channel For the LR 300 follow instructions on 2a For the LR 400 and LR 500 follow instructions on 25 2 LR 300 channel selection first make sure the transmitter is transmitting continuous audio within range Second place the receiver s earphone on your ear to listen Turn on and adjust volume to reasonable level Open the LR 300 receiver s front access door and press the mw
88. The default setting for this switch 1s in the Audiocom BAL position Installation Unpacking The package contains the following items Contact the shipper or your Audiocom dealer immediately if anything is damaged or missing Detach and fill out the registration card and return it to Telex to properly register the product PS 2001L Qty Description 1 PS 2001L Power Supply 1 Warranty and registration card 1 User Manual 4 Rubber Feet install for desktop use of the PS 2001L 1 Power Cord SPS 2001 Oty Description 1 PS 2001L Power Supply 1 Warranty and registration card 1 User Manual 4 Rubber Feet install for desktop use of the PS 2001L 1 Power Cord 1 RCA to RCA Patch Cord Configuration Switches The BAL UNBAL switch located on the rear of the unit 15 set to the Balanced Audiocom position when the unit is shipped from the factory To set the switch to the Unbalanced Clear Com mode use a pointed object such as a pen to push in the switch The Combine Isolate switch located on the front of the unit can be changed at any time by using a pointed object such as a pen to push in the switch When the switch is in the Combine position all users on both channels may intercommunicate When the switch is set to the Isolate position channels 1 and 2 cannot intercommunicate Intercom Channel and Program Connections Channel Capacity When connecting intercom stations to the PS 2001L or SPS 2001 determine the tot
89. alimentation FANTOME qui applique une tension d alimentation sur les conducteurs du c ble micro Appuyer sur la touche 48V pour mettre en service l alimen tation sur toutes les entr es MICRO La Led adjacente s illumine quand l al imentation est activ e SEZIONE MASTER QD AUX master Ciascuna delle sei uscite AUX ha un controllo master del livello di uscita ed un tasto AFL AUX AFL Come i tasti PFL permettono l ascolto pre fade cosi possibile monitorare ogni uscita AUX dopo che stato regolato il livello usando il tasto AFL Questo indirizza il segnale d uscita su MONITOR o PHONES cuffie pren dendo il posto di ogni segnale presente Anche i METERS commutano dalla sorgente selezionata per mostrare il segnale PFL AFL ed il relativo LED si illumina per avvertire che uno dei due tasti premuto Quando viene rilas ciato il tasto il Monitor torna alla sorgente precedente ED INDICATORI DI TENSIONE Questi LED si illuminano per mostrare che la consolle alimentata e che l alimentatore interno funziona correttamente ED INDICATORI METER A BARRE Gli indicatori a barre a tre colori controllano i quattro sub gruppi e la sor gente Monitor Cuffie 2TK Mono Mix o Gruppi avvertendo in caso di picchi eccessivi che potrebbero causare sovraccarico Tentare di tenere il segnale nella sezione arancione per un miglior rendimento Allo stesso modo se il livello di uscita troppo basso e viene rilevato fati cosam
90. amp S o gt E 0 M 4 10 5 o gt N 9 5 a z 70 Fat w m c a M o gt ee 1 PRE A PRE AFL POST 2 2 2 2 p 2 2 O O POST POST POST POST POST POST PRE Wo N AFL m o o m o x 3 o x 3 o 3 0 10 0 10 0 10 0 10 PRE 0 10 PRE 0 10 PRE 3 3 3 3 3 amp 6 3 7 POST POST POST POST Y N POST 7 N POST Y N 0 10 0 10 0 10 0 10 10 10 2 1 1 4 4 PAN 4 4 PAN 4 PAN 4 4 PAN 194 BAL 4 4 BAL 7 SUM an w N an on N ors N PA w N an o N 9 o A w N an op w N Es a a a a a a a a a a a a o gt o o Pr Pe o z gt lt gt lt o gt lt o gt lt a o gt lt a o gt lt a o gt lt c 4 co 4 co 4 4 co 4 co 4 4 PRE A POST DIRECT OUT 1 8 Page 30 This equipment complies with the EMC Directive 89 336 EEC For further details contact the address below hal SPIRIT By Soundcraft Spirit By Soundcraft Harman Inte
91. and registration card User Instructions For SS 2002RM units Configuration Pre check Before making connections read the configuration notes that follow and make sure that all internal controls are properly set for your intended usage If you need to access the internal controls remove the four screws on the front that secure the intercom station faceplate to the mounting box then lift out the faceplate for all versions except the RM version To access the internal controls for the RM version remove the 10 screws securing the cover on the box and then lift the cover DIP Switches Table 1 lists the DIP switch descriptions and factory default settings Descrintion Settings Default p Open Off Closed On Setting m Closed Disabled no mic kill Open Enabled mic kill active Call signal Closed DC SWI set to UNBAL method Open Audiocom SW1 set to BAL Incoming call Closed Disabled Omen beep Open Enabled p Microphone Closed Unbalanced ben type Open Balanced Closed Enabled DIP switch 3 must Speaker beep Fos cannes be set to Open Open 5 Open Disabled Mic Kill Receive Audiocom master stations such as the US 2002A can transmit an inaudible signal to turn off the microphones in all remote intercom stations on an intercom channel This is useful when a remote intercom station has been left unattended with the microphone on The procedure to send a mic kill signal from a master station is a
92. are available in the PANARAY system digital controller for Bass Array Applications MB4 2xBS280Hz The MB4 2x Broadside Bass Array preset provides 360 degree horizontal cov erage with a 10 to 15dB suppression in energy going up and down from 80 200Hz The crossover is set at 280Hz and is recommended for use with the LT Series MB4 2xBS180Hz The MB4 2x Broadside Bass Array preset provides 360 degree horizontal cov erage with a 10 to 15dB suppression in energy going up and down from 80 200Hz The crossover is set at 180Hz and is recommended for use with MA12 MB4 and 02 Series speakers MB4 2xEF280Hz The MB4 2x Endfire Bass Array preset provides 180 degree conical disper sion 160Hz The crossover is set at 280Hz and is recommended for use with MA12 MB4 and LT Series speakers MB4 2xEF180Hz The MB4 2x Endfire Bass Array preset provides 180 degree conical disper sion 160Hz The crossover is set at 180Hz and is recommended for use with MA12 MB4 and 02 Series speakers MB4 4xEF280Hz The MB4 4x Endfire Bass Array preset provides 120 degree conical disper sion 160Hz The crossover is set at 280Hz and is recommended for use with MA12 MB4 and LT Series speakers MB4 4xEF180Hz The MB4 4x Endfire Bass Array preset provides 120 degree conical disper sion 160Hz The crossover is set at 180Hz and is recommended for use with MA12 MB4 and 02 Series speakers Loading and Setting Up Bass Ar
93. back panel serial port using a standard PC running Wings 98 or NT The user must select the proper comm port channel number in the utility s Options pull down menu Once the proper communications port is selected you can open a source file for download from the PC to Digitool The download process takes approximately 4 minutes At the end of the download the Flash utility will report a successful download and instruct the user to cycle power for the new program to take affect 13 Utilitics Fozition Figure 14 Panel view for the utility save function Utiliticz mu Logqd Preset Fazition LOAD Figure 15 Panel view for the utility load function Iti1liticz 331r RE Frz3 DE HZ Function Sine Figure 16 Panel view for the utility signal generator UTILITIES Ftu ucrride zEM 0 Figure 17 Channel 1 priority override view CAUTION Once the download is in progress it should not be interrupted Digitool usually detects bad data or communication errors Under some circumstances Digitool may attempt to load a corrupt file and become unresponsive To recover from this condition the user must load the upgrade using the hardware method described below LOADING FIRMWARE VIA HARDWARE RESET To download new firmware and DSP code from the PC to Digitool using the hardware method the user must use a terminal emulator Hyperterminal is a terminal
94. by inadvertent connection to the mains supply If this product 15 not provided with a mains plug or one has to be fitted then follow the instructions given below IMPORTANT DO NOT make any connection to the larger terminal which is marked with the letter or by the safety earth symbol or coloured GREEN or GREEN and YELLOW The wires in the mains lead on this product are coloured in accordance with the following code BLUE NEUTRAL BROWN LIVE As these colours may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug proceed as follows The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED When replacing the fuse only a correctly rated approved type should be used and be sure to re fit the fuse cover IF IN DOUBT CONSULT A COMPETENT ELECTRICIAN 2 TASCAM CD RW700 For U S A TO THE USER This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against interference in a residential area This device generates and uses radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions it may cause interference to radio or TV reception If th
95. cart apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip over Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time to prevent damage to this product Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way such as power supply cord or plug is damaged liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture does not operate normal ly or has been dropped Do not attempt to service this product yourself Opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltages or other hazards Y u Please call Bose to be referred to an authorized ser Vice center near you 15 To prevent risk of fire or electric shock avoid over loading wall outlets extension cords or integral convenience receptacles 16 Do not let objects or liquids enter the product as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short out parts that could result in a fire or electric shock 17 See product enclosure back for safety related markings 18 No naked flame sources such as lighted candles should be placed on the apparatus Information about products that generate electrical noise This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against har
96. contents TOC has been written at the start of the disc The process of writing this table of contents is known as finalizing Once this has been done no further data can be written to the disk See 5 1 Finalizing for details In the case of a CD RW disc which has been final ized the whole of the disc may be erased or the disc may be refreshed and the disc re used In addition a CD RW disc that has been finalized may be unfinalized i e the TOC is removed This allows further tracks to be recorded to the disc pro vided that there is space on the disc 1 2 1 Recordable discs In this manual we use the term recordable disc to describe a CD R or CD RW disc that has not been finalized i e further recording is possible on the disc 1 2 2 About this manual In this manual we use the following conventions The names of keys and controls are given in the following typeface ERASE e When the alphanumeric portion of the display shows a message this is shown in the following typeface Welcome If a preset indicator in the display 1 e one which cannot change but is either on or off is shown this is shown as follows SHUFFLE When referring to a front or rear panel control or feature the following typeface is used to show the number of the feature as given in the diagram in this manual and the corresponding explanation When referring to a remote control key the follow
97. create a taller line array The height of the EXPANDED FULL RANGE SYSTEM Amplifier MA12 Speaker MA12 speaker line array must correspond to the ear height range of the listeners in sitting and standing positions in the installation venue aw LOUDSPEAKER CONFIGURATION The Bose MA12 loudspeaker module can be used with the Bose M2150 1600 and 1800 amplifiers It is also compatible with industry standard amplifiers rated for 4 to 8 2 loads The MA12 loudspeaker is packaged one per carton ENGINEERS AND ARCHITECTS SPECIFICATIONS The MA12 speaker shall be a multiple driver full range system with matched active equalisation as follows The transducer complement shall consist of twelve 2 2 5 7 cm full range drivers mounted in a vertical line array Each driver shall have a rated impedance of 3 20 and be wired in series parallel resulting in a composite nominal impedance of 80 The nominal horizontal beamwidth of the loudspeaker shall be 160 and the vertical coverage is a band of constant height The power handling capacity of the loud speaker shall be 300W continuous pink noise band limited from 155Hz to 12kHz 30 PANARAY System Digital Controller The loudspeaker shall be provided with a ducted vent system tuned at 100Hz The input connector of the loudspeaker module shall consist of two parallel wired Speakon NL4 receptacles and one two posi
98. da ein PFL oder AFL Schalter gedr ckt ist Wird der Schalter wieder gedr ckt so wird auf die vorher angew hlte Quelle wieder zur ckgeschaltet ED Power anzeicen Die LEDs leuchten wenn das interne Netzger t des LX7 ordnungsgem arbeitet ED LiD AUSSTEUERUNGSANZEIGE Sechs 3 farbige 12 Segment LED Ketten dienen als Aussteuerungsanzeigen Angezeigt werden auf den LED Ketten die Subgruppen Ausgangssignale und die angew hlte Monitor und Phones Quelle 2TK Mono Mix oder Gruppen So haben Sie immer einen berblick ber richtige Signalpegel Einstellungen Die roten LEDs zeigen beim Aufleuchten den PEAK Bereich an Beachten Sie also da die amberfarbenen LEDs immer leuchten Dann k nnen Sie davon ausgehen da die Signalpegel richtig eingestellt sind Ein zu niedrig eingestelltes Signal k n nte ein zu hohes Hintergrundrauschen verursachen Ist einer der PFL oder AFL Schalter gedr ckt wird das entsprechende PFL oder AFL Signal auf der Aussteuerungsanzeige in Mono angezeigt MIX Durch Dr cken des MIX Schalters werden die post fade Subgruppensignale paarweise dem Haupt Mix zugewiesen Die Gruppen und 3 werden zum Mix L die Gruppen 2 und 4 werden zum Mix R geroutet MASTER FADER Mit den Master Fadern wird der endg ltige Pegel der Subgruppen und der Mix L und Ausg nge eingestellt Normalerweise sollten diese Fader bei korrekter Kanal Eingangs Vorverst rkung auf 0 stehen um eine maximale Faderaufl sung f r
99. de SIGNAL los de 2028 y 10 dB se illuminan respectivarrerte al 0 1 1 y 10 de la potenda indicador LED rojo de CLIP parpadea cuando hay saturad n dips Quando perrranece encendido indica fund n Mute de protecd n Si esto ocurre durante el uso lea la secci n Busqueda de Aver as LEDarrarillo de BRIDGE indca que el ampnlifi cador est en nodo de puenteado en nono LEDarrarillo de PARALLEL indica que los interruptores de entrada paralela han sido Fan Ventilateur L fter Ventilador f L fter Ventilador Fan Ventilateur Warm air exits amp L air chaud est expluls LEN Cool air enters rack L air frais entre dans le coffret Kuhle Luft flie t in den Rack Aire fresco que entra en el rack Warme Luft flie t aus den Verst rker Aire caliente del amplificador RACK COFFRET ES ON OPERATION Fan cooling The fan speed varies automatically to maintain safe intemal temperatures Keep the front and rear verts dear to allow full airflow Hot air exhausts out the front of the arrp so it does nct heat the interior of the rack Make sure that plenty of cool air can enter the rack espedally if there are other units which exhaust hot air into it Safe operating levels The arrps protective muting system against excess
100. de la prise casque l embase fournit la tension appropri e pour des micros professionnels statiques Utilisez l alimentation fant me 48V SEULEMENT avec des microphones statiques Mettez l alimentation fan t me 48V en ou hors service avec tous les faders EN BAS pour viter des dommages la console ou aux equipements externes FAITES ATTENTION lors d utilisation de sources asym triques elles peuvent tre endommag es par la tension de l alimentation fant me pr sente sur les broches 2 et 3 du connecteur XLR D branchez le micro si vous voulez utiliser l entr e LIGNE Le gain d entr e est r gl par le potentiom tre SENS ED ENTREE LIGNE Cette entr e sur jack 6 35 STEREO est destin e a des sources autres que des micros telles que des claviers des boites a rythmes des synth tiseurs des mag n tophones ou des guitares Lentr e est SYMETRIQUE pour un bon rapport sig nal bruit et pour du mat riel professionnel mais vous pouvez utiliser des sources ASYMETRIQUES en c blant les jacks comme montr dans ce cas utilisez des c bles aussi courts que possible D branchez tout micro de l entr e MICRO si vous voulez utiliser cette embase Le gain d entr e est r gl par le poten tiom tre SENS SENS Sensibilit Ce potentiom tre permet d adapter la sensibilit du pr ampli micro au niveau de signal de la source R gl trop haut le signal sera distordu et surchargera la voie Trop bas le niveau de bruit
101. de mezcla est arriba Compruebe que el bot n 2TK REEMPLAZA A LA MEZCLA est desactivado No hay salida en el amplificador de monitores e Esta el jack de auriculares insertado e Est el control de nivel de monitor y auriculares suficientemente alto Est pulsado el conmutador de selecci n de moni tor apropiado Distorsi n de auriculares e los auriculares de impedancia mayor de 20002 e Est el control de nivel de monitor y auriculares suficientemente alto APPLICATIONS Anwendungen Applications Applicazioni Aplicaciones Live Applica tions CENTRE VOICE CLUSTER Live Sound Sonorisation Applicazioni Llve Directo MONITORS MONITORS DES 2 dos CROSSOVER rs SI w 16 TRK MULTITRACK DI BOX GUITAR VIA DI BOX 5 m wm JE an El ONO NOISE GATES X 6 amus ail nas Le S VOCAL MICS INSTRUMENTO MIC ON GROUP OUTPUTS INSERTS CAN BE USED TO FEED CD PLAYER MULTITRACK WITH PRE MIXED DRUMS COMPRESSOR LIMITER ME TM Page 22 Places of Worship Kirchen Lieux de culte Luoghi di culto PA SPEAKERS 100V LINE OR NORMAL PA SYSTEM Iglesias INSTRUMENT MICS INDUCTION LOOP AMP MONITORS N INDUCTION ol Al ZONE 1 ZONE 2
102. des Mix Ausganges wieder bertragen und die 2TK Einspielung hier die CD wird unterbrochen ATTENTION les micros asym triques peuvent tre endommag s par la tension pr sente Des micros dynamiques sym triques peuvent normalement tre utilis s avec l alimentation fant me contacter votre constructeur de microphone pour des conseils Les micros doivent toujours tre branch s et tous les faders de sortie r gl es au minimum avant de mettre en service l alimentation fant me pour viter d endommager le mat riel externe ED EMBASE CASQUE Cette embase jack st r o 6 35 convient pour des casques dont l imp dance est sup rieure ou gale 2000 OY NIVEAU D ORDRES TB LEVEL Une entr e sym trique est pr vue pour un microphone d ordres Le signal peut tre dirig vers les Auxiliaires 1 2 ou 3 4 destin s au retour musiciens ou vers le mix gauche droit en appuyant sur la touche correspondante Le niveau est r gl par le potentiom tre TB LEVEL RETOURS STEREO Deux retours st r o sym triques sont disponibles pour les effets qui sont dirig s directement vers les sorties mix gauche droite Le niveau est r gl par les potentiom tres et RET 2 Si la source est mono on utilise embase jack gauche et le signal est dirig automatiquement vers la droite et la gauche O niveau 2 PISTES Le potentiom tre rotatif r gle le niveau du retour 2 pistes dont le signal est dirig vers le casque les e
103. eine lineare Einstellung zu gew hren MIX TO MONO Mit diesem Schalter werden die post fade Mix L R Ausg nge zum Mono Bus geroutet Hierdurch kann ein separater Mono Mix erzeugt werden mit dem beispielsweise ein Center Cluster angesteuert wird HINWEIS Beachten Sie bei Eingangskan len die dem Mix und Mono Bus zugewiesen sind R ckkopplungen entstehen die zu Besch digungen f hren k nnen SECTION DE SORTIE MASTER GENERAUX D AUXILIAIRES des six sorties Aux un r glage de niveau g n ral et une touche associ e AFL AFL AUXILIAIRES Comme les touches PFL sur les voies vous pouvez contr ler chaque sortie AUX en appuyant sur la touche AFL Ceci dirige le signal AUX apr s con tr le du niveau vers l coute ou le casque se substituant au signal existant Les AFFICHEURS se lib rent galement de la source choisie pour afficher le signal de PFL AFL et la Led PFL AFL s illumine pour avertir qu une touche de PFL ou d AFL est appuy e Quand vous rel chez la touche la source ini tiale est restitu e ED inoicareur DE MISE SOUS TENSION Ces Leds s illuminent pour indiquer que la console est sous tension ED AFFICHEURS BARGRAPH Les afficheurs Bargraph tricolores suivent la s lection Monitor et casque pour afficher le niveau des quatre sorties sous groupes du 2 PISTES de la source mono du Mix ou des Groupes vous donnant un avertissement con stant des cr tes excessives dans le signal qui
104. emulation program provided by Windows which is intended for connection to a modem It is often found in the Accessories folder under Communications Hyperterminal should be setup as follows Connection name Digitool Area code Not applicable for this connection but you must provide one anyway Connect using Com1 Com2 Com etc Select the PC communications port that is connected to Digitool Port Settings Bits per second baudrate 57 6k Data bits 8 Parity None Stop bits 1 Flow control None Once you have a hyperterminal window open the File pull down menu and select Properties Select the Settings tab and change the emulation type to VT 100 Select save to keep this configuration Next turn the Digitool unit off and remove the top cover 14 Locate the Flash pads which is between U1705 U1708 see figure 18 The steps are as follows 1 While the unit is still off short across the two Flash pads using a small flat head screwdriver 2 While still shorting the pads turn the unit on 3 Digitool will respond with all front panel LEDs brightly lit Green If Digitool does not respond this way repeat steps 1 and 2 4 Once the LEDs are all green you may release the short 5 In the Hyperterminal Transfer pull down menu select Send Text file 6 Browse to the directory containing the upgrade file select the file and press Open 7 Digitool will report GDone to the emulat
105. es capaz de operar sobre una amplia gama de tensiones gracias a un soporte del fusible de red de 4 posiciones Es importante asegurar que la selecci n de tensi n es adecuada al nivel del suministro de red local para una operaci n segura e ininterrumpida Use un peque o destornillador para ajustar la posici n del soporte del fusible en el conector Para evitar riesgos de incendio sustituya el fusible s lo con otro del mismo valor como se indica en el panel trasero La fuente de alimentaci n interna contiene partes no reemplazables por el usuario Para reparaciones dir jase a un servicio t cnico oficial a trav s de su distribuidor Spirit o T dE mee x TE ALL Cee oes a E ger COCO pide is se os ge yaaa PII aaa T S 84444526 a ada a ee IU 521 AAA were ew a 24 redes we EE aaa CODD PII I 3 unos ji amp yeJopunos 2 i ERES 910 O a am Ouiput Connectors Master amp Group Faders 4 reas FRI gt Dar no TYP a 1 2 GRP 3 DD 506 49 n s 2 1 T amt 1
106. esta gu a del usuario Importantes instrucciones de seguridad Lea y siga estas instrucciones Respete todos los avisos del producto y de la gu a del usuario No utilice este aparato cerca del agua o humedad Limpie s lo con un trapo seco No bloquee las aperturas de ventilaci n Instale seg n las instrucciones del fabricante Para garantizar que el producto funciona de manera fiable y con el fin de evitar que se sobrecaliente coloque el producto en una posici n y ubicaci n que no interfiera con su ventilaci n adecuada 6 No lo instale cerca de fuentes de calor tales como radiadores salidas de aire caliente hornos o dem s aparatos inclusive amplificadores que generen calor 7T No elimine el dispositivo de seguridad ofrecido por el enchufe con toma a tierra Los enchufes con toma a tierra tienen dos patas para la corriente y una tercera para la toma de tierra La tercera pata est instalada a efectos de seguridad Si el enchufe suministrado no encaja en sus tomas de electricidad consulte con un electricista para sustituirlo 8 Proteja el cable el ctrico de forma que nadie lo pise o quede apretado particularmente cerca de los enchufes recept culos de tomas m ltiples y en el lugar en el que sale del aparato 9 Utilice s lo conexiones y accesorios suministrados por el fabricante 10 Utilice s lo con un carrito soporte tr pode abrazadera o mesa suministrados por el fab ricante o vendidos junto al apar
107. for the delay control Utility View Selecting UTIL in the upper left hand corner of the Mix View y panel will enable the Utility View panel The Utility View allows Figure 12 Response curves for the the user to store and save presets enable the internal generator paragraphic EQ and turn on the priority function SAVE PRESET Parameters for a given configuration can be saved into 1 of 8 preset locations All hardware and software variables are saved Figure 14 illustrates the Panel View for the save function outputchanneld Coarse 27 LOAD PRESET prem um Parameters for a given configuration can be reloaded from 1 of 8 previously saved preset locations All hardware and software variables are reloaded Figure 15 illustrates the panel view for the save function Figure 13 Panel view for the output delay controls 12 The user also has the option to reload the factory default configuration This configuration has all functions bypassed and each input channel routed to it s corresponding output SIGNAL GENERATOR An internal signal generator may be accessed from the Utility View The generator output signal is positioned prior to the paragraphic equalizers in each of the output stages The signal can be routed to one or more output channels This signal when enabled is mixed with the normal audio signal flow for each channel The generator provides three functions Sine Pink Nois
108. gemis cht werden Der Pegel wird mit dem RET oder dem RET 2 Regler eingestellt Wird nur ein Mono Ger t eingeschleift nutzen Sie wieder die linke Buchse da hier das Signal beiden Kan len zugewiesen wird 2TK LEVEL Mit diesem Dreh Regler wird der Pegel der 2 Spur Bandmaschinen Eing nge eingestellt der zum Kopfh rer Ausgang zu den Monitor Ausg ngen oder direkt zu den Mix Ausg ngen geroutet wird Hierbei mu der jeweilige Schalter 12 gedr ckt sein Die unsymmetrischen Cinch Anschl sse dienen zum Anschlu eines Tonbandger ts um die Wiedergabe abh ren zu k nnen 2TK REPLACES MIX OUTPUT 21K ersetzt den Mix Ausgang Dieser Schalter veranla t genau das was seine Bezeichnung sagt Wird der Schalter gedr ckt werden die 2 Spur Bandmaschinen Eing nge auf die Mix Ausg nge geschaltet So k nnen beispielsweise bei Live Veranstaltungen Zwischeneinspielungen ber die Haupt Ausg nge erfolgen ohne das hierf r Eingangskan le verwendet werden m ssen Der gro e Vorteil dieser Einrichtung wird am folgenden Beispiel ersichtlich W hrend ein angeschlossener CD Spieler f r die Zwischeneinspielung sorgt kann der Toningenieur alle Kanal Pegel ein stellen EQs abstimmen R cksprache zu den Musikern halten und jeden Teil des Mixes inklusive des Haupt Mixes zur Kontrolle abh ren ohne daf der einge spielte Sound zum Publikum in irgend einer Weise gest rt oder unterbrochen wird Wird der Schalter erneut gedr ckt wird der Sound
109. is probably because the receiver is not designed to handle the 25kHz deviation of the Listen transmitter This can be corrected by turning the PROCESS control knob all the way counter clockwise and turning the INPUT LEVEL knob down Several transmitters operating in the same environment For this you ll need to choose your transmitting frequencies carefully The following guidelines should be used to choose channels a If possible use all wide band channels These channels offer lower noise b Select channels that have the highest frequency separation as possible see Frequency Compatibility Tables pages 28 31 to avoid adjacent channels and interference Channels should be at least 200kHz apart Through a process of trial and error select a combination of channels that offer the lowest interference and highest reliability 10 LISTEN TECHNOLOGIES CORPORATION 1 801 233 8992 1 800 330 0891 Fax 1 801 233 8995 Internet www listentech com All specifications are subject to change without notice LT 800 Stationary Transmitter Specifications LT 800 Stationary Transmitter Specifications RF Frequency Range 72MHz 72 05 75 95MHz 216MHz 216 025 216 975 MHz Transmitter Stability 50 PPM Output Power 72MHz 8000uV at 3 meters 216MHz 100mW Max allowed by FCC Signal to Noise ratio 72MHz Wide band channels 60dB Narrow 54dB 216MHz Wide band channels 50dB Narrow 44dB Antenna 72MHz Telescoping Rubb
110. knob sets how much of the source signal is sent to the rest of the mixer Too high and the signal will distort as it overloads the channel Too low and the level of any background hiss will be more noticeable and you may not be able to get enough signal level to the output of the mixer Setting the knob to the U mark gives unity gain for the LINE input Note that some sound equipment particularly that intended for domestic use operates at a lower level IOdBV than professional equipment and will therefore need a higher gain setting to give the same output level See Setting Up amp Troubleshooting on page 20 to learn how to set SENS correctly ED 1000 HI PASS FILTER Pressing this switch activates a steep 18dB per octave filter which reduces the level of bass frequencies only Use this in live situations to clean up the mix reducing stage rumble or popping from microphones Page 6 VORBEREITUNGEN BEDIENELEMENTE DES LX7 Mono Eingangs Kanal nicemcanc Pre Der XLR Mic Eingang bietet die M glichkeit symmetrische und unsymmetrische Ger te anzuschlieBen Professionelle dynamische oder Grenzfl chen Mikrofone sind am geeignetsten da diese eine niedrige Impedanz haben Es k nnen auch preis g nstige Mikrofone mit hoher Impedanz verwendet werden Hier ist jedoch das Hintergrund Rauschen h her Wird der 48V Schalter neben der Kopfh rer Buchse gedr ckt wird die sogenannte Phantom Spannung f r Kondensat
111. lassen auf einen elektronischen Fehler imst renden Ger t schie en teppich riecrig zu halten enpfiehitt e sich de Quelle nit vollemPegel alber ohne bersteuerungen zu betreiben Achten Sie auch darauf den Signalpegel zwischen Quelle und Verst rker weiter anzulheben Problem Pfeifen und Ruckkopplungen R ckkoppl ungen die von Mikro fonen verursacht werden sollten mit Hilfe eines Mischpultes unterdr ckt werden VVenn die St rger usche trotz ausgeschalteter Mikrofonver st rkung erhalten bleiben liegt wahrscheinlich ein Fehler innerhalb eines Signalprozessors oder der Verkabd ung vor Eine schrittvveise berpr fung aller beteiligten Ger te vonder Signalqualle is hin amer st rker nit berpr fung je welligen Verst rkung ist notwendg BUSQUEDADEAVERIAS Probleme zumbidos La fuerte de alirrentaci n PowerVVave elimina los zumbidos intemos pero los transfonradores de corriente altema de otros aparatos pueden causados Mueva los cables y la fuente de la se al para encontrar los puntos d biles del sisterra Los cables con aislamiento defectuoso por lo general son un punto de entrada de zumbidos y ruidos Probleme ruido hiss Desconecte la entrada del amplificador para revisar si el ruido proviene desde la fuente de la se al o de otro aparato interrredio H ruido permanente explosivo revela una falla el ctrica enla unidad Para mantener el ruido de piso nomal abajo mante
112. loudspeakers bi amped with MBA Output 1 80211 Mono High 8021 Mono High Output 1 8021 Mono Full Range 8021 Mono High 80211 Mono High 8021 Mono High 8021 Mono High 8021 Mono High 8021 Mono Full Range 8021 Mono High 8021 Mono High 8021 Mono High Output 2 80211 Mono High 80211 Mono High Output 2 8021 Mono Full Range 8021 Mono High 83021 Mono High 8021 Mono High 80211 Mono High 8021 Mono High 8021 Mono Full Range 80211 Mono High 8021 Mono High 8021 Mono High Output 3 AWCS Mono Low 80211 Mono High Output 3 802111 Mono Full Range 502B Mono Low 502BEX Mono Low MB4 Mono Low AWCS Mono Low 8021 Mono High 8021 Mono Full Range 502B Mono Low 502BEX Mono Low MB4 Mono Low Output 4 AWCS Mono Low 8021 Mono High Output 4 802111 Mono Full Range 502B Mono Low 502BEX Mono Low MB4 Mono Low AWCS Mono Low 8021 Mono High 802111 Mono Full Range 502B Mono Low 502BEX Mono Low MB4 Mono Low 41 42 Bose Speaker EQ Preset List Mono Bank PANARAY 802 Series Ill loudspeaker Mono Presets 802IIISTK AWCS 802IIISTK HP PANARAY MA12 loudspeaker Mono Presets MA12 WALL MA12 FREE MA12 502B MA12 MB4 MA12 HF MA12STK WALL MA12STK FREE MA12STK 502B MA12STK MB4 MA12STK HF 802 Series loudspeaker Preset Descriptions Sta
113. medium weight full cushion single sided headset for the ultimate in day long comfort The PH 1 features a high quality monaural dynamic earphone with dynamic noise cancelling microphone on adjustable ball joint boom that can be positioned on either side of the head The unit has a straight cord and is available in various connector configurations Specifications Receiver Type Impedance Microphone Type Parts List DESCRIPTION I 7 9 T 5 5 5 5 7 150 ohms 150 ohms PART 61162 046 63709 001 61166 005 63801 001 70398 034 70398 001 63465 006 35320 004 35398 004 35398 005 64442 000 63988 063 54462 001 51856 008 63451 003 63453 000 57907 000 63763 000 51845 038 63444 001 35772 000 70398 035 70608 000 64440 001 51856 002 63460 005 63124 018 61585 037 63459 005 63455 000 Wiring Diagram POLARITY DOT BLU BLK u RED MICROPHONE WHT RED s BLK UE RECEIVER NC Connector Wiring d amp nl N C VEL N C GRN YEL SHLD SHLD SHLD RED BLU BLU BLK WHT WHT WHT BLK RED BLU RED BLK 64438 100 64438 102 64438 103 PH 1 PH 1R PH 1R5 TELE 38109 637 Rev D 8 00 User Instructions Model PS 2001L Power Supply Model SPS 2001 Power Supply Audiocom Intercom Systems 9350 7699 000 Rev 4 2001 FCC Statement This equipment uses and can radia
114. mico PAN PFL PEAK Cuando se pulsa el bot n PFL la se al pre fader post EQ se env a a los auricu lares salidas de control y medidores donde reemplaza a la fuente seleccionada de monitorizaci n MIX o 2TK El LED PFL AFL en la secci n master se ilumi na para avisar que un PFL est activo Este es un modo til de escuchar cualquier entrada sin interrumpir la mezcla principal para hacer ajustes o hallar problemas Al soltar el bot n PFL el LED sirve como indicador de picos que se ilumina aproximadamente 4dB antes de la saturaci n para ofrecer un aviso de una posi ble sobrecarga La sefial se mide tras el ecualizador de HF y tras la ecualizaci n 1331 PFL STEREO INPUT CHANNEL pur These high impedance inputs accept 3 pole A gauge TRS jacks Use these inputs for sources such as keyboards drum machines synths tape machines or returns from processing units The inputs are BALANCED for low noise and top quality from professional equipment but you can use UNBALANCED sources by wiring up the jacks as shown in the Connecting Leads section on page 28 in this manual although you should then keep cable lengths as short as possible to prevent hum being induced into the sound system Mono sources may be used by plugging into the left jack only GAIN The GAIN control sets the input level to the channel allowing matching to a wide range of line level sources ED
115. migliorare suoni poco chiari Quando non ne richiesto l uso lasciare la manopola in posizione centrale Page 9 O PUNTO DE INSERCION El punto de inserci n no balanceado pre EQ es un corte en el paso de la se al del canal permitiendo a adir en ste limitadores compresores ecualizaci n especial u otros procesadores de se al La inserci n es un conector jack de 1 4 de tipo A que normalmente est en BYPASS Cuando se inserta un jack se corta la se al justo antes del ecualizador El env o puede enviarse a grabaci n como alternativa a la salida directa pre fader pre EQ si se necesita usando un conec tor en el que se conectan la PUNTA y el ANILLO para no interrumpir el paso de la se al ver a la izquierda O SALIDA DIRECTA Los canales 1 16 disponen de una salida directa dedicada que permite la co nexi n directa a dispositivos externos por ejemplo para env os a grabadores de cinta o a unidades de efectos El nivel de la salida directa pre fader puede monitorizarse pulsando el bot n PFL en el canal apropiado para dirigir la se al pre fader a los monitores y a los medi dores bargraph DIR PRE Las salidas directas en los canales 1 16 son normalmente POST_FADER para usarlos como env os a efectos o para ofrecer control de fader de los niveles de grabaci n en aplicaciones de estudio de grabaci n Para grabaci n de directo las salidas pueden conmutarse individualmente a PRE_FADER pulsando este bot n de for
116. must be accompanied by documentation stating your return address telephone number and proof of date of purchase along with a description of the problem In lieu of this you may obtain a Return Authorization form from our Customer Service Department Customer Service Department Telex Communications Inc 12000 Portland Avenue South Burnsville Minnesota 55337 U S A Telephone 800 392 3497 Fax 800 323 0498 Return equipment to Service Department Telex Communications Inc West 1st Street Blue Earth Minnesota 56013 U S A WARRANTY Repairs If in warranty no charge will be made for the repairs Equipment being returned for warranty repair must be sent prepaid and will be returned prepaid Non Warranty Repairs Equipment that is not under warranty must be sent prepaid to Telex If requested an estimate of repair costs will be issued prior to service Once your approval for repair and repair of equipment is completed the equipment will be returned on a collect basis Collect charges may be avoided by sending a signed check for payment in full along with your signed estimate approval form the estimate includes the shipping charge 22 TELEX TELEX COMMUNICATIONS INC 12000 Portland Avenue South Burnsville MN 55337 USA Parts List and Wiring Diagrams Model PH 1 Headset 64438 Series 21 17 20 See Model OPTIONAL Differences WINDSCREEN Order 59737 001 The PH 1 headset is a
117. nur imParallel bzw Monobr cken betrieb beachten Sie bitte die Beschreibungen auf Seite 9 CONEXIONES Entradas Cada canal tiene entradas activas balanceacbs con conectores XLR y 6 3r 1 cedleacbs en paralelo Laim pedanda de ertraca es 12 enla balanaeada 6 enla no balanceada Las se ales balanceadas son menos propensas a indudr zumbidos debido la comente altema pero para cables cortos se pueden usar se ales no balanceades La impedanda de Salida debe ser menor de 600 ohrrs para prevenir la p rdida de frecuencias agudes en cables largos Entradas balanceadas Use conectores XLR o TRS de ti 6 3 mm Entradas no balanceadas Conedte lacolibre de la salida balan ceach a tierra corro se rruestra a la izquierda Con un conector ti po ti p sleeve de V4 se llevar Cabo la teminad n apropiada del conductor sin usar de la entrada sin ninguna modificaci n Para operaci n en dos canales est reo use las entadas de los canales 1 y 2 Para operaci n en paralelo o puenteach en muno use la entrada del canal L Lea la secd n de los modos de operad n para una explicaci n 5 detallada Para ermar la se al de audio a otros amplificadores s lo en los modos paralelo o puerteado en nono lea las instrucdones para entradas paralelas en la p gina 9 ground 77 inverting input non inverting input ground 77 Balanc
118. or 952 884 0043 DO NOT RETURN ANY EQUIPMENT DIRECTLY TO THE FACTORY WITHOUT FIRST OBTAINING A RETURN AUTHORIZATION Be prepared to provide the company name address phone number a person to contact regarding the return purchase order number the type and quantity of equipment a description of the problem and the serial number s Shipping to Manufacturer for Repair or Adjustment All shipments of products should be made via United Parcel Service or the best available shipper prepaid The equipment should be shipped in the original packing carton if that is not available use any suitable container that is rigid and of adequate size If a substitute container is used the equipment should be wrapped in paper and surrounded with at least four inches of excelsior or similar shock absorbing material All returns must include the return authorization number Units sent for repair or adjustment DO NOT need a return authorization number Factory Service department Telex Communications Inc West 1 Street Blue Earth MN 56013 U S A Upon completion of any repair the equipment will be returned via United Parcel Service or specified shipper collect 18
119. physical panel The amount of transmitted RF power that you will damage See Technical Service Contacts Page 4 if need depends on your application If you are operating damage has occurred other transmitters in the same environment and receivers can be used close to the antenna it is best to have the For Rack Mounting rack mounting the unit install transmitters output power at its lowest level to reduce the rack mount shelf according the instructions that come the possibility of interference with the shelf then install the unit and shelf in the rack Plug in Wall Transformer Plug the connector on the wall transformer into the power connector on the back panel Do not plug into power source yet Power Up Only use a Listen supplied transformer 1 Plug transformer into outlet 2 Pressto 3 Select channel 4 desired lock in turn power using UP and selected channel by ON DOWN buttons pressing both UP and DOWN buttons simultaneously Connect Antenna Connect the supplied antenna according the instructions that come with the Lock Into or Unlock A Channel TO LOCK Press the LT 800 s channel UP and DOWN buttons simultaneously for three or more seconds until you see a Connect external Connect telescoping or decimal dot light up next to the channel number antenna here or rubber ducky antenna To UNLOCK Press the channel UP and DOWN buttons through cover here simultaneously for three or more
120. polypropylene end caps PANARAY MB4 LOUDSPEAKER SIZING Incremental bass output can be achieved by combining multiple M B4 units in close proximity Hof Panaray MB4s Output dB 1 110 2 116 3 119 4 122 A single 4 speaker is well matched in output and bandwidth to one or two Panaray 402 11 502A or 12 loudspeakers providing a full range solution for distributed or portable systems Two or three M B4 speakers are a good match for higher output loudspeakers like the Panaray 802 Ill speaker for engineered or portable systems For larger spaces that require even higher SPL four or more M B4 speakers can be combined with each Panaray LT series loud speaker GENERAL DESCRIPTION The Panaray M B4 modular bass loudspeaker is a 200W low frequency loudspeaker that can be used for indoor permanent installations and for portable applications M ultiple M B4 speakers can be combined to effectively create a larger single bass enclosure resulting in higher SPL The M B4 speaker s output bandwidth and size make it useful as a single bass unit or as a modular building block to match other Bose products in most professional systems The M speaker can also be used in con junction with the M B4 endfire or broadside bass array brackets and the Panaray system digital controller to create directional bass The Panaray M B4 modular bass loudspeaker offers the following features Wide frequency range fro
121. preset mode The stored preset will be displayed Note that the bank designation will be based on the preset that you edited For example If the preset came from the Mono bank it will be designated as Mono Custom If a preset originates from the Stereo bank then it will be designated as Stereo Custom And if a preset originates from the Bass Array bank it will be designated as Bass Array Custom Mono In this mode the user only has access to the custom presets Select presets in the same manner as in the standard operating mode The Encoder wheel selects presets and the Arrow UP Arrow DOWN buttons select the desired bank To Turn Off Custom Presets To turn off custom presets and return to standard operation press the UTILITY button and use the Arrow UP Arrow DOWN button to find the Custom Presets parameter and set it to Off You will immediately be transferred to standard operating mode To Activate Custom Presets To return to custom preset mode go back to the UTILITY row and turn the Custom Presets para meter to On You will immediately be transferred to custom preset mode create additional cus tom presets repeat the procedure above Note You cannot store a Dual Mono preset but can create one by storing two custom mono pre sets which you have access to in custom preset mode Follow standard operation instructions for loading Dual Mono presets 33 12 0 Bass Array Presets The following presets
122. products including amplifiers that produce heat TASCAM CD RW700 3 SAFETY INFORMATION This product has been designed and manufactured according to FDA regulations title 21 CFR chapter 1 subchapter J based on the Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968 and is classified as a class 1 laser product There is no hazardous invisi ble laser radiation during operation because invisible laser radiation emitted inside of this product is completely confined in the protective housings The label required in this regulation is shown 1 CAUTION DO NOT REMOVE THE PROTECTIVE HOUSING USING A SCREWDRIVER USE OF CONTROLS OR ADJUSTMENTS OR PERFORMANCE OF PROCEDURES OTHER THAN THOSE SPECIFIED HEREIN MAY RESULT IN HAZARDOUS RADIATION EXPOSURE IF THIS PRODUCT DEVELOPS TROUBLE CONTACT YOUR NEAREST QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL AND DO NOT USE THE PRODUCT IN ITS DAMAGED STATE Voltage Conversion General export models only Be sure to remove the power cord from the AC outlet before repositioning the voltage converter switch 1 Locate the voltage selector on the rear panel 2 Using a flat bladed screwdriver set to the appropriate 230V or 120V position according to your area VOLTAGE SELECTOR 120V CERTIFICATION CERTIFICATION Optical pickup Type KRS 202A or KRS 220B RE Manufacturer SONY Corporation POT Laser output Less than 0 1 mW Play and 32 mW Record on the
123. que es la fuente de los monitores y los medidores EI LED normalmente est apagado Setting Up amp Troubleshooting Initial Set Up Once you have connected up your system see the sections on connection and wiring earlier in this manual for guidance you are ready to set initial positions for the controls on your mixer The front panel drawing on page 29 shows typical initial control positions which may serve as a useful guide to setting up the mixer for the first time Set up individual input channel as follows Connect your sources microphone keyboard etc to the required inputs and release the MUTE switches Note Phantom powered mics should be connected before the 48V is switched on Set Master faders at 0 input faders at 0 route the chan nels to MIX and set power amplifier level to suit the application O Provide a typical performance level signal and press the PFL button on the first channel monitoring the level on the bargraph meters Richtiger Einsatz und Fehlersuche Anfangseinstellungen Wenn alles Equipment Ihres Systems angeschlossen ist siehe hierzu im Abschnitt Vorbereitungen ist das System ein satzbereit um erste Einstellungen an den Reglern vorzunehmen Die Abbildung auf Seite 29 zeigt die typischen ersten Einstellungen der Regler an Diese Abbildung ist eine n tzliche Anweisung f r die erstmalige Mixer Einstellung Folgenderma en werden die einzelnen Eingangskan le eingerichtet
124. r ponse en fr quence du syst me Cu Page 20 Master Faders This procedure will ensure that the mixer is set up correctly with adequate headroom If more amplifica tion is needed adjust the power amplifier level controls Iroubleshooting No Power 5 the mains supply present Check that mains voltage selection is correct for your country Is the mains lead firmly connected Check the mains fusing If only one of the power indicators is illuminated consult your Spirit dealer Condenser Mic Not Working O 5 the 48V turned on O Isthe mic plugged into the Mic input 5 the mic cable a balanced 3 wire type Meters not showing any signal Hasthe input gain been set correctly see above 5 source connected to the appropriate input socket for the level of signal Set Up Guida all individuazione dei problemi Set Up Iniziale Una volta che il sistema collegato vd capitolo relativo siete pronti ad impostare la posizione iniziale dei controlli Il disegno del pannello frontale a pagina 18 mostra un posizione tipica dei controlli che essere usata come guida per la prima volta che si effettua tale operazione Impostate i singoli canali d ingresso come segue Collegate le sorgenti microfono tastiere etc agli ingressi desiderati e rilasciate i tasti MUTE Nota microfoni con alimentazione phantom vanno collegati prima che 48V sia inserito Impostate i Master F
125. s pour cr er des m langes s par s de retours musiciens de d parts EFFETS ou pour l enregistrement Chaque m lange est disponible la sortie Aux l arri re de la console Pour des effets il est utile que le sig nal soit d pendant du fader POST FADE mais pour les retours il est impor tant que le d part soit ind pendant du fader PRE FADE Tous les d parts Aux sont coup s lorsque la voie est coup e touche MUTE enfonc e Les 6 d parts Aux sont normalement APRES CORRECTEUR tant que la touche EQ est enfonc e voir ci dessus et sont normalement POST FADE lorsqu ils sont utilis s comme d parts effets ou m langes suppl mentaires Les d parts Aux amp 2 et 3 amp 4 peuvent tre commut s PRE FADE si n ces saire retour musiciens en enfoncant la touche PRE corrspondante Les Aux 5 amp 6 restent toujours POST FADE OD anoramique Ce potentiom tre dose la proportion de signal entre les c t s droit et gauche vous permettant de d placer le signal au sein de l image st r o Quand le potentiom tre est tourn enti rement droite ou gauche vous pouvez diriger le signal vers les sorties droite ou gauche individuellement mute Toutes les sorties de voie sauf les inserts sont actives quand la touche MUTE est rel ch e et coup es quand la touche est enfonc e permettant de pr r gler le niveau avant que le signal soit activ QD nom Le potentiometre rectiligne d une course
126. sera plus audible et vous ne pourrez pas obtenir assez de niveau en sortie de console Le gain unitaire de l entr e LIGNE est la position U Notez que certains mat riels audio en particulier ceux destin s une utilisation domestique fonctionnent un niveau plus bas 10dBV que le mat riel professionnel et auront donc besoin d un gain plus lev pour donner le m me niveau de sortie Voir R glages et probl mes de fonctionnement la page 9 pour apprendre com ment r gler le potentiom tre SENS correctement FILTRE PASSE HAUT A 100Hz Cette touche ins re un filtre 18dB par octave qui r duit le niveau des basses fr quences ind sirables A utiliser en sonorisation pour r duire les bruits de sc nes ou le pop des microphones UTILIZZO DEL MIXER Ingresso Microfonico Mono OD incresso mic Accetta connettori di tipo XLR ed progettato per una vasta gamma di segnali a basso livello BILANCIATI e SBILANCIATI microfoni profession ali dinamici a condensatore o a nastro sono i migliori perch saranno a BASSA IMPEDENZA Mentre usando un microfono economico ad ALTA IMPEDENZA non si ottiene lo stesso grado di immunita alle interferenze sul cavo microfonico e quindi il livello del rumore di fondo potrebbe essere alto Se viene inserita l ALIMENTAZIONE PHANTOM la presa fornisce la tensione adatta ai microfoni professionali a condensatore Collegare i microfoni a condensatore solo con l alimen tazione Phanto
127. sicher da die Parallel Inout und Bridge Mono Schalter auf OFF stehen e Stellen Sie sicher da andere Ger te der Signalkette zB Mixer Nicht imMonobetrieb laufen BUSQUEDADEAVERIAS Probleme sonido distorsionado gt INDICACI N EL INDICADOR LED DE CLIP PARPADEA Si el indicador rojo de CLIP par padea artes que los otros tres ind cadores de se al la impedanda de carga es muy baja o corta Desconecte cada bodna una por una desde el anplificador Si el indicador se apaga cuando usted desconecta un cable ste esa otros para localizarla falla gt INDICACI N EL INDICADOR CUP NO PARPADEA Esto puede ser causado por una defectuosa o por desconexi n Revise el cableado y pruebe con otra bocina Lafuente de la se al puede que se est saturando Mantenga los con troles de gananda del amplificador a n s de medio trayecto para que de esa manera no tenga que exigir demasiado al fuente de la se al Probleme no hay separaci n entre los Canales Reviselos indicadores arrarillos PARALLEL o BRIDGE MONO en panel frontal del anpiificador que indican la posici n de los interrup tores en la parte de atr s del ficador Ninguno debe iluminar si usan los modos de dos canales Hiarrplificado o est reo Revise que los interruptores Parallel Input y e Verifique el resto del equipo en el trayecto de la se al corro rrezda Cores preerrplificacores etc
128. speaker EQ Preset is loaded To save settings see section 11 0 PANARAY System Digital Controller Display Stereo 402T1 MB4 CH2 CH2 a gt 4 E 100 240v Ac P 4 50 60Hz reset Description EX CAUTION AVIS XE o NEFAS OU 402 Il Speaker Stereo with MB4 Speaker Mono 4 speaker Controller Inputs From mixer Mono Low freq Ch 1 Mono Left from mixer Ch 2 Right from mixer Right Left Controller Default Output Routing 402 1 speaker Left Ch 1 Ch 2 Ch3 Ch4 High freq Routing 402 11 speaker 402 11 speaker MBA speaker MB4 speaker CH1 CH2 CH1 CH2 High freq High freq Low freq Low freq Limiter Off Off Off Off Delay Off Off Off Off 18 5 2 PRESET Button Mono Bank Mono Preset Bank Presets designed for Mono Operation Example 1 Mono Full Range PANARAY System Digital Controller Display Mono 402TI Preset Description 402 Il Speaker Mono Full Range Controller Inputs Ch 1 Mono Mono from mixer Ch 2 No input Controller Default Output Routing en Mole eher Ch 1 Ch 2 Ch3 Ch4 S Routing 402 ll speaker 402 Il speaker 402 speaker 402 speaker Mono Mono Mono Mono Full range Full range Full range Full range Limiter Off Off Off Off Delay Off Off Off Off Example 2 Mono Mid High Device with Mono Bass PANARAY System Digital Controller Display Mono 502A 502B Preset Description
129. station except that a local power supply is also connected This local power supply is located with the intercom station and provides power for that station only Since power loss on the intercom lines is no longer an issue the operating range is now limited only to the audio transmission range which 15 several miles Another advantage to this method is that more stations can be connected to the intercom channels When local power is supplied to an intercom station the station detects this and automati cally disconnects from the system s phantom power supply Figure 6 illustrates an intercom system with both phantom powered and locally powered U boxes As long as a system power supply PS 2001L SPS 2001 etc 1s located somewhere in the intercom system the proper terminating impedance will still be suppled for all stations However if all stations are locally powered and there 15 not system power supply special line termination must be installed 500 METERS 727 NF o 551002 552002 552002 y Box JU Box U Box LOCAL POWER 12 to 15 VDC 250 mA TINE NZ ne Audiocon O 552002 PS2001L or SPS2001 etc 552002 551002 552002 U Box U Box U Box Figure 6 A two channel Audiocom intercom system using a PS2001L power supply the PS2001L is set to isolate mode In isolate mode each intercom channel is a separate party line and total current for each channel is l
130. termi nals should match the markings If you are not going to use the remote control unit for an extended period of time remove the batter ies Old batteries can leak casing damage to the remote control unit Always dispose of old batteries in the way recom mended by your local garbage disposal authorities 2 4 Connections The following should be noted when you connect the unit to other equipment It is possible to connect the unit s DIGITAL COAXIAL 05 and DIGITAL OPTICAL to other equipment at the same time However the unit can receive signals from only one digital input at a me Audio signals output from the unit are output from the ANALOG OUT 24 jacks as well as from the DIGITAL COAXIAL OUT jack 25 and DIGITAL OPTICAL OUT connector simultaneously If the ANALOG IN jacks 23 are connected it is pos sible to select a mix mode where the ANALOG IN signals are mixed with the digital audio signals at either the COAXIAL or OPTICAL input The digital audio signal 16 attenuated cut by 12 dB when this mix takes place 2 5 Timer operations The unit can use its internal clock to start and stop playback or recording at pre determined times 2 5 1 Setting the clock 1 When the unit must be in standby mode power connected but not turned on and if pier time has not been set the display shows 5 nk Headset dimmed characters 2 Press the MENU gu or E The nen lights and shows
131. the behavior of the unit when the timer on time 15 reached See 2 5 Timer operations for details 439 PHONES jack and LEVEL control Use a standard pair of stereo headphones equipped with a 1 4 inch plug with this jack Adjust the volume from the jack with the control turn clockwise for higher volume REC LEVEL controls Use these concentric controls to adjust the level of the analog audio signals received at the ANALOG IN jacks 23 Typically turning one of these controls will cause the other to turn but they can be turned inde pendently of each other Use the lower outer control to adjust the left signal and the upper inner control to adjust the right signal Turning the controls clockwise past the 5 position will boost the signals relative to their input level and turning them counterclockwise to a position below 5 will cut the signals relative to their original input level 45 FINALIZE key Use this key to finalize recordable discs See 1 2 Finalizing and 5 1 Finalizing for details ERASE key Use this key with CD RW discs only to erase tracks or a whole disc or to refresh a bad disc or TASCAM CD RW700 11 2 Features of the CD RW700 Rear panel to unfinalize a finalized disc See 5 2 Erasing for details 4 STOP key Use this key to stop playback or recording PLAY key Use this key to start or resume playback or recording PAUSE key Use t
132. the synchronized recording A high numerical value towards 72 means that a relatively quiet sig nal will trigger the start of recording The conditions under which an input signal is used as the trigger to start recording are when recording digitally a digital start signal is detected and audio is subsequently detected level Track start signal received Start of recording time Or e the sound level rises above the threshold see below after having been below the threshold for one second or more Note that the diagram below represents a special case the source 1s stopped or paused of the more general condition as explained later level ids Start of recording time To start synchronized recording when the source is stopped or in pause mode 1 Theunit must be in record ready mode and the SYNC indicator in the display must be lit as explained above 2 Start playing the source The pause indicator disappears from the display and the unit starts recording 20 TASCAM CD RW700 The conditions under which synchronized recording stops are when recording digitally an appropriate digital sig nal is detected If the signal is detected from a CD the unit enters record ready mode after 2 seconds If the signal is detected from an MD the unit enters record ready mode immediately level HEC pause time MD stop pause time Note that the trigger level is not us
133. to open the disc tray 2 Discs should be inserted in the tray with the label uppermost 3 Press the OPEN CLOSE key 3 or to close the tray again When a disc is ondegi into a unit the display briefly shows Readi with a flash ing period following ihe word Reading as the unit determines the contents of the disc When the TOC has been read the display shows at the top left of the display one of the following CD A commercial pre recorded CD or a finalized CD R CD R NO TOC A CD R which has yet to be finalized CD RW NO TOC A CD RW which has yet to be finalized CD RW A finalized CD RW this differs from a CD as it may be unfinalized and erased blank Unusable or unreadable disc or no disc 1 Press the PLAY key 48 or 6 to start playback 2 Press the STOP key 47 or to stop playback 3 Press the PAUSE key 49 40 to pause play back temporarily The track number indicators at the bottom of the dis play light to show the available unplayed tracks If there are thirteen tracks on the disc for example indicators 1 through 13 will light If there are more than 20 tracks on a disc the track number OVER indi cator at the bottom of the display will light 3 1 1 Time display modes When playing back a CD or in pause mode there are four different time display modes In each mode the current track number is given fol lowed by the time as given below e g 3 Playback ope
134. used use caution when moving the cart apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip over 11 Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way such as power sup ply cord or plug is damaged liquid has been spilled or objects have fall en into the apparatus the apparatus has been exposed to rain or mois ture does not operate normally or has been dropped Do not attempt to service this product yourself Opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltages or other hazards Please call Bose to be referred to an authorized service center near you 12 To prevent risk of fire or electric shock avoid overloading wall outlets extension cords or integral convenience receptacles 13 Do not let objects or liquids enter the product as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short out parts that could result in a fire or electric shock 14 See product enclosure back for safety related markings 15 No naked flame sources such as lighted candles should be placed on the apparatus 16 Product must be rack mounted and installed in accordance with local building codes 17 Product is not intended for marine applications pum PI Advarsel Dansk Enheden ma ikke uds ttes for regn eller fugtighed af hensyn til risikoen for brand eller elektrisk st d FORSIGTIGHED RISIKO FOR ELEKTRISK ST D M IKKE BNES FJERN IKKE L GET ELLER BAGKL DNING
135. used to tune other manufacturer receivers or to identify a particular channel on a receiver Selecting a Channel to Transmit On Selecting a clear channel to broadcast is important for interference free broadcasting Wide Band Recommendation If you don t plan to have other transmitters or a limited number operating in the same area it is recommended that you use wide band channels These are the most common channels used Many people own receivers that will operate on these channels In addition wide band channels offer the best fidelity and the lowest noise In this case select one of the 17 wide band channels A through R on 72MHz systems 19 wide band channels beginning with 2 on 216MHz systems The best way to select a channel is by trial and error Try a channel if it has low interference and reliable performance stick to that channel Compatibility with other manufacturers If you are using other manufacturer s receivers with the LT 800 find out their frequency then refer to Listen s Frequency Compatibility Tables Pages 28 31 to find the LT 800 channel number or letter that corresponds with the receiver s frequency As much as possible Listen has duplicated the wide band channel letters to cover frequencies of other major brands However we recommend verifying corresponding channel numbers and letters on the tables on pages 28 41 If you are using other manufacturer s receivers and the sound is distorted it
136. utragraves no deseadas 4 NCHI ANAN PAR NOA ICA E Patching the input signal to additional amps m NT e e MT FEATURES amp SETUP Parallel input mode WHEAT IT 15 The Parallel Input switches let you operate the arrplifier in parallel noce delivering the sane signal to both channels without using a Y cable Each channel drives its own speaker load with independent gain filtering and dipliniting Set switch positions 4 5 and 6 to couple the inputs together Turn the switches off for stereo bi anping or other 2chamel modes The yellow PARALLEL LED indicator on the front panel wams you when the switches are set to parallel With the inputs in parallel you can use the other set of input connectors to carry tte signal to other arrps This is often called a caisy chain WHEN TO USE IT Parallel the inputs when driving two speakers with one input signal parallel rrode while keeping separate control of both channeis gain filtering andliniting Usethem in bricbed mono modeto patch the signal to additional 5 through the extra input jacks See page 12 for an explanation of arp operating nodes NOTE If you re using a balanced signal use only balanced patch cables even one unbalanced cable will unbalance the entire signal chain pos
137. with a combined power of 132 Mips The Digitool MX gives the system designer an economical alternative to design and is considerably more powerful than similarly priced components The Digitool MX s host processor and non volatile flash memory maintain user defined configurations and allow interface via the unit s front panel control and optional external control interfaces Completely upgradable through a standard serial connection to a PC the Digitool MX allows the system designer to upgrade to the latest version without removing the unit from the rack and disassembling the chassis The graphic display is capable of displaying real time audio signal activity active presets and control information for audio processes as well as monitoring critical variables such as internal cabinet temperature and power presence e Eight balanced analog line mic inputs e Phantom power e Eight balanced analog line outputs e 24 bit A D and D A converters e Up to 96 kHz sample rate e Sixteen front panel dual color LED indicators eight input eight output e Three front panel parameter controls e Large 64 x 128 pixel display with back light e Jog select control encoder for navigating the display 32 bit parallel processing performed by two ADI SHARC DSPs e RS 232 connection for easy set up and operation e RS 485 connection for remote serial functions e Four assignable control input ports analog with 10 VDC range for external potentiometers
138. zu unterbrechen Finzelne Signale k nnen jetzt abgeh rt werden Die Orginal Quelle ist wieder h rbar wenn der PFL AFL Schalter erneut gedr ckt wird QD nui Die PFL AFL LED leuchtet wenn ein PFL oder AFL Schalter auf dem LX7 gedr ckt ist und die entsprechende Quelle auf die Monitor Ausg nge und LED Anzeige geschaltet ist Normalerweise sollte die LED aus sein MONITOR PHONES Ce potentiometre r gle le niveau des sorties d coute gauche amp droite Si un casque est branch les sorties Monitor seront coup es et le poten tiom tre r gle alors le niveau du casque Lorsqu aucun casque n est branch la sortie Monitor est restitu e La source d coute est s lection n e l aide des cinq touches situ es au dessus du potentiom tre Lorsqu une touche AFL ou PFL est enfonc e le casque et l afficheur recoivent le signal mono PFL AFL sans affecter les autres sorties de la con sole cela permet de v rifier la pr sence et la qualit d un signal Lorsque les touches AFL PFL sont rel ch es l afficheur et le casque recoivent nou veau la source initiale QD urn Cette Led s illumine pour indiquer qu une pr coute PFL AFL est active La Led doit normalement tre teinte MONITOR CUFFIE Questo controllo regola il livello di uscita alle uscite MONITOR DESTRO amp SINISTRO Se le cuffie sono collegate alla presa PHONES le uscite Monitor sono escluse e quindi la manopola regola il livello delle cu
139. 0 These devices comply with part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 These devices may not cause harmful interference and 2 these devices must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesirable operation Listen s LT 800 and LT 700 Transmitters 216MHz only Listen s LT 800 and LT 700 transmitters are authorized by rule under the Low Power Radio Service 47 C F R Part 95 and must not cause harmful interference to TV reception or United States Navy SPASUR installations You do not need an FCC license to operate these transmitters These transmitters may only be used to provide auditory assistance to persons with disabilities persons who require language translation or persons in educational settings health care services to the ill law enforcement tracking services under agreement with a law enforcement agency or automated maritime telecommunications system AMTS network control communications Two way voice communications and all other types of uses not mentioned above are expressly prohibited Caution Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate Listen s equipment FCC Statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a class B digital device pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection a
140. 0 25 216 8375 3S8 2168500 x 216 8625 1T zs FE EEG Br 216 8750 216 8875 216 9000 216 9125 216 9250 216 9375 216 9500 1V 216 9750 216 9875 217 0000 u ei 30 LISTEN TECHNOLOGIES CORPORATION 1 801 233 8992 1 800 330 0891 Fax 1 801 233 8995 Internet www listentech com All specifications are subject to change without notice 216MHz Frequency Compatibility Table Continued Frequency LTC Williams C s Comtek Phonic E Telex Drake Gentner MHz 24 5250 16 5375 16 5500 16 5675 an 5750 x 5875 16 6000 6 6175 T 6250 6 6375 6 6500 m 8 za ERR EE E O 3K EE CEN Ed 3 7 ER TEN dM 2M 3M a 6 6750 a 3N ns 7000 x 16 7125 1P 16 7250 2P 16 7375 an 7500 x 16 7625 1R 16 7750 2R an 7875 3R 16 8000 BE EEE mr 2 EIS O IT ME BE SM ETE p PE META a ME ra 5 8250 5 8375 6 8500 6 8625 16 8750 T 8875 E 9000 16 9125 16 9250 u nd ni 555 15 9500 cn cn e LISTEN TECHNOLOGIES CORPORATION 1801 233 8992 1 800 330 0891 Fax 1 801 233 8995 Internet www listentech com specifications are subject to
141. 0 uses CD R and CD RW Digital media CD R discs can be recorded once only Once they have been used for recording they cannot be erased or re recorded However if space is available on the disc additional material can be recorded The pack aging of CD R discs will include the following logo COMPACT DIGITAL AUDIO Recordable By contrast a CD RW disc can be used in much the same way as a CD R disc but the last track or tracks recorded can be erased before the disc has been finalized and the space on the disc can be re used for other recordings The packaging of CD RW discs will include the a logo similar to the following COMPACT DIGITAL AUDIO ReWritable However you should note that an audio CD created using a CD RW disc may not play back satisfactorily on every audio CD player It will naturally be play able on the CD RW700 This is in no way a limita tion of the CD RW700 itself but of the difference between the different types of media and the methods used to read them CD R discs created on the CD RW700 by contrast may be played satisfactorily on the majority of audio CD players For details of disc brands that are known to work well with the CD RW700 see 1 4 5 Recommended media 1 2 Finalizing Although audio data may be written on a CD R or CD RW disc a standard CD player will not be able to read the data 1 e play back the audio until a final table of
142. 00 ms in 1 ms steps H13h Shaler M DECAY The bottom control adjusts the decay time of the gate AE The value range is from 1 to 1000 ms in 1 ms steps FLOOR The floor specifies the level to which the gate a attenuates when off This parameter must be accessed and An modified using the PROGRAM WHEEL to navigate and select m p The range of this control is o to 100 dBFS HIGH SHELF EQ 5 This is the first of four shaping EQs for the input signal chain The top encoder adjusts the Gain boost cut and has a range 200 50 Sk 10k 20k of 5 dB to 15 dB The corner frequency is adjustable down to by 3 kHz The corner frequency is positioned 3 dB below the shelf level with a 6 dB oct slope between the shelf point and o dB The graph of figure 7b shows multiple curves for varying gain settings with the frequency set for 5 kHz Figures 7a and 7b High Shelving EQ panel view a and boost cut response curves PARAMETRIC EQ 1 amp 2 The next two processes in the signal chain are fully parametric 0 00 equalizers The control functions are Gain boost cut Frequency Parametric Frog and Bandwidth The Gain control is adjustable from 20 to 15 dB in 1 2 dB steps Frequency is adjustable for the full audio range Bandwidth is specified per octave and is adjustable from 3 0 to 0 004 octaves Figure 8 illustrates the panel view and Figures 9a 9b and 9c show response curves for a range of parametric sweeps Figu
143. 00 transmitter or connected to the back of the unit but not both Locate the antenna at a location as high as possible and free of obstacles Make sure There is too much audio processing pi note PROCESS the antenna is of the correct type and is connected properly to Adjust the process knob counter clockwise been relabeled MIX the unit Try using different frequencies that don t have There is a tone The TEST TONE button has been pressed its LED light is on Push the TEST TONE button to turn off the tone cannot change the broadcast channel The unit is locked To unlock press the UP and DOWN button simultaneously for 3 seconds You can tell when it s locked because the decimal is illuminated The Audio Input 1 sounds tinny If you are using an unbalanced audio source make sure Pin 2 or the XLR and the ring on the 1 4 jack is grounded interference If you re using 216MHz you might want to try a directional antenna End users are adjusting the unit First lock the channel by pressing the UP and DOWN buttons together for 3 seconds Consider removing the INPUT PROCESS AND CONTOUR knobs You can order from Listen a rack mount kit and security cover that will limit access to unit from end users Other manufacturers receivers sound distorted It is probably because the Listen transmitter is over deviated See Page 10 for instructions on how to correct this 12 LISTEN TECHNOLOGIES CORPORATION 1 801 233 89
144. 000 board figure 4 on page 19 NOTE Figure 2 shows a BP 2002 with the switches and jumpers in their factory default positions referenced in Table 2 The SIDETONE agjustment is also accessible behind the screw that holds the belt clip callout 5 in Figure 1 The functions of the internal switches and jumpers are described in Table 3 11 NOTE On the BP 1002 jumper JP6 must always have pins 2 and 3 shorted Side Tone Adjustment R145 The side tone adjustment is accessible either internally refer to Figure 2 or by removing the belt clip mounting screw callout 5 in Figure 1 To adjust the level of your own voice heard in the headphones tap the Talk button once to turn on the headset microphone Then use a small flat blade screwdriver to increase or decrease your voice level while talking into the microphone Clear Com Setup Make the following switch and jumper changes when the belt pack is used with Clear Com equipment BP 2002 SW1 must be placed in the UNBAL position JP4 must have pins 1 and 2 shorted U position JP5 jumper must be removed and placed on JP2 JP2 must have pins 1 and 2 shorted using jumperfrom JP5 JP1 must have pins 1 and 2 shorted BP 1002 SW1 must be placed in the UNBAL position must have pins 1 and 2 shorted U position 3 JP6 JP5 must have pins 2 and 3 shorted at all times Default Jumper Settings BP 1002 Shorting across Pins 1 and 2 JP13 PERDS N Shorting across P
145. 01 KE 5 9 10 01010 CK 01 10 09 222 104 Stereo Inputs pe 415 4 e JC ro 25 ro H ro e vo rana ro 4 roo 2 iis ES 2 10 x oo 00 0 000 00 00 000000000 0000000900 0UO0000000000000000000000000000000000 EXE GETTING STARTED Overview bersicht Puesta en Marcha D marrage Per Iniziare Page 4 Connecting Up ps Anschl sse Ry gt gt Raccordement Collegamento Conexiones CD PLAYER KEYBOARD SAMPLER OR DRUM MACHINE m MONITORS GUITAR AMP aq CE VOCAL MIC gt 2 a M 2 A 5 ES i LORE 230 230 0 b ER LP 4 E Ep d SU WV A 4 ach Ceg t b SUFFLY MIN ACTIVE GRAFHIC EQ DI BOX GUITAR VIA DI BOX Page 5 STAGE MONITORS FA SPEAKERS Balanced Input JACKS Signal Gnd Screen Gnd Screen Unbalanced Input Hot ve Cold ve Gnd Screen Sleeve Balanced Input Send Return Gnd Screen Sleeve PHANTOM POWER USING LX7 Mono Input Channel
146. 02A loudspeaker bi amped with 502B 502A loudspeaker bi amped with MB4 502A loudspeaker bi amped with AWCS Note Limiting is assigned to outputs 3 and 4 for protection of the AWCS 502A loudspeaker bi amped 160Hz 802 Series Il loudspeaker Preset Descriptions 802 Series loudspeaker Full Range EQ 802 Series loudspeaker bi amped with 502B loudspeaker 802 Series loudspeaker bi amped with MB4 802 Series loudspeaker bi amped with AWCS Note Limiting is assigned to outputs 3 and 4 for protection of the AWCS 802 Series loudspeaker bi amped 0 112 2 Stacked 802 Series loudspeaker EQ Stacked 802 Series loudspeakers bi amped with 502B loudspeaker Output 1 502A Mono Full Range 502A Mono High 502A Mono High 502A Mono High 502A Mono High Output 1 8021 Mono Full Range 80211 Mono High 80211 Mono High 8021 Mono High 8021 Mono High 8021 Full Range 8021 Mono High Output 2 502A Mono Full Range 502A Mono High 502A Mono High 502A Mono High 502A Mono High Output 2 8021 Mono Full Range 8021 Mono High 8021 Mono High 8021 Mono High 8021 Mono High 80211 Full Range 8021 Mono High Output 3 502A Mono Full Range 502B Mono Low MB4 Mono Low AWCS Mono Low 502A Mono High Output 3 8021 Mono Full Range 502B Mono Low MB4 Mono Low AWCS Mono Low 8021 High 80211 Full Range
147. 18 e cM 15 19 L LINE LINE LINE Page 9 SPIRIT FOLIO o APPLICATION 1 LIVE SOUND REINFORCEMENT This drawing shows a typical configuration for sound reinforcement with the main PA fed from Mix L amp R plus an addi tional centre fill fed from the Mono output The Aux sends are used for foldback and effects and Sub L amp R are used to feed a recorder In this case all channels would be routed to SUB and SUB TO MIX pressed to routed all sources to SUB and MIX NA LA je FILL GRAFHIC EQ MAIN FA LEFT amp RIGHT STAGE FOLDBACK a SEQUENCED KEYBOARD Ele N CARA hM EFFECTS SEQUENCER TIMECODE SEQUENCER TIMECODE DIRECT OUTPUTS ee Ere eee TO M T INPUTS a gov vg e v v n Gg SERER 5 TO PRE 9 CASSETTE DAT MACHINE HEADPHONES VOCAL 8 INSTRUMENT SOURCES SEE PAGE 4 USING DELAY IN REINFORCEMENT SYSTEMS The drawing below illustrates how to calculate delay settings for fill speakers in multiple speaker installations Front of House
148. 26 LISTEN TECHNOLOGIES CORPORATION 1 801 233 8992 1 800 330 0891 Fax 1 801 233 8995 Internet www listentech com All specifications are subject to change without notice Receiver Troubleshooting LR 300 LR 400 and LR 500 Receiver Troubleshooting The receiver has no power Make sure the unit has either fully charged batteries or a Listen approved wall transformer connected Make sure the VOLUME knob has been rotated to the ON position If this does not work try a different set of batteries Make sure the batteries are installed properly There is no audio Make sure you have turned the volume control up Make sure the earphone jack is plugged all the way in to the top of unit Make sure the transmitter is broadcasting an audio source Make sure you re tuned to the same channel as the transmitter If the RF signal is too weak the receiver will squelch and thus mute the audio source move closer to the antenna or make sure the transmitters output RF power select is on FULL The audio is distorted Make sure you re receiving on the correct channel Make sure the audio on the transmitter is not turned up too loud so that it is clipping or distorting Make sure the earphone connector is pushed all the way in If you re using the LR 300 without an LCD display re scan the channels to find the clearest channel by pressing SEEK see page 22 section 2a for more information There is interference Try different frequencies until
149. 4 TRS connector into the panel microphone connector and screw the microphone in When a gooseneck microphone is inserted in the panel microphone connector the built in panel microphone 15 automatically bypassed Use either of these microphones for talk back then use the internal speaker for listening or connect a pair of headphones to the headset connector for private listening Intercom Channel Connections the method of connection depends on the type of box The 5 box box and RM versions connect to the intercom system using prefabricated cables in a phantom powered configuration The U box version is designed for permanent installation and it can be either phantom powered or locally powered Description of Phantom Powered Connection 1 1 channel cable PS2001L or SPS2001 etc Combine Isolate Switch Y Y cable set to Isolate 2 2 channel cable To all stations To all stations on channel 1 on channel 2 BP 1002 SS1002 1 1 551002 Note A JB 2 Junction Box may be used instead of the Y cable SS2002 S Figure 5 An example of a phantom powered system this system a PS 2001L power supply is set to isolate mode this mode each channel is a separate party line and current per channel is limited to 1 amp Note that both single and two channel intercom stations may be connected by using Y cables or JB2 Junction boxes Prefabricated cables
150. 4 Mono MB4 Mono MB4 Mono MB4 Mono 120 degree conical dispersion Y 160Hz The crossover is set at 280Hz and is recommended for use with MA12 MB4 and LT Series speakers MB4 AxEF180Hz The MB4 4x endfire bass array preset provides MB4 Mono MB4 Mono MB4 Mono MB4 Mono 120 degree conical dispersion Y 160Hz The crossover is set at 180Hz and is recommended for use with MA12 MB4 and 02 Series speakers 54 14 0 Technical Information Sample Rate 44 1kHz Analog Inputs Connectors 2 XLR balanced Impedance balanced 21 Input level Maximum 18dBu Minimum OdBu Sensitivity 9dB headroom 12dBu to 9dBu A to D conversion 24 bit 128x oversampling bitstream Dynamic range 95dB typ 20Hz 20kHz THD Typ lt 92dB 0 0025 1kHz Frequency response 20Hz to 20kHz 0 0 1dB Crosstalk lt 100dB 20Hz to 20kHz Analog Outputs Connectors 4 XLR balanced Impedance balanced 400 Maximum output level 18dBu balanced Output ranges Balanced 20 14 8 2dBu D to A conversion 24 bit 128x oversampling bitstream D to A Delay 0 63ms 44 1kHz Dynamic range 100dB typ 20Hz 20kHz THD Typ 94dB 0 002 1kHz 20dBu output Frequency response 20Hz to 20kHz 0 0 5dB Crosstalk 95dB 20Hz to 20kHz Environment Operating temperature 32 F to 122 F 0 10 50 C Storage temperature 22 F to 167 30 C to 70 C Humidity Maximum 9096 non condensing Control interface Fin
151. 45 kg with batteries Door Channel and ON OFF buttons are accessible through the door lockable Power Two AA batteries alkaline or NiMH rechargeable external power connector 8 9 VDC center positive lt 300 Battery Life 16 hours with high capacity alkaline 8 hours with rechargeable NiMH Specifications subject to change without notice Battery Charging Fully automatic 14 hours Phantom Power Included for microphone Microphone Input bbdBm 50 ohms unbalanced tip of 3 5MM connector Line Input 10dBm 10k ohms unbalanced ring of 3 5MM connector Audio Processing 4008 automatic 3 speed dynamic control with noise gate Controls On Off Program Lockout Channel UP Channel DOWN Battery Type Mute Control Located on top of unit LED flashes when mute is activated Programmahility Allows only programmed channels to be tuned and to be displayed LCD Channel Battery Charge Status Program Locked Channel Lock Out LED Red Constant ON and or charged fast flash muted slow flash battery low or charging 20 LISTEN TECHNOLOGIES CORPORATION 1 801 233 8992 1 800 330 0891 Fax 1 801 233 8995 Internet www listentech com All specifications are subject to change without notice Listen Receivers Preparing for Use Listen Receivers LR 500 Programmable Display Receiver LR 400 Display Receiver and LR 300 Digital Receiver Differences in the LR 300 400 and 500 The LR 300 does not have a LCD Display
152. 5 half duplex 57 6 kbaud 1 port with 2 multi drop RJ 45 connections RS 232 56 7 kbaud Standard dB 9 serial cable connector female CV Inputs 0 to 10 V Operates with either an external voltage applied or using a remote passive potentiometer connection GENERAL DIMENSIONS 19 48 26 cm W x 12 25 31 12 cm D x without connectors 3 5 8 89 cm H NET WEIGHT 11 6 Ibs 5 26 kg AC POWER INPUT VOLTAGE 100 VAC to 240 VAC 47 Hz to 63 Hz Universal Power Supply 20 7 Watts 0100 V 330 mA POWER CONSUMPTION 20 5 Watts 120 V 321 mA 22 7 Watts 240 V 206 mA 70 7 BTU 17 7 kcal 20100 V POWER DISSIPATION 70 0 BTU 17 6 kcal 0120 V 77 5 BTU 19 5 kcal 0240 V AGENCY COMPLIANCE UL CUL CE FCC part 15 Pending LISTINGS Class B Notes 1 All specifications are typical for any channel s 2 All measurements are made in the digital domain 3 All specifications are for an AC line input of 120 Volts RMS 4 All input measurements are made using a 40 balanced source impedance at 24 dBu full scale unless otherwise noted 5 All measurements are made with gain attenuation set for unity unless otherwise noted 19 Performance Graphs 0 1 0 07 0 06 0 05 dB 3 2 1 3 DigiTool MX Frequency Response 100k Ohm Load 50 100 200 500 1k 2k 5k 10k 20k Hz Ref 4 dBu DigiTool MX Input THD N 2k 5k 10k DigiTool MX Input Cross Talk deg DigiTool MX Frequency Response 600 ohm load 3 2 1 d
153. 8V powering OFF and ONLY turn the 48V powering on or off with all output faders DOWN to prevent damage to the mixer or external devices TAKE CARE when using unbalanced sources which may be damaged by the phan tom power voltage on pins 2 amp 3 of the XLR connector Unplug any mics if you want to use the LINE Input The input level is set using the SENS knob 3 LINE INPUT Accepts 3 pole A gauge TRS jacks Use this input for sources other than mics such as keyboards drum machines synths tape machines or guitars The input is BAL ANCED for low noise and top quality from professional equipment but you can use UNBALANCED sources by wiring up the jacks as shown below although you should then keep cable lengths as short as possible Unplug anything in the MIC input if you want to use this socket Set the input level using the SENS knob 4 INSERT POINT ALTERNATIVE DIRECT SEND The unbalanced pre EQ insert point is a break in the channel signal path allowing limiters compressors special EQ or other signal processing units to be added in the sig nal path The Insert is a 3 pole A gauge jack socket which is normally bypassed When a jack is inserted the signal path is broken just before the EQ section The Send may be tapped off as an alternative pre fade pre EQ direct output if required using a lead with tip and ring shorted together so that the signal path is not interrupted see below Signal Send Mo
154. 92 1 800 330 0891 Fax 1 801 233 8995 Internet www listentech com All specifications are subject to change without notice LT 700 Portable Transmitter Preparation Preparing the LT 700 for Use Remove the product from the shipping Select Battery Type CAUTION you are using container and plastic cover Inspect for physical any battery type other than rechargeable Nickel Metal Hydride damage See Technical Service Contacts Page 4 if NiMH batteries make sure the BATTERY SELECT switch is in damage has occurred the alkaline position located in the battery compartment and labeled BATTERY SELECT remove batteries to access this Check to see if the door is locked locked switch The product is shipped from the factory in the use a pocketknife or small screwdriver to unlock the door alkaline position locks on the both sides of the unit To unlock the door rotate To use NiMH batteries before placing in unit change the lock 1 4 turn counter clockwise 0 0 the battery switch to See page 17 for more details BATTERY SELECT Switch With batteries removed use a pen or small screwdriver to select the battery type On both the right and left side unlock by turning slot horizontal as shown EH 27 o x WARNING Do not place the BATTERY SELECT switch in the NiMH position when using Non Nickel Metal Hydride hatteries The NiMH position will attempt t
155. 95 Internet www listentech com All specifications are subject to change without notice Listen Limited Lifetime Warranty Limited Lifetime Warranty Including Performance Guarantee Listen Technologies Corporation Listen warrants its products to be free from defects in workmanship and material under normal use and conditions for the useful lifetime of the product from date of purchase Accessories are warranted for ninety days from date of purchase This warranty is only available to the original end purchaser of the product and cannot be transferred Warranty is only valid if warranty card has been returned within 90 days of purchase This warranty is void if damage occurred because of misuse or if the product has been repaired or modified by anyone other than a factory authorized service technician Warranty does not cover normal wear and tear on the product or any other physical damage unless the damage was the result of a manufacturing defect Listen is not liable for consequential damages due to any failure of equipment to perform as intended Listen shall bear no responsibility or obligation with respect to the manner of use of any equipment sold by it Listen specifically disclaims and negates any warranty of merchantability or fitness of use of such equipment including without limitation any warranty that the use of such equipment for any purpose will comply with applicable laws and regulations The terms of the warranty are governe
156. A 2 CH3 MBA 3 CH4 MB4 4 MB4 4x Endfire Horizontal Octave Band Polar Data This array fires from the end of the fourth MB4 speaker to provide the dispersion shown above 35 12 1 Bass Array Setup and Connections MB4 2x Endfire Bass Array 58 4 cm Bose Components 1 PANARAY system digital controller 1 Bose 1800 VI power amplifier 2 2xendfire bass array brackets top and bottom 2 MBA modular bass loudspeakers Spacing In order to effectively create the MB4 2x endfire bass array each unit must be spaced 23 58 4 cm on center from each other This is shown in the illustration above IF THE UNITS ARE NOT SPACED PROPERLY THE BASS ARRAY WILL NOT WORK Note All EQ and delay settings are already set in the PANARAY system digital controller In order for the bass array to work you must connect the MB4 units to the appropriate outputs on the controller and apply the proper spacing The output assign ments are listed to the right 36 MBA 4x endfire bass array 280Hz 180Hz PANARAY system digital controller output MBA 2x Endfire Horizontal Octave Band Polar Data 63Hz 125Hz This array fires from the end of the second MB4 speaker to provide the dispersion shown above 12 1 Bass Array Setup and Connections MB4 2x Broadside Bass Array 45 114 3 cm Bose Components 1 PANAR
157. AY system digital controller 1 Bose 1800 power amplifier 2 2x broadside bass array brackets top and bottom 2 MB4 modular bass loudspeakers Spacing In order to effectively create the MB4 2x endfire bass array each unit must be spaced 45 114 3 cm on center from each other This is shown in the illustra tion above IF THE UNITS ARE NOT SPACED PROPERLY THE BASS ARRAY WILL NOT WORK Note All EQ and delay settings are already set in the PANARAY system digital controller In order for the bass array to work you must connect the MB4 units to the appropriate outputs on the controller and apply the proper spacing The output assignments are list ed to the right MBA 2x broadside bass array 280Hz and 180Hz PANARAY system digital controller output MBA 1 MBA 2 Not used Not used MBA 2x Broadside Horizontal Octave Band Polar Data 40Hz 63Hz 125Hz This array fires from the sides of both MB4 speakers to provide the dispersion shown above 37 13 0 Bose Speaker EQ Preset List The following is a list of 180 presets that are available in the PANARAY system digital controller The pre sets are separated into three separate banks Mono Stereo and Bass Array Included in this list is the name of each preset as it appears on the PANARAY controller LCD as well as a description of the preset and the default settings for each of the four outputs LCD Display Preset Description Output Default Configuration
158. Applications ty 1 channel cable PS 2001L Power Supply 2 2 channel cable Combine Isolate Switch set to Isolate Y Y cable US2000A Master Station BEN e Je ER ES e e S E o We JE ES Soo 2 e e 12 15 VDC Sum CHN 1 CHN2 INE LEVEL UNBAL IN To all stations To all stations on channel 1 on channel 2 BP 1000 A BP 1000 A BP 1000 1y BP 1000 1 o om om C C e e HEADSET LINES HEADSET LINES 2000 99 Note A JB 2 Junction Box may be used instead of the Y cables The 2 JB 2 provides a means of combining two channels while also allowing the 4 9 9 single channels to be continued BP 2000 Gs directly from the junction box Y 1000 1000 4 4 oo e e HEADSET LINES HEADSET LINES Figure 4 Typical connections using a single PS 2001L Power Supply to power two channels 17 1 channel cable SPS 2001 Power Supply 2 2 channel cable Combine Isolate Switch set to Isolate Y Y cable Speaker Inter connect cable 1 a 1y E US2000A Program Input Edo eC Master Station cable From 2 oo 9 WI LS audio sources en l To all stations To all stations on channel 1 on channel 2 BP 1000 A BP 1000 A BP 1000 BP 1000 da y Y y BP 2000 ES Note A JB 2 Junction Box may be
159. Bose speaker equalization To load a preset from the front panel e Press the PRESET button Next use the Arrow UP or Arrow DOWN button to select the configuration bank Stereo Mono etc hen use the Encoder to select the desired preset The PANARAY system digital controller automati cally updates the outputs to reflect the selected EQ preset and configuration The examples on the following pages illustrate how the PANARAY system digital controller is configured for each type of default output A complete list of presets with descriptions can be found in section 13 0 16 5 1 PRESET Button Stereo Bank Stereo Preset Bank Presets designed for Stereo operation Example 1 Stereo Full Range PANARAY System Digital Controller Display Stereo 802 OUTPUTS r INPUTS raus Bose Corporation Framingham MA 01701 9168 POWER OW 3000 Preset Description 100 240V AC Bose Corporation Framingham MA 01701 9168 Made in the U S A ums i A e 802 IIl Speaker Stereo Full Range Controller Inputs 8029 Ill speaker Right Full range Ch 1 Mono Left from mixer From mixer Ch2 Right from mixer Left Right Controller Default Output Routing 802 11 speaker Left Ch 1 Ch 2 Ch 3 Ch 4 Full range Routing 802 111 speaker 802 Ill speaker 802 Ill speaker 802 1 speaker CH1 CH2 CH1 CH2 Full range Full range Fu
160. Centre Screen 819 E Joouidu3 dicii io E P 19945 01504 D 000000000000 n HOr 69505 595556050002 co oo EC t O T 9 Y Or xov 9 JH zi 038315 93eg Au O nsa Ow Ow a 0 ol 0 z z 1 9 XnY y XN Qw On a 0 oO 0 1 1 9c S XY Xnv A vr i BAN z f ot 0 t xnv 0 a 6 9 9 9 TE ug n 6 6 9 Bpzz 2 Ne OG dw RU 000006000000 T EN tic 000009000000 6 9 y OL xov 6 3 0 3H NY9 zi 039315 seoueulJoJIad USIMISQ SIP BY 8 113 5 1 3sisse 500131504 o43u02 O aged 514 doo O O80 OaQ 6 o 7 1718100 XIN ALZ E 4 TAN ALZ 0 0 55 9 g 1 134 NY QOO a 0 i 9 13431 81 m 0 Oz Os OL XIN mr 334 0 MXIT e ey es a Si Ym em nl A a Ja a ee ad a mm a P Sheet Title Sheet Tide Sheet Title Sheet Title Sheet Title Sheet Title Sheet Title
161. D d o i ten LISTEN TECHNOLOGIES CORPORATION 1 801 233 8992 1 800 330 0891 Fax 1 801 233 8995 11 Internet www listentech com All specifications subject to change without notice LT 800 Stationary Transmitter Troubleshooting LT 800 Troubleshooting The LT 800 has no power Make sure the power transformer is connected to a power source and is connected to the jack marked Power Input Make sure the POWER button is pressed There is no audio or the audio level is too low Make sure that you have an audio source properly connected to INPUT 1 and or 2 The INPUT 1 or 2 switch must be located in the correct position for the appropriate input level For example if you are using the output of a mixer on INPUT 2 the switch should be in the LINE position If it were in the SPEAKER position the level would be too low Also check the INPUT knob to ensure it is properly adjusted You should be able to see the VU meter deflect on INPUTS 1 or 2 correspond ing with the input level of the audio source Try connecting a headset to the front panel jack and adjusting the MONITOR volume control so that you can listen to the audio source The audio is distorted Check to make sure you have the input level select switches in the proper position You may be providing too much audio level for the input stage to handle There is hum in the audio Make sure you have properly grounded the audi
162. Digitool s default password is 1234 After correct entry of the old password the user will be prompted to enter the new password up to four digits long and then to confirm this new password again The Digitool will enter secure mode by choosing Lock Screen from the key option menu In this mode a banner will appear in the graphics display and any movements of the front panel controls will cause a password entry screen to appear A user must type the correct password before they can gain access to the Digitool s settings via the front panel If the unit is powered down while in secure mode then it will power up in secure mode Similarly if it was powered down unsecure it will power up unsecure Pressing the PROGRAM knob while an input or output object is selected will open the edit window for the selected channel These panels are used to access and control filters gates compressors and other signal processes Refer to these sections in the following pages of this manual for a detailed description Once Edit is selected the Edit View panel will be activated The Edit View panel is actually a series of views that are presented in the same manner that the signal path follows The views are described below INPUT CHANNEL HARDWARE The first panel that is visible in Edit View is the Input Channel Hardware page figures 4a and 4b This panel allows for configuration of the input hardware There are two different views depending up
163. Division CD RW70O CD Rewritable Recorder ISE DIGITAL AUDIO Recordable ReWritable CD RW700 OWNERS MANUAL A CAUTION TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT REMOVE COVER OR BACK NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the pres The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated dangerous voltage within the product s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons ence of important operating and maintenance servicing instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance cate on tne Tear panel Please record WARNING TO PREVENT FIRE OR SHOCK and retain them for your records HAZARD DO NOT EXPOSE THIS mes APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE Important Safety Precautions Note for U K Customers DO NOT cut off the mains plug from this equipment If the plug fitted is not suitable for the power points in your home or the cable is too short to reach a power point then obtain an appropriate safety approved extension lead or consult your dealer If nonetheless the mains plug is cut off remove the fuse and dispose of the plug immediately to avoid a possible shock hazard
164. E 3 i La a P Pan aat aT EE R4 Pay La Hi ry ata Un Lo J i a VID TEE ER kg a AA Fi 1 TE E RR err 7327 E AR PEE LEE 2 rara ata Pn AAA ta AA cc P Pri ea 8 Ma Mum Fi a Le oe ee 234 ee te A ur 25 ET 1 L k a LI Fa mm Lr a fa is 1 2fs Ta HE bg a Mer EGO Tey 21 23 tu ha LT DET us T P Ter 34 By Y gt Lc Bose Panaray MB4 modular bass loudspeaker TECHNICAL INFORMATION Frequency Range 40Hz to 300Hz 3dB Sensitivity 97dB SPL 1W 1m pink noise Maximum Acoustic Output 110dB SPL 1m pink noise Dispersion Omnidirectional at all frequencies below 200Hz Long Term Power Handling 200W continuous Impedance 8Q nominal MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS Dimensions 18 1 D x 10 2 W x 26 7 H 46 cm x 25 9 cm x 67 8 cm Weight 45 Ib 20 kg Connectors Two 2 parallel wired NL4 connectors Available colors White and Black Enclosure construction High density M ultiFiber multi layer wood particle panel with high impact foamed
165. EN AF HENSYN TIL 4 FOR ELEKTRISK ST D DER ER INGEN DELE INDEN I DER KAN SERVICERES AF BRUGEREN OVERLAD SERVICERINGEN TIL KVALIFICERET PERSONALE Disse FORSIGTIGHEDSM RKER er anbragt p de PANARAY System Digital Controller Symbolet med et med pilespids i en ligesidet trekant skal g re brugeren opm rksom p tilstedev relsen af en ikke isoleret farlig sp nding i det lukkede system der kan v re tilstr kkelig kraftig til at give elektrisk st d net til at advare brugeren om vigtige instruktioner til betjening og vedlige Udr bstegnet i en ligesidet trekant som systemet er maerket med er bereg holdelse i denne betjeningsvejledning Vigtige sikkerhedsinstruktioner L s og f lg disse instruktioner Laeg merke til alle advarsler p produktet og i betjeningsvejledningen Anvend ikke dette apparat i naerheden af eller fugtighed Renger kun med en tor klud Undg at blokere ventilations bningerne Install r i overensstemmelse med produ centens instruktioner Til sikring af p lidelig funktion og beskyttelse mod overophedning skal produktet anbringes i en position og et sted der ikke hindr er korrekt ventilation 6 Install r ikke i naerheden af varmekilder s som radiatorer varmeovne komfurer eller andre apparater herunder forsteerkere der frembringer varme 7 ikke sikkerheden ved brug af et ikke jordforbundet stik Et jordforbundet stik har to ben og et tredje j
166. EQ 11 CH2 No EQ 12 Mono No EQ Delay T ine Limiter gt Output 4 x High Input EQ Del T Input CH2 3 over ad Limiter Output 3 ponore m CH2 Low ulis i Delay T Input line Limiter Output 2 meter Delay T line Limiter Output 1 3 2x4 Router The 2 x 4 router gives the user the ability to select from the options listed in the routing matrix to the right and route the selection to any of the controller s four outputs Complete detail of the router operation can be found in section 9 0 14 4 4 Signal Flow Delay and Limiter Input Meter Input on Input CH1 T a over EQ 4 Input CH2 nn over CH2 Low Input meter 4 Delay and Limiter 1 CH1 High 2 CH2 High 3 Mono High 4 CH1 Low 5 CH2 Low 6 Mono Low 7 CH1 FR 8 CH2 FR 9 Mono FR 10 CH1 No EQ 11 CH2 No EQ 12 Mono No EQ 4 Delay and Limiter After the signal passes through the routing matrix it goes to each of the four outputs and passes through the delay and limiter blocks on each channel The delay and limiter blocks can be bypassed by the user For more information on controlling the delay and limiter see sections 6 0 and 7 0 15 5 0 PRESET BUTTON o PRESET ___ INPUT METER TPM sii A0000000 802 Full Range There are 180 speaker EQ presets in the PANARAY system digital controller They are organized into banks Stereo Mono Bass Array and Dual Mono Within each bank are presets that provide
167. EQUALISER HF EQ Turn clockwise to boost high treble frequencies adding crispness to per cussion from drum machines synths and electronic instruments Turn anti clockwise to cut these frequencies reducing hiss or excessive brilliance Set the knob in the centre detented position when not required The control has a shelving response giving 1548 of boost or cut at 2kHz and above LF EQ Turn clockwise to boost low bass frequencies adding extra punch to synths guitars and drums Turn anticlockwise to reduce hum boominess or improve a mushy sound Set the knob to the centre detented position when not required The control has a shelving response giving 15dB of boost or cut at 60Hz and below O senos These are used to set up separate mixes for FOLDBACK EFFECTS or recording and the combination of each Aux Send is mixed to the respective Aux Output at the rear of the mixer The sends are always PRE FADE which is most appropriate for Foldback or Monitor feeds but note that the Line Inputs on pairs of Mono channels may be used as alternative stereo inputs if post fade sends are essential for effects LEVEL The rotary level control adjusts the overall level of the signal which is fed to the Mix or selected pair of Groups O The Stereo channel signal is fed either to a pair of Subgroups switch UP or the stereo Mix switch DOWN at a level set by the LEVEL control Stereo feeds to Subgroups amp 2 S
168. Full Range FS360 Mono Full Range Output 4 M32 Mono Full Range MB4 Mono Low FS3 Mono Low FS1B Low 502BEX Mono Low Output 4 Output 4 Output 4 FS360 Mono Full Range FS360 Mono Full Range FS360 Mono Full Range Bose Speaker EQ Preset List Bass Array Bank PANARAY MB4 Bass Array Presets MB4 Bass Array Preset Descriptions Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 MBA 2xBS180Hz The MB4 2x broadside bass array preset MB4 Mono MB4 Mono N A N A provides 360 degree horizontal coverage with a 10 to 15 dB suppression in energy going up and down from 80 200Hz The crossover is set at 180Hz and is recommended for use with 12 MB4 and 02 Series speakers MBA 2xBS280Hz The MBA 2x broadside bass array preset MB4 Mono MB4 Mono N A N A provides 360 degree horizontal coverage with a 10 to 15 dB suppression in energy going up and down from 80 200Hz The crossover is set at 280Hz and is recommended for use with the LT Series MB4 2xEF180Hz The MB4 2x endfire bass array preset provides MB4 Mono MB4 Mono 180 degree conical dispersion Y 160Hz The crossover is set at 180Hz and is recommended for use with MA12 MB4 and 02 Series speakers MB4 2xEF280Hz The MB4 2x endfire bass array preset provides MB4 Mono MB4 Mono 180 degree conical dispersion Y 160Hz The crossover is set at 280Hz and is recommended for use with MA12 MB4 and LT Series speakers MB4 AxEF280Hz The 4 4x endfire bass array preset provides MB
169. H PASS EQ FILTER INSERT FADER i L INSERT MIX MIX RIGHT gt gt RIGHT pl gt il MONITOR SELECT e o T DIRECT 1 MONO MONO PRE 7 ____ OUT u A Au III LH 1 Mi O m 2 8 MONITOR SELECT 9 ES y if E hr MONO da ar E E Ree a i CH 1 16 ONLY i and CH 25 32 on LX7 40 y O 17V 17V MIXL amp R c UT POWER Y Y 48V GROUPS 1 2 e Um MONO INPUTS S is ENE ANA AAN MUERE Een LIT gt GROUPS 3 4 E 3 4 LEVEL L METER q PFL AFL _ PHONES L m gt ie d gt ls ES C RML v A E EE PFL AFL ws S TEREC tene e PFL MN R METER SAMA ENABLE pe PFL AFL A STEREO INPUTS Worum FADER gt GROUP 19 GROUP 19 GROUP 1 GROUP 3 SIMILAR INSERT p RET 1 RET 2 MONITOR SELECT FADER GROUP 2 4 GROUP 2 GROUP 4 SIMILAR gt gt gt ps OUT c RET 1 RET 2 SIMILAR GROUP 2 4 STEREO RETURNS REFRESH HE ET MIXL oe NE MIX R ee L s AUX 1 AUX 2 o AUX 3 AUX1 MASTER TALKBACK AUX2 6 SIMILAR 2 8 8 AUX1 OUT Page 27 Connecting Leads Ideale kabel und kabel verbindungen Connexions Collegamenti Conectando los cables Balanced RING SLEEVE SLEEVE RINS 1 RING SLEEVE Un
170. Inc further dedares as its sole responsibility that the above named product is in compliance with the Council Directive 73 23 EFC of 19 February 1973 on the hamonization of the laws of the Merrber States relating to eledrical equiprrert for use within certain voltage limits and the Council Directive 93 68 EEC of 22 J uy 1993 which amenos the previous mentioned directive as well as requirements of the hamonized product standard EN 60065 related to safety requirements of the harrronized product standard 60065 related to safety requirements for mains operated electronic and related apparatus for household and similar general use Audio Products Inc d dare seul responsable que le produit nomme dessus est en confomit avec la directive europ enne 8 33 y EFC du mai 1989 concemant l harrronisation des lois des tats membres relatives la corrpatibilit lectrorragn tigue ainsi que de les sp dfications de la nomre hammonis e EN 55013 relative aux limites et m thodes de mesure des perturbations radio des r cepteurs de diffusion et qui penents assod s et EN 55020 relative l immunit Gectromagn tique des r cepteurs de t l diffusion et Q5C Audio Products Inc d dare de plus tre seu responsable que le produit ci dessus est en confomite avec la directive europ enne 73 23 EEC du 19 feviier 1973 corcemart l harrronisation des lois des tats membres relatives a
171. Ky N f 7 7 4 N 5 S 2 S 7 K a NECE Li ud E 3 mm 3 Ss E Don TON TA E EX 4 AN DES 25 Bl pes Deos GEI NE nn E
172. LTITRACK OR EFFECTS 35 PAGE 9 CONNECT SIGNAL PROCESSORS HERE ISF PAGE 9 SET INPUT LEVEL HERE 10 ADJUST SIGNAL TONE WITH THE EQUALISER HERE IS PAGE 10 MAKE FOLDBACK AND CREATE EFFECTS MIXES WITH AUXILIARY SENDS HERE POSITION THE SIGNAL WITHIN STEREO IMAGE HERE IS PAGE 11 FOLIO OVERVIEW Page SPIRIT FOLIO LISTEN ON HEADPHONES HERE IS PAGE 14 SET UP MONITORING HERE IS PAGE 14 SET THE OUTPUT LEVEL ON MASTER FADERS BALANCE THE SIGNAL LEVEL ON FADERS HERE IS PAGE 11 Page 2 SPIRIT FOLIO INTRODUCTION Thank you for purchasing a SPIRIT FOLIO SX mixer brought to you with pride by the SPIRIT team of Andy Colin Chris James Simon Mukesh Graham Martin Paul Matt and Peter with the support of many others we hope you will have as much fun using it Owning a SPIRIT console brings you the expertise and support of one of the industry s leading manufacturers and the results of over 23 years experience supporting some of the biggest names in the business Built to the highest standards using quality components and new surface mount technology FOLIO SX is designed to be as easy to use as possible but some time spent NOW looking through this manual and getting to know your new mixer will give you lots of helpful tips and confidence away from the pressures of a live s
173. LX 1202 PLX 1602 PLX2402 PLX 3002 PLX S402 OUTPUT POWER in watts ZO FE 20 K E O 003 THD 80 per channel 200 300 425 550 700 20 FE 20 K E O 005 THD AQ per channel 325 500 700 900 1100 1 1 THD 80 per channel 215 325 475 625 800 4 per channel 375 550 825 1050 1250 20 per channel 600 800 1200 1500 1700 160 20 Hz 20 kHz 0 1 THD 400 600 850 1100 1400 80 20 Hz 20 kHz 0 1 THD 700 1000 1500 2000 2200 1kHz 1 THD 1200 1600 2400 3000 3400 DYNAMIC HEADROOM 20B 040 DISTORTION SMPTE IM lt 0 01 lt 0 01 lt 0 02 lt 0 02 lt 0 02 FREQUENCY RESPONSE 20 Hz 20 kHz 30 15 dB at 10 dB below rated output povver 3 points 5 Hz and 100 kHz DAMPING FACTOR gt 500 O Q NOISE unweighted 20 Hz to 20 kHz below rated output 106 dB 107 dB 108 dB 107 0B 107 dB VOLTAGE GAIN 4 32 cB INPUT SENSITIMTY V RMS full rated power 8 2 LOv 42 2 dBu L2v 3 9 dBu L5v 45 5 dBu 1 7v 46 8 dBu 19 4 7 dBu full rated power O 9v 41 3 Liv 43 2 dBu L3v 44 6 dBu L5v 45 7 dBu 1 7v 46 6 dBu INPUT IMPEDANCE 6 unbalanced 12 KQ balanced CONTROLS Fort AC switch Ch 1 and Ch 2 gain knobs with 11 detents Rear 10 position DIP switch INDICATORS POWER Green LED CLIP Red LED 1 per channel Yellow LED 10 dE Green LED 1 per channel BRIDGED Yellow LED 20 dE Green LED 1 per channel SIGNAL Green LED 1 per channel CONNECTORS Input XLR and Y4 6 3 mm TRS tip and pin 2 positive Output Touch
174. Note See section 8 1 for more details Default Value Off Custom Presets Provides access to stored presets Selectable between ON and OFF Default Value Off View Angle Adjusts display contrast Selectable 0 7 Default Value 3 27 28 8 1 UTILITY Button User Lockout User Lockout The User Lockout feature is available to prevent others from tampering with the EQs and associat ed parameters that have been set To access the User Lockout feature press the UTILITY button then press the Arrow UP Arrow DOWN button until you see the following display Lockout Toggle the Encoder to select ON Lockout lt When set to ON the User Lockout feature locks the current preset and prevents users from access ing the following buttons and their associated para meters Pressing any of these buttons or turning the Encoder wheel will yield the following message on the display gt Lockout lt gt No Access lt To Disable User Lockout Press and hold the UTILITY button for five seconds until you see the following display gt Lockout lt gt Unlocked lt User Lockout is now disabled 9 0 Router Functionality The 2 x4 router is updated every time a new preset is loaded to reflect the stored output configuration The router can be manually edited by the user to accommodate additional output configurations To access the router press the UTILITY button and use the Ar
175. O Premendo questo tasto si attiva un filtro di 18dB per ottava che riduce solo il livello delle basse frequenze ed una caratteristica eccezionale Da usare in situazioni PA live per un mix pi pulito riducendo il rumore del palco o il popping dei microfoni Page 7 USANDO LA LX7 Canal de Entrada Mono maa mic Uie La entrada Mic acepta conectores tipo XLR y ha sido dise ada para acomodarse a un amplio abanico de se ales balanceadas y no balanceadas Los micr fonos profesionales din micos de condensador o de cinta son los m s adecuados ya que presentan una baja impedancia Si utiliza micr fonos baratos de alta impe dancia el nivel del ruido de fondo puede ser mayor Si activa la alimentaci n phantom de 48V al lado del conector jack de auriculares el conector suminis trar una tensi n de alimentaci n adecuada para los micr fonos profesionales de condensador la cual es conocida como alimentaci n Phantom SOLO conecte micr fonos de condensador cuando la alimentaci n phantom est desactivada conmutador arriba y SOLO active la alimentaci n phantom con todos los faders de salida ABAJO para evitar da os en el mezclador o en aparatos externos TENGA CUIDADO cuando use fuentes no ba lanceadas ya que pueden ser da adas por la tensi n que aparece sobre los pins 2 y 3 del conector XLR Desconecte cualquier micr fono si desea utilizar la entrada de LINE El nivel de entrada se ajusta a trav
176. OUT 1 8 DIRECT carefully upwards using a small screwdriver or the end of a POST FADE PRE FADE pencil lt is advisable to turn the unit off before making this adjustment Always check all outputs after adjusting to ensure that switching has been successful 14 PFL When the latching PFL switch is pressed the pre fade signal is fed to the headphones control room output and meters where it replaces the selected monitor source MIX SUB or 2TK The PFL AFL LED on the Master section illuminates to warn that a PFL is active This is a useful way of listening to any required input signal without interrupting the main mix for making adjustments or tracing problems Page SPIRIT FOLIO o TEREO INPUT CHANNEL Each stereo input channel comprises two pairs of inputs per channel strip 7 INPUTS 13 14 6 17 18 These inputs are unbalanced on RCA phono connectors and are intended for use with CD players DAT machines or Hi Fi equipment Alternatively they may be used as simple effects returns or stereo instrument inputs 2 LEVEL The LEVEL control sets the level of the channel signal VER 3 508 A N gt 2 The MIX SUB switch allows the signal to be routed to either the main MIX switch L3 up or SUB mix switch down ___5 4 INPUTS 15 16 19 20 These inputs accept 3 pole A gauge TRS jacks Use these inputs for sources such as keyboards drum machines synths t
177. Outputs Aux Outputs Mono Output CHANNEL DIRECT OUTPUTS Signal The Direct outputs are on 3 pole A gauge jack sockets wired as shown on the left Signal and are unbalanced Screen HEADPHONES The PHONES output is a 3 pole A gauge jack wired as a stereo output as shown suitable for headphones of 2000 or greater 80 headphones are not recommended POLARITY PHASE Mix Inserts You will probably be familiar with the concept of polarity in electrical signals and this Signal Send is of particular importance to balanced audio signals Just as a balanced signal is highly Signal Return effective at cancelling out unwanted interference so two microphones picking up the Gnd Screen same signal can cancel out or cause serious degradation of the signal if one of the cables has the ve and ve wires reversed This phase reversal can be a real problem when Tip microphones are close together and you should therefore take care always to connect Ring SS pins correctly when wiring audio cables GROUNDING AND SHIELDING For optimum performance use balanced connections where possible and ensure that all signals are referenced to a solid noise free earthing point and that all signal cables Left Signal have their screens connected to ground In some unusual circumstances to avoid earth Headphones IU loops ensure that all cable screens and other signal earths are connected to ground Uroun only at their sou
178. P 2002 only Disabled No pins jumpered Enabled Pins 1 amp 2 shorted To enable use jumper from JP5 DC Call Detect Clear Com Jumper on one operation only not used in pin only Audiocom mode BP 2002 only Disabled No pins jumpered Enabled Pins 1 amp 2 shorted JP13 For RTS use only Must be installed 13 Unbalanced Balanced Line Must be used in conjunction with Note In case of local power use install a jumper on pins 2 amp 3 of U6 CONNECTOR PIN CONFIGURATIONS Headset Connector Type XLR 4M callout 6 in Figure 1 Pin 1 Headset microphone low Pin 2 Headset microphone high Pin 3 Headphone high Pin 4 Headphone low Intercom Channel Connectors BP 1002 Type One XLR 3M and XLR SF pair callout 8 in Figure 1 Audiocom Mode Internal switch SW1 and jumpers JP4 JP5 JP2 and JP1 set to BAL position Pin 1 Common Pin2 Intercom audio low and 24 VDC input Pin3 X Intercom audio high and 24 VDC input Clear Com Mode Internal switch SW1 and jumpers JP4 JP5 JP2 and JP1 set to UNBAL position Pin 1 Common Pin2 30 VDC input Pin3 Intercom audio call signal 14 2002 Type One XLR 6M and XLR 6F pair callout 7 in Figure 1 Audiocom Mode Internal switch SW1 and jumpers JP4 JP5 JP2 and JP1 set to BAL position Pin 1 Pin 2 Pin 3 Pin 4 Pin 5 Pin 6 Common Local power 24 VDC Channel A intercom audio low and 24 VDC input Channel A intercom audio high and 24 VDC input Channel B i
179. Power Z0 ch ZOHE 20K E 20Hz ZOH E QCP6 THD 1 kHz 196 THD IZ me em Copyright 1998 1999 Audio Products Inc is a registered trademark and PowerVVave is a trademark of SC Audio Products Inc and the QSC logo are registered with the U S Patent and Tracerrari Cffice other trademarks are the property of their respective owners INTRODUCTION The PLX Series Anplifiers PowerVVave technology and a refined audio structure combine studio quality performance with touring quality portability These fan cooled 2 channel 2 RU arrps prov de unprecedented power in a strong compact chassis Features Independent user defeatable dip lirriters Fullysdectable low frequency filtering choice of 30 or 50 Hz roll off Stereo dual channel parallel input or bridged mono operating nodes e Balanced inputs both XLR and V 6 3 TRS Binding post and Neutik Speakon outputs Deterted gain controls Front panel LED indicators for power signal 20 and 10 cB dip protect parallel inputs and bridged mono mode 5 exdusive hioh perfor mance PowerVVave switching technology power supply Les anplificateurs de la s rie PDX La technologie PowerWave et ure drauiterie audio refin e sont combin es pour obtenir une qualit sonore digne d un studio derregstrerrert avec la robustesse requise pour l
180. Proof binding posts and Neutrik Speakon COOLING Continuously variable speed fan bad lt to front air flow AMPLIHER PROTECTION Full short drait open drait therrral ultrasonic and RF protection Stable into reactive or mismetched loads OUTPUT CIRCUIT TYPE DIMENSIONS WEIGHT POWER REQUIREMENTS POWER CONSUMPTION O 120 both channels driven Multiply currents by 0 5 for 230V units POWER CONSUMPTION NOTES SPECIFICATIONS SP CIFICATIONS TECHNISCHE DATEN PLX 1202 PLX 1602 PLX2402 PLX 3002 Turrrcorytum coff muting DC fault power supply shutdown dip lirriting AB AB H H AB Class AB corrplerrentary linear output H Class AB conplerrertary linear output with Class 2 step high effidency drait 19 0 48 3am wide 3 5 8 9 a1 tall 2 rack spaces 13 2 33 5 deep rack mounting to rear support ears Shipping 27 lbs 12 3k9 Net 21165 9 5 kg Available for 120 or 220 240 50 60 Hz Full Mich Ful Full Full Icle 09A 82 33A 54A 844 92 56 80A 125A 84A 15 8 822 1A 20 42 GOA 89A 140A 42 90A 135A 26 2 17A BA 22 96 143A B 22 uA 42A 20 27 5 1 8 power with pink noise represents typical programwvith occasional dipping 1 3 power with pink noise represents severe programwith heavy dipping Continuous sine wave at 1 dipping Thermal or overcurrent cutba
181. QD Tutte le uscite tranne gli inserts sono attive quando il tasto MUTE non pre muto e sono escluse in caso contrario per permettere di regolare i livelli prima che il segnale arrivi FADER FADER da 00mm progettato per un controllo uniforme del segnale per mette un preciso bilanciamento dei diversi segnali che vengono mixati sulla Sezione Master Si ottiene un controllo adeguato quando la Sensibilit del l ingresso SENSITIVITY impostata correttamente cosi da lasciare la massima escursione al fader Consultare la sezione Set Up amp Guida all in dividuazione dei problemi per la corretta impostazione dei parametri ROUTING Il segnale di un canale pu essere indirizzato al MIX stereo principale o a coppie di bus 1 2 3 4 premendo i relativi tasti con il segnale mandato in maniera proporzionale a destra 2 4 e sinistra 1 3 secondo la posizione del controllo PAN 11 Il segnale pu anche essere indirizzato al bus mono separato premendo il tasto senza che il PAN abbia effetto in questo caso QD Quando il tasto PFL premuto il segnale pre fade post EQ e mandato in cuffia all uscita della regia e ai meter dove sostituisce la sorgente monitor selezionata II LED si illumina per avvertire che un PFL attivo Questo un modo utile di ascoltare ogni segnale in ingresso senza interrompere sieme sonoro per fare le regolazioni necessarie o individuare problemi Quando
182. Quelle an die entsprechenden Eing nge anschlie en z B Mikrofon Keyboards etc Mute Funktionen alle aufheben Mit Phantom Spannung betriebene Mikrofone anschlie en bevor die 48V eingeschaltet wird O Master Fader und Kanal Eingangs Fader auf 0 stellen Kan le zum MIx routen und die Power Amps Pegel entsprechend der Anwendung einpegeln Einen typischen Auftritts Signal Pegel einstellen und den PFL Schalter des ersten Kanals dr cken Den Signalpegel auf der LED Anzeige beachten O Die Vorverst rkung der einzelnen Eingangskan le so ein stellen bis das die LED Anzeige das Signal im amberfar benden Bereich anzeigt Hierbei darf die erste rote Peak LED leuchten Dies ist ein typischer maximaler Signalpegel Dadurch stellt sich ein gen gend groBer Headroom Verst rungsreserve f r eine normale Beschallung ein Beachten Sie jedoch auch den nachfolgenden Hinweis Diese Vorgehensweise auch auf den anderen Kan len anwenden Achten Sie auf den charakteristischen Sound einer beginnenden R ckkopplung Kann keine befriedigende Einstellung erfolgen ohne da R ckkopplungen entste hen m ssen Mikrofon und Lautsprecher Aufstellung nochmals gepr ft werden Bei weiterhin anhaltenden R ckkopplungen kann der Einsatz eines Graphic Equalizers notwendig werden um den System Frequenzgang bei bestimmten Resonanz Frequenzen abzuschw chen Cu Adjust the input gain until the meter display is in the amber section w
183. Range Peak 126 Full Range Long Term 120 Nominal Coverage Angle 6 dB points degrees Conical 100 S EAW One Main Street Whitinsville MA 01588 508 234 6158 Toll Free 800 992 5013 EAW products are continually improved specifications are therefore subject to change without notice SPECI FI CATIONS SM109z PHYSICAL 0001307 2 way full range floor monitor 1x 10 in vented l in exit 1 4 in voice coil compression driver on Wave Guide Plate Passive LF HF crossover Exterior grade Baltic birch plywood Part Number Configuration LF Subsystem HF Subsystem Powering Mode Enclosure Materials Finish Wear resistant textured black paint Connectors 2x Neutrik NL4 Speakon Mounting Hardware Pole mount cup Grille Powder coated perforated steel Dimensions inches millimeters Height 14 88 378 Height w feet 15 5 394 Width 12 25 311 Depth 18 00 45 Floor Angle 37 Weights pounds kilograms Net Weight 30 13 7 Shipping Weight 33 15 0 FAX 508 234 8251 5 1092 0004644 001 2 info September 2002 WWW eaw com Printed in USA SPECI FICATI ONS SM109z NOTES 21 SYMBOL INDICATES FEET 2 SYMBOL INDICATES CENTER OF BALANCE 3 WEIGHT APPROX 27 LBS 4 SHIPPING WEIGHT APPROX 32 LBS 5 HEIGHT OF FEET APPROX 4 7 43 1 32 2 756 u _ 4 31 1 73 gt 7 VIEW A A
184. Safety Instructions Read these instructions Keep these instructions for future reference Heed all warnings on the product and in the owner s guide Follow all instructions Do not use this apparatus near water or moisture Clean only with a dry cloth Do not block any ventilation openings Install in accor dance with the manufacturer s instructions To ensure reliable operation of the product and to protect it from overheating put the product in a position and location that will not interfere with its proper ventila tion Do not install near any heat sources such as radia tors heat registers stoves or other apparatus includ ing amplifiers that produce heat Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding type plug A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong The wider blade or third prong are provided for your safe ty If the provided plug does not fit in your outlet consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs convenience recepta cles and the point where they exit from the apparatus Only use attachments accessories specified by the manufacturer Use only with the cart stand tripod brack et or table specified by the manufacturer or e sold with the apparatus When a cart is used use caution when moving the
185. Speaker Key Selects the built in speaker in the on position and the Headset connector 10 in the off position Channel Select Key SS 2002 amp SS 2002RM only Selects intercom channel 1 or 2 The key lights green for channel 1 and red for channel 2 Volume Control Adjusts intercom listen volume to headphones or speaker Intercom Listen Key Both momentary push to listen and latching hands free listen are possible Call Key Used to send call signals on the intercom channel Flashes for incoming calls Intercom Talk Key Both momentary push to talk and latching hands free talk are possible models are also equipped with a mic kill receive circuit which allows an operator at a remote master station such as the US 2000A to turn off the talk key on all stations on the intercom line 10 Dynamic Mic Headset Connector 4 pin male XLR connector accepts headsets with monaural headphones and either a balanced or unbalanced dynamic microphone Also accepts a telephone style handset Can also be used with head phones when a Panel Mic is connected Can also be used with a handheld microphone along with the internal speaker 11 Panel Mic Connector Accepts an electret gooseneck microphone such as the Telex MCP 90 12 Built in Panel Microphone Active when the Panel Mic key is pressed and a gooseneck microphone 15 not inserted in the Panel Mic connector 13 Sidetone Trimmers These adjust the level of the user s own voice in the head
186. T FINDING GUIDE Repairing a sound mixing console requires specialist skills but basic Fault Finding is within the scope of any user if a few basic rules are followed Get to know the Block Diagram of your console see page 29 Get to know what each component the system is supposed to do Learn where to look for common trouble spots The Block Diagram is a representative sketch of all the components of the console showing how they connect together and how the signal flows through the system Once you have become familiar with the various component blocks you will find the Block Diagram quite easy to follow and you will have gained a valuable understanding of the internal structure of the console Each Component has a specific function and only by getting to know what each part is supposed to do will you be able to tell if there is a genuine fault Many faults are the result of incorrect connection or control settings which may have been overlooked Basic Troubleshooting is a process of applying logical thought to the signal path through the console and tracking down the problem by elimination O Swap input connections to check that the source is really present Check both Mic and Line inputs O Eliminate sections of the channel by using the insert point to re route the signal to other inputs that are known to be working O Route channels to different outputs or to auxiliary sends to identify problems on the M
187. T PRE The input channels provide both Pre and Post Fade AUX 2 sends which may be selected desk wide on the Master Section Press the POST PRE switch to make all of the AUX 2 Sends on the channel strips PRE FADE This means that they will all be unaffected by the position of the channel faders making them ideal for FOLDBACK or MONITORING When the switch is released the AUX 2 Sends are all POST FADE and will fade up and down with the channel faders This is more suitable for effects sends which need to fade out with the associated source MONO SUM The Mix Left and Right signals are summed to a MONO output on a 3 pole A gauge jack Output level is set by the dedicated rotary control Monitoring of the Mono output if required but be done at the external equipment it feeds or the signal brought back to a spare console input 10 MASTER FADERS The MASTER FADERS set the final level of the MIX and SUB outputs and separate faders are provided for each output These should normally be set close to the 0 mark if the input GAIN settings have been correctly set to give maximum travel on the faders for smoothest control 508 TO MIX The SUB outputs may be used as independent outputs from the console or used as true subgroups routed to the main Mix outputs When the switch is released the SUB signal feeds the SUB outputs only With the switch pressed the post fade Sub Left and Right signals are routed to Mix Left and Right respectiv
188. T3202 Mono Full Range LT3202 Mono Full Range LT3202 Mono High LT3202 Mono High Output 2 Output 2 Output 2 Output 2 Output 2 LT3202 Mono Full Range LT3202 Mono Full Range LT3202 Mono High LT3202 Mono High Output 3 Output 3 Output 3 Output 3 Output 3 LT3202 Mono Full Range LT3202 Mono Full Range MB4 Mono Low 502BEX Mono Low Output 4 Output 4 Output 4 Output 4 Output 4 LT3202 Mono Full Range LT3202 Mono Full Range MBA Mono Low 502BEX Mono Low 43 44 Bose Speaker EQ Preset List Mono Bank PANARAY LT4402 loudspeaker Mono Presets LT4402 LT4402CLUSTER LT4402 MB4 LT4402 502BEX PANARAY LT9702 loudspeaker Mono Presets LT9702 LT9702CLUSTER LT9702 MB4 LT9702 502BEX FreeSpace Model 8 loudspeaker Mono Presets M8 M8 MB4 M8 FS3 M8 FS1B LT4402 loudspeaker Preset Descriptions LT4402 loudspeaker Full Range EQ LT4402 Cluster EQ LT4402 loudspeaker bi amped with MB4 LT4402 loudspeaker bi amped with 502 BEX loudspeaker LT9702 loudspeaker Preset Descriptions LT9702 loudspeaker Full Range EQ LT9702 Cluster EQ LT9702 loudspeaker bi amped with MB4 LT9702 loudspeaker bi amped with 502BEX loudspeaker Model 8 loudspeaker Preset Descriptions Model 8 loudspeaker Full Range EQ Model 8 loudspeaker bi amped with MB4 Model 8 loudspeaker bi amped with FreeSpace 3 loudspeak
189. TE um M a Bypass 1 Bypass Bypass OUTPUT 1 1 i E OUTPUT CH 1 21 2 Bric Fo FM 20 p Mix Levels gt oO id iD uu 1522 X X dia MESA u 0h FE 75 Se X 4 1 REP BW y 2 2 12 2 Bypass d i ad dy Gain u m E 1 ui 2 rss Jo rer DOR E Lie E Tie T Uds ed Mi 3 11 ERE wy 2 mE pen A i Li 1 2 5 MN duprrgie33 le mid 7 p pe OUTPUTS E Mis 3 eH d DE Li I ns 2 thru 8 ES ws Ao po REB NITITAES i 2 Diem 0 0 EE LETEA Y na Dan ix 5 0292 Y a wdd ddd dm PA 8 0 3 3 3 3 Din mE d The processing shown for Mix 1 is duplicated for each output mix Function Output Select _ Pi 12 zd ware m J sine The function generator output is applied to any combination of output mixes 18 z SPECIFICATIONS MEASURE COMMENTS Specifications AUDIO CHANNELS 8 inputs 8 outputs Line or Mic level inputs LED METERING 8 input 8 output LED STATUS peak reading Red 0 5 dBFS and higher Clip Dual color LEDs Red amp Green 4 to 0 5 dBFS Green
190. TION Be prepared to provide the company name address phone number a person to contact regarding the return purchase order number the type and quantity of equipment a description of the problem and the serial number s Shipping to Manufacturer for Repair or Adjustment All shipments of products should be made via United Parcel Service or the best available shipper prepaid The equipment should be shipped in the original packing carton if that is not available use any suitable container that is rigid and of adequate size If a substitute container is used the equipment should be wrapped in paper and surrounded with at least four inches of excelsior or similar shock absorbing material All returns must include the return authorization number Units sent for repair or adjustment DO NOT need a return authorization number Factory Service department Telex Communications Inc West 1 Street Blue Earth MN 56013 U S A Upon completion of any repair the equipment will be returned via United Parcel Service or specified shipper collect 13 User Instructions Model SS 1002 Single Channel Intercom Speaker Station h RN Ta Mir E Model 55 2002 Two Channel Intercom Speaker Station Model SS 2002RM Two Channel Rack Mount Intercom Speaker Station Audiocom Intercom Systems 9350 7741 000 Rev A 10 2002 FCC Statement This equipment uses and c
191. TO PRE SPEAKER necia SWITCH MULTITRACK MEE EFFECTS PROCESSOR 4 o E 31 TO OTHER M T MONO SUM VOCAL amp INSTRUMENT SOURCES SEE PAGE 5 Y OO 0 0 0 0 MI H 15 MONO SUM 2TK L E PHONES APPLICATION 5 LINKING TWO FOLIO 5 CONSOLES Two or more FOLIO SX consoles may be combined to create a larger number of input channels by connecting Mix and Aux outputs from one console to the Stereo and Line inputs on another as shown Note that the PFL AFL systems remain separate on each console Ns MAIN FA LEFT amp RIGHT Le NOTE PFL BUS IS NOT COMMON lO MIXL amp R MONITOR BUS MONITOR EFFECTS BUS SUB MIXER SLAVE MASTER 4 psu o Fo T u SPIRIT m d ci ic quc T I By Soundcraft By Soundcraft N kn AUX1 AUX2 AUX3 _ e se 18 R MIX INSERT MONITOR MONO SUM MONITOR MONO SUM 0 0 E O O O 12 12 HONES FFL LINK SPIRIT FOLIO CARE OF YOUR MIXER GENERAL PRECAUTIONS O Avoid storing or using the mixer in conditions of excessive heat or cold or in positions where it is likely to be subject to vibration dust or moisture
192. The unit can be operated while batteries are charging Operating the Receiver with a Wall Transformer 1 The unit will operate normally when connected to a wall transformer 2 Batteries do not need to be installed in the unit operate from a wall transformer LR 500 Receiver Programming 1 The LR 500 can be programmed to operate on a limited number of channels The LR 400 and LR 300 cannot be programmed For applications where users are required to select a channel such as language interpretation or classrooms and you don t want them to have to go through all of the available channels this feature is ideal If all channels where available the user could have 57 channels to select from oo 4 To adjust squelch the padlock Use the UP and DOWN keys to To enter PROGRAM mode press the UP and DOWN keys simultane ously until the PGM symbol is displayed on the LCD display On each channel check to see if 1 0 is displayed it means select channels As channels channel is locked out from the user are displayed the L O symbol on the LCD display will be displayed for those channels that are locked out When a channel is locked out the channel is not available to the user To toggle between locked out and not locked out press the SEEK button To toggle between locked out and not locked out press the SEEK button In PROGRAM mode on the LR 500 icon will appear after you program dots indi
193. Turn the MULTI JOG control or use the KIF th until the display shows E I 5 3 If you do not want to proceed with the refresh operation press any other key such as the STOP key 4 To refresh the disc press the MULTI JOG con trol or press the ENTER key NOTE This operation cannot be undone If you are going to refresh a disc make sure that it contains only record ings that you really want to erase 5 If the erase en has been selected the word ERAGE flashes on the display and the timer starts pure down The refresh opera tion typically takes around 20 minutes or so 6 a end of the countdown period the word iet e appears briefly on the display ind the display returns to the track time display of course there are no tracks and the disc is as the start with the total time of the disc available for recording TASCAM CD RW700 27 6 Reference and specifications 6 1 Troubleshooting Symptom Possible cause and remedy No sound on playback The connections from the CD RW700 to the disc is playing and the amplifier system have not been made the time display is properly or the input source selector is incrementing not at the correct position No meter indication Analog and or digital volume 4 1 1 Sig when a source is input nal volume is set too low The signal is being input through an unselected input source 4 1 Input selection digital input source has been selected but th
194. UNGS Amplification BEISPIELE d instrument APLICACI NES Anplifaci n de instrumento 1 cabinet Instrument input Entr e de l instrument Instrumentseingang Entrada del instrumento Ch 1 input Entr e Canal 1 Eingang Kanal 1 Entrada Canal 1 2 cabinets Instrument input Entr e de l instrument Instrumentseingang Entrada del instrumento Ch 1 input Entr e Canal 1 Eingang Kanal 1 Entrada Canal 1 e Preamp PLX amp bridged mono mode Preamp PLX amp parallel mode e Line level output Sortie audio niveau ligne Linepegel Audio Ausgang Salida de nivel de lin a Line level output Sortie audio niveau ligne Linepegel Audio Ausgang Salida de nivel de lin a Instrument Verstaraung Instrument input Entr e de l instrument Instrumentseingang Entrada del instrumento Line level output Sortie audio niveau ligne Linepegel Audio Ausgang Salida de nivel de lin a Ch 1 input Entr e Canal 1 Eingang Kanal 1 Entrada Canal 1 E PLX amp stereo mode Ch 2 input Entr e Canal 2 Eingang Kanal 2 Entrada Canal 2 BUSQUEDADEAVER AS Problerra hay sonido FEHLERBEHEBUNG Problem kein Ton TROUBLESHOOTING D PANNAGE Problem no sound Probleme pes de son gt INDICATION POWER gt INDICATION DEL POWER gt ANZEICHEN POWER gt INDICACI N EL INDICADOR DE INDICATOR NOT LIT Check the AC plug Confinmthat the AC outlet works by Plugging in another dev
195. UR UTILISATION Filtres d entr e DESCRIPTION Le filtre passe haut lorsquiactiv r duit le niveau de signal sous 30 Hz ou 50 Hz Cefiltre arr liore la performance du systerre en linitart le rrouverrert excessif du c ne du haut parleur de basses des fr guences infrasonigues donnant plus de puissance disponible dans le spectre audible Les ajustements des filtres pour chaque canal se font s par rrent sur les interrupteurs tel que rrontr d contre Lorsque les filtres sont d sadiv s un filtre passe haut 5 Hz entre en fonction afin de prot ger le haut parleur contre les tensions continues et contre les signaux infrasoni ques UTILISATION En r gle generale les haut paneurs fonctionnent mieux avec un filtre bien ajust A moins que d autres qui penerts en amont dans la cha ne soient munis de filtre ajustez le filtre de votre arrplificateur en accord avec votre haut parleur Les enceintes vert bass reflex etc sont particulierement sensibles aux surexcursion des c nes aux fr quences inf rieures ala fr quence d accord de l enceinte Le filtre 50 Hz fondtionne tres bien avec la plupart des enceintes plein registre compactes et le filtre augmente le gain autour de 100 Hz pour un son plus riche Le filtre hz est pr vu pour les enceintes de SOUS graves et pour les grosses enceintes plein registre La position Off ou d rivation devrait utilis e dans des applications tel
196. Use el conectar la se al a amplificadores adidonales por medio de los conectores extra de entrada Consulte la p gina 12 para una completa de los modos de operaci n del NOTA Si usa una se al balan ceada utilice nicamente cables adecuados Un solo cable no balanceado puede afectar el recorrido de la se al y producir zumbiclos NOTA Cuando alimente el anplificador con dos se ales independientes coloque el interruptor Parallel Inputs en la posici n cle apagado NI ZEHLICZH ANMENDEAR BACGEMIDEOF gt PARALLEL INUIS To patch the signal to additional anplifiers use the parallel input switches described on page 10 Pour arrerer le signal vers d autres anplificateurs suivez les instructions de la page 10 Unm cas Eingangs signal weiteren Verstarkem zur Verf gung zu stellen verwenden Sie die Parallel Input Schalter wie auf Seite 10 beschrieben Para pasar la se al alos arrplificacores adicionales utilice el selector de entrada paralela desarito en la p gina 10 160 80 2 40 4 To speaker vers l enceinte Zum Lautsprechersystem Ala bocina 2
197. V V5 Adding the suffix u denotes the ratio is relative to 0 775V RMS Dl direct injection DI Box direct output equaliser fader feedback foldback frequency response gain input sensitivity the practice of connecting an electric musical instrument directly to the input of the mixing console rather than to an amplifier and loudspeaker which is covered by a microphone feeding the console a post fade line level output from the input channel bypassing the summing amplifiers typically for sending to individual tape tracks during recording a device that allows the boosting or cutting of selected bands of frequen cies in the signal path a linear control providing level adjustment the howling sound caused by bringing a microphone too close to a loud speaker driven from its amplified signal a feed sent back to the artistes via loudspeakers or headphones to enable them to monitor the sounds they are producing the variation in gain of a device with frequency the variation in level of the signal Page 23 sub group headroom highpass filter impedance balancing insert pan pot peaking PFL pre fade listen phase polarity post fade pre fade rolloff shelving spill transient unbalanced 48V SPIRIT FOLIO an output into which a group of signals can be mixed the available signal range above the nominal level before clipping occurs a filter th
198. ZE 30 31 Battery status 100 16 Locking the access door 17 Charging batteries using SmartCharge 17 Operating the unit with a wall transformer 18 LT 700 troubleshooting 19 LT 700 20 LISTEN TECHNOLOGIES CORPORATION 1 801 233 8992 1800 330 0891 Fax 1 801 233 8995 3 Internet www listentech com All specifications subject to change without notice Technical Service Contacts amp Compliance Notices Technical Service Contacts If technical service is needed please contact Listen Pre authorization is required before returning Listen products If products were damaged in shipment please contact the carrier then contact Listen for replacement or repair requirements payable by the carrier Toll Free 1 800 330 0891 Telephone 1 801 233 8992 Fax 1 801 233 8995 Internet www listentech com General E Mail infoOlistentech com Shipping amp Correspondence Address Listen Technologies Corporation 8535 South 700 West Suite A sandy Utah 84070 U S A FCC ID Numbers LT 800 072 72MHz base transmitter ID OMD800 001 LT 800 216 216MHz base transmitter ID OMD800 216 LT 700 072 72MHz portable transmitter ID OMD700 001 LT 700 216 216MHz portable transmitter ID OMD700 216 Compliance Notices Listen s Models LT 800 LT 700 LR 300 LR 400 and LR 50
199. a de la mayor a de voces Escuche cuidadosamente cuando utilice estos controles conjuntamente con el fin de encontrar la forma como puede reducirse o realzarse una caracter stica concreta de una se al vocal Coloque el bot n inferior en su enclavamiento central cuando no lo necesite Nota la est ajustada en 1 5 LF EQ G relo hacia la derecha para realzar las bajas frecuencias graves hasta 15 dB a 60 Hz a adiendo calor a las voces o pegada extra a los sintetizadores guitarras y percusiones G relo hacia la izquierda para atenuar las bajas frecuencias hasta 15 dB con el fin de reducir zumbidos vibraciones en el escenario o mejorar un sonido pobre Coloque el bot n en su enclavamiento central cuando no lo necesite The EQ switch bypasses the Equalisation section when released Alternately pressing and releasing the switch provides an easy way of com paring the equalised and unequalised signals AUX SENDS These are used to set up separate mixes for FOLDBACK EFFECTS or recording and the combination of each Aux Send is mixed to the respective Aux Output at the rear of the mixer For Effects it is useful for the signal to fade up and down with the fader this is called POST FADE but for Foldback or Monitor feeds it is important for the send to be independent of the fader this is called PRE FADE All Aux Sends are muted with the other channel outputs when the MUTE switch is pressed All six Aux Sends are
200. a puissance continue par rapport un canal simple En mode port utiliser l entr s le gain lefiltre e lelirriteur du canal 1 le canal 2 tart sans effet La DEL BRIDGE sur le panneau avart allume pour indiquer que l arrglificateur est r gl en mode pont nono UTILISATION Utilisez le mode port nono pour la puissance des deux canaux sur une seule charge de 4 ou 8 ons Ajustez l interrupteur 7 en position on Utilisez l entr e du canal 1 e branchez la charge tel qu indiqu d contre PR CAUTIONS EN MODE MONO PONT Le mode port mono place un stress suppl mentaire sur lamalificateur et le haut parleur L cr tage excessif peut causer la mise en sourdine par le circuit de protection et ou peut endommager le haut parleur Veuillez vous assurer que le haut parleur peut accepter la puissance de l amplificateur Des pointes de tension plus de 100 volts nrs sont possibles entre les bomes cle sortie de l armrplificateur en mode pont Installez votre systeme selon les codes lectriques local et national du site d installation AUSSTATTUNG amp EINSTELLUNGEN BESCHREIBUNG Der Monobr ckenbetrieb addiert de Leistung beider Kan le umsie einem Lautsprecher zur Verf gung zu stellen Des hei t es steht ungef hr die dop pate Ausgangsspannung die Spitzenleistung und ungef hr die deai fache Dausa stung eines Eirvelkar
201. a stabilizer mounted to it The residual adhesive may cause the disc to stick to the mechanism of the CD RW700 If it sticks to the mechanism you will need a technician to get it out 1 4 3 Handling of compact discs Observe the following e Always place the compact discs in the trays with their label facing upward compact discs can only be played on one side To remove a disc from its storage case press down on the center of the case and lift the disc out hold ing it carefully by the edges 8 TASCAM CD RW700 Finger marks and dust should be carefully wiped off the disc s recorded surface with a soft cloth Unlike conventional records the compact disc has no grooves to collect dust and microscopic debris so gently wiping with a soft cloth should remove most particles Wipe in a straight motion from the inside to the outside of the disc Small dust particles and light stains will have absolutely no effect on reproduc tion quality Never use such chemicals as record sprays anti static sprays or fluid benzine or thinner to clean compact discs Such chemicals will do irreparable damage to the disc s plastic surface Discs should be returned to their cases after use to avoid serious scratches that could cause the laser pickup to skip Don t expose discs to direct sunlight or high humidity and temperature for extended periods Long exposure to high temperature can warp the disc Only use circul
202. a tension de sortie ce qui nultiplie par un facteur de 4 la puissance en pointe e triple la puissance en continu par rapport un canal sinple dans un charge de 4 ou de 8 ols La section Mode port nono en page 11 d rit les branchements sp ciaux des haut parleurs en ce noce Exemples faire fonctionner un bauc parteur de 8chrrs acc la puissance combin e 4 ohms des deux canaux faire fondionner un de 40ms avec la puissance combin e a 2 ohms des deux canaux Pr cautions e mode port mono pemet d envoyer des nilliers de watts de puissance vers un seu hauk parleur La consommation de courant sera dus S assurer que le c ldage et le haut parleur peuvent supporter la puissance g n r e e Si la charge haut parleur est de moins de 4 ohrrs ou que des surtensions prolong es se produisert il est possible que l arrdificateur passe en mode protedion pour quelques secondes lors de surtensions Nepssuliliserclec arges de 2 VOIR LES INSTRUCTIONS ADDITIONNELLES POUR UTILISATION EN MODE PONT MONO EN PAGE 11 AUSSTATTUNG amp EINSTELLUNGEN IMONOBR CKENBETRIEB Diese Betriebsart addiert die volle Verst rkung beider Kan le f r eine einzelnes Lautsprechersystem Der Verst rker wird intem so urrkorfig riert so Cals beide Kan le wie ein eirzelner Kanal funktionieren Hierdurch steht ungef hr die doppelte Ausgangsspan nung de vierfache Spitzenleistung und u
203. a toum e Ces anplificateurs ventil s 2 canaux occupant 2 espaces nomrralis s vous procurert un niveau de puissance sans pr c dent dans un ch ssis compact et solide Caract ristiques Limiteurs d ecr terent ind pendants commutables par l utilisateur Hltres passe haut commutables avec choix aoup re 30 ou 50 Hz Modes d op ration st r o deux Ganaux parall le ou pont mono Ehtr ss syrr trigues sur prises XLR et Y1 6 3 mm e Sorties sur bomes rou et prises Speakon Contr les de gain d tentes ndicateurs DEL sur le panneau avant pour alimentation pr sence de signal 20 cB 10 cB r terrert protection modes nono port et parallele e Bloc dalimentation commuta tion haute performance utilisant le technologie PowerVVave excdusive Die PLX Verstarkerserie Die Verbindung einer hochentwickelten PowerVWawve Technologie korrbiniert studi otaugliche Tonqualit t nit den robusten Eigenschaften einer Touring Endstufe Diese kompakten l ftergek hlten 2 Kanal Endstufen mit 2 HE liefem un bertroffen hohe Leistung in einemstabilen Geh use Ausstatiungsnerknale unabh ngige abschaltbare Spitzenbegrenzer Eirstellbare Hochpessfilter oder 50 Hz Eckfrequenz e Stereo Zweikanal Parallel oder Mono Br ckenbetri eb Syrretisce Eingange XLR und Stereoklinke Neutrik Speakons und Ausgangsklemmen Rasterpo
204. aaa 12 Speaker Inputs SP5 2001 Only al 12 ADDEOYAIS Uo Ort DOE ROREM ERROR MM 12 POWEI UD Check Description The PS 2001L and SPS 2001 are versatile power supplies that can be used in a variety of Audiocom intercom system applications They both directly accept any AC input power from 100 to 240 VAC 50 60 Hz and can be configured to power two separate intercom channels or one large intercom channel with twice the intercom station capacity Additionally the units can be configured for compatibility with Clear Com Intercom Systems The units may be rack mounted or used on a desktop For rack mounting optional hardware is required For desktop use four non marring rubber feet are supplied The SPS 2001 also provides a speaker with two mixed inputs making it ideal for situations calling for a master station with a microphone speaker combination PS 2001L PS 2001L e Ol Combine 2 Isolate O 100 240 VAC 60 50 HZ TELEX COMMUNICATIONS INC MADE IN USA CLASS 2 WIRING 1 5A 24VDC Figure 1 PS 2001L Front and Rear Panel Features 1 Combine Isolate Switch When in the Combine position the unit will combine the audio signals of the two channels to create a single audio channel where all users can intercommunicate When in the Isolate position the unit will create two groups of completely independent users Channel Status Indicators The indicators are green for normal operation and red when there
205. able external power connector 8 9 VDC tip positive lt 300mA Battery Charging Fully automatic lt 14 hours Battery Life 40 hours with high capacity alkaline 20 hours with rechargeable NiMH Headphone Output 750mW RMS maximum at 25kHz deviation 32 ohms 3 5MM mono or stereo LR 300 Specifications RF Frequency Range 72MHz 72 05 75 95 MHz Sensitivity BuV typical 1uV maximum for 1208 SINAD Max deviation at 70kHz Signal to Noise ratio 72MHz Wide band channels 60dB Frequency Response 50Hz to 17kHz 3dB Distortion 2 5 THD Squelch 40dB with loss of RF signal Antenna Uses headphone cable Available Channels 72MHz 17 wide band Frequency 12300 12 200 12 300 12 400 12 500 12 600 12 100 12 800 12 900 14 100 15 300 15 400 15 500 15 600 75 700 75 800 75 900 Physical Dimensions 3 Wx1 Dx5 H 7 6cm W x 2 5cm D x 13cm H Weight 1 Ib 45 kg with batteries Door CHANNEL and SEEK buttons are accessible through door lockable Power Two AA batteries high capacity alkaline or NiMH rechargeable external power connector 8 9 VDC tip positive lt 300mA Battery Charging Fully automatic 14 hours Battery Life 40 hours with high capacity alkaline 20 hours with rechargeable NiMH Headphone Output 750mW RMS maximum at 25kHz deviation 32 ohms 3 5MM mono or stereo Channel Letter uE 22 49 Specifications subject to change without notice
206. ada Canal 1 Eingang Kanal 1 Mono mix Mixing board Console de mixage Mischpult Mezclador Mixing board Console de mixage Mischpult Mezclador Active crossover 7 Stereo b Mixing board Console de mixage Mischpult Mezclador stereo mode S parateur activ Aktivweiche Line level audio Audio niveau ligne Linepegel Audio Audio de nivel de lin a Enceintes deux voies Zweiweg Aktivsystem Bocinas dos v as PP 0 2 way loudspeakers stereo mode stereo mode N a ud stereo Mischpult Mezclador S parateur activ Active crossover 7 F Aktivweiche Mixing board Console de mixage Crossover activo Audio de nivel de lin a Enceintes deux voies Zweiweg Aktivsystem Bocinas dos v as stereo mode DP KOJ 2 way loudspeakers fu m Crossover activo Y stereo mode teur activ r Active crossover 7 para S F Aktivweiche Aktivsystem Enceintes deux voies Zweiweg Bocinas dos v as gt 20 2 way loudspeakers Subwoofer stereo mode bridged mono mode APPLICATIONS Instrument anplification APPLICATIONS ANWEND
207. ader e quelli di ingresso 0 indirizzate i canali al MIX e portate l amplificatore di potenza ad un livello adeguato all installazione O Dateun livello tipico del segnale dell esecuzione e premete PFL sul primo canale controllando il livello sui meters Regolate il gain d ingresso finch il meter rag giunge la zona arancione con sporadici picchi sul primo led rosso come massimo Questo garan tisce un headroom sufficiente per sistemare i pic chi e stabilisce il livello massimo per l uso normale Ripetete la procedura con gli altri canali secondo necessit Ascoltate attentamente il tipico suono del feed back Se non riuscite ad avere un livello d in gresso soddisfacente senza feedback controllate la posizione dei microfoni e dei diffusori quindi ripetete la prova Se il feedback continua potrebbe essere necessario usare un equalizza tore grafico per ridurre la risposta del sistema a particolari frequenze Cu O Do you have something connecetd on the Inserts and is that external device switched on Arethe Master faders set at max are input faders set high enough and is the channel routed to the output being monitored Is the MUTE switch released on the relevant channels isthe appropriate monitor select switch pressed Isthere a PFL AFL pressed on another channel No Mix output O Check that the Mix Master Fader is up Check that the 2TK REPLACES MIX switch is released N
208. al de la voie st r o est dirig vers les sous groupes amp 2 celui de la voie st r o 2 vers les sous groupes 3 amp 4 O gt Quand la touche PFL est enfonc e le signal PRE FADE et apr s correcteur est dirig en mono vers le casque vers la sortie coute et vers les afficheurs il remplace la source choisie La Led PFL AFL sur la section Master s illumine pour avertir qu une pr coute est active Les afficheurs gauche et droit affichent le signal PFL mono INGRESSO STEREO O wonrssi sack Questi ingressi ad alta impedenza accettano jack a 3 poli A gauge TRS Questi ingressi vanno usati per sorgenti come tastiere drum machines synth registratori o come ritorno dalle unit di processing Gli ingressi sono BILANCIATI per diminuire il rumore e avere la massima la qualit dalle apparecchiature professionali ma possibile usare sorgenti NON BILANCIATE collegando i jack come mostrato nella relativa sezione del manuale pag 28 sebbene dobbiate mantenere la lunghezza dei cavi il pi corto possibile per ridurre le interferenze Le sorgenti mono possono essere inserite su entrambi i percorsi utilizzando solo il jack di sinistra amp can controllo GAIN regola il livello di ingresso al canale permettendo la mod ulazione di diverse sorgenti line EQUALIZZATORE HF EQ Girando la manopola in senso orario le alte treble frequenze aumentano aggiungendo brillantezza a percussioni synth e strume
209. al current for all stations on each channel The total per channel should not exceed 2A If you exceed this limit an overload indication will be provided and the output of the power supply will be turned off Once the overload 15 corrected the overload indication will disappear and the power supply output will be turned on Note that if you are using DC wallpacks with some intercom stations you do not need to add the current consumption of those stations to the total current Audiocom Connections Intercom Cable wiring details are shown in Figure 3 Speaker interconnection cables SPS 2001 only are standard RCA phono types For program input cable wiring refer to your master intercom station user manual Some typical intercom applications are shown in Figures 4 through 8 Clear Com Applications Refer to your Clear Com system documentation for intercom cable wiring and connection details Desktop or Rackmount Installation For desktop use install the four supplied rubber feet to the bottom of the unit Do not obstruct the cooling vents when using the unit on a desktop For rackmounting use an optional Audiocom Rackmount Kit Several kits are available to meet the requirements of your particular system Follow the assembly instructions supplied with the rackmount kit TYPICAL 1 CHANNEL CABLE WIRING 1 Both wires Shield nn gt Shield Cable Type 22AWG Stranded 2 Pair Twisted wire with Shield Connector Type 3 Pin XLR Audio
210. al path is not interrupted Signal Send Insert Point N centre Non B Link pins 1 amp 3 XLR Screen Direct ourrur Channels 1 16 have a dedicated Direct Output which allows direct connec tion to external devices for example to feed Tape Machines or effects units The pre fade direct output level may be monitored by pressing the PFL switch on the appropriate channel to feed the pre fade signal to the moni tors and the bargraph meters DIR PRE The Direct Outputs on channels 1 16 are normally set POST FADER for use as effects sends or to provide fader control of recording levels in a stu dio recording application For live recording the outputs can be individually changed to PRE FADER by pressing this switch so that the direct output level remains unaffected by fader settings for the main PA mix ED EQUALISER Equaliser EQ allows fine manipulation of the frequency bands and is particularly useful for improving the sound in live PA applications where the original signal is often far from ideal and where slight boosting or cutting of particular voice frequencies can really make a difference to clarity HF EQ Turn clockwise to boost high treble frequencies 12kHz and above by up to 15dB adding crispness to cymbals vocals and electronic instruments Turn anticlockwise to cut by up to I 5dB reducing hiss or excessive sibilance which can occur with certain types of micro
211. amplifier power continuous and shall have a nominal impedance of 8 ohms The loudspeaker enclosure shall be irregularly trapezoidal in shape and shall have rubber footpads on one side Its baffle shall be angled up 37 It shall be constructed of exterior grade Baltic birch plywood and shall employ extensive internal bracing It shall be finished in wear resistant textured black paint Input connec tors shall be 2x Neutrik NL4 Speakon wired in parallel It shall include a pole mount cup and handle integral to the enclosure The front of the loudspeaker shall be covered with powder coated perforated steel grille The 2 way full range loudspeaker shall be the EAW model 5 1097 FAX 508 234 8251 SM109z 0004644 001 2 pp info September 2002 WWW eaw com Printed in USA User s Manual LT 800 Stationary Transmitter LT 700 Portable Transmitter LR 500 Programmable Display Receiver LR 400 Display Receiver LR 300 Digital Receiver Both 72 and 216MHz Systems LISTEN TECHNOLOGIES CORPORATION Copyright 2001 Listen Technologies Corporation Introduction Dear Valued Customer Thank you for choosing Listen All of us at Listen are dedicated to providing you the highest quality products and prompt efficient customer care Our products are manufactured in an 150 9000 factory that has been independently certified to the highest quality standards We stand ready to answer any questions you might have at ins
212. an radiate radio frequency energy that may cause interference to radio com munications if not installed in accordance with this manual The equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits of a Class A computing device pursuant to Subpart J Part 15 of FCC Rules which are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference when operated in a commercial environment Operation of this equipment in a residential area may cause interference which the user at his own expense will be required to correct C This product meets Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive 89 336 EEC Table of Contents IntroOUCtOll aaa BTW OSAMA ON _____ iret 6 Confieuration Precheck utei te eeepc eost ec 6 6 lg dcl rm 14 14 SuSE M D DD Channel Select SS 2002 SS 2002RM 15 Headset Headphone Speaker Microphone Selection ccce eere ee ecce eee eee eene 15 Receivins C alls A 15 an Intercom Channel boda eben sab tdeo aene boy eaa did 15 vusdpwis ire 1 O Generale 16 Dynamicenic Headset Handset een Renee nnd 16 Panel MICFODBOBQ unse Eae
213. ancia de 2000 o mayor Se ofrece una entrada balanceada para un micr fono de talkback La serial puede dirigirse selectivamente a los auxiliares 1 2 o 3 4 que pueden usarse t picamente para el foldback de los m sicos o a la mezcla L R pulsando los conmutadores apropiados El nivel de se al se ajusta con el control TB LEVEL RETORNOS ESTEREO Dispone de dos retornos est reo balanceados para las salidas de unidades de efectos que se mezclan directamente a los buses MIX L R a un nivel ajustado por los controles 1 y RET 2 Si se usa una fuente mono al conectarla s lo al jack izquierdo se dirige autom ticamente esta serial a la izquierda y la derecha NIVEL 2TK Este control rotativo ajusta el nivel de la entrada de cinta 2 pistas que se dirige a los auriculares salida de monitores y medidores Estas entradas no balanceadas en conectores RCA son ideales para conectar el equipo de cinta para monitorizaci n QD 27K REEMPLAZA A LA SALIDA DE MEZCLA iEste conmutador hace lo que dice Al pulsarlo la salida de mezcla se conmuta a la entrada de 2 pistas y es una forma ideal de enviar m sica a las salidas princi pales antes de la actuaci n en aplicaciones de directo sin tener que usar unos valiosos canales de entrada Por ejemplo con el bot n pulsado y un CD conec tado y reproduciendo m sica antes de la actuaci n el t cnico puede estar ajus tando niveles de canal ecualizaciones hablando con los m sicos y mon
214. and condition based on a flat fee This limited lifetime warranty prices and the specifications of products are subject to change without notice isten LISTEN TECHNOLOGIES CORPORATION 1 801 233 8992 1 800 330 0891 Fax 1 801 233 8995 Internet www listentech com All specifications are subject to change without notice LT 800 Stationary Transmitter Controls Audio Connections LT 800 Front Illustration Controls Displays INPUT Adjust audio input Indicates audio Shows Indicates RF output power levels of Inputs 1 and 2 input level of modulation level full 1 2 or 1 4 Channel the unit Inputs 1 and 2 after processing select on rear panel is tuned to If decimal place is lit channel is locked m SULLLLIM g sa IHFUT LEVELS PROCESS CONTOUR Plug in a headset LE d then adjust volume o o Sa T E TEST TONE CHANNEL SELECT Power ON OFF TO LOCK press both UP and PROCESS Adjust the amount of CONTOUR Adjust voice SELECT DOWN buttons simultaneously Activates a tone to audio processing to make all audio intelligibility equalization CHANNEL to lock channel press both aid tuning of non sources sound like they are at the for your application again to unlock Listen receivers same level adjust clockwise requirements Please Note as of December 2002 Process has been relabeled MIX LT 800 Audio Connection
215. anere danneg giati microfoni dinamici bilanciati possono general mente esser usati con l alimentazione phantom inserita fare riferimento al manuale del microfono Prima di inserire i 48V bisogna collegare i microfoni e abbassare tutti i fader per non danneggiare gli apparecchi esterni Q L uscita PHONES su prese jack da 1 4 di tipo a 3 poli adatta a cuffie con impedenza da 200W o superiori TB LEVEL E previsto un ingresso bilanciato per il microfono di Talkback segnale pu essere indirizzato a Aux 1 2 o 3 4 generalmente per il foldback dell artista o al Mix L R premendo i relativi tasti Il livello del segnale regolato dal con trollo TB LEVEL O RITORNI STEREO STEREO RETURNS Sono disponibili due Ritorni Stereo per le uscite di effetti Essi sono mixati direttamente sui bus Mix L R ad un livello impostato con o RET 2 Se viene usata una sorgente mono il jack di sinistra manda il segnale automati camente a destra e sinistra QD 27k eveL Questa manopola regola il livello dell ingresso 2 Track che indirizzato alle cuffie alle uscite monitor e ai meter o direttamente alle uscite Mix pre mendo il tasto relativo 12 Questi ingressi sono sbilanciati su connettori RCA phono e sono indicati per collegare il playback di un registratore per il monitoraggio 27k SOSTITUISCE L USCITA MIX Esattamente Quando questo tasto premuto l uscita Mix viene mandata all in gres
216. ape machines or processing units The inputs are BALANCED for low noise and top quality from professional equipment but you can use UNBALANCED sources by wiring up the jacks as shown in the Wiring it Up section earlier in this manual although you should then keep cable lengths as short as possible Mono sources may be used by plugging into the left jack only 5 GAIN D S 9 e a gt N sk a The GAIN control sets the input level to the channel allowing matching to a wide range of line level sources 1 6 EQUALISER 8 9 o HF EQ Turn to the right to boost high treble frequencies adding crispness to percussion from drum machines synths and electronic instruments Turn to the left to cut these frequencies reducing hiss or excessive brilliance Set the knob in the centre detented position when not required The control has a shelving response giving 5dB of boost or cut at 2kHz a o o BAL a 0 LF EQ Turn to the right to boost low bass frequencies adding extra punch to synths gui tars and drums Turn to the left to reduce hum boominess or improve a mushy sound Set the knob to the centre detented position when not required The control has a shelving response giving 5dB of boost or cut at 60Hz 7 AUX SENDS These are used to set up a separate mixes for FOLDBACK EFFECTS or recording and the combination of each the Aux Send i
217. ar compact discs Avoid using non circular promotional etc discs 199 To keep the laser pickups clean don t touch them For the same reason don t leave the disc trays opened unnecessarily 1 4 4 Additional notes with regard to CD R and CD RW discs There are additional precautions that you should take when handling CD R and CD RW discs that are dif ferent to those that you should take when handling ordinary CDs Avoid touching the recording non label side of a disc on which you will be recording Recording on a disc requires a cleaner surface than playing back and fingerprints grease etc can cause errors in the recording process CD R discs are more sensitive to the effects of heat and ultraviolet rays than ordinary CDs It is impor tant that they are not stored in a location where 1 Introduction Environmental considerations direct sunlight will fall on them and which is away from sources of heat such as radiators or heat gen erating electrical devices Always store CD R discs in their jewel cases to avoid dirt and dust accumulating on their surfaces Do not put labels or protective sheets on the discs and do not use any protective coating spray When labeling CD R discs always use a soft oil based felt tipped pen to write the information Never use a ball point or hard tipped pen as this may cause damage to the recorded side Dirty discs may be cleaned using a soft dry clot
218. arrortiguaci n y el control del moi miento de la rrisrra Los aparatos de potenda est n colocados sobre super fides con aislaniento t mico lo que fona unt nel de aire frente al verti lador para un enfriamiento ptimo Un sensor t rrrico puesto en cada canal monitorea la terrperatura y controla la velocidad del ventilador del apagado t mico y del control de polarizaci n bias asegurando rra daridad de audio a Cualquier tem peratura y nivel de se al Un drcuito nonitorea la disipaci n de los trarsis tores y realiza cortes de protecd n s lo quando real mente se necesita drauto de salida se corrprirre adi vamente durante la saturad n para pemitir una recuperaci n r pida y suave compresor tambi n alimenta un limitador de picos propordonal el realmente siente la intensidad del pico y responce de manera serrejarte Las entradas balanceadas usan resistores preriumal 0 1 de predsi n para un alto rechazo al ruido Los componentes de predsi n usados en los filtros de entrada y el resto de accesorios del circuito le aseguran un fundonarriento exacto Apagado amplificador asilenda tan pronto corro se corta la comente evitando ruidos de apagado apagado de la fuente de alimentad n puede provocar un da o serio La frecuencia alta del interruptor corta la potencia en niaosegundos para evitar un da o mayor SPECIFICATIONS SP CIFICATIONS TECHNISCHE DATEN ESPECIFICACIONES P
219. assicurarsi che la tensione selezionata sia la stessa della rete a cui ci si collega Per spostare il porta fusibile dal suo alloggiamento usare un cacciavite Per evitare il rischio di incendio sostituire il fusibile solo con uno dello stesso valore indicato sul pannello posteriore L alimentatore interno contiene parti non riparabili dall utente Rivolgersi ad un centro assistenza autorizzato Page 3 PRECAUCIONES DE SEGURIDAD ATENCION ESTA UNIDAD DEBE ESTAR CONECTADA A TIERRA Bajo ninguna circunstancia la toma de tierra debe ser desconectada del cable de alimentaci n principal Los conductores en el terminal de red se encuentran codificados por co lores del siguiente modo Tierra Verde y Amarillo Neutro Azul Vivo Marr n En caso de que los colores de los conductores del terminal de red no coin cidan con los colores de las marcas que identifican los terminales en su enchufe proceda del siguiente modo O El conductor de color verde y amarillo debe conectarse al terminal del enchufe que este marcado con la letra E o por el s mbolo de tierra O EI conductor de color azul debe conectarse al terminal del enchufe que este marcado con la letra N o sea de color negro O EI conductor de color marr n debe conectarse al terminal del enchufe que este marcado con la letra L o sea de color rojo Aseg rese de seguir cuidadosamente este c digo de colores en caso de que deba sustituirse el enchufe Esta unidad
220. aster section Compare a suspect channel with an adjacent channel which has been set up identically Use PFL and AFL to monitor the signal in each section Insert contact problems may be checked by using a dummy jack with tip and ring shorted together as shown below f the signal appears when the jack is inserted it shows that there is a problem with the normalling contacts on the jack socket caused by wear or damage or often just dirt or dust Keep a few in your gig tool box Wire Link Dummy Insert Bypass Jack Page 8 SPIRIT FOLIO PRE A POST DIRECT OUT 1 8 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CONSOLE MONO INPUT CHANNEL 1 DIRECT OUTPUT The first eight channels have a dedicated Direct Output which allows direct connec tion to external devices for example to feed Tape Machines or effects units See the Advanced Features section on page 18 for a full explanation of these outputs 2 MIC INPUT The mic input accepts XLR type connectors and is designed to suit a wide range of BALANCED or UNBALANCED signals Professional dynamic condenser or ribbon mics are best because these will be LOW IMPEDANCE You can use low cost HIGH IMPEDANCE mics but the level of background noise will be higher If you turn the PHANTOM POWER on top right hand side of the mixer the socket provides a suitable powering voltage for professional condenser mics ONLY connect condenser microphones with the 4
221. at rejects low frequencies a technique used on unbalanced outputs to minimise the effect of hum and interference when connecting to external balanced inputs a break point in the signal path to allow the connection of external devices for instance signal processors or to another mixer line level signals at a nominal level of 10 to 6dBu usually coming from low impedance source abbreviation of panorama controls levels sent to left and right out puts an equaliser response curve affecting only a band of frequencies i e based on a bandpass response a function that allows the operator to monitor the pre fade signal in a channel independently of the main mix a term used to describe the relationship of two audio signals In phase signals reinforce each other out of phase signals result in cancellation a term used to describe the orientation of the positive and negative poles of an audio connection Normally connections are made with positive to positive negative to negative and this would correct polarity If this is reversed the result will be out of phase signals see phase above the point in the signal path after the monitor or master fader and therefore affected by fader position the point in the signal path before the monitor or master fader posi tion and therefore unaffected by the fader position a fall in gain at the extremes of the frequency response an equaliser response affecting all frequ
222. at the limiter uses to release the gain reduction when the signal exceeds the threshold Gain Use the gain parameter to compensate for unwanted gain reduction caused by heavy limiting 25 8 0 UTILITY Button Stereo Bank 802 Full Range 26 Pressing the UTILITY button provides access to the Level System and Routing parameters Use the Arrow UP Arrow DOWN buttons to navigate through the parameters and use the Encoder wheel to select parameter values Parameter Definitions Output Level Controls the overall output level of outputs 1 2 3 and 4 Parameter Range Off 97dB to OdB Default Value OdB Output Range You can use this parameter to match the input level of other equipment Parameter Range 2dB 8dB consumer 14dB and 20dB pro Default Value 20dB Allows you to adjust the maximum output level of the PANARAY system digital controller Input Sensitivity Sets level in dBu to allow full scale operation A digital product produces the best signal to noise performance when operating at 0 dBFS full scale For example For a mixer with 4dBu outputs the Input Sensitivity should be set to 8dBu to account for peaks in the programming material Parameter Range OdBu 24dBu Default Value 20dBu Input Trim CH1 Allows you to change the input level in 1dB steps on 1 Parameter Range 40dB to OdB Default Value 20dB Input Trim CH2 Allows you to change the input level in 1dB s
223. ate preset and config uration No additional programming is required The PANARAY system digital controller has two balanced XLR analog inputs and four balanced XLR analog outputs It can be configured to run two mono Bose speaker EQ presets or a single stereo Bose speaker EQ preset including preset crossover settings There are a total of 180 presets which are separated into Stereo Mono and Bass Array Banks All rout ing is automatic based on the selected preset and configuration See the preset chart in section 13 0 for a full list of presets with descriptions and output routing defaults In addition to providing Bose speaker equalization the PANARAY system digital controller also has the following easy to use programmable features Four independent programmable line delays 200 ms per output that can be used for decentralized or distributed speaker alignment and for creating custom bass arrays Four independent programmable output limiters that can be set to protect speakers from unpredictable spikes in program material Programmable signal router that allows each output to select Full Range High Pass Low Pass or Bypass EQ combinations of input signals Jp Bose Corporation Framingham MA 01701 9168 1 Made in the U S A s 7 CH2 CH CH2 CH3 CH4 605 c CAUTIO DO NOT OPEN 2 0 Front Panel STANDBY button Standby on off Input Meters The peak meter
224. ato Cuando se utilice un carrito tenga cuidado al mover la combinaci n de carrito aparato para evitar lesiones en caso de que se caiga 11 Toda reparaci n debe ser realizada por personal cualificado Lleve el aparato a reparar si ste sufre cualquier dafio como por ejemplo si el cable el ctrico o enchufe est n dafiados se ha derramado l quido o han ca do objetos dentro del aparato el aparato ha sido expuesto a la lluvia o a la humedad no funciona normalmente o ha ca do No intente reparar este producto usted mismo Abrir o sacar las tapas le expondr a volta jes peligrosos o a otros peligros Por favor llame a Bose para que le indiquen un cen tro de reparaci n autorizado en su zona 12 Para impedir el riesgo de descarga el ctrica evite la sobrecarga de los enchufes cables de extensi n o recept culos de varias tomas 13 No deje que caigan objetos o l quidos dentro del aparato ya que podr an tocar puntos en los que existen niveles de voltaje peligrosos o causar cortocircuitos que podr an causar incendios o descargas el ctricas 14 Vea la parte posterior de la caja para indicaciones de seguridad 15 No coloque en el aparato ninguna llama viva como por ejemplo una vela 16 El producto se debe montar en bastidor y debe instalarse seg n los c digos de montaje locales 17 El producto no est pensado para aplicaciones marinas o gemi Important Safety Instructions Avertissement Francais Afin de r duir
225. aux d entretien ou de r paration par un personnel quali fi Une maintenance est n cessaire d s que l appareil est endommag de mani re quelconque notamment lorsque le cordon d alimentation est en mauvais tat qu un liquide a t renvers ou qu un objet est tomb l int rieur du produit en va de m me si l quipement a t expos la pluie ou l humidit qu il est tomb ou qu il ne fonctionne pas normalement N essayez pas de r parer cet appareil vous m me En ouvrant ou en retirant un capot vous risquez d entrer en contact avec des ten sions dangereuses ou de vous retrouver expos d autres dangers Appelez la soci t Bose afin de connaitre la station technique agr e la plus proche de chez VOUS 12 Pour viter tout risque d incendie ou de choc lectrique ne surchargez pas les prises murales les prolongateurs ou les blocs multiprises 13 Evitez que des objets ou des liquides ne p n trent dans l appareil pourraient entrer en contact avec des l ments aliment s par des tensions dangereuses ou cr er des courts circuits pouvant provoquer un incendie ou une lectrocution 14 Reportez vous aux avertissements relatifs la s curit appos s l arri re du ch s lt None gt lt None gt sis 15 Ne placez aucune flamme nue telle qu une bougie sur l appareil 16 L appareil doit tre mont sur rack et install conform ment aux r glements locaux du b timent 17 L appareil n est pas destin
226. ax 1 801 233 8995 Internet www listentech com All specifications are subject to change without notice LT 700 Portable Transmitter Troubleshooting LT 700 Troubleshooting The LT 700 has no power Make sure the unit has either fully charged batteries or a Listen approved wall transformer connected to the unit Open the door and press the ON button If this does not work try a different set of batteries Make sure the batteries are installed properly There is no audio Make sure the MUTE switch is in the TALK position Make sure you have the microphone plugged all the way in the top of unit Make sure you are using a Listen approved microphone If you re using the line input make sure you have connected a line level unbalanced input to the ring of the connector The audio is distorted Make sure you re using an approved Listen microphone Make sure the line input level is not too high There is hum in the audio The microphone may be too close to a transformer The microphone is low in level The microphone must be placed in close proximity to the person speaking If this does not work try using a head worn microphone There is too much noise This is probably due to the fact that the microphone is not close enough to the person speaking and is picking up background noise Try positioning the microphone closer or try using a microphone that is directional like a head worn mic There is interference Try different fre
227. ay 4 4XEF180Hz Preset Description Preset MBA 4x Endfire Bass Array Controller Inputs Ch 1 Mono source Controller Default Output Routing Ch 1 Ch 2 Ch 3 Ch 4 Routing MBA 1 MBA 2 MBA 3 MBA 4 mono mono mono mono Limiter Off Off Off Off Delay On On On On Mono from mixer POWER 100 240 50 60Hz 300W 21 22 5 4 PRESET Button Dual Mono Operation Loading presets from Dual Mono mode Dual Mono When the PANARAY system digital controller is used in Dual Mono mode the EQ Crossover blocks process each input indepen dently allowing you to run two different speaker EQs To access Dual Mono mode press the PRESET button Then press the Arrow DOWN button until you see the following display Le 402I 2 4021 The period next to the preset name indicates that the Encoder can change the preset To select between 1 and 2 use the Arrow UP Arrow Down buttons Input The top of the display shows the preset name that will be processed by the CH1 input This signal will be routed to Outputs CH1 and CH2 If this is a full range preset the same EQ will be applied to Outputs CH1 and CH2 If this preset consists of a mid high device with a bass loudspeaker the mid high frequencies will be routed to Output CH1 and the low frequencies will be routed to Output CH2 CH2 Input The bottom of the display shows the preset that is processe
228. ay returns to its previous mode 3 2 Programmed order playback The steps to set up to 25 program steps tracks to be played back in a specified order are as follows 1 Press the PLAY MODE key until the display shows F ram 2 pen to show that no program steps have yet had tracks assigned to them 3 Use the number keys to enter a track number including the 10 key to enter values greater than 9 as described in 3 1 2 Track search There is no need to press ENTER The track entered is assigned to the program step and the display changes showing the track number the total time of the program so ae ano 026 e g 4 The next program step can then be entered Steps 3 and 4 above can be carried out from the main unit by turning and pushing the MULTI JOG control AD 16 TASCAM CD RW700 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 above until the program is complete 6 Press the PLAY key 48 or to start playback at the first program step The display shows the track the current time display and the program step number While in programmed playback mode using the SKIP keys or the MULTI JOG control 17 moves backwards and forwards in the order set in the program Use the PAUSE key 49 or to halt playback tem porarily or the STOP key 47 or to stop playback of the program If the STOP key 15 used when playback is restarted it starts from the first program step Clear the pro
229. b WWw Gscaudio com BBS World Group OnLine Technical Support Support technique enligne Technische fachberaten Or Line Soporte t cnico OnLine 1200 14400 bps 8N1 714 668 7567 800 856 6003 CompuServe GO CSCAUDIO E mail info qscaudio com service aqscaudio com Qsc_audio conmpuserve com QSC Audio Products Inc 1675 MacArthur Boulevard Costa M esa California 92626 USA QSC and the QSC logo are registered with the U S Patent and Trademark Office 1998 amp 1999 QSC Audio Products Inc cai SPIRIT By Soundcraft Contents Overview Introduction Installation amp Safety Precautions Connecting It Up Wiring Up Getting To Know Your Console Using Your Folio SX Console Advanced Features Applications Care Of Your Mixer Glossary Typical Specifications Dimensions Typical Connecting Leads System Block Diagram Front Panel 1112222222227 Besse vu FOLIO e 15 GUIDE irit by soundcraft co uk SC LJ SPIRIT FOLIO TAKE THE FINAL OUTPUT FROM HERE ADDITIONAL OUTPUTS ES PAGE 15 FEED YOUR FROM HERE TAKE EFFECTS MONITORS FROM 5 PAGE 15 6 FOLDBACK SENDS HERE FROM HERE BER 35 PAGE 14 CONNECT DIS PAGE 15 MICS HERE 1 lt SSS as ENS CONNECT LINE LEVEL SOURCES HERE PAGE 9 12 SEND THIS OUTPUT MU
230. balanced SLEEVE RING SLEEVE Insert Leads RING SLEEVE SLEEVE TP RING SLEEVE RING SLEEVE Tip 1 Sleeve 3 Tip 1 25 15 2 Sleeve 5 gt 2 Sleeve 3 2 5 Sleeve Sleeve Ring 2 ES King Sleeve Sleeve Centre Oleeve Screen Tip Centre Ring 7 Sleeve Screen 1 2 5 ye Tip Sena Tip Sleeve Ring Sleeve Tip Return Sleeve 1 2 Send Tip 2 Ring Sleeve 1 2 Return 2 Centre Send Tip Screen Ring Sleeve Centre Return Screen Page 28 Y Leads Balanced Where used Aux Mix outputs SLEEYE RING RING SLEEVE SLEEVE RING TIF RING SLEEVE Headphone Splitter RING SLEEVE Y Leads Unbalanced SLEEVE RING RING SLEEVE SLEEVE KING SLEEVE TIP TIP SLEEVE SLEEVE TIP SLEEVE Tip Ring Sleeve NN Tip Ring Sleeve Tip Ring Sleeve Tip Ring Sleeve Tip Sleeve Tip Sleeve Tip Ring Tip Ring Sleeve Tip Ring Sleeve King Sleeve Tip Ring Sleeve Tip Ring Sleeve Tip Ring Sleeve Tip Sleeve Tip Sleeve un ON Centre Screen
231. bandwidth noise meeting the IEC Standard 2268 5 is applied to the MA12 speaker and amplified to a level at the loudspeaker terminals corresponding to the power handling of the loudspeaker The loudspeaker must show no visible damage or measurable loss of performance after 100 hours of continuous testing BASIC VOICE SYSTEM PANARAY System Digital Controller MA12 speaker Wide horizontal dispersion for broad Coverage Longer throw than conventional sources with less SPL variation This means you will experience sound that is not too loud up front and not too soft far away Low sensitivity to microphone feedback Slender aesthetic styling in white or black A full complement of brackets available for product installations MA12 loudspeaker modules are used with the Panaray system digital controller or the Bose amplifiers in combination with the 12 speaker plug in EQ card Active equalisation assures smooth accurate spectral response across the entire operating range of the module Use of the Panaray system digital controller or amplifier EQ card also allows for crossover of the 12 speaker with a Bose bass loudspeaker INSTALLATION Installation and use instructions are included with the loudspeaker The MA12 modular line array speakers are designed to be wall or floor mounted at the listener s ear height 12 speakers can be installed end on end to
232. can be downloaded from the Bose professional systems website at http pro bose com SAFETY AND REGULATORY COMPLIANCE The Bose MA12 loudspeaker complies with ANSI EIA 636 recommended loudspeaker safety practices and EM C directive 89 336 EEC and article 10 1 of the directive in compliance with EN50081 1 EN50082 1 as signified by the CE mark WARRANTY INFORMATION The Bose MA12 loudspeaker is covered by a 5 year transferable limited warranty Subject to change without notice TOP VIEW DD tL Better sound through researche r Du D ze 0D Go o 0 GS Ho Os 5 zo lt 5 m 5 9 5O O O 053 c EN Installation services Ls un D O 52 E ES 3 MaS E lt 2 ce Lu 855 49 O ac 49 E LLJ a O Q e gt 28 S 3 gt al a A 4 un a TT HS MEN D E m dh Ta 4 2 24 3 P i un 4 i A 1 1 4 5 far ato ara Pi 54 ha 1 d 2 ou 1 H a Py hy mj 4 x i s LAA i L 1 i hy T dy LE y d E Ed 1 z B F Pa ha HL H Pi by 4 y
233. cate level of squelch your channels in PROGRAM mode You should still be in PROGRAM mode To NOT adjust squelch don t press a button for 4 seconds and the unit will exit PROGRAM mode To adjust squelch press SEEK to unlock squelch the padlock will disappear The squelch level will appear as a number of dots showing No dots means no squelch The factory default setting is four dots Press the UP button to increment through five possible squelch settings indicated by dots More dots means more squelch sensitivity 5 To exit PROGRAM mode don t press a key for 4 seconds isten TM LISTEN TECHNOLOGIES CORPORATION 1 801 233 8992 1 800 330 0891 Fax 1 801 233 8995 25 Internet www listentech com All specifications subject to change without notice Listen Receiver Specifications LR 500 Specifications RF Frequency Range 72MHz 72 05 75 95 MHz 216MHz 216 025 216 975 MHz Sensitivity BuV typical 1uV maximum for 1208 SINAD Max deviation at 70kHz Signal to Noise ratio 72MHz Wide band channels 6008 Narrow 54dB 216MHz Wide band channels 5008 Narrow 44dB Frequency Response 12 50Hz to 17kHz 3dB 216 50Hz to 10kHz 3dB Distortion 2 THD Squelch 40dB with loss of RF signal Antenna Uses headphone cable Available Channels 72MHz 17 wide band 40 narrow band 216MHz 19 wide band 38 narrow band see charts on pages 28 31 for details Physical Dimensions 3 Wx1 Dx5 H 76cm W x 2 5cm D x 13
234. ceivers Look amp Listen Display Descriptions Small dots indicate the relative RF signal strength When there is no signal the unit is squelched Indicates the unit is in PROGRAM mode to enter PROGRAM mode press UP and DOWN until the symbol In OPERATING mode this icon on the LCD display is indicates the channel is locked and shown cannot be changed by the user to lock unlock press the SEEK button Receiver LED Indicator steady Red LED Proper Operation slow Flashing Battery 15 Low Slow Flashing when Charging Unit is Charging Letters and numbers indicate the channel the unit is tuned to Battery indicator flashes slowing when charging quickly when almost discharged In PROGRAM mode PGM symbol is displayed icon indicates the channel is locked out and the user does until the LOCK symbol on the LCD Ms channel display is displayed not displayed e e LISTEN TECHNOLOGIES CORPORATION 1 801 233 8992 1 800 330 0891 Fax 1 801 233 8995 23 Internet www listentech com All specifications subject to change without notice Listen Receivers Door Lock 8 Batteries LR 400 and LR 500 Receiver Battery Status Icon The status of the battery is indicated by the battery symbol on the LCD When the battery is fully charged all three segments of the battery symbol will be displayed as shown As fewer battery segments are displayed the lower the battery lev
235. change without notice User Manual Digitool MX RGHITEGTLIRAL coustics M By Peavey Listen to This Intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated dangerous voltage within the product s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons Intended to alert the user of the presence of important operating and maintenance servicing instructions in the literature accompanying the product CAUTION Risk of electrical shock DO NOT OPEN CAUTION To reduce the risk of electric shock do not remove cover No user serviceable parts inside Refer servicing to qualified service personnel WARNING To prevent electrical shock or fire hazard do not expose this appliance to rain or moisture Before using this appliance read the operating guide for further warnings Este s mbolo tiene el prop sito de alertar al usuario de la presencia de voltaje peligroso sin aislamiento dentro de la caja del producto y que puede tener una magnitud suficiente como para constituir riesgo de descarga el ctrica Este s mbolo tiene el prop sito de alertar al usario de la presencia de instruccones importantes sobre la operaci n y mantenimiento en la informaci n que viene con el producto PRECAUCION Riesgo de descarga el ctrica iNO ABRIR PRECAUCION Para disminu r el riesgo de descarga el ctrica no abra la cubierta No hay piezas tiles den
236. ck limits duration ESPECIFICACIONES Id NAR Full 76A 116 166 131A 25 20A 39A US patents pending SPECIFICATIONS SUBJ TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE WARRAN T Y INFORMATION USA only see your clealer or clistributor Disclaimer GSC Audio Products Inc is not liable for any darrage to speakers 5 or any other equipment that is caused by negigence improper installation and or use of the PLX Product Warranty guarartees the PLX to be free from defective material and or workmanship for a period of three years fromthe date of sale and will replace defective parts and repair rralfunctioning products under this warranty when the defect occurs under normal installation and use provided the unit is returned to our factory Via prepaid transportation with a copy of the proof of purchase i e sales receipt This warranty provides that eanination of the retumed product must indicate in our judgrrent manufacturing defect This warranty does not extend to any product which has been subjected to misuse neglect acdident improper installation or where the date code has been rerroved or defaced INFORMATIONS DE GARANTIE E U consultez votre marchand ou clistributeur D charge Audio products Inc ne peut tre tenu responsable de tout dommage a des haut parleurs arrplificateu
237. cked 802 Series loudspeaker bi amped with AWCS Note Limiting is assigned to outputs 3 and 4 for protection of the AWCS Stacked 802 Series loudspeaker bi amped 125 Hz MA12 loudspeaker Preset Descriptions MA12 loudspeaker Full Range Wall Mount EQ Curve MA12 loudspeaker Full Range Free Field EQ Curve MA12 loudspeaker bi amped with 502 B loudspeaker MA12 loudspeaker bi amped with MB4 MA12 loudspeaker bi amped 160 Hz Stacked MA12 loudspeaker Full Range Wall Mount EQ Curve Stacked MA12 loudspeaker Full Range Free Field EQ Curve Stacked MA12 loudspeaker bi amped with 502B loudspeaker Stacked MA12 loudspeaker bi amped with MB4 Stacked MA12 loudspeaker bi amped 160Hz Output 1 80211 Mono High 80211 Mono High Output 1 MA12 Mono Full Range MA12 Mono Full Range MA12 Mono High MA12 Mono High MA12 Mono High MA12 Mono Full Range MA12 Mono Full Range MA12 Mono High MA12 Mono High MA12 Mono High Output 2 80211 Mono High 80211 Mono High Output 2 MA12 Mono Full Range MA12 Mono Full Range MA12 Mono High MA12 Mono High MA12 Mono High MA12 Mono Full Range MA12 Mono Full Range MA12 Mono High MA12 Mono High MA12 Mono High Output 3 802111 802111 Mono High Output 3 MA12 Mono Full Range MA12 Mono Full Range 502B Mono Low MB4 Mono Low MA12 Mono High MA12 Mono Full Ran
238. cm H Weight 1 Ib 45 kg with batteries Door CHANNEL and SEEK buttons are accessible through door lockable LR 500 Programmahility Allows only programmed channels to appear on the display user functions can be locked by pressing the Seek button for 3 seconds Power Two AA batteries high capacity alkaline or NIMH rechargeable external power connector 8 9 VDC tip positive lt 300mA Battery Charging Fully automatic 14 hours Battery Life 40 hours with high capacity alkaline 20 hours with rechargeable NiMH Headphone Output 750mW RMS maximum at 25kHz deviation 32 ohms 3 5MM mono or stereo LR 400 Specifications RF Frequency Range 72MHz 72 05 75 95 MHz 216MHz 216 025 216 975 MHz Sensitivity BuV typical 1uV maximum for 1208 SINAD Max deviation at 70kHz Signal to Noise ratio 72MHz Wide band channels 60dB Narrow 54dB 216MHz Wide band channels 50dB Narrow 44dB Frequency Response 72 50Hz to 17kHz 3dB 216 50Hz to 10kHz 3dB Distortion 2 THD Squelch 40dB with loss of RF signal Antenna Uses headphone cable Available Channels 72MHz 17 wide band 40 narrow band 216MHz 19 wide band 38 narrow band see charts on pages 28 31 for details Physical Dimensions 3 Wxl1 Dx5 H 76cm Wx 2 5cm D x 13cm H Weight lt 1 Ib 45 kg with batteries Door CHANNEL and SEEK buttons are accessible through door lockable Power Two AA batteries high capacity alkaline or NIMH recharge
239. cy MHz LTC Phonic Ear Comtek Williams Telex Drake GTNR 12 450 12 550 12 650 12 150 12 850 28 LISTEN TECHNOLOGIES CORPORATION 1 801 233 8992 1 800 330 0891 Fax 1 801 233 8995 Internet www listentech com All specifications are subject to change without notice 72MHz Frequency Compatibility Table continued Frequency MHz LTC Phonic Ear Comtek Williams Telex Drake GTNR 34 34 34 14 700 M l 74735 35 NS S Ze 74 150 mpra 36 36 Fi 1 350 75 375 75 400 75 425 75 450 75 475 22 aq 75 500 F 755 75 525 2 23 eal 75 550 EE 75 575 24 1 75 600 1 51 75 625 rear ee 75 700 75 750 75 775 75 800 75 825 O 30 oe 15 900 15 925 e LISTEN TECHNOLOGIES CORPORATION 1 801 233 8992 1 800 330 0891 Fax 1 801 233 8995 29 Internet www listentech com All specifications subject to change without notice 216MHz Frequency Compatibility Table Frequency LTC Williams C sl Comtek Phonic E Telex Drake Gentner MHz 216 5250 216 5375 216 5500 216 5625 216 5750 216 5875 216 6000 216 6125 216 6250 216 6375 216 6500 IN 216 6750 216 6875 216 7000 216 7125 1P 216 7250 216 7375 216 7500 216 7625 216 7750 216 7875 216 8000 A mam S 1 216 825
240. d Exposure to extremely high noise levels may cause a permanent hearing loss Individuals vary considerably in susceptibility to noise induced hearing loss but nearly everyone will lose some hearing if exposed to sufficiently intense noise for a sufficient time The U S Government s Occupational and Health Administration OSHA has specified the following permissible noise level exposures Sound Duration Per Day In Hours Sound Level dBA Slow Response 8 90 6 92 4 95 3 97 2 100 11 2 102 1 105 1 2 110 1 4 or less 115 According to OSHA any exposure in excess of the above permissible limits could result in some hearing loss Ear plugs or protectors to the ear canals or over the ears must be worn when operating this amplification system in order to prevent a permanent hearing loss if exposure is in excess of the limits as set forth above To ensure against potentially dangerous exposure to high sound pressure levels it is recommended that all persons exposed to equipment capable of producing high sound pressure levels such as this amplification system be protected by hearing protectors while this unit is in operation SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS Applications The Digitool MX is a fully programmable audio processing and control system It includes advanced parallel DSP processing a multi layer front panel display and multiple interface and control options Signal processing is accomplished using two 32 bit parallel SHARC processors
241. d tectart la nontant d c terrert et r agissant en cons quence Les entr es syrr trigues utilisent des r sistances de pr cision 0 1 afin d obtenir un facteur de diff rence COMPR tres Les composantes de pr dsion utilis es dans les filtres d entr e et aux autres tages du drait audio assurert une reproduction des plus fiddles Arr t L anplificateur passe en sourdine aussit t qu on l teirt lirrinart ainsi tout bruit ult rieur Toute panne rrajeure d denchera le bloc dalirmmentatiory le circuit de commutation haute fr quence est d sengage en quelques microsecondes afin de limiter les d amp g ts INNERER AUFBAU High Perfomance Audio Hoch gsschwindigkeitstransistoren wandeln diese Geichspamungsleistung in Audiosignale nit voller Bandbreite um welche zumBetrieb der Lautsprecher verwendet werden Ein Hochleistungs Schaltungsaufbeu und zweifache Aus gangs berpr fung korrigert Fehler auf beiden Seiten der Lautsprecheran faktor und steuert die Laubsprecherbe wegungen Leistungskomponenten sind direkt Mit isolierten K hlk rpem verbunden Zur Erzielung optinaler K hlung bilden diese K hlk rper eine breite Luftschleuse direkt vor einem L fter Ein Thenvof hler imK hlk rper jedes Kanals nift die Temperatur und steuert Loftergeschwind gkeit thenmisches Abschalten und die Steu erung des BIAS wodurch h chste Audioqualit t bei allen Betriebstem peraturen und Signalpegeln
242. d by the CH2 input This signal will be routed to Outputs CH3 and If this is full range preset the same EQ will be applied to Outputs CH3 and CHA If this preset consists of a mid high device with a bass loudspeaker the mid high frequencies will be routed to Output CH3 and the low frequencies will be routed to Output Note If you only have a connection plugged into Input 1 the signal will only pass through Outputs 1 and 2 If you only have a signal plugged into Input 2 the signal will only pass through Outputs 3 and 4 If you want to send the same audio information to both of the PANARAY system digital controller s inputs you can achieve this in two ways 1 From your mixer set all of your pan controls to center position this will sum your information to mono Next plug the left and right outputs from your mixer into CH1 and CH2 on the PANARAY system digital controller 2 From a mono source use a Y cable to send the same information into CH1 and Ch2 on the PANARAY system digital controller 5 4 PRESET Button Dual Mono Bank Dual Mono Presets Independent selection of two single mono presets Example 1 Dual Mono PANARAY System Digital Controller Display Le 8021 114502B 2 402TI MB4 OUTPUTS Presets Preset 1 802 Ill Speaker with 5028 Speaker Mono Preset 2 402 Il Speaker with MB4 Speaker Mono From mixer Controller Inputs Ch 1 Source 1 from mixer Source Source
243. d by the laws of the state of Utah Listen will only accept returned products with prepaid shipping and with a return authorization number To receive a return authorization number call 1 800 330 0891 or 1 801 233 8992 vef Kormance SATISFACTION SN nte Listen will refund the purchase price of the product to the original purchaser within the first ninety days after purchase if the product does not perform better than a similar competitive product subject to an annual amount to any one original purchaser not to exceed 51 000 and subject to the conditions of this limited warranty This is called our Whatever It takes Performance Guarantee Refunds will only be given to the original purchaser of product once the product has been returned to the factory in good working order with an explanation for the refund To receive a refund call Listen for a return authorization number Return the product with a letter on the end user s letterhead stating the reason for the refund and a copy of the original invoice If the product was purchased through a dealer refunds must be processed through the original dealer In the first ninety days after purchase any defective product will be replaced with a new unit After ninety days Listen will at its own discretion either replace the unit with a new unit or a unit of similar type and condition Product that is not covered under warranty shall be replaced with a unit of similar type
244. d channels and 40 narrow band channels letters wide band and numbers narrow band channels m At216MHz the 17 700 operates on 19 wide band channels and 38 narrow band channels channels beginning with 2 wide band and channels beginning with 1 or 3 narrow band channels Or connect optional Line Level Input Cable use optional Listen supplied line input cable LA 263 or connect as follows Microphone Ground Line Input Please refer to the Frequency Compatibility Tables Pages 28 31 for specific frequencies Turn the unit on it does not turn on by pressing power button check to ensure you have installed charged m NOTE Operating on a narrow band channel will have batteries and that the batteries have been installed with the more noise roper polarity proper polarity Close the access door If you choose lock the door by rotating the 2 LED should light up bu locks on the right side 1 4 turn clockwise red when ON a en Ce and on the left side 1 4 turn counter T 1 Turn POWER on clockwise This be done with a small E A 3 LCD display Dy pressing screwdriver or pocketknife should show button turn off 058 battery level Dy again n On both the right logo and left side lock door by turning slot vertical as shown 14 LISTEN TECHNOLOGIES CORPORATION 1 801 233 8992 1 800 330 0891 Fax 1 801 233 8995 Internet www listentec
245. d manually as described above 4 2 3 Manual track division or being divided automatically 4 3 2 Automatic track division At any time within record or record ready mode turn the MULTI JOG control 41 or use the SKIP keys This sets the number of remaining tracks as shown to the right of the time display The maximum num ber here is limited by the standard limit of 99 tracks and the number of tracks currently recorded In other words if 8 tracks have already been recorded on Aus 9148 99 If 49 tracks have already been 2 disc the maximum value that can be set here Every time a track division is made the number shown at the right of the display goes down by one When the number shown is 1 gone a track division 1 1S made the display shows F iir itinudand the unit enters stop Su The number of remaining tracks can be changed dur ing recording using the MULTI JOG control 4 2 5 Full disc If recording a long program and the number of tracks has not been restricted when there is no space remaining on the disc for recording as shown by the time display see 4 2 2 Time display while record ing just before the end of the disc is reached the unit starts a fade out over a few seconds the display shows F HOE en ine fade out nag finished the display shows Dizc F for a few seconds and unit then goes into stop msi the display shows F ihing If the disc is a CD RW the f
246. de 00mm permet un contr le du niveau global de signal dans la voie permet l quilibrage pr cis des divers signaux de source m lang s dans le mixage final La SENSIBILITE d entr e doit tre r gl e correctement pour utiliser toute la course du potentiom tre Voir la section r glages Initiaux la page 9 pour le r glage correct du niveau de signal O TOUCHES D AFFECTATION En appuyant sur ces touches le signal de voie peut tre dirig vers le mix age st r o final ou vers une paire de sorties groupes 1 2 3 4 Selon la position du PANoramique le signal sera dirig proportionnellement vers la gauche 1 3 ou vers la droite 2 4 Lorsqu on appuie sur la touche MONO le signal est dirig vers une sortie mono s par e et n est donc pas affect par le panoramique 15 QD rr Quand la touche PFL est enfonc e le signal PRE FADE apr s correcteur est envoy au casque la sortie coute et aux afficheurs o il remplace la source choisie La Led PFL adjacente s illumine pour indentifier la voie s lectionn e et la Led PFL AFL sur la section principale s illumine pour avertir qu une pr coute est activ e Cela permet d couter n importequel signal d entr e sans interrompre le m lange principal pour faire des r glages ou rep rer des probl mes Lorsque la touche PFL est rel ch e la Led sert d indicateur de cr te en s illu minant 4dB environ avant saturation pour pr venir d une surcharge possible Le si
247. de of operation On Off Each delay provides up to 200ms of delay on each of the four outputs increments in 0 02ms intervals Use the Arrow UP and Arrow DOWN buttons to navigate through the parameters and use the 0 00ms 200 00ms Encoder wheel to select parameter values 0 00ms 200 00ms The four output delays have the following parameters 0 00ms 200 00ms Delay time 4 0 00ms 200 00ms Delay On Off Bypasses delay Delay Time Adjustable in 0 02ms increments 24 7 0 LIMITER Button Pressing the LIMITER button provides access to four independent output limiters that can protect the loudspeakers from damage if an operator overdrives the system Use the Arrow UP and Arrow DOWN buttons to navigate through the parameters and use the ENCODER wheel to select parameter values The four output limiters each have the the following parameters Limiter On Off Bypasses the limiter Threshold Sets the level at which the limiter will activate When the input signal exceeds the threshold the limiter will be activated The lower the threshold the more sensitive the limiting will be Ratio The ratio of gain reduction For example if the ratio is set to 4 1 it means that for every 4dB the actual audio signal will rise only 1dB over the threshold Attack The time it takes the limiter to reach gain reduction specified by the ratio parameter when the signal is above the set threshold Release Release is the time th
248. ded for the transmitted audio source i ten LISTEN TECHNOLOGIES CORPORATION 1 801 233 8992 1 800 330 0891 Fax 1 801 233 8995 9 Internet www listentech com All specifications are subject to change without notice LT 800 Stationary Transmitter Operation Selecting a Channel Operating the LT 800 Make sure the unit is powered on Press POWER button and verify power connections When ON display should be lit Select a channel select the channel to transmit on to by pressing the channel UP and DOWN buttons See Selecting a Channel to Transmit On to the right Can t change the channel may be locked Press both the UP and DOWN buttons simultaneously for 3 seconds until the decimal dot next to the channel turns off Press again to lock in new channel if desired At 72MHz The LT 800 at 72MHz operates on 17 wide band channels and 40 narrow band channels Letters Wide Band Channels Numbers Narrow Band Channels At 216MHZz The 17 800 at 216MHz operates on 19 wide band channels and 38 narrow band channels 2 as left digit wide band channel 1 and 3 left digits narrow band channels Please refer to the Frequency Compatibility Tables Pages 28 31 for specific frequencies and compatibility with other manufacturers m NOTE Operating on a narrow band channel will have more noise Test Tone if necessary To broadcast a tone press the test tone button This button is
249. der Sektion wird die spezifische Frequenz eingestellt In der HMID Sektion liegt der Einstellbereich von 550 Hz bis 13 kHz und in der LMID Sektion liegt der Einstellbereich von 50 Hz bis 1 9 kHz Beide Bereiche k nnen jew eils mit dem unteren Regler um 15 dB verst rkt oder abgeschw cht werden Dieser Teil der EQ Sektion eignet sich besonders zum Herausfiltern und Hervorheben bes timmter Klang Eigenschaften So liegen z B die Gesangsstimmen zumeist auch im Mittenbereich Wenn Sie keinen Frequenzbereich in diesem Teil der EQ Sektion verst rken oder abschw chen m chten dann m ssen die 15 dB Regler jeweils in Mittenposition stehen Der Q Faktor betr gt 1 5 LF EQ Drehen des Reglers im Uhrzeigersinn verst rkt die tiefen Frequenzen bis max 60 Hz um bis zu 15 dB und eignet sich besonders f r klangliche W rme f r Gesang oder f r den zus tzlichen Druck Extra Punch bei Synthesizern Gitarren und Drums Drehen entgegen gesetzt des Uhrzeigersinns reduziert Brummen B hnen Schwingungen und verbessert dr hnenden Sound Wenn dieser Frequenzbereich weder verst rkt noch abgeschw cht werden soll mu der Regler in Mittenposition stehen O insert Le point d insertion asym trique pr correcteur est une rupture dans le circuit de voie permettant d ins rer des limiteurs des compresseurs un correcteur sp cial ou d autres appareils de traitement de signaux Linsertion utilise une embase jack 6 35 st r o qui est normale
250. dificateur Assurez vous que les interrupteurs PARALLEL et BRIDGE sort en position CHE Assurez vous que les autres quiperrents dans la chaine audio aano soitles pr arpificeteurs rrixers ou autres sont r gl s en mode st r o et non en nono FEHLERBEHEBUNG Problem Verzerrungen gt ANZEICHE CLIP LED BLINKT Fallsdiercte CLIPLEDDBinkt bevor alle drei Signal Arveigen auf leuchten ist de angeschlossene Last entweder zu niedrig oder kurzge schossen Schiefsen Sie jeden Laut sprecher einen nach demanderen auf der Verst rkerseite ao Wennde CLIP LED enisdt wenn ein Kabel abgeschlossen wird weisen ent weder Kabel oder Lautsprecher einen Kurzschlu auf Versuchen Sie ein anderes Kabal sprecher umden Fehler zu finden gt ANZEICHE CLIP ANZEIGE BLINKT NICHT Hier liegt de Ursache wahr scheinlich bei einemfehlerhaften Lautsprecher oder einem kontakt berpr fen Sie de Verkabelung und versuchen Sie einen anderen Lautsprecher Die Signalquelle kann verzerren Halten Sie die Gain Regler etwa halb aufgedreht damit die Quelle nicht bersteuert werden mus Problem keine Kanaltrennung berpr fen Sie die frontseitigen gelben PARALLEL oder BRIDGE MONOLE 5 welche die Schalter stellung auf der R ckseite arveigen Keine sollte imAweikanal Biarrp oder Stereobetrieb aufleuchten bei denen unterschiedliche Signale den individuellen Kan len zugef hrt werden Stellen Sie
251. ducing stage rumble or popping from microphones EQUALISER The Equaliser EQ allows fine manipulation of the sound particularly to improve the sound in live PA applications where the original signal is often far from ideal and where slight boosting or cutting of particular voice frequencies can really make a difference to clarity There are three sections giving the sort of control usually only found on much larger mixers The EQ knobs can have a dramatic effect so use them sparingly and listen carefully as you change any settings so that you get to know how they affect the sound HF EQ Turn to the right to boost high treble frequencies above 2kHz by up to 15dB adding crispness to cymbals vocals and electronic instruments Turn to the left to cut by up to 15dB reducing hiss or excessive sibilance which can occur with certain types of microphone Set the knob in the centre detented position when not required MID EQ There are two knobs which work together to form a SWEPT MID EQ The lower knob provides I5dB of boost and cut just like the HF EQ knob but the frequency at which this occurs can be set by the upper knob over a range of 240Hz to 6kHz This allows some truly creative improvement of the signal in live situations because this mid band covers the range of most vocals Listen carefully as you use these controls together to find how particular characteristics of a vocal signal can be enhanced or reduced Set the lower knob
252. ducteur ne soit expos s serrer le corps du connecter utiliser une pi ce de rronnaie si n cessaire Mockles non europsens seuerrert Les cosses fourche devraient avoir un corps isol afin de pr venir les risques de choc ledrique AMERTISSEMENT Afin cde pr venir les risques de choc lectrique ne pas utiliser l anplificateur si une portion de conducteur du fil de haut parleur est expos e Connexions pour Utilisation en modes st r o ou parall le Connexions pour utilisation en mode port nono Voir les instructions et pr cautions suiwe pour le branche nert en mode port mono en page 12 CABLAGE DU HAUT PARLEUR Les cables de fort calibres et les courtes distances mininisert a la fois les pertes de puissance et la d gradation du coefficient danortisserert Evitez de placer les Cables de haut parleurs proximit des cables dertr e Tension utilisation alimentation CA Vous devez vous assurer de raccorder l arrplificateur une source de courant alternatif de tension corecte tel Quindiqu sur l tiquette du numero de s rie Connecter une source de Gourart autre quindiqu est dangereux et pourrait encommager l ervificereur ANSCHL SSE Anschiusskiemnen O Des Kabelende nicht langer als 13 nmabisolienen Des Kabelende kordet einf hren ohne das blanker Draht sicHiber bleibt Klemme festorehen M rze benutzen falls notwendig Nur bei au ereurop isch
253. e As the signal increases the green SIGNAL 2048 and 1008 LED indicators light respectively at 0 1 1 and 10 of full power The red CLIPLED indicator flashes during overload dipping A bright steady gow indicates protective muting If this occurs during use see Troubleshooting The yellow BRIDGE LED indicates the anpis in bridged mono mode The yellow PARALLEL LED indicates the Parallel Input switches are set UTILISATION Interrupteur cd alimentation Avert de rrettre l arrplificateur en marche v rifiez toutes les connexione et femrezles contdles de gain A la mise en marche la fonction Soft start est active avec comre indication l allurrage de la DEL POVVER deni intersit Quelques secondes plus tard le ventilateur d nrane et l anplificateur passe en mode protection pour une seconde tel quiindiqu parla DEL CLIP Qui passe au rouge La DEL POWER passe alors pleine intensit et l arrglificateur est pr t fonctionner Controles de gain Les contr les de gain a taquets penret les r ajusterrents r p t s Le gain en tension de l arrglification est indiqu en dB Le gain meximumest de 40 gt soit 432 cB Incicateurs DEL A pleine intersite la DEL diode lectrolurrinescerte verte de POWER indique que amplificateur est en mardhe A deni intensit elle indique que est en mise en marche Au fur et rresure que le niveau de signal augrrente le
254. e 100mm FADER gives you smooth control of the overall signal level in the channel strip allowing precise balancing of the various source signals being mixed to the Master Section It is important that the input level is set correctly to give maximum travel on the fader which should normally be used at around the 0 mark See the Initial Set Up sec tion on page 16 for help in setting the right level 12 PFL When the latching PFL switch is pressed the pre fade signal is fed in mono to the head phones control room output and meters where it replaces the selected monitor source MIX SUB or 2TK The PFL AFL LED on the Master section illuminates to warn that a PFL is active The Left and Right meters display the PFL signal in mono This is a useful way of listening to any required input signal without interrupting the main mix for making adjustments or tracing problems Page 13 SPIRIT FOLIO MASTER SECTION 1 PHANTOM POWER Many professional condenser mics need PHANTOM POWER which is a method of sending a powering voltage down the same wires as the mic signal Press the switch to enable the 48V power to all of the MIC inputs The adjacent LED illuminates when the power is active TAKE CARE when using unbalanced mics which may be damaged by the phantom power voltage Balanced dynamic mics can normally be used with phantom power switched on contact your micro Lo e d ___2 phone manufacturer for guidance OO
255. e Worldwide compatible power supply e Stadiums e Music Clubs e Auditoriums e Hotel Meeting Rooms e Civic Centers e Conference Centers e Performing Arts Centers e Schools e Theaters e Sports Bars e Courts of Law e Cruise Ships e Houses of Worship e Teleconferencing e Theme Parks e Paging Systems e Arenas e Any facility requiring distribution of e University Campus Buildings multiple line level signals Front Panel MULTI PROCESSOR gt J 24 RCHITECTURAL v INPUT DIGITOOL MX COUSTICS PROGRAMMABLE AUDIO UTPUT PELMEYS 1 PROGRAM WHEEL This control navigates the display as well as performing parameter changes on functions with more than three settable parameters It is used to scroll through the various functions and to select among items such as inputs outputs and hardware configuration 2 LCD DISPLAY This screen gives a graphical representation of unit configuration and parameter settings The layout of the screen and the information conveyed will depend on the function being monitored or set 3 PARAMETER CONTROLS These controls are used to adjust the settings of the displayed effect Their individual function will depend on the effect being displayed 4 ACTIVE LEDs These LEDs eight input and eight output will illuminate as an indication of the active inputs and outputs Rear Panel DIGITOOL MX SERA CONTROL 5 MOUNT IN RACK ONLY
256. e a Unbalanced Direct Output Control Room L 4 R Stereo Inputs Tip 1 RING SLEEVE Sleeve 5 1 z TIP SLEEVE Sleeve gt 1 Centre E Screen Tip Sleeve Sleeve TIP SLEEVE SLEEVE TIP Tip 0 e E RING SLEEVE SLEEVE KING TIP Sleeve Sleeve Tip Centre Sleeve Screen SLEEVE Ti p Centre King RING SLEEVE Sleeve Screen sum 2 2 3 3 Insert Leads Mono Inserts Mix L amp Inserts AZ Tip Send SLEEVE Tip Sleeve Ring RING SLEEVE Sleeve Tip Return Sleeve SLEEVE 1 2 Send Tip 3 Ring RING SLEEVE Sleeve 1 2 Return 5 S Centre Send Tip Screen Ring Sleeve Centre Retur RING SLEEVE i Ocreen Page 27 Y Leads Balanced Where used Aux Mix outpute SLEEVE RING RING SLEEVE SLEEVE RING RING SLEEVE Headphone Splitter RING SLEEVE Headphone Separator SLEEVE T TIP RING SLEEVE SLEEVE TIP RING SLEEVE Y Leads Unbalanced SLEEVE RING RING SLEEVE SLEEVE RING SLEEVE TIP SLEEVE SLEEVE u
257. e accentue de 1598 les fr quences hautes aigu s au dessus de 2kHz ajoutant de la brillance aux cymbales aux voix et aux instruments lectroniques Tourn vers la gauche il attenue ces fr quences jusqu 1588 en r duisant le souffle excessif qui peut se produire avec certains types de microphone La position neutre est rep r e par un d clic central HAUTS ET BAS MEDIUMS Deux potentiom tres travaillent ensemble pour corriger les m diums Le potentiom tre inf rieur accentue ou r duit 15948 comme le poten tiom tre du correcteur d aigu s mais la fr quence d action peut tre r gl e par le potentiom tre sup rieur sur une plage de 550Hz 3kHz HMID ou de 80Hz 1 9kHz LMID Ceci permet une am lioration v ritablement cr atrice du signal en sonorisation cette bande m dium couvrant la plage de la plupart des voix Ecoutez soigneusement lorsque vous utilisez ces commandes pour trouver comment les caract ristiques particuli res d un signal vocal peuvent tre am lior es La position neutre est rep r e par un d clic central Note Le coefficient Q est fix 1 5 GRAVES Tourn vers la droite ce potentiom tre accentue de l5dB les basses fr quences graves au dessous de 60Hz en ajoutant de la chaleur aux vocaux ou du punch suppl mentaire aux synth tiseurs aux guitares et aux batteries Tourn vers la gauche il coupe ces fr quences de 1548 pour r duire le ronflement ou pour claircir un son
258. e and White Noise The frequency range of the sine wave generator is 10 to 20 kHz The attenuation range is 127 to o dBFS Refer to Figure 16 for the panel view PRIORITY OVERRIDE Channel one provides a priority override of channels two through eight The Priority View provides the user with the ability to enable and select any or all channels for override Figure 17 The Priority function is implemented via the channel one gate When the channel one gate threshold is reached and Priority is enabled the selected override channels will be attenuated by an envelope set by the channel one gate attack decay and floor settings That is if the channel one gate attack is set for 10 ms then slave channels will attenuate with the same attack time Similarly the decay and floor settings for channel one will determine the attenuation floor and decay recovery of the slave channels The Priority Override acts on the gates of the slave channels The gates for each slave channel still operate normally as gates until the Priority condition becomes true In addition the Priority Override acts on the slave channel gates even if the gate function is disabled assuming that priority override is enabled for that channel UPGRADING DIGITOOL DigiTool firmware and DSP code can be upgraded using a Flash utility which is available from the Peavey web site The Flash utility is a Windows based application that allows the user to connect to the Digitool via the
259. e asyr trique Cans la cha ne rencka la cha ne asyrr trique avec tous les d savantages de ce type de NOTE d sengager les interrupteurs parallel inputs Quand vous amenez cles signaux differents aux deux canaux AUSSTATTUNG amp EINSTELLUNGEN Parallelbetrieb BESCHREIBUNG Durch de Parallel Input Schalter kann der Verst rker parallel betrieben werden wobei das gleiche Signal beiden Kan len zugef hrt wird J eder Verst rkerkanal treibt dabei seinen eigenen Lautsprecher nit urebPergogsr Verst rkung Filterung und Spitzenbegrenzung Stellen Sie die Schalterpositionen 4 5 und 6 auf ON umde Eingange zu verkoppeln Schalten Sie die Schalter aus f r Stereo oder einen anderen 2 Kanalbetrieb Die gelbe PARALLEL LED auf der Frontplatte leuchtet auf wenn Parallelbetrieb gew hlt wurde Mit parallelgeschalteten Eing ngen k nnen die anderen Eingangsstecker benutzt werden umdas Signal an weitere Verst rker zu liefem Schalten Sie die Eing nge parallel wenn zwei Lautsprecher mit einem Signal angefahren und dabei aber separate Verst rkung Filterung oder Begrenzung benutzt werden soll Wahlen Sie Bridged Mono Mode Monobr ckenbetrieb umdie Signale zus tdiche Verst rker mit Hilfe der brigen Eingangsbuchsen zu verbinden siehe auch Seite 12 f r weitere Erl ukerungen BITTE BEACHTEN SIE Vem Sie ein symmretrisches Eingangssig nal anlegen benutzen
260. e internal PRE POST switch 13 accessible through an aper ture covered by a grommet beside the fader on channel see below DIRECT DIRECT OUT 1 8 POST FADE PRE FADE In the POST FADER position the outputs may be used as individual effects sends or to provide fader control of recording levels in a studio recording application For live recording the outputs would normally be set to PRE FADE so that the direct output levels remain unaffected by fader settings for the main PA mix The direct output level may be monitored by pressing the PFL switch on the appro priate channel to feed the pre fade signal to the monitors and the bargraph meters In applications where more than 8 tracks are being created the Direct outputs may be split to feed multiple tape tracks in blocks of 8 and individual tracks enabled on the recorder Note also that the insert sends may also be used as an alternative pre fade pre EQ direct output using a lead with tip and ring shorted together so that the signal path is not interrupted Refer to page 9 for an example Page 18 SPIRIT FOLIO USING THE FOLIO SX ON LOCATION The FOLIO SX may be powered from DC source of 11 18V using the optional Portapower unit for applications where a source of mains power is unavailable Contact your dealer for further details quoting Spirit Part No 222849 PORTAPOWER SPIRIT FOLIO By Soundcraft AUX 1 AUX 2 AUX3 00 ee 99 Go 2TK 14
261. e just as the input signal reaches full scale Note that this formula is given only to provide a mechanism to maximize dynamic range It is not intended to compensate for average signal loss due to the compression Inrutchannzcli GALM a JE Frog Low hclr ATTACK amp DECAY The Attack and Decay functions are accessed via the PROGRAM WHEEL Attack sets the amount of time for the compressor to respond once the threshold has been met Decay determines the amount of time for the compressor to recover from a compressed state once the input signal strength falls below the threshold The adjustment range for each control is 1 to 1000 ms 5 5k 10k 20k Editing of an output channel object is identical to editing an input process The following signal processes b Figures 10a and 10b Low shelving EQ panel view a and boost cut response curves 11 5 BAND PARAGRAPHIC There is a five band paragraphic equalizer for each output compressor Ir channel Functionally each band operates identically to the Attack parametrics of the input stage Paragraphics named as such Decay Soon to differentiate their control facility from a graphic equalizer which has fixed bandwidth and frequency From the Digitool 4 0 front panel they are presented as parametric equalizers with a their frequencies centered on five octaves They are 160 640 oppo xerrsessonumenmmocunv
262. e le risque d incendie ou de choc lectrique ne pas exposer le syst me la pluie ou l humidit ATTENTION RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE NE PAS OUVRIR ATTENTION AFIN DE REDUIRE LE RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE NE PAS RETIRER LE CAPOT DE L APPAREIL OU SON PANNEAU ARRI RE IL N EXISTE A L INTERIEUR DE CET EQUIPEMENT AUCUN ELEMENT OU SOUS ENSEMBLE POUVANT ETRE DEPANNE PAR L UTILISATEUR LA MAINTENANCE DOIT ETRE REALISEE PAR UN PERSONNEL QUALIFIE Ces signalisations d AVERTISSEMENT sont peut tre situ es del PANARAY System Digital Controller L clair termin par une fl che et contenu dans un triangle quilat ral est pr vu pour attirer l attention de l utilisateur sur la pr sence l int rieur du produit de tensions dangereuses appliqu es certains l ments non prot g s Ces tensions sont d une magnitude suffisamment importante pour constituer un risque de choc lectrique ou d lectrocution Le point d exclamation contenu dans un triangle quilat ral est pr vu pour avertir N l utilisateur sur la pr sence d instructions importantes de fonctionnement ou de maintenance sur le produit et dans ce manuel Consignes de s curit importantes 1 Lisez et appliquez les instructions donn es dans ce document 2 Soyez attentif tous les avertissements Ceux figurant sur l appareil et ceux d livr s dans ce guide 3 N utilisez pas cet appareil proximit d eau ou d humidit
263. e source is not connected or is not switched on Cannot record on a A finalized disc has been inserted Use disc pressing an unfinalized recordable disc RECORD shows MOHITOR An attempt has been made to create more than 25 program steps Full or There is no space on the disc or no tracks are available or a general record ing error has occurred You are trying to record digitally from a second generation digital copy Try ana log recording 4 3 3 SCMS and the CD RW700 You are trying to do digital direct record ing from a source which has not been recorded at 44 1 kHz 4 3 4 Digital direct Auto track is not on when an attempt is being made to rehearse track split times An attempt has been made to set timer recording 2 5 3 Using the timer with a non recordable disc or no disc Disc Error The disc is bad If it is a CD RW disc you may refresh it 5 2 3 Refreshing a disc otherwise replace the disc An error has occurred while trying to erase the disc The display suddenly Either the disc is full ia cus n shows FHA be prefaced by F Writing 4 2 5 Full disc 0 oran i attempt has been mode to write more than 99 tracks General recording error This may be caused by vibration or a shock during recording for example or may be the result of a bad disc Try recording again with the same disc If the message appears again try a different disc OFC Area Appears onl
264. e the product from the shipping container and plastic cover Inspect for physical damage See Technical Service Contacts Page 4 if damage has occurred WARNING Do not place the BATTERY SELECT switch in the i NiMH position wh ing Non Nickel Metal Hydri Check to see if the door is locked if ckea position when using Non Wickel Metal Hydride batteries The NiMH position will attempt to charge the use a pocketknife or small screwdriver to unlock the door locks on the both sides of the unit To unlock the door rotate batteries Charging non Nickel Metal Hydride batteries may the lock 1 4 turn counter clockwise result in physical harm destruction of property and or fire isten To unlock door both the right and left side unlock by turning slot horizontal as shown LISTEN TECHNOLOGIES CORPORATION 1 801 233 8992 1 800 330 0891 Fax 1 801 233 8995 21 Internet www listentech com All specifications subject to change without notice Listen Receivers Preparation Continued Operation On the LR 400 and LR 500 LCD display should illuminate when unit is on Place Batteries in Unit Place two AA batteries in the compartment making note of the battery polarity shown in the battery compartment and again verifying that the BATTERY SELECT switch is switched correctly for your batteries see Step 4 Top of Unit and Battery Compartment Place an earpiece or headset in the mini jack on the top of the unit
265. eado balanceado 4 Stereoklinke TRS no balanceado non inverting input 5 NRIANDIS To Channel 1 speaker Vers l enceinte canal 1 Zum Lautsprechersystem Kanal 1 A la bocina canal 1 To Channel 2 speaker Vers l enceinte canal 2 Zum Lautsprechersystem Kanal 2 A la bocina canal 2 2 channels canals Karxile canals amp 2 Speakons Stereo bi arrp or parallel mode Modes stereo bi arrp ou parall le Stereo Bi anp oder Parallelbetriel Modos est reo bi arrp o paralelo To Channel 1 speaker Vers l enceinte canal 1 Zum Lautsprechersystem Kanal 1 A la bocina canal 1 To Channel 2 speaker Vers l enceinte canal 2 Zum Lautsprechersystem Kanal 2 A la bocina canal 2 Channel 2 Canal 2 Kanal 2 ee 2 channels canals Karxile canals amp 1 Speakon Stereo bi anp or parallel mode Modes stereo bi arrp ou parall le Stereo Bi Anp oder Modos est reo bi arrp o paralelo NFUTANDIS To speaker e is A y GAIL Vers l enceinte Manes 2 aruma Zum Lautsprechersystem A la bocina 3 mo INFUISIN 2 J eR MoE 2 2 aruma MESHES m d d Bridged mono Mono port
266. ecen siempre POST FADER QD pan Este control ajusta la cantidad de se al del canal que ataca los buses de mezcla izquierdo y derecho permiti ndole mover suavemente la fuente a trav s de la imagen est reo Cuando el control se encuentra totalmente girado a la izquier da o a la derecha podr colocar la se al con ganancia unidad individualmente tanto en las salidas izquierda o derecha respectivamente MUTE Todas las salidas del canal excepto las insertadas est n activas cuando el bot n Mute est soltado y silenciadas cuando el bot n est pulsado dejando los niveles en pre set antes de que la se al sea requerida FADER El 100mm Fader permite un balance preciso de las varias fuentes de se ales para ser mezcladas en la secci n M ster Puede conseguir un mayor control cuando la entrada de sensibilidad est colocada correctamente dejando al fader entero recorrido Vea la secci n de Ajustes y Soluci n de Problemas en la p gina 20 si necesita ayuda para ajustar una se al de nivel apropiada QD routine La se al del canal puede dirigirse a la mezcla est reo principal o a pares de buses de grupo 1 2 3 4 pulsando los conmutadores respectivos envi ndose propor cionalmente la se al a la izquierda 1 3 o a la derecha 2 4 dependiendo de la posici n del control PAN 11 La se al del canal puede tambi n dirigirse a bus mono separado pulsando el conmutador MONO que no se ve afectado por el control de panor
267. ed here Or e the sound level drops below the threshold level for five seconds level s HEC pause 5 seconds time If you set the threshold value so that only high level signals trigger recording remember that this will not record the start of a piece with a slow fade in level Recording starts This part of the track is not recorded time Also remember that when recording from an analog source the threshold should be set so that it 1s higher than the noise floor the base level of hiss pops 4 Recording Advanced recording and crackles which may come from an older vinyl recording for example If the noise floor is higher than the threshold synchronized recording will not take place the rehearsal facility can be used here 4 4 Rehearsal to help level Start of track is not registered Noise is higher than threshold time Because synchronized recording can be turned on and off while recording is taking place it is therefore possible to record with a synchronized automatic start and a manual end or vice versa When the source material is being played back before synchronized recording is enabled the condi tions under which synchronized recording will start after synchronized recording has been enabled are When the signal drops below the threshold for one second or more and then rises above the threshold again this 15 the general condition of which starting synchroniz
268. ed recording from a stopped or paused source is a special case Recording starts At least 1 level second time Alternatively when recording digitally from sources MD CD and DAT which output track divisions synchronized recording starts when a track division is received regardless of the level Track signal from source starts recording level time To stop synchronized recording 1 Theunit must be in record mode and the SYNC indicator in the display must be lit 2 Stop the source After a few seconds the unit enters record ready mode The time between the stopping of the source and entering record ready mode is used to record a gap at the end of the track 3 If no changes are made to the unit s controls restarting the source restarts recording as the unit is still in sync mode and will start record ing again when the source is detected When recording in sync mode you may notice a slight delay between starting the source and the CD RW700 responding This is due to the way in which the unit works storing the data in a memory buffer before writing it to the disc The resulting delay is therefore not a cause for concern all audio data received between the start and end points will be recorded 4 3 2 Automatic track division The trigger level as set above 4 3 1 Synchronized recording can also be used to divide tracks if the A TRACK auto track function is enabled When this function
269. ed with FreeSpace 1B loudspeaker Output 1 LT4402 Mono Full Range LT4402 Mono Full Range LT4402 Mono High LT4402 Mono High Output 1 LT9702 Mono Full Range LT9702 Mono Full Range LT9702 Mono High LT9702 Mono High Output 1 M8 Mono Full Range M8 Mono High M8 Mono High M8 Mono High Output 2 LT4402 Mono Full Range LT4402 Mono Full Range LT4402 Mono High LT4402 Mono High Output 2 LT9702 Mono Full Range LT9702 Mono Full Range LT9702 Mono High LT9702 Mono High Output 2 M8 Mono Full Range M8 Mono High M8 Mono High M8 Mono High Output 3 LT4402 Mono Full Range LT4402 Mono Full Range MBA Mono Low 502BEX Mono Low Output 3 LT9702 Mono Full Range LT9702 Mono Full Range MB4 Mono Low 502BEX Mono Low Output 3 M8 Mono Full Range MB4 Mono Low FS3 Mono Low FS1B Mono Low Output 4 LT4402 Mono Full Range LT4402 Mono Full Range MBA Mono Low 502BEX Mono Low Output 4 LT9702 Mono Full Range LT9702 Mono Full Range MBA Mono Low 502BEX Mono Low Output 4 M8 Mono Full Range MB4 Mono Low FS3 Mono Low FS1B Mono Low 51 52 Bose Speaker EQ Preset List Stereo Bank FreeSpace Model 32 loudspeaker Mono Presets M32 M32 MB4 M32 FS3 M32 FS1B M32 502BEX FreeSpace Model 1B loudspeaker Mono Presets FS1B 100Hz LP FS1B SURFACE FS1B FLUSH Fr
270. eeSpace 3 Bass Mono Presets FS3 100Hz LP Foo 150Hz LP FreeSpace 360 Mono Presets FS360 HARD FS360 SOFT FS360 DECK Model 32 loudspeaker Preset Descriptions Model 32 loudspeaker Full Range EQ Model 32 loudspeaker bi amped with MB4 Model 32 loudspeaker bi amped with FS3 Model 32 loudspeaker bi amped with FS1B Model 32 loudspeaker bi amped with 502 BEX loudspeaker FreeSpace Model 1B loudspeaker Preset Descriptions FreeSpace Model 1B loudspeaker 100Hz Low Pass FreeSpace Model 1B loudspeaker Surface Mount EQ FreeSpace Model 1B loudspeaker Flush Mount EQ FreeSpace 3 Bass Preset Descriptions FreeSpace 3 Bass 100Hz Low Pass FreeSpace 3 Bass 150Hz Low Pass FreeSpace 360 loudspeaker Preset Descriptions FS360 loudspeaker inground hard EQ FS360 loudspeaker inground soft EQ FS360 loudspeaker deck EQ Output 1 M32 Mono Full Range M32 Mono High M32 Mono High M32 Mono High M32 Mono High Output 1 Output 1 Output 1 FS360 Mono Full Range FS360 Mono Full Range FS360 Mono Full Range Output 2 M32 Mono Full Range M32 Mono High M32 Mono High M32 Mono High M32 Mono High Output 2 Output 2 Output 2 FS360 Mono Full Range FS360 Mono Full Range FS360 Mono Full Range Output 3 M32 Mono Full Range MB4 Mono Low FS3 Mono Low FS1B Low 502BEX Mono Low Output 3 Output 3 Output 3 FS360 Mono Full Range FS360 Mono
271. ejor respuesta Al pulsar cualquier bot n PFL o AFL los medidores pasan a mostrar la se al seleccionada en ambos medidores en mono MIX Pulsando el bot n MIX se dirige las se ales de los subgrupos est reo en pares a la mezcla principal Los grupos y 3 se dirigen a la mezcla izquierda y los gru pos 2 y 4 se env an a la mezcla derecha FADERS MASTER Los faders master ajustan el nivel final de las salidas de mezcla izquierda y derecha Normalmente deber n estar cerca de la posici n 0 si los ajustes de ganancia se han efectuado correctamente para ofrecer el recorrido m ximo en los faders para un control m s fino MIX TO MONO Pulsando este bot n se dirigen las salidas post fader de mezcla L y R al bus mono para crear una mezcla mono separada para por ejemplo un bucle de inducci n o un cluster central Nota Si hay canales de entrada dirigidos a MIX y a MONO al pulsar este bot n se producir un efecto de suma que puede producir reali mentaciones 48V Alimentaci n Phantom Muchos micr fonos profesionales de condensador requieren una alimentaci n externa normalmente de 48V conocida tambi n como ALIMENTACI N PHANTOM Es un m todo de enviar la alimentaci n a trav s de los mismos cables que la se al del micr fono Pulse este bot n para ofrecer la alimentaci n de 48V a todas las entradas de micr fono El LED adyacente se ilumina cuando se activa la alimentaci n gt an 05 000000000000
272. el as shown When the batteries are almost fully discharged the battery segments and the red LED near the volume control will blink When this occurs less than 5 of the battery life is remaining and the batteries should be immediately replaced or recharged This segment will blink when batteries are low Locking the Receiver s Access Door To unlock both the right and left side unlock by turning slot horizontal as shown 7 To lock On both the EA ight and left side PN lock door by turning slot vertical as shown Z All Receivers Charging Batteries Using SmartCharge 1 Listen s receivers are unique because they have an automatic battery charger built in That means that when the Listen receiver is connected to a wall transformer or placed in a Listen battery charging case LA 311 or LA 317 Nickel Metal Hydride NiMH batteries will be charged while in the receiver Once batteries are charged the internal battery charger will automatically turn off This prevents overcharging of batteries automates the process of charging and makes it so you don t have to remember to unplug the charger 2 Do not attempt to charge alkaline or any other type of non NiMH batteries Only charge NiMH batteries within Listen receivers We recommend that you use NiMH batteries supplied by Listen WARNING Attempting to charge non NiMH batteries may result in physical harm destruction of property and or
273. el canal 1 Los controles del canal 2 no producen ning n efecto LED rrarcaco BRIDGE en panel frontal indicala posid ncaB en el nodo puerteado en mono CU NDO O CU NDO NO USARLO Utilice el modo puenteado en mono para pasar la potenda de anbos canales a una sola carga de 8 4 ohmios Ajuste el selector n mero 7 en la posici n BRIDGE MONO ON Use las entades del canal 1 y la bodra cono se muestra enla figura PRECAUCIONES DEL MODO PUENTEADO EN MONO Este modo implica un gran requerimierto para el amplifi cador y las bocinas La saturaci n excesiva puede provocar un silencio para proteger de cualquier da o a la bocina Aseg rese de que sta tenga el rango de potencia necesario Los voltajes de salida mayores a voltios RIVIS est n disponibles entre las terminales puenteadas del amplificador Los m todos de conexion CLASS 3 NEC se especifican de acuerdo a los c digos locales o nacionales y deben utilizarse para conectar la bocina Stereo bi amp 2 channel Ch 1 input Ch 2 input Parallel Ch 1 input FEATURES amp SETUP Vet are the differences among Stereo Parallel Input and Bridge Mono modes STEREO MODE This is the norrral way of using the inwhich each channel is fully independent Separate signals connect at the inputs the gain knobs contra their respective channels and se
274. eliminate unwanted false starts It 1s also possible to slip the start time backwards in order to record a quiet passage that would otherwise not trigger the sync recording facil ity this is done by the use of a memory buffer As well as being used for changing the start time of synchronized recording the start of an automatic track division can also be trimmed backwards and forwards in a similar way 24 TASCAM CD RW700 Both the sync start trim and the track start trim can take the same value and can be used in the same recording The maximum trim value is 125 frames on either side of the original point represented by Ei where there are 75 frames in a second i e 1 67 seconds 4 4 14 Rehearsal for synchronized recording To perform a synchronized recording using the rehearsal mode to slip the start of the track forwards or backwards 1 Load a recordable disc into the unit and make sure the unit is in stop mode 2 Cuethe source material to the start of the source track to be recorded i e in the example above this would be just before the count in 3 Press the RSE a so that the display shows i ind 2unc 4 Start playing the source When the start of the track is detected as explained in 4 3 1 Syn b the display changes to 5 If the rehearsal does not start at the region of the true start point press the RHSL key once again to re arm the trigger 6
275. els zur Verf gung Diese Betriebsart verwendet das Eingangssignal von Kanal 1 seine Verst rkung Filter und Begrenzung Die Regler von Kanal 2 haben keine Wirkung Die BRIDGE LED auf der Frontplatte leuchtet auf wenn diese Betriebsart gew hlt wurde EINSATZ DES IMONOBR CKENBETRIEBS Verwenden Sie diese Betriebsart um die Leistung beider Kan le einer ein Zigen 8 oder Last ar Verf gung zu stellen Stellen Sie den Schalter 7 auf BRIDGE MONO ON Verwenden Sie de Eing nge von Kanal 1 und schliefsen Sie die Lautsprecher wie aus der Zeichnung ersichtlich an BR CKENBETRIEB VORSICHTSMABNAHMEN Diese Betriebsart stellt hohe Arr forderungen an Verst rker und steuerung kann zu Abschalten des Verst rkers oder auch Lautsprec herbesc h di gungen f hren Stellen Sie sicher da cler Lautsprecher entsprechende Leistungen verarbeiten kam Ausgangsspannungen von mehr als 100 ms liegen zwischen den Ausgangsanschl ssen an Daher missen die einschlagigen Sicherheitsma nahmen beim Anschiufs der Lautsprecher beachtet werden CARACTERISTICAS Y AJUSTES Mocb puenibpacb en mano QU ES 8 modo en mono contra la potenda de ambos canales de arrplificador hada una bodna aumentando dos veces el consumo de voltaje cuatro veces la potenda de picos y aprox madamente tres veces la potenda de sostenimiento de un solo Este mocb utiliza la ertraca el corto de gananda filtro y limitador d
276. ely The Sub outputs remain unaffected Page 15 SPIRIT FOLIO USING YOUR FOLIO SX CONSOLE he final sound from your system can only ever be as good as the weakest link in the and especially important is the quality of the source signal because this is the starting point of the chain Just as you need to become familiar with the control functions of your mixer so you must recognise the importance of correct choice of inputs microphone placement and input channel settings However no amount of careful setting up can take account of the spon taneity and unpredictability of live performance and the mixer must be set up to provide spare control range to compensate for changing microphone position and the absorption effect of a large audience different acoustic characteristics from sound check to show C Cardioid Response Q MICROPHONE PLACEMENT Careful microphone placement and the choice of a suitable type of microphone for the job is one of the essentials of successful sound reinforcement The diagrams on the left show the dif ferent pick up patterns for the most common types of microphone Cardioid microphones are sensitive to sound coming from in front and hypercardioid microphones offer even greater directivity with a small amount of pickup behind the microphone These types are ideal for Hypercardioid Response recording vocalists or instruments where rejection of unwanted sounds and elimination of feed back i
277. en Umde Gefahr elektrischer S ge Zu verrreiden m ssen Kabelklenm sch heisdierte Klemmena fvweisen WARNUNG Um elektrische Schl ge zu vermeiden sollte der Verst rker nicht betrieben werden wenn blanke Kabel enden sichtbar sincL Anschl sse Stereo bzw Parallel betrieb Arsdlu s im Monobr ckenbetrieb Bitte beachten Sie die Erl uterungen auf Seite 11 LAUTSPRECHERKABEL Dickere und k rzere Kabel verringem sowohl Leistungsverlust wie eine Ver Verlegen Sie keine Ausgangskabel neben den Eingangskabeln NetzanscHlu s SchliefSen Sie den Verst rker nur an de ridtige Netzspannung an de auf dem Btikett nit der Seriennummer aufgedruckt ist Ein Anschlu an de falsche Netzspannung kann zu Besch digungen am Verst rker f hren CONEXIONES Termnales con tomillo aislamiento no m s de 13 mm 4pulgado Inserte el cable hasta que el conductor se pueda ver Asegure la rosca con fuerza si es necesario use una moneda Unicamente para modelos no europeos O Los conectores tipo hemad ra deben estar aislados apropiadamente para prevenir un corto el dtrico AVISO Para evitar descarga el ctrica no opere el amplificador si alguno de los cables de la bocina est expuesto una Conexiones para operad n en est reo O paralelo Conexiones para operaci n de puenteada en mono Lea las recomendad ones de la p gina 11 CABLEADO DE BOCINAS Los celles guesos y los t
278. en Signal Verzerrungen entstehen Ist das Signal zu niedrig eingestellt entsteht ein h rbares Hintergrundrauschen und der Signal Pegel am Ausgang des Mixers ist zu schwach Wird der Regler auf U gestellt ist eine Vorverst rkung von I f r den LINE Eingang eingestellt Es gibt Sound Equipment daf f r den h uslichen Bereich konstruiert ist Dieses Equipment hat einen niedrigen Pegel 10 dBV als professionelles Equipment und ben tigt daher eine h here Einstellung der Vorverst rkung um den gleichen Ausgangspegel zu erreichen Im Kapitel Richtiger Einsatz und Fehlersuche sind wichtige Hinweise f r die Einstellung des SENS Reglers gegeben 100 Hz HOCHPASSFILTER Durch Dr cken des 100 Hz Schalters wird ein Filter mit einer Flankensteilheit von 8 dB Oktave geschaltet Dieses Filter reduziert nur den Pegel der Bass Frequenzen In Live PA Situationen werden z B B hnenschwingungen oder Mikrofon Poppen reduziert UTILISATION DE LA LX7 Voie d Entr e Mono micro uirga Verkado L entr e micro sur connecteur de type XLR est concue pour convenir une large gamme de signaux SYMETRIQUES ou ASYMETRIQUES Les micros profes sionnels dynamiques statiques ou ruban sont les meilleurs parce qu ils sont BASSE IMPEDANCE Vous pouvez utiliser des micros peu co teux HAUTE IMPEDANCE mais le niveau du bruit de fond sera plus haut Si vous mettez l al imentation FANTOME en service l aide de la touche stiu e c t
279. encies above or below the break frequency i e a highpass or lowpass derived response acoustic interference from other sources a momentary rise in the signal level a method of audio connection which uses a single wire and the cable screen as the signal return This method does not provide the noise immunity of a balanced input see above the phantom power supply available at the channel mic inputs for condenser microphones and active DI boxes Page 24 SPIRIT FOLIO TYPICAL SPECIFICATIONS NOISE Measured RMS 20Hz to 20kHz Bandwidth Line inputs selected at unity gain and terminated 150 AUX SUB O PS 16 Inputs routed faders amp pots down EIN Microphone Input Maximum Gain terminated 150 CROSSTALK 2 Channel mute 95 dB Fader cutoff rel to 0 mark lt 90dB Routing isolation lt 90dB Aux Sends pots offness lt 85dB FREQUENCY RESPONSE Mic Line In to any output 25Hz to 30kHz T H D Mic Sens 30dBu 20dBu at all outputs Y 2 INPUT OUTPUT IMPEDANCES Microphone Input Line Input Stereo Input A B Stereo Input C D Direct Out Sub Mix Aux Insert INPUT amp OUTPUT LEVELS Mic Input Maximum Level Line Input Maximum Level Stereo Input Maximum Level Headphones 200 Page 25 85 dBu 129 dBu I OkHz 85 dB 80dB 80dB 80dB dB lt 0 00696 8 10 12 lO 750 22 dBu gt 30 gt 30 dBu 50mW SPIRIT FOLIO o
280. ente dai meter il livello del rumore di fondo potrebbe divenire ecces sivo Fare attenzione ai livelli di ingresso e regolarli con cura Quando uno dei tasti PFL o AFL premuto i meter commutano per mostrare il segnale PFL AFL su entrambe le file in modalit mono MIX Premendo questo tasto i segnali post fade dei sub gruppi vengono indiriz zati a coppie al Mix principale gruppi 1 amp 3 vanno al MIX L sinistro men tre i gruppi 2 amp 4 vanno al MIX R destro Q MASTER FADERS MASTER FADERS regolano il livello finale delle uscite Sub Group e Mix destra e sinistra Normalmente dovrebbero essere vicini a 0 se il GAIN d ingresso stato impostato correttamente cosi da avere la massima escur sione sui fader per un controllo pi uniforme amp mix ro mono Questo switch pilota le uscite Mix post fade destra e sinistra sul bus Mono per creare un mix mono separato da mandare ad esempio ad un cluster centrale Nota Se ci sono ingressi indirizzati a Mix e Mono premendo questo tasto si crea un effetto che pu portare al feedback 6 ALIMENTAZIONE PHANTOM 48V A Molti microfoni a condensatore professionali hanno bisogno di alimentazione esterna solitamente a 48V nota come alimentazione Phantom Questo un metodo per mandare il segnale di alimentazione sullo stesso cavo del segnale microfonico Per alimentare a 48V tutti gli ingressi microfonici premere il tasto relativo Il led si illumina per indicare l attivazione
281. ependientemente como se muestra a la izquierda CU NDO O CU NDO NO USARLO Cuando se usan bodinas de rango completo el limitador de picos reduce la distorsi n de las frecuencias agudas causada por la sobrecarga de graves Tambi n protege a los drivers de fre quendas agucs del exceso de saura Gdn y amr nicos descontrol ados Gando se usan sulawoofers algunos prefieren usar los picos del arrplifi cackr sin limitaci n para obtener un punch adidonal enel bonbo dela bater a y otros sonidos similares ADVERTENCIA El limitador de picos reduce se ales extremas de saturaci n pernritiendo un nivel de se al mas alto sin distorsi n audible Sin enbargo aumentar la ganancia con el limitador de picos activado puede doblar la capacidad de salida Tenga cuidado de no rebasar el l nite de potencia cle sus bocinas LFADEROF 7 LF ALIERON CHD LFSOFZ M7 LF LFSOFZ LF LFAUEROF 7 LF HIETERON GHD NGO TZNVENCBAR NOH ICZB E LFON __ Ch 1 1 Ch 2 HN ron 3 A 5 6 20Hz 5060 80100 200 300400500 1 kHz
282. equipment attempts at modification and repair not authorized by Telex and shipping damage Products with their serial numbers removed or effaced are not covered by this warranty To obtain warranty service follow the procedures entitled Procedure for Returns and Shipping to Manufacturer for Repair or Adjustment This warranty is the sole and exclusive express warranty given with respect to Audiocom products It is the responsibility of the user to determine before purchase that this product is suitable for the user s intended purpose ANY AND ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY ARE LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THIS EXPRESS LIMITED WARRANT Y NEITHER TELEX NOR THE DEALER WHO SELLS TELEX PRODUCTS IS LIABLE FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND CUSTOMER SUPPORT Technical questions should be directed to Customer Service Department Telex 12000 Portland Avenue South Burnsville MN 55337 U S A Telephone 952 884 4051 Fax 952 884 0043 RETURN SHIPPING INSTRUCTIONS Procedure for Returns If a return is necessary contact the dealer where this unit was purchased If a return through the dealer is not possible obtain a RETURN AUTHORIZATION from Customer Service Department Telex Communications Inc Telephone 1 800 392 3497 or 952 884 4051 Fax 1 800 323 0498 or 952 884 0043 DO NOT RETURN ANY EQUIPMENT DIRECTLY TO THE FACTORY WITHOUT FIRST OBTAINING A RETURN AUTHORIZA
283. er Model 8 loudspeaker bi amped with FreeSpace 1B loudspeaker Output 1 LT4402 Mono Full Range LT4402 Mono Full Range LT4402 Mono High LT4402 Mono High Output 1 LT9702 Mono Full Range LT9702 Mono Full Range LT9702 Mono High LT9702 Mono High Output 1 M8 Mono Full Range M8 Mono High M8 Mono High M8 Mono High Output 2 LT4402 Mono Full Range LT4402 Mono Full Range LT4402 Mono High LT4402 Mono High Output 2 LT9702 Mono Full Range LT9702 Mono Full Range LT9702 Mono High LT9702 Mono High Output 2 M8 Mono Full Range M8 Mono High M8 Mono High M8 Mono High Output 3 LT4402 Mono Full Range LT4402 Mono Full Range MB4 Mono Low 502BEX Mono Low Output 3 LT9702 Mono Full Range LT9702 Mono Full Range MB4 Mono Low 502BEX Mono Low Output 3 M8 Mono Full Range MB4 Mono Low FS3 Mono Low FS1B Mono Low Output 4 LT4402 Mono Full Range LT4402 Mono Full Range MBA Mono Low 502BEX Mono Low Output 4 LT9702 Mono Full Range LT9702 Mono Full Range MB4 Mono Low 502BEX Mono Low Output 4 M8 Mono Full Range MB4 Mono Low FS3 Mono Low FS1B Mono Low Bose Speaker EQ Preset List Mono Bank FreeSpace Model 32 loudspeaker Mono Presets M32 M32 MB4 M32 FS3 M32 FS1B M32 502BEX FreeSpace Model 1B loudspeaker Mono Presets FS1B 100Hz LP FS1B SURFACE
284. er Ducky Front Mount Remote Base or Coaxial Dipole 216MHz Telescoping Whip Front Mount Remote Base Ground Plane or Coaxial Dipole Available Channels 72MHz 17 wide band 40 narrow band 216MHz 19 wide band 38 narrow band Modulation is automatically switched when changing between narrow and wide band channels Frequency Response 12 50Hz to 17kHz 3dB 216 50Hz to 8kHz 3dB Specifications subject to change without notice RF Power Selection Full 1 2 1 4 Physical Dimensions 8 W x 8 D x 1 75 H 20 3cm W x 20 3cm D x 4 45cm Optional rack mount brackets Weight 3 10 1 4 kg Power 16 VAC 850mA Audio Input 1 F XLR 1 4 Phone 50 600 ohms balanced bbdBm 4dBm selectable adjustable Audio Input 2 Phono 10k 50 ohms unbalanced 10dBm 20dBm selectable adjustable Audio Output Mix Phono 10k ohms unbalanced 10dBm Headphone Output 250mW 32 ohms 3 5MM stereo Controls Mix Process Contour Headphone Level Tone RF Power Output and ON OFF Visual Indicators Audio input levels 1 2 and post processed modulation level channel RF power test tone o D d o i ten LISTEN TECHNOLOGIES CORPORATION 1 801 233 8992 1 800 330 0891 Fax 1 801 233 8995 11 Internet www listentech com All specifications subject to change without notice LT 800 Stationary Transmitter Specifications LT 800 Stationary Transmitter Specifications
285. era de nuestras instalaci n deficiente y si el c digo la fecha ha sido enmendado retirado ADDRESSIADRESSEANSCHRIFTIDIRECCI N amp POSTALE UND Y TELEPHONE ET TELEFON TEL FONO INFORMATION NUM ROS NUMMERN Mailing Adresse postale Postanschrift Direcci n postal GC Audio Products Inc 1675 MacArthur Boulevard Costa Mesa 92626 1468 USA Telephone Numbers Num ros de t l phone Telefonnunmmenm N meros de tel fono N Main Number Numero principal Hauptinummer N mero princi pal 714 754 6175 N Sales Direct Line Ligne directe vertes Verkauf Direkt Linea directo ventas 714 957 7100 Sales amp Marketing Ventes marketing Verkauf u Marketing Ventas y marketing 800 854 4079 toll free in USA arly sans frais aux EU seulerrert Gollfrei nur beimUSA sin costo en EE UU solarrente Custorrer Service Service la dientele Kundendienst Serido a la dientela 40714 957 7150 800 772 2834 toll free in USA arly sans frais aux EU seulerrert nur beimUSA sin costo en EE UU solamente Facsimile Numbers Num ros de t l copieur Telefaxnunmem N mero de FAX Sales amp Marketing FAX T l copie vertes amp marketing Telefax der Verkauf u Marketing FAX ventas y marketing X714 752 6174 G storrer Service FAX T l copie service la dientele Kundendienst Telefax FAX servido a la dientela 714 754 6173 World Wide We
286. erheit Falls der mitgelieferte Schutzkontaktstecker nicht n Ihre Steckdose passt wenden Sie sich an einen qualifizierten Elektriker um die Steckdose auszutauschen 8 Verlegen Sie das Netzkabel so dass es keine Stolpergefahr darstellt und nicht besch digt werden kann insbesondere im Bereich von Steckern und Steckdosen und dort wo das Netzkabel aus dem Ger t herausgef hrt wird 9 Verwenden Sie nur Zubeh r Anbauteile die vom Hersteller zugelassen sind 10 Verwenden Sie f r das Ger t nur Rollwagen St nder Dreibeine Halterungen oder Tische die vom Hersteller zugelassen sind oder zusammen mit dem Ger t verkauft wer den Falls Sie einen Rollwagen verwenden d rfen Sie die Einheit Ger t Rollwagen nur mit Vorsicht bewegen damit Verletzungen beim m glichen Umkippen ausgeschlossen sind 11 Wenden Sie sich bei allen Reparatur und Wartungsarbeiten nur an qualifiziertes Kundendienstpersonal Eine Reparatur ist erforderlich wenn das Ger t in irgendeiner Weise beschadigt wurde Beispielsweise falls das Netzkabel oder der Netzstecker beschadigt ist Fl ssigkeit oder Fremdk rper in das Gerat gelangt sind oder das Gerat Regen bzw Feuchtigkeit ausgesetzt war nicht einwandfrei arbeitet oder heruntergefall ist Versuchen Sie in solchen Fallen keinesfalls das selbst zu reparieren Off nen oder entfernen Sie unter keinen Umst nden Geh useabdeckungen da Sie andern falls mit gef hrlichen elektrischen Spannungen in Ber hr
287. ert is enabled incoming calls will cause beeps in the headset On the BP 2002 calls can be received on the selected channel only Call send To send a call signal to all stations on a channel press and hold the Call button until a verbal response is received The indicator will glow red On the BP 2002 calls can be sent on the selected channel only TALK BUTTON AND INDicATOR The Talk button activates the headset microphone and operates in two ways Latched Mode Tap the button once to talk The indicator will glow green Tap the button again when finished with a conversation Momentary Mode Press and hold the button to talk momentarily Release the button when finished talking NOTE On the BP 2002 if no headset is connected when the Talk button is pressed the Talk button will have the same function as the Chan button 5 SIDETONE CONTROL When using a headset this control adjusts your own voice level heard in the head phones To adjust the level tap the Talk button once to turn on the headset microphone Then use a small flat blade screwdriver to increase or decrease your voice level while talking into themicrophone This control is accessible by removing one screw of belt clip 6 HEADSET CONNECTOR This connector accepts a four wire Telex boom microphone headset 7 INTERCOM CHANNEL CONNECTORS On the BP 2002 intercom channels are connected via a pair of 6 pin connectors one male and one female The
288. ervicing to qualified service personnel under the following conditions a when the power supply cord or plug is damaged b if liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the product C if the product has been exposed to rain or water d if the product does not operate normally by following the operating instructions Adjust only those controls that are covered by the operating instructions as an improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage and will often require extensive work by a qualified technician to restore the product to its normal operation e if the product has been dropped or damaged in any way f when the product exhibits a distinct change in performance this indicates a need for service 21 Replacement Parts When replacement parts are required be sure the service technician has used replacement parts specified by the manufacturer or have the same characteristics as the original part Unauthorized substitutions may result in fire electric shock or other hazards 22 Safety Check Upon completion of any service or repairs to this product ask the service technician to perform safety checks to determine that the product is in proper operating condition 23 Wall or Ceiling Mounting The product should be mounted to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the manufacturer 24 Heat The product should be situated away from heat sources such as radiators heat registers stoves or other
289. es a 12 dB oct slope below the corner frequency and is ultimately unattenuated above the corner frequency Notice also that the value of Q specifies the gain at the specified frequency Therefore a of 2 provides a 6 dB boost at the specified corner while a Q of o 5 attenuates by 6 dB It is important to observe that the Q value does not specify the maximum boost or cut level of the filter For example notice the middle curve which has a Q of 1 0 This curve is o dB at the corner frequency yet has slight gain above the corner One o 7 ack application for this control is to simultaneously roll off the low end and add warmth to the input signal which could serve to free up one of the two parametric equalizers in later stages Ere coms Floor 100 00E 60 NOISE GATE DigiTool MX Noise Gate Thresh 26 dB variable Floor The next process in the input signal chain is the Noise Gate There are four parameter controls for the noise gate See figures amp 6b for the control view and transfer function 70 80 THRESHOLD The top encoder sets the 5 turn on threshold This control is specified in dBFS The range of the IN dES control is from o to 100 dBFS b Figures 6a and 6b Panel view a and transfer function b for the noise gate ATTACK The middle control adjusts the attack time of the gate The value range is from 1 to 10
290. esize oto 2 56k and 10 25 kHz each with 1 octave bandwidths Figure 12 displays the boost cut response curves For detailed operation refer to the parametric EQ description in the EDIT VIEW Input Channel section QU 5 5 8 8 amp 40 30 COMPRESSOR Refer to the EDIT VIEW Input Channel section for a DigiTool MX COMPRESSOR LIMITER THRESHOLD CURVES 6 1 RATIO description of the operation of the compressor E OUTPUT CHANNEL FILTERS 1 amp 2 Each output channel provides two general purpose filters for low pass band pass or high pass functions Each filter is a 2nd order hi pass or low pass function 12 dB oct slope A 24 40 20 0006 dB oct slope is possible by configuring both filters to be either low pass or hi pass types Configuring both filters for a band pass response filter 1 HP fiter 2 LP will result in response Figures 11a 11b and 11c Panel view that is limited to a 12 dB octave slope Each filter operates for the compressor parameter identically to the input section filter Refer to the EDIT VIEW Controls Input channel section for a description of the operation of the LPF HPF filter function DigiTool MX 5 Band EQ OUTPUT CHANNEL DELAY Each output channel provides an alignment delay for up to 5 ARN seconds The delay is specified in milliseconds and seconds 207 and can be resolved to samples periods Figure 13 provides the d panel view
291. ess the MULTI JOG control 41 or the ENTER key on the remote control unit 4 Turn the MULTI JOG control or use the remote control unit SKIP keys D to set the timer hour The unit uses the 24 hour clock where 1 p m is represented by i 3 etc 5 Press the MULTI JOG control the ENTER key to confirm the hour setting The minutes value starts flashing 6 Turn the MULTI JOG control or use the remote control unit SKIP keys to set the timer minutes 7 Press the MULTI JOG control or the ENTER key to confirm the minutes setting 14 TASCAM CD RW700 9 Repeat steps 4 through 7 above to set the hours and minutes value If the TIMER switch 42 is set to REC or PLAY the display shows a small clock icon to show that the unit is in timer mode 2 5 3 Using the timer When the start time has been set slide the TIMER switch 42 to either the PLAY or REC position depending on whether playback or recording 15 to start at the specified time The display shows a small clock icon to show the unit is in timer mode in standby mode as well as in power on mode When the switch is set to REC and a recordable disc 15 loaded the REC indicator shows beside the clock icon When the unit is in standby mode and timer playback is selected the unit will turn on and start playing at the specified time If recording is selected the unit will turn itself on one minute before recording is due to start Record ing will sta
292. ession Don t be afraid to experi ment to find out how each control affects the sound this will only extend your creativity and help you to get the best from your mixer INSTALLATION AND SAFETY PRECAUTIONS INSTALLING THE MIXER C orrect connection and positioning of your mixer is important for successful and trouble free operation The following sections are intended to give guidance with cabling connections and configuration of your mixer Choose the mains supply for the sound system with care and do not share sockets or earthing with lighting dimmers Position the mixer where the sound can be heard clearly Run audio cables separately from dimmer wiring using balanced lines wherever possible If necessary cross audio and lighting cables at right angles to minimise the possibility of interference Keep unbalanced cabling as short as possible 1 Check your cables regularly and label each end for easy identification SAFETY PRECAUTIONS For your own safety and to avoid invalidation of the warranty please read this section carefully The FOLIO SX mixer must only be connected through the Power Supply supplied The wires in the mains lead are coloured in accordance with the following code Earth Green and Yellow Green Yellow US Neutral Blue White US Live Brown Black US As the colours of the wires in the mains lead may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your pl
293. euchten de gr nen SIGNAL 20B und 104B LEDs nacheinander auf und zeigen 0 1 1 und 10 der rr gliichen vollen Leistung Die rote CLIPLED leuchtet wahrend Ubersteuerungen Clipping auf Ein helles Jeichn iges Leuchten zeigt alserdem sch tzendes Stunnsschalten an Falls dieser Zustand w hrend des Betriebs auftritt lesen Sie bitte den Abschnitt Fehlerbehebung Die gelbe BRIDGE LED leuchtet auf wenn der Verst rker Monobr ce betrieben wird Die gelbe PARALLEL LED zeict an chis die Parallel Input Schalter eingestellt wurden OPERACION Interruptor de encendio Artes de encender el equipo revise las conexiones y baje los controles de gananda La secuenda de encendido suave inda con el indicador LED POWER a meda luz Un par de segundos despu s el ventilador se enciende y el amplificador hace un silencio de protecd n que se puede visualizar en los indicadores LEDrojos de CLIP Despu s el indicador POWER se endende corrpletarrerte y el amplificador est listo para operar Controles de ganancia Los controles de gananda han sido dise ados para un ajuste continuo voltaje de gananda del amplificador aparece en dedbeles La gananda es de 40x 432 cB Indicadores LED La luz verde en el LED de POWER indica que el amplificador est en uso Y a med a luz que est en la secuenda de encendido A medida de que la se al aumenta los LED indicadores verdes
294. ever during recording there are fewer options available obviously the unit cannot see into the future and know how much time remains of the track which is being currently recorded When in record or record ready mode repeated presses of the DISPLAY key 40 or cycle between displaying the remaining time left for recording on the disc TOTAL REMAIN and the elapsed time of the track currently being recorded no indica tor lit When playback 15 stopped at the start of a recordable disc there are only two options available TOTAL the total time recorded so far on the disc and TOTAL REMAIN the total time available on the disc for fur ther recording 4 2 3 Manual track division It is possible to divide the recording into tracks the fly while recording While recording is taking place press the RECORD key 20 or D The current track number is incre mented by one For details of automatic track division while record ing see 4 3 2 Automatic track division According to the Red Book the specification for audio CDs a track cannot be less than four seconds in length and there can be a maximum of 99 tracks on an audio CD Bear these limitations in mind when adding track divisions 4 2 4 Restricting the number of tracks When making a recording using CD RW700 it is possible to restrict the number of tracks that may be recorded at one time This applies whether the tracks are being divide
295. ffie Quando si toglie il jack della cuffie dalla presa PHONES l uscita Monitor ripristinata La sorgente di Monitor e Phones viene selezionata dai cinque switch 13 sopra la regolazione Quando uno dei tasti PFL o AFL premuto la sorgente delle uscite Monitor e cuffie commutata sul segnale mono PFL AFL senza che le altre uscite dal mixer siano interrotte per permettere ai segnali di essere monitorati individualmente La sorgente originale viene ripristinata quando i tasti PFL AFL sono rilasciati QD rar Il led PFL AFL si illumina per indicare che un PFL AFL attivo e viene usato come sorgente per monitor e meters Normalmente spento Page 19 NIVEL DE AURICULARES Y MONITORES Este control ajusta el nivel de las salidas izquierda y derecha de monitores Si hay unos auriculares conectados se cortan las salidas de monitor y el control ajusta el nivel de auriculares desconectar los auriculares se restituye la salida de monitor Cuando se pulsa un bot n PFL o AFL la fuente para las salidas de monitor y auriculares se cambia por la se al mono PFL AFL sin interrumpir las otras salidas del mezclador para permitir la monitorizaci n de senales individuales El LED PFL AFL se ilumina para indicar que la fuente de los monitores y los medidores es una se al PFL AFL La fuente original de monitores se restituye al soltar los botones PFL AFL PFL AFL El LED de PFL AFL se ilumina para mostrar que hay un PFL AFL activo y
296. fire 3 IMPORTANT To charge NiMH batteries the BATTERY SELECT switch must be selected to NiMH Use a pen or small screwdriver to the move the switch located in the battery compartment directly below the BATTERY SELECT label to the proper position For only NiMH batteries set BATTERY SELECT switch to NiMH For all other batteries set BATTERY SELECT at alkaline 4 Install NiMH rechargeable batteries in the battery compartment ensuring that proper polarity has been observed Top of Unit and Battery Compartment 24 LISTEN TECHNOLOGIES CORPORATION 1 801 233 8992 1 800 330 0891 Fax 1 801 233 8995 Internet www listentech com All specifications are subject to change without notice Listen Receivers Charging cont amp LR 500 Programming Charging the Batteries continued 9 Plug a wall transformer into the side of the Listen receiver or place receiver in a Listen Carrying Charging Case LA 311 or LA 317 For charging using a transformer with NiMH batteries in unit plug wall transformer in CHARGING connection and into wall outlet as shown Batteries will be fully charged when red LED stops flashing and is unlit LED and battery symbol will flash slowly while charging Co Once the batteries are fully charged the unit will stop charging the batteries Full charge will be indicated when all the battery symbol segments are illuminated and the LED near the volume control is not lit
297. for synchronized recording 12 Cue up the source material to the point where recording is to start 13 Start playing the source material If sync recording is not being used start recording on the CD RW700 otherwise recording starts automatically When the track division point plus or minus the trim value set earlier 15 reached the recording will divide into tracks Note that if a positive trim value is set i e the start point of the track is slipped to a position past the nonna 22 the counter shows minus value e g 13 E12 for the period between the normal and ihe actual adjusted start position This minus value is also displayed when recording starts if sync recording has been enabled If a trim setting is made for the track division this will apply to all track divisions and sync starts made in the future until the value is reset using the procedure above TASCAM CD RW700 25 5 After recording This section deals with the actions taken after record ing finalizing for CD R and CD RW discs and erase operations for CD RW discs Once finalized CD R discs are truly final no more can be recorded on them By contrast CD RW discs can be unfinalized using the CD RW700 i e their can be deleted and if there is space further material can be recorded on them Even if the disc is full tracks can be erased following the unfinalize process and new material can be recorded 5 1 Finalizi
298. front panel input meters to ensure your signal is at approximately OdbFS full scale Adjust the input sensitivity parameter accordingly Note The input signal may occasionally light the red Overload LED This is normal 7 After you have properly calibrated your PANARAY controller s input sensitivity you must adjust your controller s output range to match your amplifier s input sensitivity Since this will vary with each manufacturer please consult your amplifier user guide 31 10 0 Optimizing Signal to Noise Use the table below to match the PANARAY system digital controller s Output Range to your amplifier O cil 32 20dBu 3 9V to Note If there are no settings that exactly match your amplifier s input sensitivity pick the highest setting that is nearest your amplifier input sensitivity and use the controllers OUTPUT LEVEL control to scale back the overall output Set the PANARAY system digital controller out put range First press the UTILITY button Then press the Arrow DOWN button until you see the following display Output Range 20dB Pro Adjust this parameter with the Encoder wheel to match your amplifier s input sensitivity Output Range 14dB Consumer This setting will provide the optimum input level for your amplifier 8 Select a speaker EQ preset on the PANARAY system digital controller by pressing the PRESET button and using the Encoder wheel to select the desired speake
299. g von der jeweiligen Faderstellung z B bei Effektger ten Hall Echo u s w F r das Abh ren Monitoring ist es wichtig da das Signal von der Faderposition unbeeinfluBt bleibt Diese Ausspielwege sind pre fade d h das Signal wird unab h ngig von der Faderstellung ausgekoppelt Alle 6 Ausspielwege des LX7 sind post EQ d h das Signal hat die EQ Sektion durchlaufen siehe hierzu Abschnitt EQ Sektion AUX und 2 und AUX 3 und 4 k nnen paarweise von post fade auf pre fade umgeschaltet werden z B wie oben beschrieben f r die Monitoransteuerung AUX 5 und 6 sind dagegen immer post fade PAN Mit dem PAN Regler wird die Stereoabbildung des linken und rechten Mix Busses eingestellt Ist der Regler nach links oder rechts gedreht liegt der entsprechende Signalpegel mit einer Verst rkung am linken oder rechten Ausgang an MUTE Alle Kanal Ausg nge mit Ausnahme der Inserts werden durch Dr cken des MUTE Schalters stummgeschaltet So k nnen z B Pegel schon voreingestellt werden FADER Der 100 mm Fader erm glicht ein pr zises Einstellen der Kanal Signale die dann zur Master Sektion geroutet werden Die feinste Pegeleinstellung wird erreicht wenn die Eingangsempfindlichkeit richtig voreingestellt ist siehe hierzu Kapitel Richtiger Einsatz und Fehlersuche hier sind die wichtigen Hinweise f r die Signal Einstellung gegeben ROUTING Das Kanalsignal kann zum Haupt Stereo Mix oder paarweise 1 2 3 4 zu den jewe
300. g this switch will have an additive effect which may lead to feedback 48V Phantom Power Many professional condenser mics need an external powering voltage nor mally 48V also known as PHANTOM POWER This is a method of sending a powering voltage down the same wires as the mic signal Press the switch to supply the 48V power to all of the MIC inputs The adjacent LED illumi nates when the power is active Page 14 gt Wird der rastende PFL Schalter gedr ckt wird das pre fade post EQ Signal zum Kopfh rer Signal zum Regieraum Monitor Ausgang und zur LED Anzeige geleitet wobei das zuvor anliegende Monitor Signal berschrieben wird Des weiteren leuchtet auf der Mastersektion zus tzlich die LED PFL AFL und zeigt an ein PFL Schalter auf einem Kanal gedr ckt ist Linke und rechte LED Kette zeigen ein Mono Signal an MASTER SEKTION QD Aux masters Jeder der 6 AUX Ausgange hat einen eigenen Haupt Ausgangs Pegelregler und einen zugeh rigen AFL Schalter After fade Fadergeregeltes Signal AUX AFL Genauso wie die einzelnen PFL Schalter das pre fade H ren des Signals erm glichen so kann jeder Aux Ausgang nach dem Pegelregler abgeh rt wer den Hierzu muB der AFL Schalter gedr ckt werden Dadurch wird das Aux Ausgangssignal auf die Monitor oder Phones Ausg nge geschaltet Die LED Anzeige wird zus tzlich zur Anzeige des PFL AFL Signals umgeschaltet Die LED PFL AFL leuchtet und zeigt wiederum an
301. gainst harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help This equipment has been certified to comply with the limits for a class B computing device pursuant to FCC Rules In order to maintain compliance with FCC regulations shielded cables must be used with this equipment Operation with non approved equipment or unshielded cables is likely to result in interference to radio and TV reception The user is cautioned that changes and modifications made to the equipment without the approval of manufacturer could void the user s authority to operate this equipment 4 LISTEN TECHNOLOGIES CORPORATION 1 801 233 8992 1 800 330 0891 Fax 1 801 233 89
302. ge FS360 Mono Full Range FS360 Mono Full Range Output 4 M32 Mono Full Range MB4 Mono Low FS3 Mono Low FS1B Low 502BEX Mono Low Output 4 Output 4 Output 4 FS360 Monc Full Range FS360 Monc Full Range FS360 Monc Full Range 45 46 13 2 Bose Speaker EQ Preset List Stereo Bank PANARAY 402 Series loudspeaker Stereo Presets 4021 502B 4021 4 4021 AWCS 4021 HF Panaray 402 Series Il loudspeaker Stereo Presets 40211 502B 4021 502 40211 4 4021 AWCS 4021 HF 402 Series loudspeaker Preset Descriptions 402 Series loudpeaker Full Range EQ 402 Series loudspeaker bi amped with 502 B loudspeaker 402 Series loudspeaker bi amped with MB4 402 Series loudspeaker bi amped with AWCS Note Limiting is assigned to outputs 3 and 4 for protection of the AWCS 402 Series loudspeaker bi amped 160Hz 402 Series Il loudspeaker Preset Descriptions 402 Series loudpeaker Full Range EQ 402 Series loudspeaker bi amped with 502B loudspeaker 402 Series loudspeaker bi amped with 502 BEX loudspeaker 402 Series loudspeaker bi amped with MB4 402 Series loudspeaker bi amped with AWCS Note Limiting is assigned to outputs 3 and 4 for protection of the AWCS 402 Series loudspeaker bi amped 180Hz Output 1 4021 CH1 Full Range 4021 CH1 High 4021 CH1 High 4021 CH1 High 4021 CH1 High Outp
303. ge MA12 Mono Full Range 502B Mono Low MB4 Mono Low MA12 Mono High Output 4 802111 Mono Low 802111 Mono High MA12 Mono Full Range MA12 Mono Full Range 502B Mono Low MB4 Mono Low MA12 Mono High MA12 Mono Full Range MA12 Mono Full Range 502B Mono Low MB4 Mono Low MA12 Mono High Bose Speaker EQ Preset List Mono Bank PANARAY MB4 loudspeaker Mono Presets MB4 100Hz LP MB4 160Hz LP MB4 200Hz LP MB4 280Hz LP PANARAY 502 B loudspeaker Mono Presets 502B 502B loudspeaker Mono Low Pass 502B 502B 502B 502B 160 Hz PANARAY 502 BEX loudspeaker Mono Presets 502BEX 502BEX loudspeaker Mono Low Pass 502BEX 502BEX 502BEX 502BEX 200 Hz AWCS Mono Presets AWCS AWCS Mono Low Pass with limiting AWCS AWCS AWCS AWCS assigned to all four outputs PANARAY LT3202 Mono Presets LT3202 LT3202CLUSTER LT3202 MB4 LT3202 502BEX MB4 loudspeaker Preset Descriptions MB4 loudspeaker 100Hz Low Pass MB4 loudspeaker 160Hz Low Pass MB4 loudspeaker 200Hz Low Pass MB4 loudspeaker 280Hz Low Pass 502B loudspeaker Preset Descriptions 502BEX loudspeaker Descriptions Preset AWCS Preset Descriptions LT3202 loudspeaker Preset Descriptions LT3202 loudspeaker Full Range EQ LT3202 loudspeaker Cluster EQ LT3202 loudspeaker bi amped with MB4 LT3202 loudspeaker bi amped with 502BEX loudspeaker Output 1 Output 1 Output 1 Output 1 Output 1 L
304. gh 80211 CH1 High 802111 CH1 High 802111 CH1 Full Range 80211 CH1 High 80211 CH1 High 80211 CH1 High Output 2 8021 CH2 High 8021 CH2 High Output 2 802111 CH2 Full Range 802111 CH2 High 802111 CH2 High 802111 CH2 High 80211 CH2 High 80211 CH2 High 802111 CH2 Full Range 80211 CH2 High 80211 CH2 High 80211 CH2 High Output 3 AWCS CH1 Low 8021 CH1 High Output 3 802111 CH1 Full Range 502B CH1 Low 502BEX CH1 Low MB4 CH1 Low AWCS CH1 Low 802111 CH1 High 802111 CH1 Full Range 502B CH1 Low 502BEX CH1 Low MB4 CH1 Low Output 4 AWCS CH2 Low 8021 CH2 High Output 4 802111 CH2 Full Range 502B CH2 Low 502BEX Ch2 Low MB4 CH2 Low AWCS CH2 Low 802111 CH2 High 80211 CH2 Full Range 502B CH2 Low 502BEX CH2 Low MB4 CH2 Low Bose Speaker EQ Preset List Stereo Bank PANARAY 802 Series Ill loudspeaker Stereo Presets 802IIISTK AWCS 802115 HP PANARAY MA12 loudspeaker Stereo Presets MA12 WALL MA12 FREE MA12 502B MA12 MB4 MA12STK WALL MA12STK FREE MA12STK 502B MA12STK MB4 MA12STK HF 802 Series loudspeaker Preset Descriptions Stacked 802 Series loudspeaker bi amped with AWCS Note Limiting is assigned to outputs 3 and 4 for protection of the AWCS Stacked 802 Series loudspeaker bi amped 125 Hz MA12 loudspeaker Preset Descript
305. gnal est prelev apr s le correcteur d aigu s et apr s la section correcteur O nsoro Il tasto EQ bypassa la sezione equalizzazione quando non attivo La pres sione alternata di questo tasto permette di comparare i segnali equalizzati e non equalizzati MANDATE AUSILIARIE AUX SENDS Sono usate per regolare un insieme sonoro separato per FOLDBACK EFFET TI o registrazione e la combinazione di ogni Mandata Ausiliaria Aux Send mixata sulla rispettiva Uscita Aux sul retro del mixer Per gli Effetti e utile che il segnale sia sfumato con il fader questo e chiamato POST FADE ma per Foldback o Monitor importante che la mandata sia indipendente dal fader questo chiamato PRE FADE Tutte le Aux Send sono escluse quando il tasto MUTE premuto Tutte le sei mandate Aux sono POST EQ a meno che l EQ sia bypassato con il tasto EQ e sono nor malmente POST FADE per l uso con mandate di effetti o submix addizion ali Se richiesto le Aux amp 2 e 3 amp 4 possono essere impostate come PRE FADE con il relativo tasto ed usate per foldback o mandate monitor Le Aux 5 amp 6 sono sempre POST FADE PAN Controlla la quantit di segnale del canale che viene mandata ai bus MIX destro e sinistro permettendo cosi di muovere la sorgente all interno del l immagine stereo Quando la manopola completamente a destra o com pletamente a sinistra il segnale essere indirizzato individualmente alle uscite destra o sinistra
306. golare il livel lo dell amplificatore Ouando vengono aggiunti canali al mixer i meters potrebbero arrivare al rosso Regolate il livello generale con il Master Fader se necessario NOTA Il livello di ogni sorgente nell uscita finale influenzato da molti fattori tra cui la regolazione di sensibilit Sensitivity il Channel Fader e gli Output Faders Dovreste tentare di usare solo il gain necessario ad ottenere un buon bilanciamento tra i segnali con i faders impostati come descritto sopra Se il gain d ingresso troppo alto il fader abbassato troppo per compensare ed avere abbastanza gioco per il mixaggio e il rischio di feedback perch piccoli spostamenti del fader hanno un effetto significativo sul livello di uscita Se il gain troppo basso non ce ne sar abbastanza sui faders per alzare il segnale ad un livello adeguato Guida all individuazione dei problemi Non c alimentazione e Controllare che ci sia tensione e che sia selezionata correttamente e l cavo di alimentazione collegato saldamente e Controllare i fusibili Se si illumina solo uno degli indicatori di alimen tazione rivolgetevi al rivenditore Spirit microfono a condensatore non funziona alimentazione phantom inserita microfono collegato all ingresso Mic cavo microfonico del tipo XLR bilanciato a 3 poli meter non indicano alcun segnale e gain impostato correttamente L a
307. gram d PLAY MODE until the display shows The program 15 also cleared when he fice D is and if the STOP key is pressed when playback is stopped in programmed order mode The programmed play order is not memorized when power is turned off If an attempt is mad to enter more than 25 program steps the message Fin Fi F appears on the display 3 3 Repeat play The unit can repeat the whole of the disc or pro gram or the current track only Selecting the repeat mode is only possible using the remote control unit It is not possible to select the repeat mode using the main unit alone 1 Theunit should be in playback pause or stop mode 2 Continue to press the REPEAT key 6 so that the display shows Ez zat i the REPEAT 1 up to track or apo the REPEAT ALL indicator lights 1 i neat the whole disc or program 3 If playback has not started restart it To cancel repeat a He REPEAT key so that the display shows 11 and the REPEAT indicator Before you start recording using the CD RW700 make sure that you understand the following key points Once you have recorded on a CD R disc the data cannot be erased from it You can add tracks to an unfinalized recordable disc Once finalized a CD R disc 1s fixed and behaves in the same way as a pre recorded disc Finalized CD RW discs however can be erased refreshed and re recorded 4 1 Input selectio
308. h Power nn _ rar Channel 1 Audio low Power EA E HHHBE Channel 1 Audio high Power gt DC Common A a Shield Shield PIN T a OPTIONAL LOCAL an POWER SOURCE T gt 12 to 15 VDC 250 mA NS DC O COMMON Cable Type 22AWG Stranded 3 Pair Twisted wire with Shield Denotes twisted pair Denotes shield Shield Earth ground Connect at power supply only Do not short to DC common Figure 10 Audiocom mode connections for an SS2002 Intercom Station in a U box Note for Clear Com connection use the Unbalanced Mode Intercom Channel pin out information listed in the Specifications section 12 TYPICAL 1 CHANNEL CABLE WIRING 1 Both wires ds e Shield Cable Type 22AWG Stranded 2 Pair Twisted wire with Shield Connector Type 3 Pin XLR Audio Neutrik or Switchcraft Pin 1 Common Pin 2 Channel Audio Power Denotes twisted pair Pin 3 Channel Audio Power i Shield Earth ground TYPICAL 2 CHANNEL CABLE WIRING Denotes shield WA 1 Both wires Shield Cable Type 22AWG Stranded 3 Pair Twisted wire with Shield Connector Type 6 Pin XLR Audio Neutrik only not compatible with 6 pin Switchcraft Pin 1 Channel 1 amp 2 Common Pin 2 No connection Pin 3 Channel 1 Audio Power Denotes twisted pair Pin 4 Channel 1 Audio Power 4 Pin 5
309. h and or a commercial CD cleaning fluid or ethyl alcohol Do not use thinner gasoline benzene or LP cleaning fluid as these will damage the disc If you are in any doubt as to the care and handling of a CD R disc read the precautions supplied with the disc or contact the disc manufacturer directly 1 4 5 Recommended media An up to date list of manufacturers who produce media suitable for use in the CD RW700 can be 1 4 7 Dimensional drawing 483mm 19 0 465mm 18 3 TSW CD RW700 3 5 76mm 88mm 435mm 17 1 obtained from your TASCAM dealer found on the TASCAM Web site at http www tascam com 1 4 6 Default settings The default settings when the CD RW700 is shipped from the factory are given below Setting Description Default value Digital direc 4 3 4 Digital direct Off Input selection 4 1 Input selection Analog Auto track 4 3 2 Automatic track n TRACE division Trigger level 4 3 1 Synchronized 54 dB 5 LEUEL recording DE IH time 4 3 6 Fade in and fade 3 seconds out FADE OUT time 4 3 6 Fade in and fade 3 seconds out Volume DIGITAL IN 4 1 1 Signal volume 0 dB Volume ANALOG IN 4 1 1 Signal volume 0 dB Timer on off times 2 5 2 Setting the timer Unset Play mode 3 1 3
310. h com All specifications are subject to change without notice LT 700 Portable Transmitter Selecting a Channel Selecting a Channel Transmit On Selecting a clear channel to broadcast is important for interference free broadcasting Wide Band Recommendation you don t plan to have other transmitters or a limited number operating in the same area it is recommended that you use wide band channels These are the most common channels used Many people own receivers that will operate on these channels In addition wide band channels offer the best fidelity and the lowest noise In this case select one of the 17 wide band channels A through on the 72MHz system or one of the 19 wide band channels on the 216MHz system labeled 2A 2B 2C etc The best way to select a channel is by trial and error Try a channel if it has low interference and reliable performance stick to that channel Compatibility with other manufacturers If you are using other manufacturer s receivers with the LT 700 find out their frequency then refer to Listen s Frequency Compatibility Tables Pages 28 31 to find the 11 700 channel number or letter that corresponds with the receiver s frequency As much as possible Listen has duplicated the wide band channel letters to cover frequencies of other major brands However we recommend verifying corresponding channel numbers and letters on the tables on pages 28 31 If you are using other manufacturer s rece
311. he Bose 1600 and 1800 ampli fiers The M B4 plug in EQ card must be used with these amplifiers to provide active equalisation for the system When used with the system digital controller the M B4 speaker is also compatible with industry standard amplifiers rated for 40 to 80 loads The M B4 speaker is packaged one per carton INSTALLATION Installation and user instructions are included with the loudspeaker M B4 modular bass loudspeakers are designed to be wall mounted They can also be assembled into bass arrays by using the M B4 endfire or broadside brackets in con junction with the Bose Panaray system digital controller No stands are required for portable use ACCESSORIES The following versatile accessories are avail able from Bose PC027056 4 single unit wall mount bracket black PC027057 white PC028664 MBA endfire 2x bass array bracket 028665 MBA endfire 4x bass array bracket PC028663 4 broadside 2x bass array bracket PC030132 Protection Bag ENGINEERS AND ARCHITECTS SPECIFICATIONS The loudspeaker shall be a multiple driver low frequency system with matched active equalisation as follows The transducer complement shall consist of four low frequency drivers of 5 2 13 3 cm diameter mounted symmetrically in vertical FULL RANGE SYSTEM WITH BOSE AMPLIFERS 1800 amplifier with 802 111 EQ card
312. he unit bypass the frequency convertor and the digi tal volume control See 4 3 4 Digital direct for details 6 INPUT SELECT Repeated presses of this key cycle through the differ ent audio inputs and the input combinations See 4 1 Input selection for full details 7 REMOTE SENSOR This 1s not a control but the sensor for the remote control unit When using the remote control unit make sure that there is a clear path from the remote control unit to the sensor Display The display is used to show the current status of the unit as well as the current menu settings See 2 2 Rear panel for details 0 MENU key Repeated presses of this key cycle through the differ ent menu items used to set parameters DISPLAY key Repeated presses of this key cycle through the differ ent time display modes These modes differ accord ing to whether the unit is playing back or recording a disc di MULTI JOG control Use this control to select tracks for playback to set parameter values etc Typically turning the control clockwise will increase a value and turning it counterclockwise will decrease the value There is no end stop to the con trol it may be turned continuously in either direction In addition pushing the control acts like an enter key 1 e the currently displayed value or setting 15 confirmed 42 TIMER switch PLAY OFF REC Use this switch with the timer functions to control
313. high impedance microphones Balanced Unbalanced 3 pole Jack 3 pole Jack Hot ve 4 Signal WARNING Start with the input SENS knob turned fully anticlockwise when SO ug a plugging high level sources into the LINE input to avoid overloading the Gnd Screen Gnd Screen input channel or giving you a very loud surprise Tip LINE INPUT Accepts 3 pole A gauge jacks or 2 pole mono jacks which will automatically ground the cold input Use this input for sources other than mics such as keyboards Ring Sleeve drum machines synths tape machines or guitars The input is BALANCED for low noise and immunity from interference but you can use UNBALANCED sources by Inserts wiring up the jacks as shown although you should then keep cable lengths as short as possible to minimise interference pick up on the cable Note that the ring must be nk grounded if the source is unbalanced Set the input level using the SENS knob starting Gnd Screen with the knob turned fully anticlockwise Unplug any MIC connection when using the LINE input Tip SN INSERT POINT eeve The unbalanced pre EQ insert point is a break in the channel signal path allowing limiters compressors special EQ or other signal processing units to be added in the signal path The Insert is a 3 pole A gauge jack socket which is normally bypassed When a jack is inserted the signal path is broken just before the EQ section The signal f
314. his key to pause playback or recording RECORD key Use this key to enter record ready mode see 4 Recording for details and also to enter manual track divisions see 4 2 3 Manual track division 0 SYNC REC key Use this key to turn synchronized recording on and off see 4 3 1 Synchronized recording for details FADER key Use this key to start fade in recordings or to start a fade out when recording see 4 3 6 Fade in and fade out for details 2 2 Rear panel ANALOG IN L UNBALANCED These RCA jacks accept analog audio signals from suitably equipped units 10 dB V unbalanced ANALOG OUT L R UNBALANCED These RCA jacks output analog audio signals at 10 dBV levels unbalanced to suitably equipped units amp DIGITAL COAXIAL IN OUT These two RCA jacks accept and output digital audio 1n standard consumer format SPDIP DIGITAL OPTICAL IN OUT These two TOSLINK optical connectors accept and output digital audio using optical fiber connectors 2 3 Remote control unit O POWER key Use this to turn the unit between off and standby modes equivalent to QD OPEN CLOSE key Opens and closes the disc tray equivalent to 3 12 TASCAM CD RW700 Number keys 0 through 10 and 10 Use these keys for direct entry of track numbers when playing back or making a programmed play list CLEAR key Use this key to clear a mistaken entry made with the
315. hone may pick up your returned voice audio from the speaker and re amplify it This could also happen if you are using a headset or headphones with open ear style earmuffs On the other hand if you are using earmuffs that completely enclose the ears the microphone is not likely to pick up the returned audio A certain amount of your own voice level is desirable to overcome the muffled sensation when talking The sidetone adjustment 15 different for these different operating conditions If you are suing the speaker with a panel microphone or if you are using an open ear style headset or headphones adjust sidetone as follows 1 SS 2002 amp SS 2002RM only activate channel 1 as described in the operating instructions 2 Activate talk and listen as described in the operating instructions 3 Slowly increase the volume to maximum while talking into the microphone 4 Using a small flat bladed screwdriver adjust the channel 1 sidetone trimmer to minimize your voice level in the head phones 5 SS 2002 amp SS 2002RM only activate channel 2 and repeat the above steps to adjust the channel 2 sidetone 6 Install the intercom station mounting screws after completing the adjustments The station 15 now ready for use If you are using headphones that completely enclose the ears adjust sidetone as follows 1 SS 2002 amp SS 2002RM only activate channel 1 as described in the operating instructions 2 Activate talk and listen as described in the
316. hrieben Die andere Speakonbuchse enth lt nur die Signale von Kanal 2 siehe auch nebenstehende Zeichnung F r eine leichtere Anbindung verwenden Sie die NLAFC Speakon stecker der neueren Generation LAUTSPRECHERKABEL Dickere und k rzere Kabel verringem sowohl Leistungsverlust wie eine Ver Verlegen Sie keine Ausgangskabel neben den Eingangskabeln WARNUNG Um elektrische Schlage zu vermeiden sollte der Verstarker nicht betrieben werden wenn blanke Kabel enden sichtbar sind CONEXIONES Salidas Speakon arrglificador PLX ofrece varias opdones de salida con dos conectores Neutrik Speakon y dos pares de teminales con tomillo 8 conector Speakon est dise ado espedalmente para conexiones de bodnas de alta potenda Se ajusta fijamente previene cortos el dricos y asegura una correcta polaridad conector Speakon superior tiene las salidas delos canales 1y2 yse usa para una operaci n en paralelo bianpnlificada o puenteada en mono lea las recomendadones de la pagina 12 atro conector Speakon s lo la salida del canal 2 Observe las ilustradones ala izquierda Para fadlitar la inserci n de los conectores le recomendarnos que use los nuevos conectores Speakon NLAFC con ret n CABLEADO DE BOCINAS Los celles gruesos y los trayectos cortos rrinirrizan la p rdida de potenda y degradad Gn por el factor de arrorti Quadion No coloque los cables de las bodinas cerca
317. hut off preventing tum off noises Serious faults trigger a shutdown of the power supply the high switching frequency cuts off power within microseconds to limit darrage SOUS LE CAPOT Audio haute perfommance Des transistors de puissance a haute vitesse convertissent cette puissance de courart continu en une sortie audio plein registre qui actiome le haut parleur La conception haute tension et le drauit sp cial de r troactiona coude d tecteur corrige les erreurs sur les tensions positives et n gatives des haut parleurs an liorant ainsi le coeffidert d arrortisserrert et le contr le du rrouverrert du c ne du haut parleur Les composantes de puissance sont nont es diredtement sur le radiateur isol qui lui rm me fome un tunel d air large et court directerrent davart le ventilateur pour un refroidissement optimal Une sonde thenvique est noy e rr rre le radiateur de chaque canal pour cortr ler la temperature et piloter la vitesse du ventilateur le circuit de protection le drait de polarisation essurart ainsi une performance audio rre virrale a tout niveau detemperature ou ce signal Un draut supervise la dissipation des transistors et n active le d lestage de protection que lorsque wairrert n cessaire de sortie est bloqu lectroniquerrert lors de l cr tage pour obtenir un r tablisserrert tres doux et ultra rapide Le circuit de blocage pilote aussi le drait lirriteur proportionnel en
318. ice If too many an piifiers are used on one outlet the building s circuit breaker may tip and shut off power An overload in aged mono May cause the anplifierto dick off for three seconds indicated by the half br ight POWER LED followed by a nomral restart Check the load inqpedance 4 ohms minimun or reduce signal level 5 dlowing bight red indicate a thermal shutdown An arrplifier which keeps shutting off may have a serious internal faut Tumit off rerrove power and have the arrplifier serviced by a qualified technidan gt INDICATION SIGNAL LED NOT LIT If the green POWER indicator LED is at full brightness ard the fanis running yet the signal LEDS indicate no signal check the input Make sure the signal source is operating and try another input calle Connect the source to another channel or anplifierto confinmits operation 2 ETEINTE V rifiez le branchement du cordon d alirrentation Assurez voLs que la pise de auat fondionre en y branchant un autre eppareil Un trop grand nombre darrpificateur reli s au drait pouraiert faire d dencer le disjoncteur coupant l alimentation Une surcharge en mode port mono pourrait teindre nonentan ment l arrplificateur tel quiindiqu par la DHL pessera deni intensit suivi parle dallurage V rifiez l inp danae de la charge 4 ohrrs ninimn ou r duisez le n
319. ientele de ou en commande sp dale chez votre rrarchand ou distributeur local E I N B A U Benut n Sie vier Befestigungs schrauben und Unterlegscheiben zumFronteinbau in das Rack St tzen Sie den Verst rker auch an seiner R ckseite ab Dies gilt besonders f r den mobilen Einsatz R ckw rtige Einbaus tze k nnen direkt bei QSC oder den jeweiligen H nden oder Distributoren bestellt werden All four screws Toutes les quatre vis Alle vier Schrauben Todos cuatro tornillos 10 typ 10 32 S 5mm INSTALACI N Utilice cuatro tomillos con rondanas quando coloque el amplificador en la parte frontal del rad lt De la misma manera apoye la parte posterior espedalmente cuando vaya a transportar el equipo Las asas de rrortaje est n disponibles en el departarrerto de servidos t amp cnicos de o p dalas directarrerte a su distribuidor n gt ww ram ram rmm a __ a ram XLR unbalanced XLR asyrr trique 9 unsyretrische XLR 9 XLR no balanceado TRS unbalanced TRS asyrr trique unsyrretrische CONNECTIONS Inputs Each channel has adive balanced XLR and Y imdh 6 3 nm inputs wired in parallel The input impedance is 12 balanced 6 unbalanced Balanced signals are less prone to AC hum but unbalanced signals can be suitable for short cable runs The signal source s output inn
320. ies are not charging Make sure the battery switch is in the NiMH position Make sure you have turned the unit s POWER on initially to charge Make sure you have connected an approved Listen charging transformer Or if inserted in charging tray make sure the unit is ON and is pushed securely into tray Make sure you use ONLY NiMH batteries provided by Listen Never try to charge alkaline batteries want to run the unit from wall transformer Simply plug a Listen approved transformer to the Charge Power connectors Batteries need not be installed however NiMH will be recharged if installed and if the BATTERY SELECT switch is All specifications subject to change without notice EH 27 o x LT 700 Portable Transmitter Specifications LT 700 Portable Transmitter Specifications RF Frequency Range 12MHz 72 05 75 95MHz 216MHz 216 025 216 975 MHz Transmitter Stability 50 PPM Output Power 72MHz 8000uV at 3 meters 216MHz 100mW Max allowed by FCC Signal to Noise ratio 72MHz Wide band channels 6008 Narrow 54dB 216MHz Wide band channels 50dB Narrow 44dB Antenna Uses microphone cable Available Channels 72MHz 17 wide band 40 narrow band 216MHz 19 wide band 38 narrow band Modulation is automatically switched when changing between narrow and wide band channels Physical Dimensions 3 W x 1 D x 5 H 71 6cm W x 2 5cm D x 13cm Weight 1 Ib 0
321. igures 5a and 5b The user can select either a low pass filter a LPF or high pass filter HPF In general this filter is intended P DigiTool MX HPF to be used as a high pass type for the purpose of removing E unwanted low frequencies at the input particularly when used for high gain microphone applications This will tend to B stabilize dynamic processing such as gates and compressors that appear later in the chain In addition the user has control over the Q of the filter gt 20 50 100 200 500 1 2k 5k 10k 20k Q ADJUSTMENT The Q is a primitive component of the filter b and is usually fixed in most HPF or LPF implementations Figure 5b illustrates the effect of the Q adjustment on the frequency Figures 5a and 5b Filter control panel response of the filter The illustration shows the filter in high a and varying Q values b pass mode with the corner frequency set for 100 Hz There are five sweeps shown each with a different Q value The normal setting for is typically 0 707 which is shown in the illustration as the 2nd sweep from the bottom At this value the filter is considered to be critically damped and has a monotonic response throughout the attenuation band The attenuation at the corner frequency is 3 dB Higher Q values result in corner frequency gain rather than attenuation Lower Q values result in more attenuation at the corner frequency Note that in either case the filter still achiev
322. il tasto e rilasciato il LED funge da indicatore di picco che si illumi na a circa 4 dB prima del clipping per avvertire di un possibile sovraccarico Il segnale campionato sia dopo l HF EQ che POST EQ Page 11 O CONMUTADOR DE ECUALIZACION El conmutador de ecualizaci n suprime el circuito de ecualizaci n en la se al al desactivarlo Pulsar y soltar alternativamente este bot n es una manera f cil de comparar las se ales ecualizada y no ecualizada ENVIOS AUXILIARES Se utilizan para crear mezclas independientes para monitorizaci n efectos o grabaci n y la combinaci n de todos los env os auxiliares se mezcla sobre la correspondiente salida auxiliar situada en la parte posterior del mezclador Para efectos es til que la se al suba o baje de nivel con el fader esto se llama post fader pero para foldback o monitoraje es importante que el env o sea indepen diente del fader esto se llama pre fader Todos los env os auxiliares quedan silenciados junto a las dem s salidas del canal cuando el bot n MUTE es pre sionado Todos los 6 auxiliares son post ecualizaci n a menos que la ecualizaci n est desactivada usando el interruptor EQ ver arriba y normalmente est en post fader para su uso como env o de efectos o sub mezclas adicionales Los auxiliares 1 2 y 3 4 pueden conmutarse en pares a PRE FADER pulsando los botones PRE respectivos para su uso como salidas de foldback o monitores Los auxiliares 5 y 6 perman
323. iligen Gruppen Bussen geroutet werden in dem einer der entsprechenden Schalter gedr ckt wird MIX 1 2 3 4 Bei den Gruppen Bussen wird immer das linke Signal zum ungeradzahligen Bus 1 3 geroutet und das rechte Signal immer zum geradzahligen Bus 2 4 Die Stereoabstimmung erfolgt mit dem beschriebe nen PAN Regler Des weiteren kann das Signal auf den Mono Bus geroutet wer den Hierbei wird die Pegeleinstellung des PAN Reglers nicht ber cksichtigt QD Wird der rastende PFL Schalter gedriickt so wird das pre fade post EQ Signal zum Kopfh rer zum Regieraum Monitor Ausgang und zur LED Anzeige geleit et und die zuvor angew hlte Monitor Quelle ersetzt Die LED leuchtet bei gedr cktem PFL Schalter Des weiteren leuchtet auf der Mastersektion zus t zlich die LED PFL AFL und zeigt an daB ein PFL Schalter auf einem Modul gedr ckt ist Diese pre fade Abh rm glichkeit ist sinnvoll wenn ein Fingangssignal eingestellt und dabei gleichzeitig abgeh rt werden soll ohne da der Haupt Mix unterbrochen wird Ist der PFL Schalter nicht gedr ckt zeigt die LED am PFL Schalter bei ca 4 dB unterhalb Clipping das Peak PK Signal an An 2 MeBpunkten im LX7 hinter dem HF EQ und hinter der EQ Sektion wird das Signal abgenommen O rouch ca Lorsque cette touche est rel ch e la section correcteur est bypass e Cette touche permet de comparer un signal corrig et non corrig DEPARTS AUXILIAIRES Ceux ci sont employ
324. ill be required to correct This product meets the Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive 89 336 EEC Audiocom is a registered trademark of Telex Communications Inc Burnsville Minnesota 55337 Clear Com is a registered trademark of Clear Com Intercom Systems 3 End User License Agreement for Telex Software IMPORTANT Please read this document carefully before using this product THIS DOCUMENT STATES THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS UPON WHICH TELEX COMMUNICATIONS INC THE COMPANY OFFERS TO LICENSE THE INSTALLED SOFTWARE OR PROGRAM SOFT WARE FOR USE WITH THE PRODUCT IN WHICH IT WAS INSTALLED YOU ARE AGREEING TO BECOME BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT DO NOT USE THIS PRODUCT PROMPTLY RETURN THE PRODUCT TO THE PLACE WHERE YOU OBTAINED IT FOR A FULL REFUND The installed software as supplied by the Company is licensed not sold to you for use only under the terms of this license and the Company reserves all rights not expressly granted to you You own the product or other media on or in which the Software is originally or subsequently recorded or fixed but the Company retains ownership of all copies of the Software itself 1 License This license allows you to use the Software for internal purposes only on a single product in which it was installed 2 Restrictions a You may not market distribute or transfer copies of the Software to others or e
325. imited to 1 amp Note that both SS1002 and SS2002 stations may be connected depending on each location s need to communicate with one or two channels SS1002 stations may be connected to either channel one or two Also note that locally powered stations may be connected This is recommended when stations are installed at remote locations Since the PS2001L provides termination for the intercom channels no user installed termination is required All Locally Powered Intercom Stations Dry Lines If intercom stations are widely distributed you can dispense with a system power supply PS2001L SPS 2001 etc and use local power for each station When no power is delivered on the intercom channels this is known as dry line operation Since a system power supply is not used a line termination must be inserted in each intercom channel for proper operation Again note that only the U box has provisions for local power The 3 pin connectors on 5 and RM versions do not permit this type of connection Figure 7 illustrates an intercom system using all locally powered U boxes 552002 552002 m 552002 0 Box 0 Box 0 Box LOCAL POWER LOCAL POWER LOCAL POWER 12 to 15 VDC 250 mA 12 to 15 VDC 250 mA 12 to 15 VDC 250 mA LINE TERMINATION 552002 552002 NM 552002 m U Box U Box U Box LOCAL POWER LOCAL POWER LOCAL POWER 12 to 15 VDC 250 mA 12 to 15 VDC 250 mA 12 to 15 VDC 250 mA Figure 7 An exa
326. in 20 3 dB from the line Maximum Output 60 mW into 150 ohm Frequency Response 200 Hz to 8 kHz with no more than 4 dB deviation Audible Alert 1 kHz at the headset Total Harmonic Distortion Less than 296 at 50 mW from the line Sidetone 20 dB minimum range adjustable 17 DYNAMIC MICROPHONE AMPLIFIER Voltage Gain Mic to Channel 45 3 dB before limiting Mic to Headphone adjustable 65 dB range into 150 ohm Frequency Response 200 Hz to 8 kHz 1 3dB Total Harmonic Distortion Less than 196 at Channel output at 1 kHz ELECTRET MICROPHONE AMPLIFIER Voltage Gain Mic to Channel 24 3 dB before limiting Mic to Headphone adjustable 45 dB 10 into 150 Frequency Response 200 Hz to 8 kHz 1 3dB Total Harmonic Distortion Less than 196 at Channel output 18 1000008 EN JP3 EN Es LJ 888838 BAL SWi UBL E R94 Figure 4 Board Number 9040 7740 000 BP 1002 Shorting across Pins 1 and 2 JP7 JP8 JP10 JP11 JP12 and JP13 Shorting across Pins 2 and 3 JP5 JP6 and JP9 Not Populated JP1 JP2 and JP3 Populated on Pin 1 Only JP4 BP 2002 Shorting across Pins 1 and 2 JP7 JP8 JP9 JP10 JP11 JP12 and JP13 Shorting across Pins 2 and 3 JP5 and JP6 Not Populated JP3 Populated on Pin 1 Only JP1 JP2 and JP4 Default Settings 19 APPENDIX A OPTIONAL FOOTBALL MODIFICATIONS GENERAL DESCRIPTION In Audiocom Intercom S
327. inal track can be erased if required see 5 2 1 Erasing tracks and the disc then finalized If the disc is a CD R it must be final ized prior to use see 5 1 Finalizing 4 3 Advanced recording These sections cover more advanced recording techniques 4 3 1 Synchronized recording Synchronized recording means that recording will begin automatically when a signal is received and will stop when the signal ends To enable or disable synchronized recording 1 Arecordable disc must be loaded 2 With the unit in record ready or record mode press the SYNC REC key or QD The display shows Hi iH briefly and then changes to the track and time display When synchronized recording is enabled the SYNC indicator lights in the display The SYNC REC key is also used to turn off syn cronica recording the display briefly shows and then returns to the track andi finn display The signal level which may be used with synchro nized recording operations here called the trigger level or threshold is set as below TASCAM CD RW700 19 4 Recording Advanced recording 1 With a recordable disc loaded press the MENU 9 Ou until the shows gt gt E where x x is the cur m ue 2 Turn the MULTI JOG control or use the ar E Low numerical values of this setting towards 24 mean that it takes a louder signal to trigger the start of
328. ing Impedance greater than 10k ohms Sidetone 40 dB 35 dB adjustable range 16 Call Signaling Dimensions Pin 1 Common Pin 2 Local power 12 to 15 VDC If needed Pin 3 Power 30 9 125 2 125 Pin 4 Intercom channel audio and DC call signaling b 231 78 mm 4 53 98 mm Pin 5 Power 30 Pin 6 Intercom channel 2 audio and DC call signaling Speaker Output Power 171 5 mm 4W max 8 ohms 9 NT 4 125 48 7 104 78 mm 6 oes 2 pM 85 16 0 nm 8 563 DS mm P Box 1 8 11 b 206 mm 1 6 102 155 2 7 812 Dia 3 Places 4 69 mm 20 63 mm ig 3 Uy Box 10 25 gt 260 4 mm 5 46 138 7 mm RM 17 TRADEMARKS Audiocom is a registered trademark of Telex Communications Names of other products mentioned herein are used for identification purposes only and may be trademarks and or registered trademarks of their respective companies WARRANTY INFORMATION Products are warranted by Telex Communications Inc to be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one year from the date of sale The sole obligation of Telex during the warranty period is to provide without charge parts and labor necessary to remedy covered defects appearing in products returned prepaid to Telex This warranty does not cover any defect malfunction or failure caused beyond the control of Telex including unreasonable or
329. ing typeface is used to show the number of the key as given in the diagram in this manual and the corresponding explanation 1 Introduction Finalizing 1 3 Unpacking the CD RW700 When unpacking the unit you should find the fol lowing items in addition to this manual The main unit itself The remote control unit Two AA batteries for the remote control unit A rack mounting screw kit 1 3 1 Rack mounting the unit Use the rack mounting kit to mount the unit in a standard 19 inch equipment rack as shown below Remove the feet of the unit before mounting it See 1 4 Environmental considerations below for details of ventilation etc 1 4 Environmental considerations The CD RW700 may be used in most areas but to maintain top performance and prolong operating life observe the following environmental conditions The nominal temperature should be between 5 and 35 C 41 F and 95 F The CD RW700 is more sen sitive to extremes of temperature than ordinary CD players Relative humidity should be 30 to 90 degrees non condensing As the unit may become hot during operation always leave sufficient space above the unit for ventilation If you are mounting the unit in a rack leave 1U of space above it You should not place the unit on a piece of equip ment generating heat e g an amplifier to avoid pos sible problems with overheating Make sure that the unit is mounted in a level position
330. ins 2 and 3 JP5 JP6 and JP9 Not Populated JP1 JP2 and JP3 Populated on Pin 1 Only JP4 Shorting across Pins 1 and 2 JP9 and JP13 Shorting across Pins 2 and 3 JP5 and JP6 Not Populated JP3 Populated on Pin 1 Only JP1 JP2 and JP4 Table 2 Default Settings If you are using the 000 board see page 19 for the default settings 12 Table 3 s and Jumpers 2 Te or Switch Function Default Setting Number SW3 Electret Dynamic Microphone Dynamic a Select Must be set to Dynamic when JP9 functions are designed JP9 Balanced Single ended Dynamic Pins 1 amp 2 Mic shorted SW1 must be set to Dynamic Single ended Mic Pins 1 amp 2 shorted JP6 Balanced Mic Pins 2 amp 3 shorted Power Select Pins 2 amp 3 Channel One Power Pins 2 amp 3 shorted shorted On BP 1002 pins 2 amp 3 always shorted Channel Two Power Pins 1 amp 2 shorted Power Select Pins 2 amp 3 shorted Channel One Power Pins 2 amp 3 shorted On BP 1002 Pins 2 amp 3 always shorted Channel Two Power Pins 1 amp 2 Shorted Must be set for same channel as JP6 for proper power operation in Audiocom mode on BP 2002 Must be used in conjunction with SW1 Clear Com Audiocom Operation Balanced JP4 JP5 JP2 and JP1 Clear Com Audiocom Operation Jumper on Pins 1 amp 2 shorted UNBAL Clear pin only Com DC Call Detect Clear Com No jumper operation only not used in present Audiocom mode B
331. ion Audio information is routed to the same outputs regardless of the number of inputs that are connected Dual Mono Operation When the PANARAY system digital controller is used in dual mono mode the EQ crossover blocks process each input independently allowing the user to run two independent speaker EQs The router also processes each input independently so each output is discrete 11 4 1 Signal Flow CH1 and CH2 Inputs 1 CH1 and CH2 Inputs Input Meter Input CH2 1 CH1 and CH2 Input Section over CH2 Low 1 CH1 High 2 CH2 High 3 Mono High 4 CH1 Low 5 CH2 Low 6 Mono Low 7 CH1 FR 8 CH2 FR 9 Mono FR 10 CH1 No EQ 11 CH2 No EQ 12 Mono No EQ Output 4 The Output 3 ne Output 2 Output 1 A stereo mono or dual mono signal passes through the input section 12 4 2 Signal Flow EQ and Crossover 2 EQ and Crossover 1 CH1 High Hi 2 CH2 High npu nout CH ed 5 CH2 Low 6 Mono Low 7 CH1 FR 8 CH2 FR 9 Mono FR 10 CH1 No EQ 11 CH2 No EQ 12 Mono No EQ Output 4 Output 3 Output 2 Output 1 Input Input CH2 trim Input meter 2 EQ and Crossover Next the program material passes through the EQ and crossover section 13 4 3 Signal Flow 2 x 4 Router 3 2 x 4 Router Input Meter 1 CH1 High m EG x High 2 CH2 High npu 3 Mono High CH1 CH1 Low 4 CH1 Low 5 CH2 Low 6 Mono Low 7 CH1 FR 8 CH2 FR NEN M 10 CH1 No
332. ions MA12 loudspeaker Full Range Wall Mount EQ Curve MA12 loudspeaker Full Range Free Field EQ Curve MA12 loudspeaker bi amped with 502 B loudspeaker MA12 loudspeaker bi amped with MB4 MA12 loudspeaker bi amped 160 Hz Stacked MA12 loudspeaker Full Range Wall Mount EQ Curve Stacked MA12 loudspeaker Full Range Free Field EQ Curve Stacked loudspeaker bi amped with 502B loudspeaker Stacked MA12 loudspeaker bi amped with MB4 Stacked MA12 loudspeaker bi amped 160Hz Output 1 80211 CH1 High 802111 CH1 High Output 1 MA12 CH1 Full Range MA12 CH1 Full Range MA12 CH1 High MA12 CH1 High MA12 CH1 High MA12 CH1 Full Range MA12 CH1 Full Range MA12 CH1 High MA12 CH1 High MA12 CH1 High Output 2 802111 CH2 High 802111 CH2 High Output 2 MA12 CH2 Full Range MA12 CH2 Full Range MA12 CH2 High MA12 CH2 High MA12 CH2 High MA12 CH2 Full Range MA12 CH2 Full Range MA12 CH2 High MA12 CH2 High MA12 CH2 High Output 3 AWCS CH1 Low 802111 CH1 High Output 3 MA12 CH1 Full Range MA12 CH1 Full Range 502B CH1 Low MB4 CH1 Low MA12 Mono High MA12 CH1 Full Range MA12 CH1 Full Range 502B CH1 Low MB4 CH1 Low MA12 CH1 High Output 4 AWCS CH2 Low 80211 CH2 High Output 4 MA12 CH2 Full Range MA12 CH2 Full Range 502B CH2 Low MB4 CH2 Low MA12 Mono High MA12 CH2 Ful
333. ipLirriter Limitadoroe picos Wheat are the differences among Stereo Parallel Input and Bridge Mono nodes a e nnnnnen 12 Maas st r o parallele et port quelles sort les differences Unterschieceanischen Stereo Parallel und IMonobr ckenbetrieb G les sonlas diferendas entrelos nodos Est reo Entracks Paralelas y Puenteado en Mano Anschlussklemmen Terminales contarnillo Operating voltage AC munire Tersiond uilisation alimentation CA Netzanschlu vataj e de operacdian pinadpal Interngpteur dalimentationcCA Netzschalter Internyptor de engendiob Sonicbenwvo Instrument amplification 2L Anlificationd instrurent Instrurrent Verst rkung Anplificad noe instrureto FEHLERBEHEBUNG BUSQUEDA DE AVER AS Problem keine Kanaltennungy Pollera no hay separad nentre los canales Problem RauscheryZischen Problerre bruits et effet Larsen Rotem Pfeifen und Problerra chillidos y retoalimentad n INFORMATIONS DE GARANTIE GARANTIE BEDINGUNGEN INFORMACION DE GARANTIA ADRESSE POSTALE ET NUM ROS ADRESSE UND TELEFONNUMMERN DIRECCI N Y TH EFONO NOTE This equipment has been tested and found to conply with the linits for a Class B digital device pursuant to part 15 the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against hamrful interference in a residential in
334. is an overload or short circuit The circuitry in the unit will automatically reset when the overload or short circuit is located and fixed Universal AC Power Input The unit accepts any input power in the range of 100 240 VAC 50 60 Hz Intercom Channel Connectors When the Combine Isolate switch is set to the Isolate position each channel connector is powered separately and has completely separate intercom audio When the Combine Isolate switch is set to the Combine position each channel 1s still powered separately but the audio signals are combined so that all users on both channels can intercommunicate BAL UNBAL Selector Switch This selector switch allows the user to configure the unit for use in either an Audiocom BALANCED or Clear Com UNBALANCED system Compatibility includes channel connector pin outs channel power requirements and call signaling requirements The default setting for this switch is in the Audiocom BAL position 4 SPS 2001 SO 6 1 uc L dah Isolate 0 2 Volume INPUT 1 SPEAKERS m LINE LEVEL 1VRMS 100 240 VAC 60 50 HZ TELEX COMMUNICATIONS INC MADE IN USA INPUT 2 CLASS 2 WIRING 1 5A 24VDC Figure 2 SPS 2001 Front and Rear Panel Features A Speaker Inputs and Volume Control Two audio inputs are provided The inputs are combined internally and sent as a monaural signal to the internal speaker amplifier The Volume control adjusts the level to the f
335. is enabled the unit automatically inserts a track division in the recorded material when recording digitally from MD CD or DAT an incre ment signal is detected and the sound level rises above the threshold Track increment CD RW from source increments track level time Or increment signals are unavailable e g analog recording or digital sources other than MD CD or DAT and the sound level has dropped below the TASCAM CD RW700 21 4 Recording Advanced recording threshold for more than two seconds and sound has re started At least 2 level seconds time To enable or disable automatic track division 1 With a recordable disc inserted and with the unit in record ready mode ade e or Q repeatedly until is shown where may bet or OFF 2 Turn the MULTI JOG control 17 or use Ue SL E Dto change the value to H or The A TRACK indicator at the top right of the display lights when the auto track function is enabled Automatic track division can be turned on or off while recording is taking place When recording certain types of material e g certain types of classical music or spoken word through the analog connections since the track divisions are determined by relative silence it is possible that spu rious track divisions will be inserted Under these conditions it may be better to use manual track divi sion 4 2 3 Manual track division H
336. is intended to alert the user to the presence of important oper The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle as marked on the ating and maintenance instructions in this owner s guide Important Safety Instructions Read and follow these instructions Heed all warnings on the product and in the owner s guide Do not use this apparatus near water or moisture Clean only with a dry cloth Do not block any ventilation openings Install in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions To ensure reliable operation of the product and to protect it from overheating put the product in a position and location that will not interfere with its proper ventilation 6 Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators heat registers stoves or other apparatus including amplifiers that produce heat 7 Do not defeat the safety purpose of the grounding type plug A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong The third prong is provided for your safety If the provided plug does not fit in your outlet consult an electrician for replacement of the outlet 8 Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs convenience receptacles and the point where they exit from the apparatus 9 Only use attachments accessories specified by the manufacturer 10 Use only with a cart stand tripod bracket or table specified by the manufacturer or sold with the apparatus When a cart is
337. is unit does cause interference with TV or radio reception you can try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures a Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna b Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver c Plug the equipment into a different outlet so that it is not on the same circuit as the receiver If necessary consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for additional suggestions CAUTION Changes or modifications to this equipment not expressly approved by TEAC CORPORATION for compliance could void the user s authority to operate For the consumers in Europe WARNING This is a Class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures Pour les utilisateurs en Europe AVERTISSEMENT s agit d un produit de Classe A Dans un environnement domestique cet appareil peut provoquer des interf rences radio dans ce cas l utilisateur peut tre amen prendre des mesures appropri es F r Kunden in Europa Warnung Dies is eine Einrichtung welche die Funk Entst rung nach Klasse A besitzt Diese Einrichtung kann im Wohnbereich Funkst rungen versursachen in diesem Fall kann vom Betrieber verlang werden angemessene Mafinahmen durchzuf hren und daf r aufzukommen IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS CAUTION e Read all of these Instructions eSave these Instr
338. ish Black anodized aluminum front plated and painted steel chassis Mains voltage 100 to 240 50Hz to 60Hz auto switching Power consumption 15W PRESET Button 180 Speaker EQ presets sorted into Mono Stereo and Bass Array Banks UTILITY Button Output level Output range Input sensitivity Input trim CH1 Input trim CH2 Output route 1 Output route 2 Output route 3 Output route 4 Delay units Delay master Limiter master Input configuration Custom presets Input configuration Custom presets View angle DELAY Button Delay 1 On Off Delay 2 On Off Delay 3 On Off Delay 4 On Off Delay Time 1 Delay Time 2 Delay Time 3 Appendix PANARAY System Digital Controller Quick Reference Guide LIMITER Button Lim1 On Off Lim2 On Off Lim3 On Off Lim4 On Off Lim1 Threshold L1 Lim1 Ratio L1 Lim1 Attack L1 Lim1 Release L1 Lim1 Gain L1 Lim2 Threshold L2 Lim2 Ratio L2 Lim2 Attack L2 Lim2 Release L2 Lim2 Gain L2 Lim3 Threshold L3 Lim3 Ratio L3 Lim3 Attack L3 Lim3 Release L3 Lim3 Gain L3 Lim4 Threshold L4 Lim4 Ratio L4 Lim4 Attack L4 Lim4 Release L4 Lim4 Gain L4 55 HEP SL Better sound through research 2002 Bose Corporation The Mountain Framingham MA 01701 9168 USA www bose com 262350 AM Rev 00 JN20793 FEATURES Compact 2 way 10 in stage monitor PA Dual purpose loudspeaker stage monitor and PA Rubber feet included for floor use
339. it stations to be quickly interconnected using prefabricated cables The box 15 a stationary version It also has dual loop through connectors for quick interconnection but the case 15 designed for desktop or console mount applications The U box is designed for permanent in the wall mounting It uses push type wire terminals for connection to the intercom system In addition the SS 2002RM can be used on a desktop or mounted in a standard 19 equipment rack using the optional RM 14 Rack Mount Kit Features 1 Channel and Power connections The U box uses quick release terminals to connect audio and power wires For the 5 box and box versions the terminal connections are brought out to the dual loop thru XLR connectors on the side of the box These permit several stations to be connected in a string or daisy chain using prefabricated intercom cables 2 Configuration DIP switches These switches control the following features Call Beep In addition to a flashing call key indication for incoming calls an incoming call beep tone can also be used Headset Microphone Type Selection Either a balanced or unbalanced dynamic microphone can be selected DC call enable This may be turned on to use the intercom station with intercom systems that use DC call signaling 3 Panel Mic Key Selects the Panel Mic connector Built in Mic 11 in the on position and the headset connector 10 in the off position
340. ith occasional peaks to the first red LED at a typical maximum source level This allows suf ficient headroom to accommodate peaks and establishes the maximum level for normal operation but see note below Repeat this procedure on other channels as required O Listen carefully for the characteristic sound of feed back If you cannot achieve satisfactory input level set ting without feedback check microphone and speaker placement and repeat the exercise If feedback persists it may be necessary to use a Graphic Equaliser to reduce the system response at particular resonant frequencies Note The initial settings should only be regarded as a starting point for your mix It is important to remember that many factors affect the sound during a live performance for instance the chan nel EQ settings or even the size of the audience You are now ready to start building the mix and this should be done progressively listening carefully for each component in the mix and watching the meters for any hint of overload If this occurs back off the appropriate Channel Fader slightly until the level is out of the red segments or adjust the Mix R glages et probl mes de fonctionnement R glages initiaux Une fois votre syst me connect voir plus haut les sec tions concernant la connexion et le c blage vous tes pr ts pour les r glages initiaux Le dessin de la face page 29 vous montre la position typique des potentiom tres ce
341. itorizan do cualquier parte de la mezcla incluyendo la mezcla principal sin afectar el sonido de la audiencia Al soltar este conmutador se vuelve a conectar la salida de mezcla al mezclador y se corta el CD PRECAUCION pulsar este conmutador se corta la se al normal de mezcla L R y por ello NO debe usarse durante una actuaci n en directo o en grabaci n SELECTOR DE FUENTE DE MONITOR Estos conmutadores permiten la selecci n de 2TK mono mezcla o grupos como fuente de los auriculares las salidas de monitor y los medidores y pueden seleccionarse individualmente o en combinaci n NOTA Si no hay botones pul sados no habr se al en los medidores ni en los monitores 000009000000 S UO amp 665 MONITOR PHONES This control sets the output level to the MONITOR LEFT amp RIGHT out puts If Headphones are plugged into the PHONES jack the Monitor out puts are cut off and the knob then sets the headphone listening level When the PHONES are unplugged the Monitor output is restored The source for the Monitor and Phones is selected by the five switches 13 above the con trol When any PFL or AFL switch is pressed the source for the Monitor outputs and Headphones is switched to the mono PFL AFL signal without inter rupting the other outputs from the mixer to allow individual signals to be monitored The original monitor
342. ive intemal terrperatures With nomal ventilation and 4 to 8 ohmloads the anplifier will handle any signal level induding but make sure that the speakers can handle the ful power However lower load innpedances and higher signal levels produce nore internal heating Into 2 ohm loads frequent or prolonged dipping indicated by constant flashing of the red CLIP LED may trigger power Bridged rrono mode doubles the output impedance of the amp 4 isthe mnimumlicadinpedance Heavy dipping may cause muting If this Peppers see Troudeshoating page 23 UTILISATION Vertilation Le ventilateur a vitesse variable s ajuste autorratiquerrent pour maintenir une terrp rature inteme raisonnable Veillez garder les entr es et sorties d air libres dobstudiors afin de perrrettre libre dralationdair L air chaud sort par le devart de l arrplificateur afin de pas surchauffer l int rieur du coffret d quipement Assurez vous que beaucoup d air frais puisse entrer dans le coffret tout parti culierenment si vous utilisez d autres appareils qui soufflent leur eir chaud l int rieur du coffret Niveaux c utilisation s curitaire Ledraitde praecdioncel amplificereur entre en fonction e met le signal en sourdinelors de temp rature excessive Avec une charge de 4 ou de 8 et avec une vertilation l arrdificateur fonctionnera sans arr t avec tout signal induant les surcharges ass
343. iveau de signal L allurrage cortinu des DH CLIP indique la mise en sourdine par le drait de protection cause de surchauffe Un arrplificeteur qui passe continuallerent en mude protedion pourrait d fectueux Eteignez l arrplificateur d lbrandhez le puis faites le v rifier par un techniden comp tert gt INDICATION DEL SIGNAL TEINTS CHECK Si la DEL POWER est allurr e et que le vertilateur fonctionne mais que les DEL SIGNAL restent teirtes v rifiezla source de signal Assurez vous que la source fonctionne puis essayez d autres Gables de raccoral Brancher le signal de source un autre canal damplificateur pour confinrer la pr sence de signal ANZEIGE LEUCHTET NICHT berpr fen Sie den Netzstecker Stellen Sie sicher da die Sted lt dose Stromf hrt indemSie ein anderes Ger t einstecken Falls zu vide Verst rker angeschossensind kann die Haussicherung ansprechen und die Versorgung unterbrechen Eine bersteuerung im Mono f r drei Sekunden stummrschalten was durch eine balbnelle LED angezeigt wird berpr fen Sie de Impedarz der angeschlossenen Lautsprecher minimal 4021 oder Sie den Signalpegel Eine hell aufleuchtende rote CLIP LED zeigen eine therrrische Abschaltung Ein Verst rker der ausgeschaltet Bleibt kann einen internen Defekt haben Schalten Sie ihn aus trennen Sie ihn von der Netrversorgung und las
344. ivers and the sound is distorted it is probably because the receiver is not designed to handle the 25kHz deviation of the Listen transmitter Several transmitters operating in the same environment For this you will need to choose your transmitting frequencies carefully The following guidelines should be used to choose channels a If possible use all wide band channels These channels offer lower noise b Select channels that have the highest frequency separation as possible see Frequency Compatibility Tables pages 28 31 to avoid adjacent channels and interference Selected channels should be at least 200kHz apart Through a process of trial and error select a combination of channels that offer the lowest interference and highest reliability LT 700 Look amp Listen Display Descriptions Indicates the unit is in PROGRAM mode to enter PROGRAM mode press UP and DOWN until the PGM symbol on the LCD display is shown Indicates unit is locked into channel press and hold UP or DOWN button for 3 seconds to unlock Channel the unit is tuned to Indicates battery level in 3 stages flashes when battery is low along with flashing red LED L O Locked Out while in PROGRAM mode L O shows what channels are locked in or out i ten LISTEN TECHNOLOGIES CORPORATION 1 801 233 8992 1 800 330 0891 Fax 1 801 233 8995 15 Internet www listentech com All specifications subject to change without
345. l Range MA12 CH2 Full Range 502B CH2 Low MB4 CH2 Low MA12 CH2 High 49 50 Bose Speaker EQ Preset List Stereo Bank PANARAY MB4 loudspeaker Stereo Presets MB4 100Hz LP MB4 160Hz LP MB4 200Hz LP MB4 280Hz LP PANARAY 502 B loudspeaker Mono Presets MB4 loudspeaker Preset Descriptions MB4 loudspeaker 100Hz Low Pass MB4 loudspeaker 160Hz Low Pass MB4 loudspeaker 200Hz Low Pass MB4 loudspeaker 280Hz Low Pass 502B loudspeaker Preset Descriptions Output 1 MB4 CH1 MB4 CH1 MB4 CH1 MB4 CH1 Output 1 Output 2 MB4 CH2 MB4 CH2 MB4 CH2 MB4 CH2 Output 2 Output 3 MB4 CH1 MB4 CH1 MB4 CH1 MB4 CH1 Output 3 Output 4 MB4 CH2 MB4 CH2 MB4 CH2 MB4 CH2 Output 4 502B 502B loudspeaker Mono Low Pass 502B CH1 502B CH2 502B CH1 502B CH2 160 Hz PANARAY 5029 BEX loudspeaker Stereo Presets 502BEX loudspeaker Descriptions Preset Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 502BEX 502BEX loudspeaker Mono Low Pass 502BEX 502BEX 502BEX 502BEX 200 Hz CH1 CH2 CH1 CH2 AWCS Stereo Presets AWCS Preset Descriptions Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 AWCS AWCS Mono Low Pass with limiting AWCS CH1 AWCS CH2 AWCS CH1 AWCS CH2 assigned to all four outputs PANARAY LT32029 Stereo Presets LT3202 LT3202CLUSTER LT3202 MBA LT3202 502BEX LT3202 loudspeaker Preset Descriptions LT3202 loudspeaker Full Range EQ
346. l Transformer 4 Install NiMH rechargeable batteries in the battery compartment ensuring that proper polarity has been observed 1 The unit will operate normally when connected to a wall transformer Top of Unit and Battery Compartment 2 Batteries do not need to be installed in the unit to operate using a wall transformer Note It is recommended that you only use a Listen charging transformer Or set the 11 700 with NiMH batteries within unit and powered ON in a Listen Carrying Charging Case LA 311 or LA 317 For charging using a transformer with NiMH batteries in unit plug wall transformer in CHARGING connection and into wall outlet as shown Batteries will be fully charged when red LED stops flashing and is unlit LED and battery symbol will flash slowly while charging Ihe 17 700 must be powered ON initially to charge NiMH batteries within unit Connect a wall transformer to the 11 700 or place unit in a Listen Charging Case LA 311 or LA 317 The unit must be on to charge However once the charger has started the unit can be turned off O Once the batteries are fully charged the unit will stop charging the batteries Full charge will be indicated when all the battery symbol segments are illuminated and the LED near the volume control stops flashing and is unlit The unit can be operated while batteries are charging 18 LISTEN TECHNOLOGIES CORPORATION 1 801 233 8992 1 800 330 0891 F
347. la peut tre une aide pr cieuse pour r gler votre console la premiere fois R glez les voies d entr e comme suit Connectez l entr e requise microphones claviers Note les micros aliment s en fant me doivent tre connect s avant que le 48 V soit mis en route R glez les g n raux et les faders d entr e 0 r glez les niveaux des amplificateurs de puissance environ 7096 Injectez un signal de niveau typique et appuyez sur la touche PFL de la premi re voie d entr e Le niveau du signal sera visualis sur l afficheur Ajustez le gain d entr e jusqu ce que le VU m tre atteigne la partie orange OdB et ceci pour un niveau de source maximum Cela permet une dynamique suffisante pour que les cr tes soient sup port es et que l on travaille un niveau de fonction nement normal voir note ci dessous cette proc dure sur les autres voies util is es Avec l addition de nouvelles voies d entr e les VU m tres peuvent tr s bien atteindre la z ne rouge Dans ce cas ajustez le niveau g n ral en util isant les faders du Master O X Ecoutez avec attention les caract ristiques du son afin d viter le Larsen Si vous ne pouvez pas attein dre des niveaux corrects et satisfaisants sans Larsen v rifiez la position des micros et des haut parleurs et refaites vos r glages Si le Larsen persiste il peut tre n cessaire d utiliser un galiseur graphique pour corriger la
348. lanced 6 mm 1 4 stereo 35 mW 35 mW into 32 Q RCA pin IEC60958 TYPE Il TOSLINK IEC60958 TYPE Il RCA pin IEC60958 TYPE Il TOSLINK IEC60958 TYPE Il USA Canada 120 VAC 60 Hz U K Europe 230 VAC 50 Hz Australia 240 VAC 50 Hz General export 120 230 VAC 60 Hz 27 W 483 x 98 x 312 mm 19 x 3 9 x 12 3 in 6 3 kg 13 9 lbs 5 C to 35 C 41 F to 95 F RC RW700 remote control unit 2 x type 3 AA batteries PRINTED IN CHINA MA 0335 Telex Operating Instructions BP 1002 BP 2002 Belt Packs Audiocom Intercom System INTRODUCTION The Audiocom BP 1002 and 2002 are microprocessor controlled one and two channel intercom belt packs An internal switch and jumper setting allows the units to be used with Clear Com components if desired Other internal switch and jumper settings allow the unit to be uniquely configured to the operator s requirements FCC STATEMENT This equipment uses and can radiate radio frequency energy that may cause interference to radio communications if not installed in accordance with this manual The equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits of a Class A computing device pursuant to Subpart B Part 15 of FCC Rules which are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference when operated in a commercial environment Operation of this equipment in a residential area may cause interference which the user at his own ex pense w
349. las bajas impedandas y los altos niveles de se al producen Calor interno En cargas de 2 ohmios con d peo frecuente o prolongado indicado por el parpadeo del LED CLIP puede ocunir un corte de corriente un enmuded miento de protecad n modo de puenteado en mono duplica la impedanda de salida del amplificador 4ohnios es la n nima impedancia de carga La saturaci n extrerra puede causar paro total Si sto sucede lea la secd n Busqueda de Aver as en la p gina 23 S 5 Sonido en u Z O Q U l 0 4 BEISPIELE Beschallung APPLICATIONS APPLICATIONS ANWENDUNGS Line level audio Audio niveau ligne Linepegel Audio Audio de nivel de lin a Enceinte monitor deux voies Zweiweg Aktivmonitorsystem Bocina monitor dos v as 2 way monitor stereo mode 2 Ix fy 1 tor
350. ld be moved with care Quick stops excessive force and uneven surfaces may cause the product and cart com bination to overturn 10 Ventilation Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for ven tilation and to ensure reliable operation of the product and to protect it from overheating and these openings must not be blocked or covered The openings should never be blocked by placing the product on a bed sofa rug or other similar surface This product should not be placed in a built in installation such as a bookcase or rack unless proper ventilation is provided or the manufacturer s instructions have been adhered to 11 Power Sources This product should be operated only from the type of power source indicated on the marking label If you are not sure of the type of power supply to your home consult your product dealer or local power company For products intended to operate from battery power or other sources refer to the operating instructions 12 Grounding or Polarization This product may be equipped with a polarized alternating current line plug a plug having one blade wider than the other This plug will fit into the power outlet only one way This is a safety feature If you are unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet try reversing the plug If the plug should still fail to fit contact your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized plug 13 Power C
351. lease both keys The Call indicator should now glow red The number of beeps heard in the headset indicates the current mode of operation Press the Call key to change to the next mode of operation Each press of the Call key will cause the BP 1002 BP 2002 to change to the next mode of operation When the desired mode is reached press the Talk key to select that mode and exit the mode changing function Beeps will be heard in the headset when the mode changing function is exited The number of beeps heard indicates the selected mode of operation NOTE Each time the intercom system power is turned on the beltpack will reset to the default mode of operation Mode 2 10 INTERNAL SWITCHES JUMPERS AND ADJUSTMENTS There are several internal switches jumpers and an adjustment that affect operation These are described below To gain access to the switches jumpers and the adjustment disconnect all power and line connections Remove two screws from the top of each side and two screws from bottom of each side Switch jumper and adjustment locations are shown in Figure 2 ea gt 502 99 e gt S 2 2i js LS mee m 92 903 504 o 9 o 9 ge el e e e e ce M Figure 2 Internal Switches Jumpers and Adjustments Note if you have 9350 7749
352. lectronically transfer or duplicate the software YOU MAY NOT REVERSE ENGINEER DECOMPILE DISASSEMBLE MODIFY ADAPT TRANSLATE RENT LEASE OR LOAN THE SOFTWARE OR CREATE DERIVATIVE WORKS BASED ON THE SOFTWARE OR ANY ACCOMPANYING WRITTEN MATERIALS b The Software and the accompanying written materials are copy righted Unauthorized copying of the Software including portions thereof or the written materials is expressly forbidden c You understand that the Company may update or revise the Software and in so doing incurs no obligation to furnish such updates to you 3 Limited Warranty The Company does not warrant that the operation of the Software will meet your requirements or operate free from error The Company DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NON INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS 4 Limited Liability The liability of the Company for any claims arising out of this License based upon the Software regardless of the form of action shall not exceed the greater of the license fee for the Software 4 OPERATION SYSTEM POWER The BP 2002 belt pack receives power externally in one of two ways Viathe intercom channel Via the local power pin 2 of the intercom channel connector The BP 1002 belt pack receives power externally via the intercom channel Both the BP 1002 and BP 2002 will pass system po
353. les l coute en studio la o on doit v rifier l absence de signal infrasonique dans le mix AUSSTATTUNG EINSTELLUNGEN Eingangsfilter BESCHREIBUNG Ein LF oder Hochpassfilter schneidet Frecuerven unterhalb 30 Hz baw 50 ab Hierdurch wird die Basswieder verbessert da Utratiefe st rende Frequenzen alogeschnitten werden und hierdurch ner Leistungf rdienomale Wiedergabe zur Verf gung steht Die Filtereinstellungen werden durch den links abgebildeten DIP Schalter eingestellt Bei albbgeschaltetem Alter werden die Frequenzen unterhallb 5 Hz unterdr ckt damit ein Schutz von Gleichspannung und Infraschallanteilen bestert EINSATZ DES EINGANGSHLTERS In der Regel werden Ihre Lautsprecher bei richtiger Filterung besser klingen Falls schon an anderer Stelle eine entsprechence Filterung stattgefunden Fat stellen Sie de Filterung ertsprech end dem Frequenzgang Ihrer Laut sprecher ein Bel ftete Lautsprecher ZB Bassreflex etc sind ausge sprochen errpfindich gegen zu grofse Auslenkungen der Memtran unterhalb des spezifiaerten Frequenzbereichs Der 50 Hz Filter arbeitet bestens mit praktisch allen Breitbandiautsprechem da eine leichte Verst rkung imBereich um100 Hzaufweist wes in einemvolleren Klang resultiert Der 30 Hz Filter ist f r Subwoofer und Breitbandkabinette gedacht Die Off Einstellung sollte nur f r Anwendungen wie zB eine Studiobe schallung verwende
354. limentar una bodna de 8 ohmios con la potenda de dos canales de 4Z ohrrs Para alimentar una bodna de 4 ohmios con la potenda de dos canales de 2 ohrrs Precauciones H modo de puenteado en nono puede mandar miles de watts a una sola bocina H consumo de corrierte alterna AC tambi n ser mayor Evite niveles de se ales excesivos y asegurese que el cableado y las bodnas resistan la potenda e Si la carga es menor a 4 ohrrg la saturad n es muy frecuente el anplificador puede enmudecerse fund n Mute durante los picos por varios segundos No use cargas de 2 ohmios LEA LAS PRECAUCIONES ADICIONALES PARA El MODO DE PUENTEADO EN MONO EN LA P GINA 11 13 25 13 10 336 6 mm 1 60 40 6 mm 12 60 320 4 mm 3 00 76 2 mm INSTALLATION Use four screws and washers when mounting the anplifierto the front rackrails Support the amp at the rear also especially in mobile and touring use rear rack rrourting ear kits are available 5 technical services departrrent or by spedal order from your dealer distri butor INSTALLATION Utiliser les quatre vis et rondelles de montage pour fixer le devart de l amdificateursurles rails de montage Il est recommande de supporter l arri re de l anplificateur tout particulierement pour applications mobiles et de toum e des ensembles de support sont disponibles du service ala d
355. ll range Full range Limiter Off Off Off Off Delay Off Off Off Off Example 2 Stereo Mid High with Stereo Bass PANARAY System Digital Controller Display Stereo 802111 MB4 Preset Description 802 11 Speaker Stereo with MB4 Speaker Stereo Bass Controller Inputs Ch 1 Mono Left from mixer From mixer Ch 2 Right from mixer Left Right k Controller Default Output Routing Right 7 _ High freq speaker MBA speaker Ch 1 Ch2 Ch3 Ch4 802 III Right Left tal Low freq Low freq Routing 802 111 speaker 802 111 speaker MB4 speaker MB4 speaker _ Left CH1 CH2 CH1 CH2 High freq High freq High freq Low freq Low freq Limiter Off Off Off Off Delay Off Off Off Off 17 5 1 1 PRESET Button Stereo Bank Example 3 Stereo Mid High with Mono Bass Due to space limitations in the PANARAY system digital controller there are no Presets that default to a Stereo Mid High with Mono Bass configuration To set up the controller for this operation simply per form the following steps 1 Select the desired Preset from the Stereo bank 2 Press the UTILITY Button and use the Arrow DOWN button to navigate to Output Route 3 and Output Route 4 Set both outputs to Mono Low Now all of the bass content is set up to be summed to mono but the mid high devices will still be stereo Note Save all changes before loading a new Preset Unsaved router changes will be lost if another
356. lug a headset into the jack located on the LT 800 s front panel to listen to the audio source Adjust headset volume to a comfortable level LT 800 Audio Control Refer to LT 800 Controls amp Displays Illustration on Page 7 o o T il The LT 800 incorporates automatic audio level control and processing Input levels can be viewed on the two VU meters on the front panel 1 ADJUST INPUT adjust INPUT knob counter clockwise to add gain to INPUT 1 Adjust INPUT knob clockwise to add gain to INPUT 2 If you have two audio sources connected to both INPUT 1 and 2 adjust the level of one input using the VU meter then adjust the output level of the other audio source 2 ADJUST CONTOUR Adjust the CONTOUR knob counter clockwise If most of your audio source is voice adjust clockwise for music The CONTOUR knob adjusts the relative equalization of the unit This equalization boosts or cuts frequencies above 3kHz 3 ADJUST PROCESS Adjust the PROCESS knob clockwise if you want more processing This will provide for even more consistent levels This knob adjusts processing relative to automatic processing already performed in the unit The LT 800 provides dynamic audio processing intended to keep audio levels consistent to the listener When the PROCESS knob is rotated fully clockwise all audio is at the same relative level When rotated fully counter clockwise more dynamic range is provi
357. m 40Hz to 300Hz which can be easily matched to any Bose professional loudspeaker High impact output for dominant bass material Rugged portable enclosure with metal grille and carrying handles Distinctive styling Recessed back plate with two Speakon NL4 connectors Band limited pink noise is applied to the M B4 speaker and amplified to a level at the loudspeaker terminals corresponding to 1 Watt as referenced to the nominal impedance The average sound pressure level dB SPL is measured at 1 metre from the speaker in an anechoic environment Band limited pink noise is applied to the M B4 speaker and amplified to a level at the loudspeaker terminals corresponding to the long term rated power handling of the speaker The average sound pressure level dB SPL is measured at 1 metre from the speaker in an anechoic environment Band limited noise meeting the IEC Standard 4268 5 is applied to the M B4 speaker and amplified to a level at the loudspeaker terminals corresponding to the power handling of the loudspeaker The loudspeaker must show no visible damage or measurable loss of performance after 100 hours of continuous testing Full complement of brackets to simplify installations The M speaker can be used with the Bose Panaray system digital controller to provide smooth accurate spectral response over the entire operating range of the system LOUDSPEAKER CONFIGURATION The MB4 modular bass loudspeaker can be used with t
358. m disinserita ed attivarla solo con tutti i fader abbassati per evitare danni alla consolle o ad apparecchi esterni Fare attenzione con le sorgenti sbilanciate che potreb bero essere danneggiate dall alimentazione Phantom sui pin 2 amp 3 del contatto XLR Staccare tutti i microfoni in caso di utilizzo dell ingresso line Il livello di ingresso viene regolato con la manopola SENS INGRESSO LINE Accetta jack a 3 poli Usate questo ingresso per sorgenti che non siano microfoni ad esempio tastiere drum machines synth registratori o chi tarre L ingresso BILANCIATO per un baso rumore e protezione da inter ferenze ma possibile usare sorgenti SBILANCIATE collegando i jack come mostrato in figura sebbene dobbiate mantenere la lunghezza dei cavi il pi corto possibile Impostate il livello di ingresso con la manopola SENS SENS Questa manopola imposta la quantit di segnale da mandare al resto del mixer Segnali troppo alti saranno distorti Segnali troppo bassi faranno risaltare il fruscio di sottofondo ed il livello di uscita dal mixer non sar suf ficiente Fermando la manopola sul segno U si avr il gain per l ingresso LINE Alcuni apparecchi specialmente quelli per uso domestico operano ad un livello pi basso I OdBV di quelli professionali quindi avranno bisogno di un gain maggiore per raggiungere lo stesso livello Vd SetUp Iniziale per impostare correttamente la manopola SENS Q FILTRO PASSA ALT
359. ma que el nivel de la salida directa no var e con los ajustes del fader para la mezcla principal Q ECUALIZACION El ecualizador EQ permite una precisa manipulaci n del sonido particular mente con el prop sito de mejorar el sonido en aplicaciones de directo donde a menudo la se al original difiere mucho del ideal y donde una ligera atenuaci n o realce sobre unas frecuencias determinadas puede realmente marcar la dife rencia en cuanto a claridad HF EQ G relo hacia la derecha para realzar las altas frecuencias 12kHz hasta 15 dB a adiendo viveza a los platos voces e instrumentos electr nicos G relo hacia la izquierda para eliminar estas frecuencias hasta 15 dB reduciendo el soplido o el excesivo nfasis de las consonantes con alto contenido en altas frecuencias lo cual puede producirse con ciertos tipos de micr fonos Sit e el bot n en su enclavamiento central cuando desee conseguir una respuesta plana MID EQ HMID amp LMID Se dispone de dos pares de botones que trabajan conjuntamente para formar un ecualizador de medios y agudos El bot n inferior de cada par proporciona 15 dB de realce o corte igual que el bot n HF EQ pero la frecuencia a la que se pro duce esto puede ajustarse por medio del bot n superior sobre una gama situa da entre 550 Hz y 13 KHz HMID 80 Hz y 1 9 kHz LMID Esto permite una aut ntica mejora creativa de la serial en situaciones de directo ya que esta banda central cubre la gam
360. male and female connectors are wired together in parallel providing a loop through at each connector pin Use one connector to connect to the intercom channel Use the other connector to daisy chain a cable to the next belt pack or other station on the channel Local Power Input BP 2002 only Normally the BP 2002 is powered from the intercom system and will turn on with the intercom system The BP 2002 belt pack may also be powered from an optional power supply 18 30 connected be tween pin 2 4 and pin 1 of the intercom channel connector 8 INTERCOM CHANNEL CONNECTORS On the BP 1002 the intercom channel is connected via a pair of 3 pin connectors one male and one female The male and female connectors are wired together in parallel providing a loop through at each connector pin Use one connector to connect to the intercom channel Use the other connector to daisy chain a cable to the next belt pack or other station on the channel OPERATING MODES The microprocessor within the BP 1002 BP 2002 controls four modes of operation that affects the Microphone Kill and Audible Call Alert features AUDIBLE Mic KILL BEEPS CALL ALERT Table I Operating Modes Changing Modes of Operation Perform the following steps to change the mode of operation 1 2 Both the Talk and Call indicators should be off Press and hold the Talk key then press and hold the Call key then re
361. may be used or cables be constructed using the diagrams in Flgure 11 In this method operating power and intercom audio for the entire intercom system ware carried over the same wires The advantage of this method 15 simplicity of connection The system power supply PS 2001L SPS 2001A etc automatically provides what 15 know as a terminating impedance for the intercom system Without this terminating impedance the sound quality will be distorted and the levels will shift every time additional stations are connected The disadvantage of the phantom power method is that some operating power 15 lost over very long intercom cables and performance at distant 8 intercom stations be reduced Generally if intercom stations within a few hundred feet from the system power supply phantom power will be sufficient Also note that increasing the number of stations will reduce the overall operating distance Phantom power is generally the only method that will be used to connect the S box P box and RM versions Figure 5 illustrates a phantom powered intercom system Note that the distance over which power can be delivered is less than the distance over which audio can be delivered Audio can be delivered for several miles to locally powered stations as described below Description of Locally Powered Connection Using this method an intercom station 1s connected to the intercom line just like any phantom powered intercom
362. ment by pass e Quand une prise est ins r e le circuit est coup juste avant la sec tion CORRECTEUR Le d part insert peut tre utilis en tant que sortie directe avant fader et avant correcteur en cr ant une liaison entre l ex tr mit et l anneau du jack de sorte que le circuit ne soit pas interrompu SORTIE DIRECTE Les voies l6 ont une sortie directe d di e qui permet la connexion directe aux equipements externes par exemple magn tophones ou effets Le niveau de ce signal avant fader peut tre cout et visualis sur l af ficheur bargraph en enfoncant la touche PFL de la voie appropri e TOUCHE DIR PRE Les sorties directes des voies l6 sont normalement apr s fader pour utilisation en d part effets ou pour r gler l aide du fader le niveau d un enregistrement En enregistrement public cette touche permet de passer individuellement les sorties avant fader de ce que le niveau soit pas affect par les mouvements de fader durant le mixage CORRECTEUR Le correcteur EQ permet une manipulation pr cise du son d am liorer en particulier le son en sonorisation le signal initial est souvent loin d tre id al et une l g re accentuation ou diminution des fr quences partic ulieres de voix peut vraiment faire une diff rence de clart y a trois sec tions permettant d agir sur diff rentes plages de fr quence AIGUES Tourn vers la droite ce potentiom tr
363. mentos electr nicos G relo hacia la izquierda para atenuar estas frecuencias reduciendo el soplido o el brillo excesivo Coloque el bot n en su enclavamiento central cuando no lo utilice El control posee una respuesta del tipo shelving pro porcionando 15 dB de realce o atenuaci n a la frecuencia fija de 12 Khz LF EQ G relo hacia la derecha para realzar las frecuencias bajas graves a adiendo mayor pegada a sintetizadores guitarras y percusiones G relo hacia la izquier da para reducir zumbidos sonidos atronadores o para mejorar un sonido poco en rgico Coloque el bot n en su enclavamiento central cuando no lo utilice El control posee una respuesta de tipo shelving proporcionando 15 dB de realce o atenuaci n a la frecuencia fija de 60 Hz ENVIOS AUXILIARES Se utilizan para crear mezclas independientes para monitorizaci n efectos o grabaci n y la combinaci n de todos los env os auxiliares se mezcla sobre la correspondiente salida auxiliar situada en la parte posterior del mezclador Los env os son siempre PRE FADER que es m s apropiado para salidas de fold back o monitores pero observe que las entradas de l nea en pares de canales mono pueden usarse como entradas est reo alternativas si se requieren env os post fader para efectos NIVEL El control rotativo de nivel ajusta el nivel general de la se al que se env a a la mezcla o al par de grupos seleccionados O Routing La se al del canal est
364. mer or placed in a Listen battery recharging tray NiMH batteries will be charged within the LT 700 Once batteries are charged the internal battery charger will automatically turn off This prevents overcharging of batteries automates the process of charging and makes it so you don t have to remember to unplug the charger 2 Do not attempt to charge alkaline or any other type of non NiMH batteries Only charge Nickel Metal Hydride NiMH batteries within the LT 700 We recommend that you use NiMH batteries supplied by Listen WARNING Attempting to charge non NiMH batteries may result in physical harm destruction of property and or fire 3 IMPORTANT To charge NiMH batteries the BATTERY SELECT switch must be selected to NiMH Use a pen or small oa o ha X E lock door by turning screwdriver to the move the switch located in the battery slot vertical as compartment directly below the BATTERY SELECT label to the proper position For only NiMH batteries set BATTERY SELECT switch to NiMH For all other batteries set BATTERY SELECT at alkaline Continued e e LISTEN TECHNOLOGIES CORPORATION 1 801 233 8992 1 800 330 0891 Fax 1 801 233 8995 17 Internet www listentech com All specifications subject to change without notice LT 700 Portable Transmitter Battery Recharging Charging the Batteries continued Operating the LT 700 with a Wal
365. mful interfer ence in a residential installation This equipment gener ates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruc tions may cause harmful interference to radio communi cations However this is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equip ment off and on you are encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures e Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver e Connect the equipment to an outlet on a different cir cuit than the one to which the receiver is connected e Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV techni cian for help Note Unauthorized modification of the receiver or radio remote control could void the user s authority to operate this equipment This product complies with the Canadian ICES 003 Class A specifications 1 0 Introduction Thank you for purchasing the Bose PANARAY system digital controller The PANARAY system digital controller uses a digital signal processing DSP architecture to provide smooth accurate spectral response for Bose professional loudspeakers that require active equalization Bose professional loudspeaker EQ can be applied by simply selecting the appropri
366. mic input 7 2 The mic input accepts XLR type connectors and is designed to suit a wide range of BALANCED or UNBALANCED signals Professional dynamic condenser or ribbon mics are best because these will be LOW IMPED ANCE You can use low cost HIGH IMPEDANCE mics but the level of background noise will be higher If you press the 48V switch down beside the phones jack the socket provides a suitable powering voltage for pro fessional condenser mics this is also known as Phantom Power ONLY connect condenser microphones with the 48V powering OFF switch UP and ONLY turn the 48V powering on or off with all output faders DOWN to prevent damage to the mixer or external devices TAKE CARE when using unbalanced sources which may be damaged by the phantom power voltage on pins 2 amp 3 of the XLR connector Unplug any mics if you want to use the LINE Input The input level is set using the SENS knob LiNE INPUT Accepts 3 pole A gauge TRS jacks Use this high impedance input for sources other than mics such as keyboards drum machines synths tape machines or guitars The input is BALANCED for low noise and top quali ty from professional equipment but you can use UNBALANCED sources by wiring up the jacks as shown although you should then keep cable lengths as short as possible Unplug anything in the MIC input if you want to use this socket Set the input level using the SENS knob ED SENS Sensitivity This
367. mple of Audicom intercom system using all locally powered 0 box stations with no power being distributed on the intercom channels dry lines Since an Audiocom power supply is not used the installer must connect a line termination somewhere in each channel for proper operation Channel audio low Channel audio high Resistors 150 Ohm 1 4W Capacitors 22 uf 35V Non polarized Electrolytic Common Figure 8 Audiocom mode line termination for dry line operation One required for each channel the termination is available via PN 9020 7550 000 10 TO ADDITIONAL TO POWER SINGLE CHANNEL STATIONS SUPPLY CONNECTOR 5 p Channel Audio high Power E Channel Audio low Power Pair f gt DC Common E A A Shield PIN 1 Da 64240 OPTIONAL LOCAL UN LR m mu b Cable Type 22AWG Stranded 2 Pair Twisted wire with Shield a Denotes twisted pair Denotes shield Shield Earth ground Connect at power supply only Do not short to DC common Figure 9 Audiocom mode connections for an SS1002 Intercom Station in a U box Note for Clear Com connection use the Unbalanced Mode Intercom Channel pin out information listed in the Specifications section 11 TO ADDITIONAL TO POWER SINGLE TWO CHANNEL STATIONS SUPPLY CONNECTOR D a D Channel 2 Audio low Power d Channel 2 Audio hig
368. mplifi er s or with an M B4 EQ card to be installed in a Bose 1600 or 1800 amplifier The Panaray system digital controller shall provide active electronic equalisation and crossover functions SAFETY AND REGULATORY COMPLIANCE All versions of the Panaray M B4 modular bass loudspeakers comply with ANSI EIA 636 Recommended Loudspeaker Safety Practices and EMC Directive 89 336 EEC and Article 10 1 of the Directive in compliance with EN50081 1 EN 50082 1 as signified by the CE mark WARRANTY INFORMATION All versions of the Bose Panaray M B4 modu lar bass loudspeakers are covered by a 5 year transferable limited warranty TOP VIEW 18 1 459mm M8 26 7 23 677mm 583mm 26 7 23 677mm 583mm Better sound through researche System Digital Controller Installation guide HEPT E pro bose com Table of Contents 9 0 6 0 8 0 9 0 10 0 11 0 12 0 14 0 SA a CI ILE CU c 4 A _ _ _ _ ee eer ee 8 A LU ee eee 9 A E ID 10 fea ee M E 11 4 1 ASA vci c Er EM ER 12 he REO A 13 527 E 14 and Cimiteri er 15 PRESET BURNOM ET LE 16 5 1 Bank cT 17 5 1 1 Stereo Mid High with Mono 18 972 IM Bank c cct TEE 19 9 25 DAS SAA A EE MM 20 54 Dual e a
369. mporarily The pause indicator on the display shows this Pressing PAUSE or PLAY again restarts record ing with a new track number 6 Press STOP 47 or D to stop When bu the display shows F H ipi 3 Program Memory pee and the REC indicator flashes for a few seconds as the unit writes to the disc While the Writing message is displayed all keys are disabled and the unit is actually writing to disc Do not disconnect the power or subject the unit to severe vibration or shocks at this time as this will prevent proper recording of the information When this message disappears you must press the RECORD key step 2 before restarting the recording Recording restarts with a new track number NOTE Remember that every time recording is paused or stopped when recording is restarted a new track will always be started lt is not possible to record in two stages within one track 4 2 1 Although an unfinalized disc cannot be played back on an ordinary CD player the CD RW700 can play back tracks that have been recorded Use the MULTI JOG control AD or the SKIP keys to select a track for playback Playing back tracks 4 2 2 Time display while recording While a recordable disc is being played back the four time display modes available in normal play back as described in 3 1 1 Time display modes TOTAL TOTAL REMAIN track REMAIN and elapsed track me 4 Recording Advanced recording How
370. n To select the input to be recorded press the INPUT SELECT key on the main unit 6 Repeated presses of the key cycle through the follow ing options Analog in Optical digital in Coaxial digital in Optical digital and analog mixed Coaxial digital and analog mixed In the case of either the coaxial or optical inputs being selected either alone or together with the ana log inputs the boxed DIGITAL indicator shows on the display and the appropriate indicator COAXIAL or OPTICAL lights on the display If the analog signal is selected either alone or together with either of the digital inputs the boxed ANALOG indicator lights on the display 4 1 1 Signal volume The signals from either of the digital inputs coaxial or optical can be mixed with the signals from the analog inputs The signal path is as follows this description applies no matter how many inputs are being mixed The analog signals received at the ANALOG IN jacks are controlled with the REC LEVEL controls 4 e Any input analog signals are then mixed with the digital signals received at either the COAXIAL or OPTICAL or 26 If analog and digital sig 4 Recording nals are being mixed the digital signals are attenu ated by 12 dB The level of the analog digital mix is then controlled using the digital volume menu as described below 1 Press the RECORD key 00 or D to place the unit in record ready mode 2 Repeatedly pres
371. n as defined below Balanced Mode set to BAL position Line Terminating Impedance 300 ohms 10 Connector Pin out Pin 1 audio and DC return Pin2 Full duplex balanced intercom audio and 24 VDC output Pin3 Full duplex balanced intercom audio and 24 VDC output Unbalanced Mode set to UNBAL position Line Terminating Impedance 150 ohms 5 Connector Pin out Pin1 Common audio and DC return Pin2 24 VDC output Pin3 Full duplex unbalanced Intercom audio high Speaker Inputs SPS 2001 Only Type RCA Phone Jack Tip Speaker Input Sleeve Speaker Input Approvals UL CUL CE 12 TRADEMARKS Audiocom is a registered trademark of Telex Communications Names of other products mentioned herein are used for identifica tion purposes only and may be trademarks and or registered trademarks of their respective companies WARRANTY INFORMATION Products are warranted by Telex Communications Inc to be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one year from the date of sale The sole obligation of Telex during the warranty period is to provide without charge parts and labor necessary to remedy covered defects appearing in products returned prepaid to Telex This warranty does not cover any defect malfunction or failure caused beyond the control of Telex including unreasonable or negligent operation abuse accident failure to follow instructions in the manual defective or improper associated
372. n of for example a compressor limiter or graphic equaliser The Insert is AR a 3 pole A gauge jack socket which is normally bypassed When a jack is inserted the signal path is broken just before the mix fader Tip Ring The mix signal appears the TIP of the plug and is returned on the RING A Y Sleeve lead may be required to connect to equipment with separate send and return jacks as shown below Signal Send Headphones ines DO s Send to External Device Left Signal Right Signal Screen Signal Return Note Pins 1 amp 3 EE Connect Pin 2 to signal Return from External Device The MIX and SUB outputs are on 3 pole 3 pole A gauge jack sockets wired as Monitor Outputs shown and incorporate impedance balancing allowing long cable runs to balanced ampli Direct Outputs fiers and other equipment Signal Ground Ground a Balanced Connection Output To External Device Z Screen Signal Ground From FOLIO SX b Unbalanced Connection Impedance Balanced Signal To External Device Output N Signal Ground Experience has shown that sometimes it is better not to connect screen at external device end Page 6 SPIRIT FOLIO AUX OUTPUTS The Aux outputs are on 3 pole A gauge jack sockets wired as shown on the left and incorporate impedance balancing allowing long cable runs to balanced amplifiers and other equipment Mix 4 Sub
373. n the remote control unit only the SEARCH keys be used to fast forward and fast rewind through the disc 3 1 3 Playback modes The unit can be set to play back a single track the whole disc in the order in which it was created the tracks of the disc in a random shuffled order or a programmed order see 3 2 Programmed order playback TASCAM CD RW700 15 3 Playback operations Programmed order playback Selecting the playback mode is only possible using the remote control unit It is not possible to select the playback mode using the main unit alone 1 Press the PLAY MODE key repeatedly to cycle the display through the following Program see 3 2 Programmed order play back gt below The red PROGRAM display indicator lights 1 in m mode e nut is random track order In this mode Euch ada 15 22 once before the disc repeats Using the track search functions will move back wards or forwards through the random order e g if track 7 15 followed by track 10 it 1s possible to use the track search keys to go back to track 7 which is remembered as being before immediately before track 10 The red SHUFFLE display indicator lights in mode Normal playback mode gramming is C cancelled and playback continues in the normal order The selected mode is shown in large characters dis appears from the display a few seconds after select ing the mode and the displ
374. nceintes et l afficheur ou directement vers les sor ties Mix si l on appuie sur la touche correspondante 12 Le retour 2 pistes id al pour couter un magn tophone bande s effectue sur des con necteurs RCA Cinch asym triques O TOUCHE 2TK REPLACES MIX OUTPUT Le 2 pistes remplace la sortie mix cette touche fait ce qu elle dit Appuyez sur cette touche pour injecter le retour 2 pistes dans le Mix st r o C est un moyen id al en sonorisation pour diffuser de la musique d attente sans utilis er une voie d entr e Par exemple lorsque la touche est enfonc e et qu un lecteur CD diffuse de la musique d attente l ing nieur du son peut r gler le niveau des voies le correcteur parler aux musiciens et couter toute partie du mix m me le mixage final sans affecter le son D s que l on rel che cette touche le lecteur CD est coup et les sorties mix restitu es ATTENTION lorsqu on appuie sur cette touche le sig nal mix gauche droit est coup et la touche doit donc tre RELACHEE pendant la sonorisation ou l enregistrement TOUCHES DE SELECTION ECOUTE Ces touches permettent d couter au casque ou sur les enceintes et de visualiser sur l afficheur les signaux deux pistes Mono Mix ou Groupes individuellement ou combin s NOTE Si aucune touche n est enfonc e aucun signal ne sera cout ou visualis NON USARE microfoni sbilanciati con l alimentazione ea inserita poich potrebbero rim
375. ncy information from the CH1 and CH2 inputs and sums them to Mono CH1 Full Range Selects the low frequency information from the CH1 input CH2 Full Range Selects the low frequency information from the CH2 input Mono Full Range Selects information from the CH1 and CH2 inputs and sums them to Mono CH1 No EQ Bypasses active Bose EQ for CH1 Program Material CH2 No EQ Bypasses Active Bose EQ for CH2 Program Material Mono No EQ Sums the CH1 and CH2 to Mono and bypasses the Bose EQ presets 29 Router Functionality PANARAY System Digital Controller Output Configuration Table Router Matrix CH2 No EQ CH2 No EQ CH2 No EQ CH2 No EQ Mono No EQ Mono No EQ Mono No EQ Mono No EQ 30 10 0 Optimizing Signal to Noise Optimizing Signal to Noise using the PANARAY System Digital Controller with a Third Party Amplifier In order to achieve the best signal to noise performance with the PANARAY system digital controller you must optimize the input sensitivity and output range to match the equipment you are interfacing with 1 Before making any connections between the PANARAY system digital controller and an amplifier make sure all of your electronics are set to Off and your amplifier level controls set to Minimum 2 Next connect an audio source to the PANARAY system digital controller inputs CH1 and CH2 If you have a mono source plug your connection into CH1 and set the inp
376. ndependientes para sisterra de bod nas Bridged Mono FEATURES amp SETUP BRIDGE MODE This mode combines the ful power capabilities of both channels into a singe speaker system The an piifier internally re configures so that both channels operate as a unit This delivers double the output voltage resulting in four times the peak power and three times the sustai ned power nto a single 8 or 4 ohm speaker load The Bridge Mono mode section on page 11 desaibes the spedal speaker connection used Examples Driving a single S ohmspeaker with the combined 4 ohm power of both channels Driving a single 4 ohmspeaker with the combined 2 ohmpower of both channels Precautions Bridge Mono mode makes it possible to drive thousands of watts nto a singe speaker AC curert consumption will usually be higher Avoid excessive signal level and nake sure the wiring and speaker can handle the power If the loadis less than 4 ohrrs or prolonged overloads occur the anplifier will probably mute for several seconds during peaks Do not use 20m loads SEE THE ADDITIONAL BRIDGE MONO MODE VVARNINGS ON PAGE TL CARACT RISTIQUES ET LEUR UTILISATION MODE PONTE Ce mode la puissance des deux canaux vers une seule sortie L arrpglificateur est rebranch de fa on ce que les deux canaux fondionnert en tart qulunit amp brancherrerx double l
377. ndo este conmutador se activa un filtro de 18dB por octava que reduce el nivel solamente de las bajas frecuencias Util celo en sonorizaciones en directo para reducir las vibraciones procedentes del escenario o los sonidos oclusivos que puedan producirse en los micr fonos Unbalanced Mono pre fade Direct Send QQ INSERT Einschleifpunkt Der unsymmetrische pre EQ Insert ist eine Unterbrechung im Signalweg eines Kanals An diesem Punkt k nnen Limiter Kompressoren spezielle EQs oder andere Signal Prozessoren in den Signalweg eingeschleift werden Der Insert Eingang ist eine 6 3 mm Buchse die das Kanalsignal normalerweise umgeht da sie bypass geschaltet ist Wird ein Klinkenstecker in die Buchse gesteckt so wird der Signalweg vor der EQ Sektion unterbrochen Der Send des Inserts kann als pre fade pre EQ Direkt Ausgang verwendet werden Hierzu mu im Klinkenstecker auf jeden Fall auch eine elektrische Verbindung zwischen dem Tip O insert pont The unbalanced pre EQ insert point is a break in the channel signal path allowing limiters compressors special EQ or other signal processing units ser en e to be added in the signal path The Insert is a 3 pole A gauge jack socket which is normally bypassed When a jack is inserted the signal path is bro ken just before the EQ section The Send may be tapped off as an alter native pre fade pre EQ direct output if required using a lead with tip and ring shorted together so that the sign
378. negligent operation abuse accident failure to follow instructions in the manual defective or improper associated equipment attempts at modification and repair not authorized by Telex and shipping damage Products with their serial numbers removed or effaced are not covered by this warranty To obtain warranty service follow the procedures entitled Procedure for Returns and Shipping to Manufacturer for Repair or Adjustment This warranty is the sole and exclusive express warranty given with respect to Audiocom products It is the responsibility of the user to determine before purchase that this product is suitable for the user s intended purpose ANY AND ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY ARE LIMITED TO THE DURA TION OF THIS EXPRESS LIMITED WARRANT Y NEITHER TELEX NOR THE DEALER WHO SELLS TELEX PRODUCTS 15 LIABLE FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND CUSTOMER SUPPORT Technical questions should be directed to Customer Service Department Telex 12000 Portland Avenue South Burnsville MN 55337 U S A Telephone 952 884 4051 Fax 952 884 0043 RETURN SHIPPING INSTRUCTIONS Procedure for Returns If a return is necessary contact the dealer where this unit was purchased If a return through the dealer is not possible obtain a RETURN AUTHORIZATION from Customer Service Department Telex Communications Inc Telephone 1 800 392 3497 or 952 884 4051 Fax 1 800 323 0498
379. ng As has been explained earlier 1 2 Finalizing in order for a disc to become a standard CD it must have a Table of Contents TOC written to it This process is known as finalizing An unfinalized disc can always be distinguished on the CD RW700 by the NO TOC indicator under the disc type on the display being lit when the disc is inserted To finalize a disc 1 With the unfinalized recordable disc loaded and the unit in stop mode press the FINALIZE key 45 or QD The display shows 2 If you do not want to proceed with the finaliz ing process press any other key such as the STOP key 3 To start the finalizing process press the MULTI JOG control 41 or press the ENTER key Q 4 If finalization has been chosen the display Tue NO TOC indicator goes out and the TOL and the REC indicator flashes in the display The unit starts counting down from a time shown on the display about 1 minute 10 seconds 5 After finalization a CD RW NO TOC changes to CD RW and a CD R NOTOC changes to a CD Although CD R discs finalized on the CD RW700 may be replayed on ordinary CD players remember that finalized CD RW discs may not play on CD play ers 5 1 1 Unfinalizing CD RW discs If a CD RW disc has been finalized it is possible to erase the Table of Contents in the following way 26 TASCAM CD RW700 1 With the finalized disc loaded and the unit in stop mode press the ERASE key 46 or 2
380. nga la fuente dela se al a un volumen m ximo sin saturad n y abst ngase de resaltar la se al entre la fuente y el amplificador Probleme chillidos y retroalimentaci n La retroalirrentacd n del puede cortrolarse desde el nezda dor Si el ruido continua a n con la gananda del mia fono en cero entonces debe de haber una falla seris en los procesadores de se ales o en los cables Siga el trayecto de la se al y desconecte O baje el volumen de los aparatos uno por uno hada el amplificador EMI Filter 3r amp Hi PovverVWave Switching Amplifier P INNER WORKINGS An impressive amount of technology is packed under the hood of a PLX Series arrplifier Thousands of watts of power flow inches away from state of the art low noise inputs Predse drait layout and thorough protection assure that all of this activity occurs srmrootH y and safely So what actually happens vvhen you tum on the power switch Soft Start Sequence The first task 15 to Charge the primary energy reservoir without drawing a large surge current A special inrush resistor allows just enough current to charge the energy bank in three seconds Meanwhile a low power switching supply provides power to start up the main supply After three seconds a relay bypasses the inrush resistor and full power operation is enabled The audio circuitry mutes for one second to elirrinate s
381. ngef hr die dreifache Dauer leistung eines Eirzelkanals in eine 8 oder 40 Last zur Verf gung Weitere Erl uterungen zur besonderen Art des Anschlusses der Lautsprecher finden Sie auf Seite 11 Beispiele Betrieb eines einzelnen 80 Laut sprecher mit der acdierten 40 Leistung beider Kan le e Betrieb eines einzelnen 40 Laut sprecher mit der acdierten 20 Leistung beider Kan le Vorsichtsmaf nahmen Im Monobr ckenbetrieb k nnen tausende Watt Leistung an einen einzelnen Lautsprecher abgegeben werden Die Stromaufnahme des Verstarkers wird h her als nomal sein Verrreiden Sie daher ber h hte Signalpegel und stellen Sie sicher dafs die Verkabelung und der Lautsprecher die hohe Leistung verarbeiten k nnen Bei Lasten Kleiner als 40 oder zu langen bersteuerungen kann der Verst rker f r einige Sekunden abschalten 20 Lasten d rfen nicht betrieben werden BITTE BEACHTEN SIE DIE VVARNHINVWEISE AUF SEITE TL CARACTERISTICAS Y AJUSTES MODO PUENTEADO EN Este modo combina la capacidad total de potenda de anbos canales en un solo sisterra de amplificador se reconfigura intemarrerte de manera que ambos canales operen corro uno Esto produce el doble de voltaje de salida quaitro veces la potenda en picos y tres veces la potenda de sosteni miento en carges de 8 y 4 ohmios La Mono en la p gina 11 describe la conexi n usada para las bodinas Ejemplos Para a
382. ngeschlossenen Lautsprecher die Leistung verarbeiten k nnen Niecrigere Inqedanzen und h here Signalpegel f hren zu gr erer Abwanre H ufige oder lange bersteuerungen erkennbar durch cauerndes Aufflac em der roten CLIP LED mit Lasten von 22 k nnen eine Leistungsverringerung oder sogar eine Abschaltung der Endstufe zur Folge haben Der Monobr ckenbetrieb verdoppelt Ausgangsimpedanz des Verstarkers Daher d rfen in dieser Betriebsart keine Lasten Keiner 40 angeschlossen werden Erhebliche bersteuerungen k nne ein Aloschalten zur Folge haben In diesem Fall lesen Sie bitte den Abschnitt Fehlerbehebung Seite 23 OPERACI N ventilaci n La velocidad del ventilador var a autorr ti canente para mantener la temperatura ntema adecuada Mantenga las rejillas de ventilad n delanteras y posteriores despejadas para que el aire pueda dradar aire caliente sale por la parte frontal del arrpglificador para no Calentar el rack Aseg rese de que drade aire fresco en el rack espedal mente si hay otras unidades que generan aire caliente hado adentro Niveles adecuados de operaci n sistema de enmudedniento fund n Mute de protecci n se activa con temperatures altas internas Con una ventilaci n nomral y carges de 4 y el anqificador puede rrangjar Cualquier nivel de se al induyendo la saturaci n pero verifique que sus bodnes puedan esa potenda Sin embargo
383. nivel m ximo para tra bajo normal pero vea la nota m s abajo O Repita este procedimiento en los canales que necesite Escuche atentamente el sonido caracter stico de la realimentaci n Si no puede alcanzar el nivel de entrada deseado sin realimentaciones compruebe las posiciones de los micr fonos y los altavoces y repita el ejercicio Si la realimentaci n persiste puede ser necesario usar un ecualizador gr fico para reducir la respuesta del sistema a frecuencias resonantes particulares CB HINWEIS Diese Ersteinstellungen sollten als Anfangs Einstellungen Ihres Mix angesehen werden Es ist wichtig zu erkennen viele Faktoren den Sound w hrend einer Live Darbietung beeinflussen z B die EQ Einstellungen der einzelnen Kan le oder auch die Gr e des Publikums Jetzt k nnen Sie mit dem Aufbau des Mixes beginnen und dies sollte schrittweise so erfolgen indem Sie aufmerksam jeden Anteil des Mix genauestens abh ren und auch die Aussteuerung an der LED Anzeige auf Ubersteuerung hin berwachen Sollte eine Ubersteuerung eintreten den entsprechenden Kanal Fader langsam zur ckpegeln bis der Pegel aus dem roten Anzeigebereich l uft Oder den Master Fader zur cknehmen Wenn Sie diese Vorgehensweise einhalten k nnen Sie sich er sein da der Mixer richtig konfiguriert ist und gen gend Headroom vorhanden ist Sollte noch etwas mehr Verst rkung ben tigt werden regeln Sie die angeschlosse nen Power Am
384. nnuler la garantie lisez attentive ment cette section Per la vostra sicurezza e per non invalidare la garanzia leggette con la massima attenzione i paragrafi seguenti Para su propia seguridad y para evitar la invalidaci n de la garant a por favor lea cuidadosamente esta secci n SAFETY PRECAUTIONS WARNING THIS UNIT MUST BE EARTHED Under no circumstances should the mains earth be disconnected from the mains lead The wires in the mains lead are coloured in accordance with the following code Earth Green and Yellow Green Yellow US Neutral Blue White US Live Brown Black US As the colours of the wires in the mains lead may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug proceed as follows O The wire which is coloured Green and Yellow must be con nected to the terminal in the plug which is marked with the letter E or by the earth symbol O The wire which is coloured Blue must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked with the letter N The wire which is coloured Brown must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked with the letter L Ensure that these colour codings are followed carefully in the event of the plug being changed This unit is capable of operating over a range of mains voltages by means of a 4 position mains input fuse carrier It is important to ensure that the correct voltage setting is selected for the le
385. no pre fade V Direct Send Insert Point XLR Screen Signal Page 9 20 100Hz Frequency Hz 20k LY Muddiness 8 Rumble Frequency Hz 20k SPIRIT FOLIO 5 SENS This knob sets how much of the source signal is sent to the rest of the mixer Too high and the signal will distort as it overloads the channel low and the level of any background hiss will be more noticeable and you may not be able to get enough signal level to the output of the mixer Setting the knob to the U mark gives unity gain for the LINE input Note that some sound equipment particularly that intended for domestic use operates at a lower level 10dBV than professional equipment and will therefore need a higher gain setting to give the same output level See Initial Set Up on page 16 to learn how to set SENS correctly 10082 HI PASS FILTER Pressing this switch activates a steep 8dB per octave filter which reduces the level of bass frequencies only and is a real bonus for a such a small mixer Use this in live PA sit uations to clean up the mix re
386. nos a los de entrada AVISO Para evitar descarga el ctrica no opere el amplificador si alguno de los cables de la bocina est expuesto una 025 6 3 mm 12 9 mm V 00 Outlets Prises cle courant NetzanschiufS Tomas de coriente CONNECTIONS Binding post outputs O Strip back insulation not more than 13 nm G ind Insert wire fully so that none of the conductor is exposed tighten barrel use coin if necessary Non European models only Spade lugs must have insulated barrels to prevent electric shod lt WARNING To prevert electric shock do not operate the am plifier with any of the conduc tor portion of the speaker wire exposed Connections for stereo and parallel operati ons Connections for bridged nono operation See bridged mono operating precautions on page 11 SPEAKER CABLING Larger wire sizes and shorter lengths minimize both loss of power and degradation of dan ping factor Do not place speaker cables next to input wiring Operating voltage meins Make sure you connect the arrplifier to the correct AC line voltage which is shown on the serial number label Connecting to the wrong line voltage is dangerous and rray darrage the anplifier CONNEXIONS Bomes crou D nuderlefil sur un mexinumde 13nmm gt puce Ins rerle fil defagon qu aucune partie du con
387. notice EH 27 o x LT 700 Portable Transmitter Programminy LT 700 Programming In General The 1 700 can be programmed to transmit on a limited number of channels For applications where users are required to select a channel such as classrooms or language interpretation and you don t want them to have to scroll through all of the available channels this feature is ideal If all channels where available the user could have 57 channels to select from 1 Enter PROGRAM Mode To enter PROGRAM mode open the access door and press the UP and DOWN keys simultaneously until the PGM symbol is displayed on the LCD display 2 Scroll through channels to lock or unlock Use the UP and DOWN channel select keys to scroll through all 57 channels When checking a particular channel the 1 0 symbol on the LCD will be displayed when that channel is locked out Locked Out means the channel is not available to the user after the programmer exits PROGRAM mode On each channel check to see if 1 0 is displayed it means channel is locked out from the user To toggle between locked out and not locked out press the 3 To exit PROGRAM mode don t press a key for 4 seconds POWER button Locking into One Channel Enter PROGRAM Mode as described to the right lock all channels except the channel you want to use LED Indicator steady Red LED Normal Opera
388. nt headroom to accommodate peaks and establishes the maximum level for normal operation but see note below Page l6 SPIRIT FOLIO Repeat this procedure on other channels as required As more channels are added to the mix the meters may move into the red section Adjust the overall level using the Master Faders if necessary Listen carefully for the characteristic sound of feedback If you cannot achieve satis factory input level setting without feedback check microphone and speaker place ment and repeat the exercise If feedback persists it may be necessary to use a Graphic Equaliser to reduce the system response at particular resonant frequencies Note The initial settings should only be regarded as a starting point for your mix It is important to remember that many factors affect the sound during a live performance for instance the size of the audience You are now ready to start building the mix and this should be done progressively listening carefully for each component in the mix and watching the meters for any hint of overload If this occurs back off the appropriate Channel Fader slightly until the level is out of the red segments or adjust the Master Faders Remember that the mixer is a mixer not an amplifier Increasing the overall level is the job of the amplifier and if it is found impossible to provide adequate level it is proba ble that the amplifier is too small for the application Choo
389. nt signals go to each channel Make sure the Parallel Input and Bridge Mode switches are Make sure other equipment in the signal path such as mixers prearrps etc are set for stereo not mono D PANNAGE Probleme son distortionne gt INDICATION DEL CLIP CLIGNOTE Si la DA dlPdignote avert que les trois DE_de niveau ce signal ou l inp amp dance de charge est trop faible oula soriedel anplificateur est court drauit e D branchez les haut padeurs un a un l arrplificateur Si la DEL CLIP s teirt quand vous d branchez un cable ou le c ble ou le haut parleur est court drcuit Essayez un autre cable puis un autre haut parleur pour localiser le gt INDICATION DEL CLIP N ALLUMENT PAS Peu tre d a du c blage ou un haut padeur d fectueux V rifiez le c blage et essayez un autre haut parleur Lesigna pourait distortionne alasource Uilisezl arrplificateur avec les contidles de gain au moins mi course afin d dter avoir surcharger la source de signal Probl me pas de s paration des canaux e Assurez vous que les jaunes PARALLEL amp BRIDGE MONO sort teintes sur le panneau avert ce qu indiquerait la position des interrupteurs sur le pannesu ariere Ni l une ri l autre devait tre allurr e pour utilisation en mode st r o bi arrplification ou deux canaus quand des signaux distincts sont amen s aux deux canaux de l arr
390. ntercom audio low and 24 VDC input Channel B intercom audio high and 24 VDC input Clear Com Mode Internal switch SW1 and jumpers JP4 JP5 JP2 and JP1 set to UNBAL position Pin 1 Pin 2 Pin 3 Pin 4 Pin 5 Pin 6 Common Local power 14 to 30 VDC Channel A 30 VDC input Channel A intercom audio call signal Channel B 30 VDC input Channel B intercom audio call signal 15 SPECIFICATIONS GENERAL Power Requirements Channel supplied 24 VDC nominal 45 to 70 mA Local power BP 2000 only 24 VDC nominal 18 to 30 VDO 45 to 70 mA Environmental Requirements Storage 20 C to 80 0 to 95 humidity non condensing Operating 15 C to 60 C 0 to 95 humidity non condensing Dimensions 5 0 127 mm H x 3 5 88 9 mm W x 1 8 45 7 mm D Weight 1 5 pounds 0 68 kg INTERFACE REQUIREMENTS Headset 50 to 200 ohm dynamic microphone 150 to 600 ohm headphones Balanced Intercom Channel Output Level 1 Vrms nominal Input Impedance 300 ohm 5 Bridging Impedance greater than 10 000 ohm Call Signalling Send 20 kHz 100 Hz 0 5 Vrms 10 Receive 20 kHz 800 Hz 100 mVrms Mic Off Frequency Detect 24 kHz 800 Hz 100 mVrms Noise Contribution less than 60 dB on the line 16 Unbalanced Intercom Channel Output Level 480 mVrms 10 Input Impedance 200 ohm 5 Bridging Impedance greater than 10 000 ohm Call Signalling Send 12 3 VDC Heceive 4 VDC minimum HEADPHONE AMPLIFIER Voltage Ga
391. nti elettronici La rotazione in senso antiorario le diminuisce riducendo il fruscio o l eccessiva brillantezza Quando non richiesto l uso posizionare il controllo al cen tro Ha una risposta di 15dB a 12kHz e oltre LF EQ Girando la manopola in senso orario le basse bass frequenze 60kHz e inferiori aumentano aggiungendo incisivit a sintetizzatori chitarre e bat teria La rotazione in senso antiorario le diminuisce riducendo il ronzio il rumore del palco o migliorando un suono non chiaro Quando non ne e richiesto l uso posizionare il controllo al centro Ha una risposta di I 5dB a 60kHz e inferiori ED MANDATE AUSILIARIE AUX SEND Sono usate per regolare un insieme sonoro separato per FOLDBACK EFFET Tl o registrazione e la combinazione di ogni Mandata Ausiliaria Aux Send e mixata sulla rispettiva Uscita Aux sul retro del mixer Le mandate sono sempre PRE FADE che l impostazione adatta per foldback o mandate monitor ma gli ingressi Line a coppie di canali mono possono essere usate come ingressi stereo alternativi se gli per effetti essenziale che le mandate siano post fade LEVEL Questa manopola regola il livello generale del segnale mandato al Mix o alla coppia di Gruppi selezionata ROUTING Il segnale del canale stereo viene mandato ad una coppia di sub gruppi interruttore rilasciato o al Mix stereo interruttore premuto al livello impostato con il relativo controllo Stereo alimenta i sub grup
392. ntrols are accessed The Mix View provides a symbolic layout of each of eight output mixes Figure 1 illustrates the components of this display and identifies the controllable functions Rotating the PROGRAM WHEEL highlights each input or output channel object indicated by small rectangles on the left and right sides of the Mix Box The Mix Box contains bar graphs indicating the levels of all eight inputs that contribute to the selected mix Along the left side of the Mix Box are the eight inputs Similar to the input objects in the display are the output objects which represent 1 of 8 mixes These appear on the right side of the Mix Box Notice in figure 1 that only one output mix is visible at a time MIX VIEW CONTROLS The three controls for the Mix View are Output Level Matrix Level and Master Level controls OUTPUT LEVEL The top encoder affects the Output Level for one of eight outputs This level corresponds to the selected mix along the right side of the Mix Box MATRIX LEVEL The middle encoder controls 1 of 64 levels This control corresponds to a combination of the selected input channel and output mix In the illustration of figure 1 channel 3 is highlighted and therefore enables the Matrix Level of channel 3 to be visible for the selected mix Notice that the nomenclature of the label for this control which appears in the display adjacent to the encoder indicates a level control within the 8X8 matrix That is Level 3 1 identifie
393. o Monitor output Is aheadphone jack plugged in Is the Monitor Phones control set high enough 5 the appropriate monitor select switch pressed Headphones Distorting O Are the headphones less than 2000 impedance 5 the Monitor Phones level set too high Ajustes y Solucion de Problemas Ajuste Inicial Una vez haya conectado su sistema vea las secciones de conexionado y cableado en este manual ya esta prepara do para ajustar los controles de su mezclador a sus posi ciones iniciales El dibujo del panel frontal en la p gina 29 muestra las posiciones iniciales t picas de los controles lo que puede resultar una gu a til para ajustar el mez clador la primera vez Ajuste los canales de entrada como sigue O Conecte sus fuentes micr fono teclado etc a las entradas y desactive los botones MUTE Nota Los micr fonos alimentados con phantom deben conec tarse antes de activar los 48V O Sit e los faders master 0 los faders de entrada a 0 direccione los canales a MIX y ajuste los niveles de la etapa de potencia sobre el 70 Inyecte una se al de nivel t pico de actuaci n y pulse el bot n PFL en el primer canal monitorizan do el nivel en los medidores bargraph O Ajuste la ganancia de entrada hasta que el medidor est en la secci n mbar con picos ocasionales al primer LED rojo al nivel t pico m ximo de la fuente Esto permite suficiente techo din mico para soportar picos y establece el
394. o be routed to the separate mono bus by pressing the switch unaffected by the posi tion of the PAN control PFL PEAK When the latching PFL switch is pressed the pre fade post EQ signal is fed to the headphones control room output and meters where it replaces the selected monitor source The adjacent LED lights to identify the selected channel and the PFL AFL LED on the Master section illuminates to warn that a PFL is active This is a useful way of listening to any required input signal without interrupting the main mix for making adjustments or tracing problems When the PFL switch is released the LED serves as a PEAK indicator which illuminates approximately 4dB before clipping to give warning of a possible overload The signal is sampled both after the HF EQ and also POST EQ Page 10 O Mit dem EQ Schalter wird die EQ Sektion in den Signalweg geschaltet wenn der Schalter gedr ckt wird Bei nicht gedr cktem Schalter wird die EQ Sektion umgangen bypass geschaltet AUX SENDS Die Ausspielwege Aux Sends werden f r separate Abmischungen eingesetzt z B f r den Musiker Monitor Effekte oder f r die Aufnahme und die Kombination jedes Ausspielweges steht r ckseitig am LX7 ein entsprechender Aux Anschlu 6 3 mm Klinke zur Verf gung F r Effekte ist es wichtig da der Signalpegel immer mit der Faderposition bereinstimmt Diese Ausspielwege sind post fade d h dieses Signal ist abh ngi
395. o charge the batteries Open the front access door by gripping the two Charging non Nickel Metal Hydride batteries may result in tabs with your thumb and index finger physical harm destruction of property and or fire Place Batteries in Unit two AA batteries in the compartment making note of the battery polarity shown in the battery compartment and again verifying that the BATTERY SELECT switch is switched correctly for your batteries see Step 4 Top of Unit and Battery Compartment isten LISTEN TECHNOLOGIES CORPORATION 1 801 233 8992 1 800 330 0891 Fax 1 801 233 8995 13 Internet www listentech com All specifications subject to change without notice LT 700 Portable Transmitter Preparation cont Operation Preparing the LT 700 for Use continued Operating the LT 700 Transmitter Connect the microphone to the microphone jack Make sure the unit is by opening the access on the top of the unit The unit uses the microphone cable as door and pressing the POWER button an antenna If you are using the line input use the special cable accessory designed for this purpose 2 Select the channel to transmit on by pressing and holding the channel UP and DOWN buttons for 3 seconds The LOCK symbol on the LCD will go off and the channel can be changed Also see Selecting a Channel to Transmit On Operating the LT 700 Select a Channel continued B At 72MHz the LT 700 operates on 17 wide ban
396. o source to the LT 800 Check the connections from the audio source to the LT 800 If you can try to use a balanced audio source this will reduce the chance of creating hum Try connecting a ground from the LT 800 to ground and or to the ground of the source audio There is interference Try different frequencies until you find a clear channel If this does not work try a different frequency band i e if you re using 2MHz try 216MHz or vice versa This is accomplished by returning the equipment to Listen no charge and replacing It with Listen s alternate frequency band equipment cannot pick up the signal on the receiver Check to make sure the receiver and the transmitter are on the same frequency can pick up the signal on the receiver but it sounds like it s not tuned in Check to make sure the transmitter and receiver are on exactly the same channel number letter I m using another brand of receiver how do tell which channel to use Refer to Listen s Frequency Compatibility Tables pages 28 31 Adjust Listen s transmitter or receiver to the same frequency as the other major brand Since Listen products can access 57 channels they will most likely transmit or receive on the same fixed channel or channels of other major ALD brands There is not sufficient range First make sure that the receivers you are using are operating properly Then make sure that you have an antenna connected either to the top of the 17 8
397. objective lens Wavelength 777 787 nm For U S A For CANADA Pour le CANADA AC POWER CORD CONNECTION CORDE DE CONNEXION CA CAUTION ATTENTION TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK MATCH WIDE BLADE OF POUR EVITER LES CHOCS ELECTRIQUES INTRODUIRE LA PLUG TO WIDE SLOT FULLY INSERT LAME LA PLUS LARGE DELA FICHE DANS LA BORNE CORRESPONDANTE DE LA PRISE ET POUSSER JUSQU AU FOND 4 TASCAM CD RW700 1 Introduction 11 About CD R and CD RW discs 6 1 2 cerei ees 7 1 2 1 Recordable discs 7 1 2 2 About this manual 7 1 3 Unpacking the CD RW700 7 1 3 1 Rack mounting the unit 7 1 4 Environmental considerations 7 1 4 1 Beware of condensation 8 1 4 2 Never use a stabilizer or printable discs 8 1 4 8 Handling of compact discs 8 1 4 4 Additional notes with regard to CD R and CD RW discs 8 1 4 5 Recommended media 9 1 4 6 Default settings 9 1 4 7 Dimensional drawing 9 2 Features of the CD RW700 2 1 lt 11 POWER switch STANDBY ON 11 DISC ay 11 3
398. on secondaire a faible courart sonaue ce netre en marche ledraut dalirrenrtation a commutation prind pal Une fois les trois secondes unrelais d rive la r sistance d appel de courant et l arrplificeteur fonctionne nonrelerrert pleine puissance potentielle Le circuit de protection met le Grauit audio en sourdine pendant une seconde pour les coups de Quand la DEL CLIPS eirt l arrglificateur est pr t fonctionner La technologie PowerWave Des disposistifs de commutation Courant Gev passer plus de 10 000 watts en puissance de pointe a partir du r servoir principal qui est Iui rr rre drecterrert aliment par la source de courart CA pour une tension de base tr s stable Les anplificateurs conventionmels doivent isoler le r servoir d nge de la source de courant avec un transformeteur de grande dimension ce qui r duit le transfert de courant permet une chute de tension en pointe de courart et produit du ronflement Le bloc dalimentation a commutation PowerWane effectue le conversion de tension a tr s haute fr quence ce qui rend posside un Bien meilleur couplage a travers un petit transfonreteur INNERER AUFBAU In jeder PLX ist beeindruckende Tech nologie verborgen Tausende Watt Leistung fliefSen nur Zentimeter ent fert von State of the Art rauschanren Eing ngen Ein pr ziser Schaltungs aufbau und g ndiche Abschinmungen garan
399. on whether Mic or Line is selected LINE MODE The control options for Line mode are Sensitivity and Trim Sensitivity can be adjusted for one of four settings 30 24 18 and 12 dBu Each setting scales the full digital range to the specified sensitivity setting For example if an input signal has a nominal level of 4 dBu then a sensitivity setting of 24 dBu provides 20 dB of digital headroom before clip A compact disc player has a nominal level of 10 dBV 7 79 dBu therefore a sensitivity setting of 12 dBu provides 19 8 dB of headroom before clip Trim provides 6 dB of gain or attenuation in the input hardware UTIL KOLITEUIEL foOUTiLcucl mum OE Lowe 3 1 z0 0dE Master MENE Lelie Figure 2 The Route View allows the user to quickly determine the signals that are mixed to a particular output channel HIS UTIEL aaa Que Gare C268 b Entar Figures 3a and 3b Security options and password entry views Input Channeli SEN fae Lin D Figures 4a and 4b Input Channel Hardware views for Line mode a and Mic mode b MIC MODE The control options are Phantom On Off and Gain 10Hz The Mic gain is adjustable from 15 to 50 dB in 0 5 dB steps INPUT CHANNEL LPF HPF The first DSP process for the input signal chain is the filter The filter parameters are as follows Frequency Q and Type see f
400. ont une source commune de rorflerrert Probleme souffle D brandhez le cable denr e pour confi mer que le brut provient dautres 4quiperrerts dans la deine audio en amont soit les pr arrplificateurs mixers ou autres des bruits transitoires pourraient indiquer un ledronique Cans l urit en cause Afin de reduire le niveau de brut de fond au minimum utilisez les sources un niveau de signal lev sans distortion ou cr tage et ajustez le niveau final surl arrgificateur Problerre bruits et effet Larsen L effet Larsen feedback par les microphones devait tre sur le mixer Si le probl rre persiste avecles maosfernss il eisteune probleme dans le syst rre soit au niveau lectronique ou au niveau du c ldage Entrewaillart partir de la source v rifiez chaque appareil de la en en r duisart le gain ou en le mettant hors d rait Das PowerVVave Netzteil elirriniert inteme Brunmfelder aber Netz transformattoren in anderen Ger te k nnen immer noch Brummen ver ursachen Bewegen Sie die Ver kabelung und Eingangsquellen hin und her umFehlerguellen imSystem aufzusp ren Kabel mit fehlerhafter Albschinmung sind die H ufigste Ursache f r Brumrreschleifen Problem Rauschen Zischen Trennen Sie den Verst rkereingang von der Quelle umfestzustellen ob die St rger usche von einem vor geschelteten Ger t stammen Harte und poppende St rger usche
401. operating instructions 3 Set volume control to the normal listening level for intercom audio 4 While talking into the microphone use a small flat bladed screwdriver to adjust the channel 1 sidetone trimmer so that you can hear your own voice in the headphones at an acceptable level 5 SS 2002 amp SS 2002RM only activate channel 2 and repeat the above steps to adjust the channel 2 sidetone 14 Operation Channel Select 55 2002 8 SS 2002RM Only Tap the Ch Select key to select channel 1 or 2 The key is green when channel 1 is selected and red when channel two 15 selected Headset Headphone Speaker Microphone Selection To use a headset or telephone style handset set the Speaker and Panel Mic keys to off e To use headphones with the built in panel microphone set the Speaker key to off set the Panel Mic Key to on and make sure that a gooseneck microphone is not inserted in the panel microphone connector e To use headphones with a gooseneck microphone set the Speaker key to off set the Panel Mic Key to and make sure that a gooseneck microphone is inserted in the panel microphone connector Touse the speaker with a handheld dynamic microphone set the speaker key to on and set the Panel Mic Key to off Touse the speaker with the built in panel microphone set the Speaker and Panel Mic keys to on and make sure that a gooseneck microphone is not inserted in the panel microphone connector Touse the speaker wi
402. or Mikrofone eingeschaltet Es d rfen nur Kondensator Mikrofone mit der Phantom Spannung betrieben werden Weiterhin d r fen nur bei ausgeschaltetem 48V Schalter die Kondensator Mikrofone angeschlossen werden Den 48V Schalter nur bet tigen wenn alle Ausgangsfader heruntergepegelt sind Hierdurch werden Defekte am Mixer und an externen Ger ten vermieden Vorsicht bei unsymmetrischen Quellen da diese durch die 48V Spannung an den Pins 2 und 3 des XLR Anschlusses zerst rt werden k nnten Bevor Sie den Line Eingang benutzen m ssen Sie das Mikrofon aus den XLR Buchse ausstecken LINE EINGANG Am LINE Eingang werden 6 3 mm Klinkenstecker angeschlossen Dieser Eingang mit hoher Impedanz ist f r Quellen wie Keyboards Drum Machines Synthesizer Band Maschinen oder Gitarren vorgesehen Der Eingang ist sym metrisch ausgelegt mit niedrigem Rauschpegel und besitzt bei Einsatz profes sionellen Equipments hervorragende technische Eigenschaften Es k nnen jedoch auch unsymmetrische Quellen angeschlossen werden Hierbei m ssen die Klinkenstecker wie gezeigt verl tet sein Achten Sie jedoch darauf daf die Kabell nge so kurz wie m glich ist Bevor Sie den Line Eingang benutzen m ssen Sie das Mikrofon aus den XLR Buchse ausstecken Mit dem SENS Regler wird die Eingangsempfindlichkeit eingestellt SENS Empfindlichkeit Mit diesem Regler wird der Signalpegel des Eingangs eingestellt Ist das Signal zu hoch eingestellt werd
403. or now then try both positions during the operation Use the position that produces the best audio quality at other stations Speaker Beep for Incoming Call Set DIP switch 5 to the Closed position if you want to hear incoming call beep in the speaker Note that DIP switch 3 must be in the Open position Balanced Unbalanced Switch This switch 15 set at the factory to the Balanced or BAL position for use with Audiocom intercom channels Set the switch to the Unbalanced or UNBAL position for use with a Clear Com intercom system Sidetone Trimmers These are normally adjusted after all connections are completed See Sidetone Adjustment Open Off 1 TOP VIEW OF FACEPLATE Switch 1 DIP SWITCH POSITIONS CLOSED ON OPEN OFF Figure 3 DIP Switch Location RM Version Figure 4 DIP Switch Location S U and P Versions Headset Connector Notes If you are using a monaural dynamic mic headset or a monaural telephone style dynamic mic handset or a handheld dynamic microphone plug it into the Headset connector You can also use this connector with monaural headphones for listening when you are using either the built in panel microphone or the optional gooseneck microphone for talk back Panel Mic Connector Notes As an alternative to a headset or telephone style handset you can use either the built in panel microphone or an optional gooseneck microphone To connect a Telex MCP 90 gooseneck microphone insert the 1
404. or screen if the download was successful If not the message BDone will appear and therefore the process will need to be repeated 8 If successful cycle power on the unit to enable the new program 15 uonejedo 1 1 1 10 sped 8 110 5 10112907 gr 4 be ES piba RARA B Adna 1 ex d DAY MAL SOM LL gt VAY MA Sp
405. or the color black 3 The wire that is colored brown must be connected to the terminal that is marked with the letter L or the color red NAVIGATING THE DISPLAY 6 POWER SWITCH This rocker switch applies mains power to the unit 7 RJ 45 INPUT OUTPUT CONNECTORS These standard eight connector jacks allow connection to a multi drop RS 485 bus 8 RS 232 CONNECTOR This standard DB 9 serial cable connector allows interface between the Digitool and a PC 9 CONTROL VOLTAGE CONNECTORS These four control removable Euro style input ports analog have a o 10 V DC range to accommodate assignable external potentiometers 10 INPUTS AND OUTPUTS These detachable Euro style connectors allow analog input to and output from the unit The layout of the front panel is designed to simplify navigation and editing of internal processes The PROGRAM WHEEL which is located to the left of the display controls all cursor movements within the display The PROGRAM WHEEL has 32 detented positions per full rotation Clockwise rotation results in left to right or top to bottom motion while counterclockwise motion reverses this order Each detent results in the cursor moving by one position In some view panels the cursor location remains in a fixed location on the screen while each detent of the wheel results in a view change This allows the user to navigate through multiple screens in just a few clicks of the PROGRAM WHEEL SELECTING
406. ord Protection Power supply cords should be routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon or against them paying particular attention to cords at plugs convenience receptacles and the point where they exit from the product 14 Outdoor Antenna Grounding If an outside antenna or cable system is connected to the product be sure the antenna or cable system is grounded so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and built up static charges Article 810 of the National Electrical Code ANSI AFPA 70 provides information with regard to proper grounding of the mast and supporting structure grounding of the lead in wire to an antenna discharge unit size of grounding conductors location of antenna discharge unit con nection to grounding electrodes and requirements for the grounding elec trode Note to CATV system installer This reminder is provided to call the CATV system installer s attention to Section 820 40 of the NEC which provides guidelines for proper grounding and in particular specifies that the cable ground shall be connected to the grounding system of the building as close to the point of cable entry as practical Example of Antenna Grounding as per National Electrical Code ANSI AFPA 70 e LEAD IN ANTENNA DISCHARGE UNIT NEC SECTION 810 20 ELECTRIC SERVICE lt GROUNDING CONDUCTORS NEC SECTION 810 21 GROUND CLAMPS POWER
407. ordben Det tredje ben er der af hensyn til din sikkerhed Hvis det medfelgende stik ikke passer i stikkontakten skal du kontakte en elektrik er for at f stikkontakten udskiftet 8 Beskyt netledningen mod at blive tr dt p eller klemt specielt ved stik stikkontak ter og der hvor den kommer ud af apparatet 9 Brug kun tilslutningsudstyr tilbehor der er angivet af producenten 10 Brug det kun sammen med en vogn eller bord der er angivet af producenten eller solgt sammen med apparatet N r der anvendes en vogn skal der udvises for sigtighed ved kersel med vogn apparat s det ikke vaelter Overlad al serviceringen til kvalificeret servicepersonale Service er p kr vet hvis apparatet p nogen m de er blevet beskadiget f eks hvis netledningen eller stikket er blevet beskadiget der er blevet spildt v ske eller faldet genstande ned i apparatet apparatet er blevet udsat for regn eller fugt hvis det ikke fungerer nor malt eller hvis det er blevet tabt fors g ikke at reparere apparatet selv bning eller fjernelse af l get kan uds tte dig for farlige sp ndinger eller andre farer Kontakt Bose for at f oplysninger om det n rmeste servicecenter 12 Undg at overbelaste stikkontakter forl ngerledninger eller indbyggede stik af hensyn til risikoen for brand eller elektrisk st d 13 Undg at genstande eller v sker kommer ind i produktet da de kan ber re steder med farlige sp ndinger eller kortslutte dele hvilke
408. os faders master de mezcla Este procedimiento le asegurar que el mezclador est correctamente ajustado y con un techo din mico adecuado Si se requiere m s amplifi caci n ajuste los controles del amplificador de potencia Soluci n de Problemas No hay alimentaci n corriente Compruebe la toma de corriente y que el selector de voltaje est en la posici n correcta e Esta el cable de alimentaci n firmemente conectado Compruebe el estado del fusible e Si s lo uno de los indicadores de alimentaci n est iluminado consulte con su distribuidor Spirit El micro de condensador no funciona e Est la alimentaci n 48V de micr fono activada Esta el micro conectado la entrada de micro El cable del micro es del tipo balanceado de 3 cables Los medidores no muestran ninguna se al Tiene el Nivel del Ganancia ajustado correcta mente ver arriba e Esta la fuente conectada al conector de entrada apropiado por el nivel de se al Tiene algo conectado en las inserciones y esta ese dispositivo externo en marcha Est n los faders de Mix ajustado al m ximo y est n los controles de volumen de entrada lo suficiente mente altos e Est n desactivados los botones de MUTE todos los canales utilizados e Est pulsado el bot n de selecci n de monitor apropiado e Hay alg n PFL AFL pulsado en otro canal No hay salida de mezcla e Compruebe que el fader master
409. ose of the polarized or grounding type plug A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding plug The wide blade or third prong is provided for your safety When the provided plug does not fit into your inlet consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet Never break off the grounding Write for our free booklet Shock Hazard and Grounding Connect only to a power supply of the type marked on the unit adjacent to the power supply cord Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs convenience receptacles and the point they exit from the apparatus Only use attachments accessories provided by the manufacturer Use only with a cart stand tripod bracket or table specified by the manufacturer or sold with the apparatus When a cart is used use caution when moving the cart apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip over Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way such as power supply cord or plug is damaged liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture does not operate normally or has been dropped If this product is to be mounted in an equipment rack rear support should be provide
410. owever if recording through a digital connection the track number will be incremented only when a track division sig nal is received followed by a rise in volume Track start signal leve received Track incremented time A fall and subsequent rise in volume alone when recording digitally from CD MD or DAT is not sufficient to trigger an 22 TASCAM CD RW700 automatic track increment Digital recording from CD MD and Long pause in signal but track is not incremented time You may find it helpful to use the track restriction facility see 4 2 4 Restricting the number of tracks together with the automatic track division For instance if you have recorded two albums on one DAT tape and you wish to make two separate CDs from this tape you can use the MULTI JOG control to set the number of tracks to the number of tracks com prising the first album When the final track of the first album has been recorded the unit automatically performs the PMA writing procedure and enters stop mode 4 3 4 Digital direct As mentioned earlier the digital direct mode bypasses some of the input circuitry of the CD RW700 the frequency convertor and the digital level control to write directly to the disc To enable or disable digital direct recording 1 Ensure that the input source is set to DIGITAL either COAXIAL or OPTICAL 2 Press the DIGITAL DIRECT an A un unit only ne eh shows E F whe
411. parate speakers conned to each output Examples Two channel stereo playoad lt Two independent mono signals such as mainand monitormes Bi amped operation with the low frequendes in Channel 1 and the highs in Channel 2 PARALLEL INPUT MODE This mode is just like Stereo mode excer thet the inputs for Channd 1 and Channel 2 are internally connected together A signal into any input will therefore drive both channels directly Each channel s gain control still functions as usual and eadn channel feeds its own speaker load You can patch the input signal on to additional 5 by using any of the remaining input jacks Exanple Q mono signal diving both channels with independent gain control for each speaker system CARACTERISTIQUES ET LEUR UTILISATION Modes stereo parallele et pont quelles sont les differences 2 MODE STEREO Cest la fa on nomale d utiliser l arrglificateur o les des canaux sont distincts Des signaux differents peuvent se trouver aux deux entr es des ajusterrerts de gain de filtre et de limiteur sont possibles et des haut parleurs distinctes sont branch s aux deux sorties Exemples coute deux canaux st r o e deux signaux mono ind pendants tel mix principal et rroniteurs de scene e uUtilisationennodebi ampdification avec les basses fr quences fi es par le canal 1 et les hautes par le canal 2 recquier
412. ped with AWCS Note Limiting is assigned to outputs 3 and 4 for protection of the AWCS 402 Series Il loudspeaker bi amped 180Hz Output 1 4021 Mono Full Range 4021 Mono High 4021 Mono High 4021 Mono High 4021 Mono High Output 1 4021 Mono Full Range 40211 Mono High 40211 Mono High 40211 Mono High 40211 Mono High 40211 Mono High Output 2 4021 Mono Full Range 4021 Mono High 4021 Mono High 4021 Mono High 4021 Mono High Output 2 4021 Mono Full Range 40211 Mono High 40211 Mono High 40211 Mono High 40211 Mono High 40211 Mono High Output 3 4021 Mono Full Range 502B Mono Low MB4 Mono Low AWCS Mono Low 4021 Mono High Output 3 40211 Mono Full Range 502B Mono Low 502BEX Mono Low MB4 Mono Low AWCS Mono Low 40211 Mono High Output 4 4021 Mono Full Range 502B Mono Low MB4 Mono Low AWCS Mono Low 4021 Mono High Output 4 4021 Mono Full Range 502B Mono Low 502BEX Mono Low MB4 Mono Low AWCS Mono Low 40211 Mono High 39 40 13 1 Bose Speaker EQ Preset List Mono Bank PANARAY 502 A loudspeaker Mono Presets 502A 502B 502A MB4 502A AWCS 502A HF PANARAY 802 Series Il loudspeaker Mono Presets 80211 80211 502B 80211 4 802IItAWCS 8021 HF 80215 802IISTK 502B 502A loudspeaker Preset Descriptions 502A loudspeaker Full Range EQ 5
413. pedance should be less than 60002 to avoid high frequency loss in long cables Balanced inputs Use the XLR or V4incn 6 3 rrr TRS input jacks Unbalanced inputs Connect the unused side of the balanced input to ground as shown below left A tip sleeve 6 3 mmm connector will correctly teminate the unused side of the input without modification For two channel stereo operation use the inputs for both Channel 1 and Channel 2 for parallel or bridged mono operation use the Channel I input See the section on operating modes nore explanation To patch the audio signal to other an ps parallel and bridged modes only see the instructions for using parallel inputs on page 9 Balanced Syrr trique Symretisd CONNEXIONS Entr es Chaque canal est quip dune entr e syr tiique sur prises XR et Y4 6 3 nm branch es en parallele L imp dance d entr e est de 12 syrr trigue 6 asyrr trique Les sigoauxregus en mode syr tiique sont moins sujets aux ronflements d aux interferences de r seau ledrigue hung alors que les brancherrerts asyrr triques convenir pour les courtes distances L inqp dance de sortie de la source de signal devrait de moins de 600Q afin de r duire les pertes en hautes fr quences avec de longs cables Entr es symetriques Utilisez la pise XLR ou Y1 6 3 nm Entr es asymetriques Connectez le c t non utilise de l ent
414. pes so inadeguato e leggeri aggiustamenti possono realmente fare la differenza HF EQ Girando a destra questa manopola si accentuano le frequenze alte treble sopra 2kHz fino a 15dB aggiungendo nitidezza ai piatti alle voci e agli stru menti elettronici Girando a sinistra si tagliano fino a 1 5dB riducendo il frus cio o i sibili che si presentano con certi microfoni Quando non ne richiesto l uso lasciare la manopola fissa al centro MID EQ HMID amp LMID Ci sono due coppie di manopole che funzionano insieme per formare le sezioni HI e LO MID Quella inferiore di ogni coppia fornisce 1588 di cut e boost come per la regolazione HF EQ ma la frequenza a cui questo avviene pu essere impostata dalla manopola superiore su una gamma da 550Hz 13kHz HMID oppure da 80Hz a 9kHz LMID Questo per mette alcuni reali miglioramenti creativi del segnale in situazioni live poich questa banda media copre la gamma di molte voci Ascoltare attentamente i cambiamenti durante l uso di questi controlli cosi da scoprire le particolari caratteristiche e gli effetti sul segnale Quando non ne richiesto l uso las ciare la manopola inferiore fissa al centro LF EQ Girando la manopola a destra si aumentano le frequenza basse 60Hz e infe riori fino a 15dB aggiungendo calore alle voci o energia a synth chitarre e batterie Girando a destra si tagliano le frequenze basse fino a I5dB ridurre il ronzio il rumore del palco o per
415. phone Set the knob in the cen tre detented position when not required MID EQ HMID amp LMID There are two pairs of knobs which work together to form and LO MID frequency EQ sections The lower knob in each pair provides 1548 of boost and cut just like the HF EQ knob but the frequency at which this occurs can be set by the upper knob over a range of 550Hz to 3kHz HMID or 80Hz to l 9kHz LMID This allows some truly creative improvement of the signal in live situations because the mid bands cover the range of most vocals Listen carefully as you use these controls togeth er to find how particular characteristics of for instance a vocal signal can be enhanced or reduced Set the gain lower knob to the centre detented position when not required Note Q is set at 1 5 LF EQ Turn clockwise to boost low bass frequencies 60Hz and below by up to I5dB adding warmth to vocals or extra punch to synths guitars and drums Turn anticlockwise to cut low frequencies by up to 15dB for reducing hum stage rumble or to improve a mushy sound Set the knob to the centre detented position when not required Page 8 und dem Ring des Steckers gel tet werden damit der Signalweg nicht unter brochen wird DIRECT OUTPUT Direkt Ausspielweg Die Kan le 1 16 besitzen Direkt Ausspielwege um externe Ger te wie z B Aufnahme oder Effektger te direkt ansteuern zu k nnen Durch Dr cken der PFL Taste kann der pre fade Pegela
416. phones when using full cushion head phones Eliminates the muffled sensation when talking with the ears completely covered When using the speaker or open ear style headphones the sidetone trimmers are adjusted to eliminate the user s voice from the headphones or speaker This helps to prevent feedback 14 Balanced Unbalanced Selector Switch This switch sets the intercom station for compatibility with either Audiocom balanced or Clear Com unbalanced intercom systems p em ee Brand names mentioned are the property of their respective companies TOP VIEW OF FACEPLATE Mie gt DIP SWITCH POSITIONS LJ CLOSED ON 00000000 OPEN OFF 1 13 HRW Audiocom SS2002 BACK SIDE OF FACEPLATE 14 Figure 1 SS 1002 SS 2002 features Top View Cover Removed Audiocom SS2000 RM NN lt gt Wo Q1 LINE IN Loop THRU Inside View of Front Panel Figure 2 SS 2002RM features 5 Installation Unpacking Each SS 1002 SS 2002 SS 2002RM is supplied with the following items Contact the shipper or your Audiocom dealer immediately if anything 1s damaged or missing Be sure to fill out and return the product registration card to Telex to properly register your intercom station For SS 1002 SS 2002 units SS1002 or SS2002 Intercom Station Warranty
417. pi 1 amp 2 mentre Stereo 2 alimenta i sub gruppi 3 amp 4 gt Quando il tasto PFL premuto il segnale pre fade post EQ mandato in cuffia all uscita della regia e ai meter dove sostituisce la sorgente monitor selezionata II LED PFL AFL nella Sezione Master si illumina per awertire che un PFL attivo meter destro e sinistro mostrano il segnale PFL mono Page 13 CANAL DE ENTRADA ESTEREO JACKS DE ENTRADA Estas entradas de alta impedancia aceptan jacks de 1 4 TRS de 3 Utilice estas entradas para fuentes tales como teclados cajas de ritmo sintetizadores mag net fonos o como retornos de procesadores de efectos La entrada es BAL ANCEADA de alta calidad para equipos profesionales pero sin embargo puede utilizar fuentes NO BALANCEADAS cableando los conectores tal como se muestra en la secci n Conectando lo cables de la p gina 28 de este manu al aunque deber mantener la longitud de los cables tan corta como le sea posi ble para prevenir ruidos indeseados Las fuentes mono pueden alimentar ambos lados si se conectan s lo en el jack izquierdo GANANCIA El control de ganancia ajusta el nivel de entrada al canal permitiendo su adaptaci n a una amplia gama de fuentes de nivel de l nea ED HF EQ G relo hacia la derecha para realzar las altas frecuencias agudos a adiendo viveza a los sonidos de percusi n procedentes de una caja de ritmos sintetizadores e instru
418. plication the US2000A should be set for binaural speaker output as described int he US2000A manual 11 Power Up Check 1 Plug in any DC wallpacks that are being used with individual intercom stations Note If you plug in DC wallpacks after applying power to the PS 2001L or SPS 2001 you may get an overload indication This 1s because the stations that are being powered by wallpacks will draw current from the units until their own DC wallpack supplies are connected To correct the problem plug in the DC wallpacks 2 Plug in the AC power cords for any connected PS 2001L or SPS 2001 Power Supplies The channel status indicators should be green 3 Ifa channel status indicator turns red during operation locate the short or overload that is causing the problem Once the short or overload 15 corrected the Power Supply should reset itself and the overload indication should go away Specifications General Input Power Requirements 100 to 240 VAC 50 60 Hz Output Power each channel 21 1 VDC 2 A Dimensions 1 75 44 5 mm high x 8 25 209 5 mm wide x 10 31 261 9 mm deep Weight approximately 2 5 lb 1 13 kg Environmental Requirements Storage 20 C to 80 C 0 to 95 humidity non condensing Operating 0 C to 50 C 0 to 95 humidity non condensing Intercom Channels General Connector Type One XLR 3M audio connector for each channel Pin out depends on setting of BAL UNBAL switch for balanced or unbalanced operatio
419. plus a pole mount cup for stand mounting Passive crossover and EQ for economical single amplifier operation Dual Neutrik NL4 connectors for input and loop through connection Integral handle strategically placed for easy transport DESCRI PTI ON The SM109z is a compact professional loudspeaker configured for dual purpose stage monitor and PA use It is designed for applications with limited space requiring high quality moni toring The enclosure is fitted with a pole cup for upright use increasing the SM109z s usefulness as a main PA loudspeaker The conical HF waveguide provides wide angle projection important in smaller venues where a single monitor must often cover several performers As a PA loudspeaker this same pattern is ideal for meetings and presentations Portable usage is enhanced by the heavy duty enclosure construction steel grille and integral handle Two Neutrik NL4 jacks provide reliable input and loop through connections The SM109z car ries a six year warranty APPLICATION Applications Include Club Bands Theatres e Classrooms Houses of worship TV studios Meeting rooms PERFORMANCE Frequency Response 1 W 1m 3 dB 100 Hz to 19 kHz 10 dB 80 Hz Axial Sensitivity dB SPL 1 Watt 2 1m Full Range 95 Impedance Ohms Full Range 8 Power Handling Watts Full Range 300 Recommended High Pass Frequency 24 dB octave 70 Hz Calculated Maximum Output dB SPL Full
420. pourraient causer une sur charge Veillez a maintenir le signal a la limite des segments jaunes au niveau maximal De m me si le niveau de sortie est trop bas et a peine visible sur les afficheurs le niveau du bruit de fond peut devenir significatif Prenez soin de r gler les niveaux d entr e au mieux Quand une touche de PFL ou AFL est appuy e les afficheurs visualisent le signal de PFL AFL choisi sur les deux afficheurs en mono TOUCHE MIX Appuyez sur cette touche pour diriger par paire les signaux post fade des sous groupes vers le mixage final Les groupes amp 3 sont dirig s vers le mix gauche les groupes 2 amp 4 sont dirig s vers le mix droit O GENERAUX Les g n raux r glent le niveau final du m lange avec des tirettes s par es pour chaque sortie Celles ci doivent normalement tre plac es pr s de la marque 0 si le GAIN d entr e a t correctement r gl pour b n ficier au mieux de la course de la tirette O TOUCHE mix Mono Appuyez sur cette touche pour envoyer une somme mono post fade des signaux des Mix gauche et droit Cela permet de cr er un m lange mono s par pour attaquer par exemple une boucle d induction ou un cluster central Note Si l on appuie sur cette touche alors que des voies d entr e sont dirig es la fois vers les sorties Mix et Mono on risque de provoquer un Larsen Alimentation fant me 48V N Beaucoup de micros professionnels statiques ont besoin d une
421. prise Speakon du haut porte les signaux de sortie des deux canaux elle est donc tr s dile lors de lrandherrert en modes parall le bi anplifi amp ou port mono voir les instructions et precautions pour le branchervert en mode port mono en page 12 La prise du bes ne porte que le signal du canal 2 Voirlesillustrations ci contre Pour insertion plus fadle utiliserla nouvelle g n ration des Speakon NLAFC avec loquet ressort CABLAGE DU HAUT PARLEUR Les dies defart calibres et les autes distances minimisert a lafois les pertes de puissance et la d gradation du coeffidert Clarrortisserrent Bitez de placer les cables de haut padeurs proxinit des cables d entr e AMERTISSEMENT Afin cde pr venir les risques de choc lectrique ne pas utiliser l anplificateur si une portion de conducteur du fil de haut parleur est expos e ANSCHL SSE Speakon Ausg nge Der PLX Verst rker stellt rrebrere Aus gangsansdlUsse zur Verf gung zwei Neutrik NL4MD Speakonbuchsen und zwei Paar ber hrungssichere Schraubklemmen Der Speakonansdlufs wurde speziell f r den Anschlu von Hochleistungs laucsprechem korzipiert Er rastet ein verhindert elektrischen Schlag und sorgt f r die richtige Polarit t Die obere Speakonbuchse enth lt beide Kan le so da sie besonders f r Parallel oder Monobr cken betrieb geeignet ist bitte beachten Sie de Vorsichtsma nahren wie auf Seite 12 besc
422. ps nach Fehlersuche Keine Netzspannung e Pr fen ob Netzger t richtig angeschlossen ist e Pr fen Sie auch ob die rtliche Netzspannung mit der eingestellten bereinstimmt e berpr fen Sie die Hauptsicherungen e Falls nur eine Spannungsanzeige auf LX7 leuchtet dann verst ndigen Sie Ihren H ndler Kondensator Mikrofon funktioniert nicht der 48V Schalter bet tigt Stellung e Ist das Mikrofon ordnungsgem am Mikrofon Anschlu eingesteckt e Ist das Mikrofon Kabel ein symmetrisches 3 adriges Kabel LED Anzeigen zeigen kein Signal an Ist die Vorverst rkung richtig eingestellt Ist die Quelle auch an dem Eingang eingesteckt der f r diesen Signalpegel vorgesehen ist Ist am Insert Einschleifpunkt ein Stecker eingesteckt und ist das eingeschleifte Ger t eingeschaltet Sind die Master Fader auf Maximum geregelt Sind die Kanal Fader hoch genug eingestellt und wird der Kanal zu den Monitor Ausg ngen geroutet Sind die MUTE Schalter der relevanten Kan le nicht aktiviert Ist der entsprechende Monitor Schalter gedr ckt Ist ein PFL AFL Schalter auf einem anderen Kanal gedr ckt Kein Mix Ausgangssignal e Sind die Mix Master Fader richtig gepegelt st der 2TK REPLACES MIX OUTPUT Schalter nicht gedr ckt Kein Monitor Ausgang Istein Kopfh rer am Mischpult eingesteckt e Ist der Monitor und Phones Regler hoch genug eingestellt Ist der entsprechende
423. quencies until you find a clear channel If this does not work try a different frequency band i e if you re using 2MHz try 216MHz or vice versa This is accomplished by returning the equipment to Listen no charge and replaced with alternate frequency band equipment cannot pick up the signal on the receiver set 10 NIMH Check to make sure the receiver and the transmitter are on the same frequency 7 len e LISTEN TECHNOLOGIES CORPORATION 1 801 233 8992 1 800 330 0891 Fax 1 801 233 8995 19 Internet www listentech com can pick up the signal on the receiver but it sounds like it s not tuned in Check to make sure the transmitter and receiver are on exactly the same channel number letter I m using another brand of receiver how do tell which channel to use Refer to Listen s Frequency Compatibility Table included on Pages 28 31 Either adjust the transmitter or the receiver to a common channel There is not sufficient range The LT 700 is a portable transmitter that uses the microphone cable as an antenna and as such the range will vary depending on the location of the receivers compared to the transmitter You can only expect 100 feet of effective working area It s confusing for users to have 57 channels when switching between channels Use the programming feature of the LT 700 to limit the number of channels users have access to How can limit access to the batteries Use the side door locks My hatter
424. r c cu Ic 22 DELAY BUHRON c 24 BURO ECT c EET 25 26 8 1 USER O ULL ere ae eee 28 OUEN ry EE MT 29 Optimizing 31 AE cT Ic ee eee 33 Bass Amay wren UMEN 34 12 1 Bass Array Setup and 35 Bose Speaker EQ Preset 51 38 9215 A AIA eu CI are NU 39 13 252 A E eee 46 SS Bank ELIMINA UT 53 Technical 54 Appendix PANARAY System Digital Controller Quick Reference Guide 55 Important Safety Instructions Warning English To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock do not expose the unit to rain or mois ture CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT REMOVE COVER OR BACK NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED PERSONNEL These CAUTION marks may be located on the back of the PANARAY System Digital Controller The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol within an equilateral trian gle is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated danger ous voltage within the system enclosure that may be of sufficient mag nitude to constitute a risk of electric shock system
425. r e syrr trique au chassis tel quiillustr d contre Une fiche 727 6 3 mm nono Tip Sleeve fenera le drait sans modification En utilisation deux canaux st r o utilisezles prises des canaux 1 et 2 en mode ou port nono utilisez lapriseduceral L Voirles exd ications dars les sections appropri es du pr sent manuel Pour relier le signal audio de cet arrplificateur vers d autres anplificateurs mode parallele et port nono seulerrert voyez les nstrudions en page 9 ANSCHLUSSE Ei ngange J eder verf gt ber symmetrische XR und 6 3 mm Stereoklinkenein g nge Die Eingangsinpedanz betr gt symmetrisch 12 unsymretrisch 6 KQ Syntretrische Signale verursachen weniger Brummproblem ursym rretrische Verbindungen allerdings bei kurzen Kabelvegen h ufig aus reichen Quellinpedanz sollte dabei weniger als 6000 betragen umeinen H henverlust bei l ngeren Kabelvvegen zu verrreiden Symmetrische Eing nge Verwenden Sie die XLR oder 6 3nm Stereokl inkenbuchsen Unsynmetrische Eing nge Verbinden Sie den ungenulzten Pin des syntretrischen Steckers mit Masse siehe Abbildung Bei einemMono Klinkenstecker ist keine nderung n tig Im2 Kanalbetrieb Stereo verwenden Sie bitte beide Eing nge imParallel kw Monobr ckenbetrieb verwenden Sie nur Eingang 1 Bitte beachten sie de jeweiligen Beschreibungen der ver Signal an weitere Verstarker zu leiten
426. r EQ preset 9 Turn your amplifier On and turn up each level control until you reach the desired SPL These settings will automatically be retained 11 0 Custom Preset Mode The PANARAY controller s Custom Preset feature allows users to edit and store the delay limiting and routing settings Up to 20 custom presets can be stored using this feature After making the desired changes to a preset follow the steps below to store a new preset 1 Press and hold the DELAY and LIMITER buttons at the same time for approximately 5 seconds until you see the following display Store Select no 1 gt EMPTY PRESET Use the Encoder wheel to select the location where the preset will be stored up to 20 loca tions can be used 2 Once you have selected your location press the Arrow DOWN button to name your preset You will see the following display Store Edit name 1 OX Use the Arrow UP Arrow DOWN buttons to align the cursor under the desired letter or number you want to change then move the Encoder wheel through the list of characters Press the Arrow UP button to move to the next character and press the Arrow DOWN button to move back To CANCEL the store process press the PRESET button 3 Once you have named your preset press and holdD the DELAY and LIMITER buttons until you see the following display gt Preset gt Stored lt After you store a program you will be immediate ly transferred to the custom
427. r way to select a channel on the LR 400 and LR 500 is to press the SEEK button When you do this the Listen receiver looks for the next channel that is active Sometimes the unit will mistake interference for a real broadcast signal If you get interference simply press the SEEK button again The SEEK button will also likely stop on adjacent narrow band channels or the wide band channel associated with the narrow band you are looking for Simply continue to press SEEK until you reach the clearest operating channel LISTEN TECHNOLOGIES CORPORATION 1 801 233 8992 1 800 330 0891 Fax 1 801 233 8995 Internet www listentech com All specifications are subject to change without notice Listen Receivers Locking and LED LCD Indicators Adjust volume contro for the best listening level Locking into Only One Channel the LR 400 and LR 500 when locked the unit will display the LOCK symbol On the LR 300 no LCD display when listening to the unit it will sound like the channel isn t changing when pressing the SEEK button thus it is electronically locked To electronically lock in the channel so it cannot be changed press the SEEK button for five seconds or on the LR 400 and LR 500 until the LOCK symbol is displayed To electronically unlock the channel press and hold down the SEEK button for five seconds or on the LR 400 and LR 500 until the LOCK symbol disappears on the display LR 400 and LR 500 Re
428. ral est pour alerter les utilisateur de la pr sence dinstrudiors importantes pour le fondionnerrent e l entretien service dans les documents accompagnant l appareil RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE NE PAS OUVRIR ATTENTION Pour viter les risques de choc lectrique ne pas enlever le couvercle Cet appareil ne comporte aucune pi ce pouvant tre r par e par l utilisateur Confier l entretien a un technicien qualifi AVERTISSEMENT Pour viter le risque de choc lectrique ou d incendie n exposez cet appareil ni a I hunidit exces sive ni aux projections d eau pluie ruissellement etc Erkl rung der Bildsymbole Des Blitzzeichen innerhalb eines geichseitigen Dreiecks warnt den Benutzer vor nicht isolierter gef hrlicher Spannung im Inneren des Ger tes Diese Spannung ist hoch genug um Personen durch elektrischen Schlag zu gef hrden Des Ausrufungszeichen innerhalb eines Jeichseitigen Dreiecks weist den Benutzer auf wichtige Bedienungs und WVartungsanvveisungen hin de in den ger tebegleitenden Unterlagen aufgef hrt sind GEFAHR EINES ELEKTRISCHEN SCHLAGES NICHT OFFNEN VORSICHT Um Gef hrdung durch elektrischen Schlag zu vermeiden darf das Geh use nicht ge ffnet werden Es befinden sich keine vom Benutzer reparierbaren Teile im Inneren des Ger tes ber lassen Sie jegliche Reparatur dem qualifizierten Fachmann WARNUNG Umdie Gefahr eines Brandes bzw eine Verlet
429. rations Press the DISPLAY key 40 or to cycle through these time display modes as described below Display shows Meaning TOTAL Total elapsed time of the disc blank Elapsed time of the current track TOTAL REMAIN Time remaining of the current disc REMAIN Time remaining of the current track If programmed playback has been selected 3 2 Programmed order playback the elapsed time and total remaining time refer to the programmed mate rial not the whole disc 3 1 2 Track search Use the MULTI JOG control AD or the SKIP keys on the remote control unit D to jump forward or back ward by one track at a time as shown on the display Note that going forward from the last track of the disc will wrap round to track 1 and going back ward from the first track of the disc will wrap round to the last track of the disc The track number indicators at the bottom of the dis play shows the selected track the lit indicator at the left of the row of indicators It is also possible to use the number keys on the remote control unit amp to jump directly to a particular track 1 To play tracks 1 through 9 simply press the appropriate key 1 through 9 2 To play a track whose number is higher than 9 press the 10 key an appropriate number of times to set the tens digit of the track num ber followed by a single key to set the units digit For example Track 13 10 3 Track 30 10 10 10 0 O
430. rayectos cortos rrinirrizan la p rdida de potenda y degradad Gn por el factor de arrorti guadi n No coloque los cables de las bodinas cercanos los de entrada de operaci n alimentaci n CA Aseg rese de conectar el amplificador a una l nea de coriente altema AC cond voltaje adea el a d aparece en la etiqueta con el n mero de serie a una l nea de voltaje diferente es peligroso y puede claro marche ein conectado S YNNINI I 2 ar Q Gas 20018 FONAR BRI E OPERATION AC power switch Before applying power check all connections and tum down the gain controls The soft start sequence Starts with the POVWER indicator LED at half brightness A couple seconds later the fan starts and the enifier ydes through one second of protective muting indicated bythe CLIP LEDs dowing bright red The POWER indicator then changes to full brightness and the anplifier is ready Gain controls The gain cortrols are deterted for repeatable adjustrrert The actual voltage gain of the amplifier is shown Maxrrumggainis 40 gt or 432 CB LED indicators At full brightness the green POWER LED indicates that the is operating Half brightness mears the 15 in its startup sequenc
431. rays Using Presets 1 Press the PRESET button on the front panel of the PANARAY system digital controller Press the Arrow DOWN button until you see the following display Bass Array 4 2xBS280Hz Turn the Encoder wheel to the right to select the desired bass array configura tion Bass Array 4 4xEF280Hz Once you have selected your bass array preset the program is automatically loaded and ready to go 12 1 Bass Array Setup and Connections MB4 4x Endfire Bass Array 4 7 29 29 E 73 6 73 6 73 6 Bose Components 1 PANARAY system digital controller 2 Bose 1800 VI power amplifiers 2 4x endfire bass array brackets top and bottom 4 MB4 modular bass loudspeakers Spacing In order to effectively create the MB4 4x endfire bass array each unit must be spaced 29 73 6 cm on center from each other This is shown in the illus tration above IF THE UNITS ARE NOT SPACED PROPERLY THE BASS ARRAY WILL NOT WORK Note All EQ and delay settings are already set in the PANARAY system digital controller In order for the bass array to work you must connect the MB4 units to the appropriate outputs on the controller and apply the proper spacing The output assign ments are listed to the right MBA 4x endfire bass array 280Hz and 180Hz PANARAY system digital controller output CH1 MBA 1 CH2 MB
432. rce and not at both ends If the use of unbalanced connections is unavoidable you can mimimise noise by fol lowing these wiring guidelines O On INPUTS unbalance at the source and use a twin screened cable as though it were balanced Monitor Outputs O On OUTPUTS connect the signal to the ve output pin and the ground of the out Direct Output e put device to ve If a twin screened cable is used connect the screen only at the 1008 mixer end Ground Ground O Avoid running audio cables or placing audio equipment close to thyristor dimmer units or power cables O Noise immunity is improved significantly by the use of low impedance sources such as good quality professional microphones or the outputs from most modern audio equipment Avoid cheaper high imped Example 1 ance microphones which may suffer Audio with ground connected from interference over long cable runs Mixer Amplifier even with well made cables ont Supply Earth Loop Supply Grounding and shielding is still seen as black art and the suggestions above are Mains Earth only guidelines If your system still hums Example 2 Left Signal with ground connected an earth loop is the most likely cause i Two examples of how an earth loop can Miss Earth Loop Amplifier occur are shown on the right Right Signal with ground connected Page 7 SPIRIT FOLIO FAUL
433. rdable disc into the unit and make sure the unit is in stop mode 2 If the unit is not already in auto track mode set it so that the A TRACK indicator is lit on the display 4 3 2 Automatic track division 3 Cue the source material to a little before the point of the planned track division 4 Press the RASE 2 twice so that the display shows i ina inc If the auto track mode has not been selected the display shows in ogie when the key is 5 Start playing the source When the start of the track is detected as explained in 4 3 1 Syn the display changes to 6 If the rehearsal does not start at the region of the true track division point press the RHSL key once again to re arm the trigger 7 nine the message changes from inc EHSL and the sampled data loops in 4 Recording Rehearsal four second loop The display shows i ri H Eis Where gt is the current second of the loop 8 Stop the source 9 Turn the MULTI JOG control to adjust the dde in ME E M shows or pir where can be a mba between i pand i E and changes back to the i ric 12 Els display when the loop restarts 10 When the track division point has been fixed press the STOP key 17 or D 11 Press the RECORD key 20 or D to enter record ready mode The synchronized record ing mode can be used here and so the SYNC REC key 21 or D may be pressed to prepare
434. re 5 5 isti H or lif F 3 Press the DIGITAL DIREGI key to toggle between and GEF When digital direct recording is enabled the DIGITAL indicator in the display flashes slowly As mentioned earlier the digital direct feature bypasses the frequency convertor Recording is therefore only possible from sources recorded with 44 1 kHz sampling frequency 4 3 5 Rec mute function The rec mute function allows instant cut off of the input signal and records four seconds of silence on the disc 1 While recording is in progress press the REC MUTE the meters stop displaying the Current level and the moni tored sound is cut 2 After about four seconds the unit enters record ready mode This function is only available from the remote control unit It is not possible to use this function with the main unit only 4 3 6 and fade out To provide smooth beginnings and endings to recorded tracks the unit provides fade facilities Fade ins are from ee silence to the set input level 4 1 1 Signal volume and fade outs go from the current input volume to silence The fade in and fade out times can be set indepen dently in increments of one second from 1 second to 24 seconds To set the fade times 1 Press the MENU key e or 9 5 until the display shows F HIDE a where gt is the curent t fade i in time i in seconds 2 Turn the MULTI JOG control 41 or use the SKIP key
435. re 8 Panel view for one of two parametric equalizers LOW SHELF EQ The response of this EQ has a shelf level that is determined by the boost or cut value The top encoder adjusts the Gain boost cut and has a range of 15 dB to 15 dB The corner frequency is adjustable up to 200 Hz The corner frequency is positioned 3 dB below the shelf level with a 6 dB oct slope between the shelf point and o dB Figures 10a and 10b show the panel view and frequency response sweeps for several values of gain COMPRESSOR The compressor is the last process in the input chain The output of this process feeds the matrix for the associated channel The compressor has a total of five functions available They are Threshold Ratio Gain Attack and Decay Refer to figures 11a 11b and 11c for panel views and performance graphs THRESHOLD The threshold is adjusted via the top encoder The range is to 100 dBFS 1 2 dB steps This control 10 Edit View Output Channel DigiTool MX Parametric EQ Ampl Sweeps determines when the compressor begins to limit the dynamic range of the input signal The signal strength measured at the to input to the compressor is constantly monitored The compressor has no effect upon the signal as long as the measured signal strength is below the threshold point Once the signal strength E reaches and surpasses the threshold point the compressor will T begin limiting the dynamic range of the outpu
436. reo se env a a un par de subgrupos bot n arriba o a la mezcla est reo bot n abajo a un nivel ajustado por el control de NIVEL El est reo se env a a los subgrupos y 2 y el est reo 2 a los subgrupos 3 y 4 PFL Cuando se pulsa el bot n PFL la se al pre fader post EQ se env a a los auricu lares salidas de control y medidores donde reemplaza a la fuente seleccionada de monitorizaci n MIX o 2TK El LED PFL AFL en la secci n master se ilumi na para avisar que un PFL est activo Los medidores izquierdo y derecho mues tran la se al PFL en mono OBO 9 0 30 HN O O LX7 O80 O4 OSPIRIT COH 0 O REF MASTER SECTION O masters Each of the six AUX outputs has a master output level control and associ ated AFL switch AUX Afls Just as the Channel PFL switches allow pre fade listening so you can moni tor each AUX output after the level control by pressing the AFL switch This routes the AUX output signal to the MONITOR or PHONES replacing any existing signal which is selected The METERS also switch from the select ed source to display the PFL AFL signal and the PFL AFL LED lights to warn that a PFL or AFL switch is pressed When you release the switch the Monitor swaps back to the previous source ED POWER INDICATORS These LEDs light to show that power is connected to
437. rnational Industries Ltd Cranborne House Cranborne Industrial Estate Cranborne Road Potters Bar Herts EN6 3JN U K Tel 44 0 1707 665000 Fax 44 0 1707 665461 http www spirit by soundcraft co uk A Harman International Company Part No 2 016 Soundcraft Contents Introduction Einleitung Introduction Introduzione Introducci n Getting Started Ubersicht D marrage Per Iniziare Puesta en Marcha Using the Folio LX7 Vorbereitungen Bedienelemente des LX7 Utilisation de la LX7 Utilizzo del Mixer LX7 Usando la LX7 Setting Up amp Troubleshooting Richtiger Einsatz und Fehlersuche R glages et probl mes de foncionnement Set Up amp Guida all Individuazione dei Problemi Ajustes y Soluci n de Problemas Applications Anwendungen Applications Applicazioni Aplicaciones System Block Diagram Block Diagramm Synoptique Diagramma a blocchi Diagrama de Bloques del Sistema Technical Information Technische Informationen Informations Techniques Informazioni Tecniche Informaci n T cnica U S E RS wp P GUIDE Gi del usuario is TRAD For your own safety to avoid invalidation of the warranty please read this section carefully Zu Ihrer eigenen Sicherheit und damit die Garantie Anspr che gewahrt bleiben lesen Sie bitte diesen Abschnitt sehr sorgf ltig durch Pour votre s curit et pour viter d a
438. rodudendo aumbidos o hum La fuerte de alimentad n hace la conversi n de voltaje a una frecuencia muy alta acopl ndose a un transfonrador de aislamiento m s peque o DC Monitor INNER WORKINGS High Perfomance Audio High speed power transistors convert this DC power into the full range audio output which drives the speakers High currert design and spedal dual sense output feedback corrects errors on both sides of the speaker terrrirals improving dama ng and control of speaker motion The power devices are direddy mounted to isolated heat sinks which forma short wide air tunnel in front of the fan for optimumcooling A therrral sensor errbecded in each channel s heat sink monitors the temperature and controls fan speed thermal shutdown and bias control assuring rraxiimrumaudio darty at all tenperatures and signal levels A drait monitors transistor dissipation and triggers protective autback only when actually needed The output drauitry is actively damped during dipping for smooth and very fast recovery The darrp also feeds a proportional dip lirriter which actually senses the depth of dipping and responds accordingly The balanced inputs use prenium 0 1 predsion resistors for very high noise rejection The predsion components used in the input filters and all other drauitry ensure accurate performance Shhutdiowmn The arrplifier mutes as soon as power is S
439. rogram sources are monitored independently by the intercom channels The SPS 2001 monitors intercom channel 1 and program 1 The SPK1000 monitors intercom channel 2 and program 2 The US20004 is set for binaural speaker output as described in the US2000A User Manual 10 PS 2001L PS 2001L Channel 1 Power Channel 2 Power Combine Isolate Switch Combine Isolate Switch set to Combine set to Combine PS L Optional 1 1 1y To of stations To of stations To of stations To of stations on channel 1 on channel 1 on channel 2 on channel 2 Figure 7 Using two PS 2001L Power Supplies to provide a greater capacity on each channel SPS 2001 SPS 2001 Channel 1 Power Channel 2 Power Combine Isolate Switch Combine Isolate Switch set to Combine set to Combine PROGRAM INPUTS f 9 SPEAKERS 1 LINE LEVEL voi B OUT BAL OUT 12 15 VDC UNBAL IN US2000A Internal DIP PS L switches set Optional for binaural operation Program input cable From 2 1 audio sources r 1y To of stations To of stations To of stations To of stations on channel 1 on channel 1 on channel 2 on channel 2 Figure 8 Using two SPS 2001 Power Supplies to provide a greater capacity on each channel Using two SPS 2001 Power Supplies also lets you independently monitor and adjust volume for both intercom channels without the need for a separate powered loudspeaker In this ap
440. rom the channel appears on the TIP of the plug and is returned on the RING with the sleeve as a common ground The Send may be tapped off as an alternative pre fade pre EQ direct output if required using a lead with tip and ring shorted together so that the signal path is not interrupted Page 5 SPIRIT FOLIO STEREO INPUTS 13 14 6 17 18 These accept RCA phono jacks to allow easy connection to hi fi equipment or DAT players The input is unbalanced and ideal for pre show music sources or signals that do Mix 4 Sub Outputs Aux Outputs STEREO INPUTS 15 16 amp 19 20 Mono Output not require any EQ or effects These accept 3 pole A gauge jacks or 2 pole mono jacks which will automatically ground the cold input Use these inputs for sources such as keyboards drum machines Signal synths tape machines or as returns from processing units The input is BALANCED for low noise and immunity from interference but you can use UNBALANCED sources by wiring up the jacks as shown although you should then keep cable lengths as short as possible to minimise interference pick up on the cable Note that the ring must be grounded if the source is unbalanced Mono sources can be fed to both paths by plugging into the Left jack only Mix Inserts MIX INSERTS Signal Send The unbalanced pre fade Mix insert point is a break in the output signal path to allow signal the connectio
441. ront panel speaker Typically these inputs are used with the speaker outputs of a master station when the master station 1s set for use with a panel microphone and speaker instead of a headset Combine Isolate Switch When in the Combine position the unit will combine the audio signals of the two channels to create a single audio channel where all users can intercommunicate When in the Isolate position the unit will create two groups of completely independent users Channel Status Indicators The indicators are green for normal operation and red when there is an overload or short circuit The circuitry the unit will automatically reset when the overload or short circuit 15 located and fixed Universal AC Power Input The unit accepts any input power in the range of 100 240 VAC 50 60 Hz Intercom Channel Connectors When the Combine Isolate switch 18 set to the Isolate position each channel connector is powered separately and has completely separate intercom audio When the Combine Isolate switch is set to the Combine position each channel is still powered separately but the audio signals are combined so that all users on both channels can intercommunicate BAL UNBAL Selector Switch This selector switch allows the user to configure the unit for use in either an Audiocom BALANCED or Clear Com UNBALANCED system Compatibility includes channel connector pin outs channel power requirements and call signaling requirements
442. ross the stereo image When the control is turned fully right or left you are able to route the signal at unity gain to either left or right outputs individually 10 All outputs from the channel except inserts are muted when the ON switch is released and enabled when the switch is down allowing levels to be pre set before the before the signal is required 11 MIX SUB The channel signal may be routed to either the main MIX switch UP or SUB buses switch DOWN The left right balance is set by the PAN control see above allowing the signal to be sent proportionately to any of the buses 12 FADER The 100mm FADER with a custom designed law to give even smoother control of the overall signal level in the channel strip allows precise balancing of the various source signals being mixed to the Master Section You get most control when the input SENSI TIVITY is set up correctly giving full travel on the fader See the Initial Set Up section on page 16 for help in setting a suitable signal level 13 DIRECT PRE POST See Direct Output 1 and Advanced Features on page 18 for an explanation of the Direct Output The output may be selected as either PRE or POST fader The factory default setting is POST FADER but this may be changed by moving an internal switch as shown on the right Remove the protective PRE grommet to gain access to the POST ae switch and move the switch PRE A POST DIRECT
443. row UP Arrow DOWN buttons to navigate through the Utility row Use the Encoder wheel to change router values The following routing parameters can be accessed under the UTILITY button Output Route 1 Selects audio information from the CH1 or CH2 inputs and sends it to Output CH1 Default Value The routing information is stored with each preset Output Route 2 Selects the type of audio information from the CH1 or CH2 inputs and sends it to Output CH2 Default Value The routing information is stored with each preset Output Route 3 Selects the type of audio information from the CH1 or CH2 inputs and sends it to Output CH3 Default Value The routing information is stored with each preset Output Route 4 Selects the type of audio information from the CH1 or CH2 inputs and sends it to Output Default Value The routing information is stored with each Preset Each of the four outputs can be set to the following ile CH1 High Frequency Selects the high frequency information from the CH1 input CH2 High Frequency Selects the high frequency information from the CH2 input Mono High Frequency Selects the high frequency information from the CH1 and CH2 inputs and sums them to Mono CH1 Low Frequency Selects the low frequency information from the CH1 input CH2 Low Frequency Selects the low frequency information from the CH2 Input Mono Low Frequency Selects the low freque
444. rrert tel quillustr gauche UTILISATION Lors de l utilisation de l anplificateur avec unsignal plein registre le drait limiteur r duit la distortion des hautes fr quences caus e par les surtensions des basses fr cuences Le drait protege aussi les haut parleurs de hautes fr quences des surtensions et des hammoniques dues aux 5 En utilisation avec des haut parleurs de sous graves certains utilisateurs pr ferert laisser le circuit limiteur hors drauit on peut ainsi obtenir un son avec plus d impact dans la reproduction des grosses caisses et autres instruments du type ATTENTION le circuit de limiteur d cr termment les pointes surtension augineniant le ni veau moyen du signal sans distortion auci ble On peut ainsi facilerrert doubler la puissance moyenne livr e aux haut parleurs Il faut prendre soin de ne pas exceder la puissance adinissible des haut parleurs AUSSTATTUNG amp EINSTELLUNGEN dip Liniter BESCHREIBUNG VVenn des Audiosignal die Ausgangs verst rker Ubersteuert wird das Signal geklippt was zu einer Abflachung der Wellenspitzen f hrt Der Clip Limiter Spitzenbegrenzer erkennt dies und verringert schnell die Verst rkung um die St rke der bersteuerung zu zieren geidrzeitig aber Dynanikals r gichzuerhalten spricht der Spitzenbegrenzer nur w hrend echter bersteuerungen J eder Karel
445. rs ou tout autre qui penert qui pourrait tre d de la n gligence ou mauvaise installation et ou utilisation d un arrplificateur PLX Garantie de produit garan t le produit PLX libre de d faut de piece et ou de fabrication et ce pour une p riode de trois ans partir de la date d achat et rerrplacera les pieces d fectueuses et r parera le produit sous l effet de cette garantie en autart que le produit est install et utilis de facon nomale et que le produit est retoum nare usine port pay accompagn d une copie de la preuve d achat i e facture originale Cette garantie est conditionndle a ce quune inspection du produit retoume selon notre jugerrert un d faut de fabrication amp garantie ne couwe pes les produits ayant subi abus n gligence acddent installation incorecte ou dont le code de cate a t enlev ou renduillisilole GARANTIE BEDINGUNGEN Nur USA in anderen Landem Ihren Fachh ndler fragen Haftungserkiarung QSC Audio Products Inc haftet nicht f r Sch den an Lautsprechem Verstarkem oder anderen Ger ten die durch Fahrl ssigkeit imBetrieb oder durch nachl ssige Installation verursacht wurden Produktgarantie garantiert f r de PLX Verst rker einwandfreie Herstellung und Freiheit von Materialnr ngeln f r de Dauer von drei ahren nach Verkaufsdatum Innerhalb dieser Zeit ersetzt defekte Teile und repariert nich
446. rs have access 10 Users keep changing channels You can prevent users from changing channels by pressing the SEEK button and holding it for five seconds This will electronically lock into the channel In addition lock the access door to prevent users from accessing channel buttons cannot change channels when pressing the UP and DOWN buttons or the SEEK button The unit is electronically locked Press the SEEK button for five seconds to unlock When change channels only certain channels are accessible The unit has been programmed to tune to only certain channels LR 500 ONLY You can change these tunable channels by re programming the unit How can limit access to the batteries Use the side door locks My batteries are not charging Make sure the battery switch is in the NiMH position Make sure you have connected an approved Listen charging transformer Make sure you use ONLY NiMH batteries provided by Listen Never try to charge alkaline or NICAD batteries want to run the unit from a wall transformer simply plug a Listen approved transformer to the CHARGE POWER connector Batteries need not be installed however NiMH will recharge if installed while the unit is being used isten LISTEN TECHNOLOGIES CORPORATION 1 801 233 8992 1 800 330 0891 Fax 1 801 233 8995 27 Internet www listentech com All specifications subject to change without notice 72MHz Frequency Compatibility Table Frequen
447. rt at the specified time at the first free location on the disc If the off time is set to a time greater than the length of the disc and playback 15 selected the unit will start playing at the start of the disc and continue to the end If timer recording is selected and the off time is set to a time which is greater than the remaining time on the disc the unit will continue recording until there is no space left on the disc If the timer is set and the unit 1s switched on at the timer start time the timer operation will have no effect If the unit has been disconnected from the power supply so that the clock time has been lost and the timer switch 15 set the clock icon will flash rapidly in standby mode as an indication that the current timer setting is invalid If the unit has C me current disc as non recordable i mer E rar appears when the timer switch is set to REC If the timer is set with the switch at OFF or PLAY and a non recordable disc loaded the unit is then placed in standby and the switch then set to the REC position this error mes sage will not appear of course recording will not take place under these conditions The CD RW700 can be used to play back CDs including CD R and CD RW discs that have been recorded and finalized on other types of recorder as well as CD R discs and CD RW discs that have been recorded on the unit 3 1 Simple playback operations 1 Press the OPEN CLOSE key 3 or
448. s Dto change the value of the fade in time 3 Press me MENU Es apain so D inal the ge shows FODE here is the utent t fade time in ende 4 Turn the MULTI JOG control or use the SKIP keys to change the value of the fade out time 4 Recording Rehearsal It is possible to set the fade in time only per form step 5 after step 2 or the fade out time only in step 1 press the MENU key until the fade out time menu item is shown To perform the fade in 1 With a recordable disc loaded press the RECORD key 20 or D so that the unit enters record ready mode 2 Start the source material and press the FADER key 02 or The display shows F for the time specified in the menu item above As the fade progresses the monitored signal sradually becomes louder reflecting the level recorded on disc To perform a fade out 1 While recording press the FADER key 22 or The display shows specified in the menu above As the fade progresses the monitored signal sradually becomes quieter reflecting the level recorded on disc 2 When the end of the fade out time is reached the unit goes into record ready mode Record ing can be restarted with the FADER key or the PLAY or PAUSE keys The fade n and fade out times can be reset to new values while recording is in progress Fades are also possible in digital direct mode 4 3 4 Digital direct 4 4 Rehearsal There are two areas in
449. s DEL vertes SIGNAL 2008 amp 10B allument respectiverrert 01 1 et 10 de la pleine puissance ce l anplificateur La DEL AP dionote lors de surcharges Gcr tage La DEL reste allurr e pleine intensit pour indiquer la mise en sourdine par le drait de Si cette condition se pr sentait lors de l utilisation voir la section d pannage de ce manuel La DH jaune BRIDGE indique que l arrglificateur a t r gl en mode pont nono La DEL jaune PARALLEL indique que l anpificateur a t r gl en mode parallele BETRI Netzschalter Bevor Sie einschalten berpr fen Sie alle Verbindungen und drehen Sie de Verst rkung zur ck Die Softstart Sequenz beginnt mit halber Helligkeit der POWER LED Einige Sekunden sp ter beginnt der Ventilator zu laufen und der Verst rker schaltet f r etwa eine Sekunde stumm wobei die rote CLIPLED Pell aufleuchtet Danach erscheint de POIVER Arzeige in voller Helligkeit und der Verst rker ist betriebsbereit Verstarkungsregier Die Regler wurden als Rastpotentio meter ausgelegt umreproduaierbare Einstellungen zu erlauben Die tatsachliche Verst rkung wird in dB angezeigt Volle Verst rkung entspricht 40 oder 32 cB LED Anzei ge Bei voller Helligkeit zeigt die g ne LED de Betriebsbereitschaft des Verst rkers an Halbe Helligkeit bedeutet dafs sich der Verst rker in der Startsequenz befindet Bei steigendem Eingangssignal l
450. s INPUT 1 CONNECTION Connect a microphone or balanced line level ae input See Preparation instruction The LT 800 has two possible audio inputs 7 for details Page 9 INPUT 1 is used to connect a balanced mic or line level input INPUT 2 is used to connect an unbalanced high impedance line input or speaker input INPUT 1 SWITCH Select MIC or LINE input on the slide switch For Mic LINE OUTPUT the LINE INPUT 2 CONNECTION INPUT 2 SWITCH Select input the level is 55dBm and the OUTPUT connector is a mixed this is a phono connector LINE or SPEAKER on the slide input impedance is 50 ohms In the output of INPUT 1 and INPUT 2 used to connect an switch directly next to the line position the input level is 4dBm after processing This is an unbalanced high imped INPUT 2 connector In the and the input impedance is 600 ohms unbalanced phono connector ance line or speaker input line position the input level is The output level is 10dBm 10dBm and on speaker the input level is 10dBm isten LISTEN TECHNOLOGIES CORPORATION 1 801 233 8992 1 800 330 0891 Fax 1 801 233 8995 7 Internet www listentech com All specifications subject to change without notice LT 800 Stationary Transmitter Preparation Preparing the LT 800 for Use Set the RF POWER Set the RF POWER switch for Remove the product from the shipping FULL 1 2 or 1 4 Level is also indicated on the front container and plastic cover Inspect for
451. s by pressing the adjacent switch 12 These unbalanced inputs on RCA phono connectors are ideal to connect the playback of a tape machine for monitoring QD 27K REPLACES MIX OUTPUT This switch does what it says When pressed the Mix output is switched to the 2 Track input and is an ideal way of feeding pre show music to the main outputs in live applications without using up valuable input channels For example with the switch pressed and a CD connected and playing pre show music the engineer can be setting up channel levels adjusting EQ talking back to performers and monitoring any part of the mix including final Mix without affecting the sound to the audience Releasing the switch instantly swaps the Mix Outputs back to the mixer and cuts off the CD CAUTION Pressing this switch cuts off the normal Mix L R signal and it should therefore NOT be used during live performance or recording monitor SOURCE SELECT These switches allow a choice of 2TK Mono Mix or Groups as the source for the Phones Monitor outputs and meters and may be selected individu ally or as a combination NOTE If NO switches are pressed there will be NO signal on the meters or monitors Page 16 6 48 Phantom Spannung N Viele professionelle Kondensator Mikrofone ben tigen eine externe Spannungs Versorgung die sogenannte Phantom Spannung 48V Mit dieser Methode wird die Spannung auf die gleichen Leitung gelegt auf denen auch das
452. s important The aim should be to place the microphone as close as physically possible to the source to cut out unwanted surrounding sounds allow a lower gain setting on the mixer and avoid feedback Also a well chosen and well placed microphone should not need any appre ciable equalisation Omnidirectional Response There are no exact rules let your ears be the judge In the end the position that gives the desired effect is the correct position INITIAL SET UP Once you have connected up your system see the sections on connection and wiring earlier in this manual for guidance you are ready to set initial positions for the controls on your mixer The front panel drawing inside the rear cover shows typical initial control positions which may be found a useful guide to setting up the mixer for the first time Set up individual input channel as follows Connect your sources microphone keyboard etc to the required inputs Note Phantom powered mics should be connected before the 48V is switched on Route the channel to Mix O Set Master faders at 0 input faders at 0 and set power amplifier levels to about 70 O Provide a typical performance level signal and press the PFL button on the first channel monitoring the level on the bargraph meters O Adjust the input gain until the meter display is in the amber section with occasional peaks to the first red LED at a typical maximum source level This allows sufficie
453. s mixed to the respective Aux Output at the rear of the mixer For Effects it is useful for the signal to fade up and down with the fader this is called POST FADE but for Foldback or Monitor feeds it is important for the send to be independent of the fader this is called PRE FADE AUX SEND 1 This is always PRE FADE and therefore most appropriate for foldback or monitor mixes Page 12 SPIRIT FOLIO E 1 a og S 9 o e 5 o ks 5 zi 4 a AUX SEND 2 This is normally POST FADE and would typically be used as an effects send but may be switched globally to PRE FADE using the POST PRE switch on the Master section pro viding a second foldback or monitor send if required AUX SEND 3 This is always POST FADE 8 BALANCE This control sets the amount of the channel signal feeding the Right and Left MIX or SUB buses allowing you to balance the source in the stereo image When the control is turned fully right or left you feed only that side of the signal to the mix Unity gain is pro vided by the control in the centre detented position 9 All outputs from the channel except inserts are muted when the ON switch is released and enabled when the switch is down 10 MIX SU8 The channel signal may be routed in stereo to either the main MIX switch UP or SUB buses switch DOWN The left right balance is set by the BAL control see above 11 FADER Th
454. s the Input 3 to Mix 1 level There are 64 active levels within the matrix All are accessible from the Mix panel view MASTER LEVEL The third or bottom encoder functions as the Master Level for the entire system When this Level is changed all eight outputs are changed by an equivalent amount The Route View is an alternative presentation to the Mix View Figure 2 In the Route View a single input channel is selected The display then shows the routing of the selected input channel to each output Each output level can be changed in the same manner as is done in the Mix View It should be noted that in either view routing and mixing can be accomplished The Route View is handy when you need to route a selected channel to multiple outputs The three parameter knobs perform the same function as in the Mix View The top knob controls the highlighted output mix the second knob controls the selected Matrix Level and the bottom knob controls the Master Volume for all outputs 7 Digitool Security Edit View Input Channel Access to the Digitool s settings may be restricted by clicking on the key icon at the upper right portion of the Mix View screen An option menu will appear which allows the user to either set the unit s password or to lock the screen In order to set a new password the user is first asked to enter the old password using the program knob and the displayed graphical numeric keypad When shipped from the factory the
455. s the MENU 2 9e or EE until the im shows i where 5 is the current 3 Use the MULTI JOG control 17 the SKIP to un the un volume between GEE and 1222 relative to the original pui level There i is bubo aS a setting which represents a complete signal cut If digital direct is selected as described below 4 3 4 Digital direct the digital volume is bypassed and the menu item does not appear 4 1 2 Input monitoring When the unit is in record ready or record mode the input signal is output from the OUT jacks digital and analog allowing you to hear the input signal The meters also show the current s gnal level However it is only possible to record or to enter record ready mode when a recordable disc 15 inserted To allow monitoring of the input signal at other times or when the unit is stopped use the MONITOR key on the remote control unit D The RECORD key 90 on the main unit will also enter monitor mode from stop mode when there is no recordable disc in the unit when there is a record able disc in the unit pressing the RECORD key enters record ready mode The word Fi CH E appears on the display to show that the output signal 15 an echo of the input signal s The meters show the current input level Exit the monitor mode by using the STOP key 4 1 3 Frequency conversion The sampling frequency for CDs is 44 1 kHz The CD RW700 will always record and play back CDs a
456. sc When you want to erase a whole disc all the tracks on a disc follow the procedure below 1 With the disc loaded and the unit in stop mode press the ERASE key 46 or B 2 Turn the MULTI JOG control 17 or use KE 2 D until the display shows mE 3 If you do not want to proceed with the erase operation press any other key such as the STOP key 4 To erase the contents of the disc press the MULTI JOG control or press the ENTER key 5 After recording Erasing This operation cannot be undone If you are going to erase a disc make sure that it contains only record ings that you really want to erase 5 If the erase en has been selected the word iz HE flashes on the display and the timer starts down a time value shown on the display 6 ar end of the countdown period the word nf 27 appears briefly on the display and the display returns to the track time display 5 2 3 Refreshing a disc If a CD RW disc has been corrupted at any point e g power has been cut off in the middle of a final ize operation etc or has been used in a computer or another piece of equipment that makes it unreadable it is possible to refresh the disc to make it usable again This is equivalent to formatting a disk on a computer to prepare it for use This operation destroys all data on the disc 1 With the disc loaded and the unit in stop mode press the ERASE key 46 or B 2
457. se kann das Eingangssignal auch an weitere Verst rker geleitet werden Beispiel En Moncsignal speist beide Kan le mit unabh ngiger Verst rkungseinstellung f r jedes Lautsprechersystem CARACTERISTICAS Y AJUSTES Cu les son las diferen cias entre los modos Est reo Entradas Paralelas y Puenteado en Mono MODO EST REO Esta es la manera de usar el amplificador donde cada canal fundona independienterrente Con se ales separadas conectadas a las entrades botones de gananda que controlan su respectivo canal y bodnas separadas conectadas a salida Ejemplos Reproducci n de dos canales Est reo Dos sefales mono independientes corro la dela mezda principal main y la de los monitores e Cperad n bi angplificade con las frequendas graves por el canal 1 y las frecuendas agudas por el canal 2 MODO DE ENTRADAS PARALELAS Este modbo es cono el modo est reo exento que las ertracbs para el 1 canal 2 est n unices interarrerte Una se al conedacda a cLalquiera ce las entradas alimentar a ambos canales dredarrerte Los contoles de gananda de cada canal fundonar n de una manera cada canal lleva su propia carga para la bodna Usted puede conectar la se al de a otros amplificadores usando el anasto ce entraca que libre Ejemplo Um se nonof nica que alimenta a ambos canales con controles de ganada i
458. se your amplifier carefully and do not try to compensate for lack of power by using the mixer to increase output level NOTE The level of any source signal in the final output is affected by many factors principal ly the Input Sensitivity control Channel Fader Sub and Mix Faders You should try to use only as much microphone gain as required to achieve a good balance between signals with the faders set as described above If the input gain is set too high the channel fader will need to be pulled down too far in compensation to leave enough trav el for successful mixing and there is a greater risk of feedback because small fader movements will have a very sig nificant effect on output level Also there will be a chance of distortion as the signal overloads the channel and causes clipping 2 level is too high clipping distortion If the gain is set too low you will not find enough gain on the faders to bring the signal up to an adequate level and backgound hjiss will be more noticeable Clipped Signal Noise This is illustrated on the right If the signal level is too low it may be masked by the noise Page 17 SPIRIT FOLIO amp o ADVANCED FEATURES 1 DIRECT OUTPUT The Direct outputs on the first eight channels allow you to record signals direct to a multitrack tape machine Normally they are set POST FADER but can be changed to PRE FADER by moving th
459. seconds until you see the decimal dot next to the channel number disappear 8 LISTEN TECHNOLOGIES CORPORATION 1 801 233 8992 1 800 330 0891 Fax 1 801 233 8995 Internet www listentech com All specifications are subject to change without notice LT 800 Stationary Transmitter Preparation Audio Control Connect Audio Inputs Connect audio source s to 9 Use the headset jack to listen to one or both audio input connections Input 1 offers a choice of balanced XLR or 1 4 phone connection Input 2 is an unbalanced phono connector See LT 800 Audio Connections on Page 7 for specific connection instructions Unbalanced Input 2 connection Balanced Input 1 connection phono connector XLR or 1 4 phone Input 2 Switch Input 1 Switch Connect balanced and unbalanced audio sources as shown in diagram Make sure that if you are connecting an unbalanced audio source that Pin 2 of the XLR and the ring of 1 4 phone jack are connected to ground as shown XLR Wiring 1 4 Phone Wiring Balanced Unbalanced Balanced Unbalanced Tip Ring Sleeve Input from Balanced Unbalanced Audio Audio Source Source an Audio from Tip Ring Sleeve Balanced Unbalanced Audio Audio Source Source 8 Adjust Audio Input Switches For Input 1 owitch select MIC or LINE input level Input 2 Switch select LINE or speaker level See illustration on Page 7 audio source With the audio source or sources active and the unit powered ON p
460. sein einer nichtisolierten gefahrlichen elektrischen Spannung innerhalb des Systemgehauses hinweisen die so hoch ist dass eine Gefahrdung durch elektrische Schl ge besteht Das Ausrufungszeichen in einem gleichseitigen Dreieck wie es auf dem System N angebracht ist soll den Benutzer auf wichtige Bedienungs und Wartungsanweisungen in dieser Bedienungsanleitung aufmerksam machen Wichtige Sicherheitshinweise 1 Lesen Sie die folgenden Sicherheitshinweise noch vor der Inbetriebnahme des Ger ts aufmerksam durch 2 Beachten Sie alle Warn und Sicherheitshinweise am Ger t und in dieser Bedienungsanleitung Verwenden Sie dieses Ger t nicht in der von Wasser oder Feuchtigkeit Reinigen Sie das Ger t nur mit einem sauberen trockenen Tuch Achten Sie darauf dass die L ftungs ffnungen nicht blockiert sind Stellen Sie das Ger t gem den Herstelleranweisungen auf Stellen Sie es nur an einem Ort auf an dem eine gute Luftzirkulation gew hrleistet ist um den zuverl ssigen Betrieb des Ger ts sicherzustellen und es gegen berhitzung zu sch tzen 6 Stellen Sie das Ger t nicht der N he von W rmequellen auf wie Heizk rpern W rmespeichern Ofen oder anderen Ger ten auch Verst rkern die W rme erzeu gen 7 Beeintr chtigen Sie in keiner Weise die Schutzfunktion des Schutzkontaktsteckers Ein Schutzkontaktstecker hat zwei Stromkontakte und einen dritten Erdungskontakt Dieser Erdungskontakt dient Ihrer Sich
461. sen Sie den Verst rker von quelifiziertem Servicepersonal berpr fen gt ANZEICHEN SIGNAL ANZEIGEN LEUCHTEN NICHT Wem die gr ne POWER LED in voller Helligkeit leuchtet der L fter l uft die Signal LEDs aber kein Signal anzeigen berpr fen Sie den Eingang Stellen Sie sicher da die Quelle arbeitet und versuchen Sie es nit einemanderen Eingangs kabel SchliefSen Sie de Quelle an einen anderen Verst rker an um sicherzustellen sie arbeitet ENCENDIDO NO SE ILUMINA Revise el cable de comente Corfinre que la toma de comente furdane Si se conectan muchos ampalificadores auna sola tona el drcuito se sobrecarga y se desconecta Una sobrecarga en el modo de puenteado en nono puede causar un apagado monent neo corro de tres segundos y el indicador LED de POWER la intensidad de su luz reinidando la secuenda de encendido Verifique la impeodanda de carga 4 ohmios n nino reduzca el nivel de la se al Si LED rojo de CLIPse ilurrina indicar un apagado t rrrico Un anplificador que se apagada continuamente puede tener una falla interna Ap guelo descon dtel o de la toma de corrierte y ll velo con un t cnico espedalizado para su revisi n gt INDICACI N EL INDICADOR LED DE SE AL NO SE ILUMINA Si el indicador verde de POVVER est coma etarente iluninado y el ventilador est funcionando pero el LED ae signal no indica
462. shows the input level of left and right channels The meter range is 0 6 12 24 40dB Overload LEDs The Overload LEDs indicate one of two situations The input level is clipping you will hear it There is an internal DSP overflow The Overload LED is lit when one sample is at 0 dBFS Display The 2 x 16 LCD displays Preset names parameter names and values depending on the mode of operation Arrow UP Button Press to navigate up through the user inter face Arrow DOWN Button Press to navigate down through the user interface PRESET Button Press to enter preset mode which pro vides access to Bose speaker EQ pre sets LIMITER Button Press to access output limiter parameters UTILITY Button Press to access ROUTING LEVEL and general SYSTEM parameters DELAY Button Press to access output delay parameters Encoder Wheel Selects presets and changes parameter values 3 0 Rear Panel CH2 CH1 CH3 CH4 oo b o o INPUTS Dr cQ9UTPUIS 1 Bose Corporation Framingham MA 01701 9168 CH2 Made in the U S A Balanced XLR Inputs Two balanced XLR inputs Balanced XLR Outputs Four balanced XLR outputs Jack balanced XLR COM Port 5 pin DIN that will be used for future Sleeve Pin 1 Ground software upgrades or for adding new Tip Pin 2 Hot Bose speaker EQ presets Ring Pin 3 Cold Power Inp
463. sibly causing hum NOTE Turn off the Parallel Inputs switches when feeding the anp two separate signals CARACTERISTIQUES ET LEUR UTILISATION Mode entr es paralleles DESCRIPTION Les interrupteurs Parallel Inputs vous perrettent cf utiliser anmplificateur en mode parall le ou le rr rre signal est aux deux canaux Sans avoir a utiliser un cable Y Chaque canal anplifie le signal independamment avec ajusterrerts propres de gain cefiltre et deliniteur Ajustez les interrupteurs 4 5 et position ot pourjoincre les ertr es des deux canaux Laissez les interrupteurs en position off pour utilisation en mode st r o bi anplification ou toute autre application 2 canaux La DEL jane PARALLEL sur le penneau avert allure pour indiquer que l ampdificateur est en mode parallele Lorsque les entr es sont r gl es en mode parallele vous pouvez utiliser le connecteur de la seconde entr e pour le signal vers un autre any ificateur On appelle ce type brancherrert le chalnage en guidande ou daisy chaining UTILISATION J les entr es mode parallele quand vous voulez cortr ler deux haut parleurs avec des ajusterrentes de gain defiltre et deliniteur partir dun rr re signal Voir la page 12 pour les explications des modes dop ration NOTE si vous utilisez un signal syrr trique n utilisez que des cables construit a cet effet puisque l insertion d un seul Cabl
464. sing Dynamic mic Headset Handset Microphone 50 to 200 ohms dynamic balanced or unbalanced Headphones 150 to 600 ohms monaural Connector Type XLR 4M Pin 1 Microphone Low Pin 2 Microhpne High Pin 3 Headphone High Pin 4 Headphone Low Panel Microphone Built in Microphone 2 2k ohms electret 44 dB nominal Omnidirectional Gooseneck Microphone Connector Type Threaded TRS 5k ohms electret 47 dB nominal Tip Microphone High 12 VDC bias Ring Common Sleeve Common Compatible with MCP 90 Series Microphones Intercom Channels Balanced mode SW1 set to BAL position Output Level 1 Vrms nominal Input Impedance 300 ohms Bridging Impedance greater than 10k ohms Sidetone 40 dB 35 dB adjustable range Call Signaling Send 20 kHz 100 Hz 0 5 Vrms 10 Receive 20 kHz 800 Hz 100 mVrms Mic Kill Detect Frequency 24 kHz 800 Hz 100mVrms Noise Contribution less than 70 dB Common Mode Rejection Ratio greater than 50 dB Connector Type Six position push type terminal block Pin 1 Audio and DC Common Pin 2 Local power 12 to 15 VDC If needed Pin 3 Intercom channel 1 audio low and 24 VDC power Pin 4 Intercom channel 1 audio high and 24 power Pin 5 Intercom channel 2 audio low and 24 power Pin 6 Intercom channel 2 audio high and 24VDC power Intercom Channels Unbalanced mode SW1 set to UNBAL position Output Level 0 70 Vrms 10 Input Impedance 200 ohms Bridg
465. so 2TK ed e il modo ideale di diffondere musica registrata attraverso le uscite principali in applicazioni live senza usare altri canali d ingresso Per esem pio con il tasto inserito ed un lettore CD collegato il fonico pu regolare i liv elli parlare ai musicisti e monitorare ogni parte del mix compreso il Mix finale senza agire sul suono udito dagli spettatori Quando il tasto viene rilas ciato le uscite Mix tornano al mixer e il lettore CD viene escluso ATTENZIONE La pressione di questo tasto esclude il segnale Mix L R e quindi non va usato durante l esi bizione o la registrazione SELEZIONE SORGENTE MONITOR Questi tasti permettono la scelta di 2TK Mono Mix o Gruppi come sor gente per Cuffie uscite monitor e meter e possono essere scelte singolar mente o combinate NOTA Se NESSUN tasto viene premuto non ci sar alcun segnale sui meters o sui monitor Page 17 NO USE micr fonos no balanceados con la ali mentaci n 48V activada ya que pueden estropearse por la tensi n phantom Pueden usarse normalmente micr fonos din micos balanceados con la alimentaci n activada contacte con el fabricante de su micr fono para saberlo Los micr fonos deben estar conectados y los faders al m nimo al activar la alimentaci n phantom para evitar dafios a los equipos externos PHONES La salida PHONES auriculares aparece en un jack de 1 4 de tres polos ade cuada para auriculares con una imped
466. sorgente collegata all ingresso adeguato al livello del segnale e C qualche apparecchio acceso e collegato agli Inserts e Controllare che i Master faders siano al massimo i fader d ingresso siano al livello adatto e che il canale sia indirizzato all uscita che viene monitorata e tasto MUTE disattivato sul canale in questione E stato selezionato il giusto monitor Ce un PFL AFL attivo su un altro canale Nessuna uscita Mix e Controllare che il Master Fader Mix sia attivo Controllare che il tasto ZTK REPLACES MIX non sia attivato Nessuna uscita Monitor e Ce una cuffia inserita e Il livello Monitor Phones abbastanza alto E stato selezionato il giusto monitor Distorsione in cuffia Le cuffie hanno un impedenza inferiore 2000 e llivello Monitor Phones e troppo alto Page 21 Nota Los ajustes iniciales s lo sirven como punto de comien zo en su mezcla Es importante recordar que muchos fac tores pueden afectar al sonido durante una actuaci n en directo como por ejemplo la ecualizaci n de un canal o incluso la cantidad de personas en el local Ahora Ud ya est preparado para empezar a construir la mezcla escuchando cuidadosamente para cada compo nente en la mezcla y vigilando alg n indicio de sobrecarga en los medidores Si esto ocurre baje ligeramente el fader del canal correspondiente hasta que el nivel deje de encender los segmentos rojos del medidor o reajuste l
467. source is restored when the PFL AFL switches are released QD nun The PFL AFL LED illuminates to show that a PFL AFL is active and is the source for the monitors and meters The LED will normally be OFF Page 18 ACHTUNG Wenn dieser Schalter gedr ckt wird wird das normale Mix L R Signal unterbrochen Aus diesem Grund sollte der Schalter nicht w hrend einer Live Veranstaltung oder einer Aufnahme gedr ckt werden MONITOR SOURCE SELECT Dieser Schalter erm glicht das Anw hlen der 2TK Mono Mix oder Gruppen Signale als Quelle f r den Phones und den Monitor Ausgang sowie f r die LED Anzeige Die Quellen k nnen einzeln oder in Kombination geschaltet werden Ist kein Schalter gedr ckt liegt auch kein Signal am Monitor Ausgang und an der LED Anzeige an O MONITOR PHONES Mit diesem Regler wird der Ausgangspegel der Monitor Links und Rechts Ausg ngen eingestellt Ist ein Kopfh rer am PHONES AnschluB eingesteckt werden die Monitor Ausg nge stummgeschaltet Mit dem Regler wird dann der Pegel des Kopfh rers eingestellt Wird der Kopfh rer wieder abgezogen wird die Stummschaltung der Monitor Ausg nge wieder aufgehoben Die Quelle f r die Monitor und Phones Ausg nge wird mit den 5 Schaltern 13 ber dem Regler angew hlt Ist irgendein PFL oder AFL Schalter gedr ckt wird die Quelle f r die Monitor Ausg nge und der Kopfh rer Ausgang zum Mono PFL AFL Signal geschaltet ohne einen anderen Ausgang des Mixes
468. t The amount of aE dynamic compression is determined by the Ratio control H a DigiTool MX Parametric EQ BW sweeps 5k 10k 20k RATIO The Ratio of the compression is adjusted using the middle encoder The range of control is from 1 to 20 Though it is not specified in the panel view the ratio is referenced to 1 dB Therefore a Ratio setting of eight is an 8 to 1 ratio This particular setting for example means that as the input signal increases its B level by 8 dB the compressor allows only 1 dB of increase at its E output 20 5 10 50 100 200 500 1k 2k Hz 5k 10k 20k GAIN The output gain of the compressor is adjusted via the b bottom encoder The range of this control is 100 to 30 dB in 1 2 dB steps This adjustment can serve to compensate for the 4s loss in average signal strength due to the dynamic compression If SV VM MM the user desires to optimally set the gain in order to maintain digital full scale and therefore maximum dynamic range the following formula can be used DigiTool Parametric EQ Freq sweeps 20 50 100 200 500 1k 2k 5k 10k 20k Hz 1 Gain hreshold m 1 Katio Figures 9a 9b and 9c Frequency response curves for a range of For example given a threshold of 20 dB and a ratio of 4 1 the parametric sweeps calculation is 1 Gain 20 Slog Therefore the above gain setting will result in the output level reaching maximum full scal
469. t funktionierende Komponenten Produkte wenn der Defekt unter nonmalen Betriebsunst nden auftritt Dies bei frachtfreiem Versand zum Hersteller mit Kaufquittung Der Garantiefall muss nach unserer Untersuchung und nach unserem Urteil durch einen Herstellungsfehler ausgel st worden sein Eine weitergehende Haftung f r Produkte de rrissbr ucHicdna genutzt wurden durch Fahrl ssigkeit besch digt worden sind durch Unfall durch unsachgen sse Installation oder bei Entfemung des Detunscodes schliessen wir aus INFORMACION DE GARANTIA UU solamente consulte su comerciante o su distribuidor Atencion CSC Audio Products Inc no es responsable por da os a las bodnas amplificadores o cualquier otro equipo que sea causado por negligencia o mala instalaci n o uso de los amplificadores PLX Garant a garantiza que el PLX estar libre de defectos en piezas o mano de obra por un per odo de tres a os de la fecha de venta y cambiar las partes que no fundonen y productos cubiertos por esta garant a mientras que el defecto surja bajo condidones nomales de uso y asuniendo que la unidad ser a nuestra f brica transporte prepagaco con una copia de la prueba de conpra ejemplo recibo de venta Esta garant a producto devuelto y deber indicar a nuestro juicio un defecto de fabrica Esta garant a no se extiende a ning n producto que ha sido sorretido a uso fu
470. t in stop mode press the ERASE key in or we 2 If the display does not show 2 Where 3 is the of the last track recorded on the disc turn the MULTI JOG control 17 or use the SKIP keys D until it is displayed 3 Turn the MULTI JOG control or use the SKIP keys to change the number of the first track to be erased The highest value that this number can take is the last track recorded e g if 17 tracks have been recorded on the disc i ir means that the last track only 17 will be erased The lowest value that number take is if this number was i the whole disc would be erased as described below 4 If you do not want to proceed with the erase operation press any other key such as the STOP key If only one track has been recorded on the disc only the erase disc option 5 2 2 Erasing a whole disc is available 5 When the range of tracks to be erased has been selected press the MULTI JOG control or press the ENTER key 6 This operation cannot be undone If you are going to erase a track or tracks make sure that they are recordings that you really want to erase 6 Ifthe erase has been selected the word FE iz HE flashes on the ier and the timer starts uns down from 3 20 seconds 7 at end of the countdown period the word uelet appears briefly on the display and the display returns to the track time display 5 2 2 Erasing a whole di
471. t kan resultere i brand eller elek trisk st d 14 Se p bagkl dningen ang ende m rkater der er relevante for sikkerheden 15 Der m ikke anbringes ben ild s som t ndte lys p apparatet 16 Produktet skal monteres i rack og installeres i henhold til lokale bygningsregler 17 Produktet er ikke beregnet til marineprogrammer OA 1 Important Safety Instructions Vorsicht Deutsch Dieses Gerat darf weder Regen noch Feuchtigkeit ausgesetzt werden damit Brande durch Kurzschluss oder elektrische Schlage verhindert werden VORSICHT STROMSCHLAGGEFAHR NICHT FFNEN ACHTUNG ZUR VERMEIDUNG VON ELEKTRISCHEN SCHLAGEN WEDER DIE ABDECKUNG NOCH DIE R CKWAND ENTFERNEN IM INNEREN BEFINDEN SICH KEINE VOM BENUTZER ZU WARTENDEN TEILE WENDEN SIE SICH BEI NOTWENDIGEN REPARATUREN AN QUALIFIZIERTES FACHPERSONAL Advertencia Espa ol Con el fin de reducir el riesgo de descarga el ctrica no exponga la unidad a lluvia o humedad PRECAUCION RIESGO DE DESCARGA EL CTRICA NO ABRIR PRECAUCI N PARA REDUCIR EL RIESGO DE DESCARGA EL CTRICA NO QUITE LA CUBIERTA O LA PARTE TRASERA EL INTERIOR NO CONTIENE COMPONENTES REPARABLES POR EL USUARIO PARA REPARACIONES LLEVE EL APARATO A PERSONAL CUALIFICADO Diese Sicherheitshinweise befinden sich auf der R ckseite des PANARAY System Digital Controller Das Blitzsymbol mit Pfeilspitze in einem gleichseitigen Dreieck soll den Benutzer auf das Vorhanden
472. t l utilisation dun s parateur de fr quences dedronique vendu s par rrert IMODE PARALLELE Similaire au mode st r o pour les gains filtres lirriteurs et connexion des haut parleurs mais les entr es sort reli es l int rieur Un signal branch a l une ou l autre des entr es sera donc par les deux canaux Vous pouvez envoyer le signal vers un autre arrplificeteur en vous servant de la seconde entr e comme sortie Exemple Deux haut parleurs de rr rre registre dans un systerre multi voles AUSSTATTUNG amp EINSTELLUNGEN Unterschiede zwischen Stereo Parallel und STEREOBETRIEB Dies ist de nomale Betriebsart eines Verstarkers bei der beide Kan le voll st ndig unabh ngig arbeiten An den Eing ngen liegen separate Signale an und an den Ausg ngen sind unab Beispiele e Zuveikanal Stereo Wiedergabe Zwei unabh ngige Monosignale wie zB Sunnen und Monitonmx Bianp Betrieb nit den tiefen Frequenzarteilen an Kanal 1 und den H hen an Kanal 2 PARALLELBETRIEB Diese Betriebsart entspricht dem Stereobetrieb au er dal de Eing nge der beiden Kan le ntem zusanmmengeschaltet werden Ein Signal welches an einemder beiden Eing nge anliegt wird daher beiden Kan len zugef hrt werden Die Funktion der Regler der beiden Kan le bleibt vollst ndig erhalten und jeder Kanal speist seine eigene Last Mit Hilfe der freien Eingangsbuch
473. t this frequency However if recording through a digital connection either coaxial or optical and the source has been recorded at a frequency other than 44 1 kHz or is being played back at a non standard speed using a varispeed unit more than 1 away from the stan dard the CD RW700 s internal frequency converter TASCAM CD RW700 17 4 Recording Basic recording will automatically convert the incoming frequency to 44 1 kHz If digital direct is selected as described below 4 3 4 Digital direct the frequency convertor is bypassed In this case recording from digitally connected devices is only possible when the source frequency is 44 1 kHz If an attempt is made to record from a source at a frequency the error message tiat F ik is dis played 4 2 Basic recording According to the Red Book the specification for audio CDs a track cannot be less than four seconds in length and there can be a maximum of 99 tracks on an audio CD Bear these limitations in mind when recording If you press either the STOP or the PAUSE key within four seconds of starting recording the unit will continue record ing until four seconds have elapsed since the start of recording and then stop or pause as appropriate After selecting the input source s 4 1 Input selec it is possible to start recording The basic record procedure is as follows 1 Load a recordable disc is into the unit As the
474. t werden wo es darauf ankonmt Infraschallanteile imMix zu erkennen CARACTERISTICAS Y AJUSTES Filtro de entrada QU ES 8 filtro de frequendas graves LP le perrrite atenuar se ales abajo de los Hz 50 Hz Esto rrejora el rendimiento de las frecuendas graves linitando una porci n de audio no audible que mueve el cono dejando m s potenda disponible para el rango de frecuenda de las bodinas Los ajustes del filtro para cada canal se controlan individual mente con el interruptor tipo DIR corro se describe Un atenuedor de 5 Hz ofrece proteadid n contra DC o entradas de frequendas Utragraves cuando se apaga el filtro CU NDO O CU NDO NO USARLO Por regia sus bodnas sonar n mejor con el filtro apropiado A menos que anteriomente haya utilizado otro aparato para filtrar y haya igualado las frequendas graves de sus bodes Las bocinas con ventilaci n corro la bass reflex ported etc son espedal mente sensibles al desplazamiento exagerado de los conos causado por frecuencias por debajo de su l mite H filtro de 50 Hzfundona bien con la rrayor a de las bodinas de rango completo y ofrece un suave realce a los 100 Hz para reforzar el cuerpo del sonido H filtro de 30 Hz est dise ado para subwoofers y para gabinetes de rango completo de gran tama o La posici n off apagado puede usarse en trabajos corro monitoreo en el estudio donde usted necesita saber si en su rrezda hay se ales
475. tallation or in the operation of our products And should there be any problems with your Listen products we are ready to help you in any way we can Should you have any comments on how we might improve our products or our service we re here to listen Here s how to reach us Telephone 1 801 233 8992 Facsimile 1 801 233 8995 U S Toll Free 1 800 330 0891 E Mail supportOlistentech com Web www listentech com Thank you and enjoy your listening experience Best Regards The Listen Team 2 LISTEN TECHNOLOGIES CORPORATION 1 801 233 8992 1 800 330 0891 Fax 1 801 233 8995 Internet www listentech com All specifications are subject to change without notice Table of Contents MISCELLANEOUS Technical Service Contacts 4 WalnlldS zv 2 e RE 4 Compliance Notices 4 Limited Lifetime Warranty 5 rogrammabie LR 400 LR 300 Display Display E Digital Receiver Receiver Receiver PIP 4 III LR 500 Programmable Display Receiver LR 400 Display Receiver and LT 800 Stationary Transmitter LR 300 Digital Receiver LT 800 front illustration controls amp display descriptions 7 Audio connections illustration 7 Differences in the LR 300 400 and 500 21 Preparing the LT 800 for use 8 Preparing Listen receivers for use 21 Lock in
476. tart up thun ps When the red CUP lights go out the am 15 ready for action PowerWave Technology High currert switching devices draw Over 10 000 watts of peak power fromthe main energy reservoir which is replenished fromthe AC line for meximumstiffness Convertional arrplifiers must isolate the energy bark with a large AC transformer which weakens the flow of currert allows greater sag under load and produces hum The PowerVVave supply performs voltage conversion at a very high frequency allowing better coupling through a much smaller isolation transfonrer SOUS LE CAPOT Une quantit impressionnante de technologie se trouve sous le capot des arrificeteurs de s rie PLX de C Des milliers de watts de puissance d fedent ala sortiece l amdificateur quelques certirr tres a peine des dr aits dert e a faible bruit et de tech nologie de pointe L implantation pr dse des composantes Gedroniques et les dra its de protediors sophistiqu s assurert le fonctionnerrert s curitaire et sans soubresaut En fait quiarrive til quand vous mettez amplificateur en rrarche S quence Soft Start La premiere t che ce l armlificateur est de charger d rerge prrraire sace faire un appel de courart trop Une r sistance sp ciale est install e de fa on ce que l anplificateur prenne trois seconds pour charger le r servoir denerge Pendart ce temps drait dalimentati
477. te radio frequency energy that may cause interference to radio communications if not installed in accordance with this manual The equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits of a Class A computing device pursuant to Subpart J Part 15 of FCC Rules which are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference when operated in a commercial environment Operation of this equipment in a residential area may cause interference which the user at his own expense will be required to correct C This product meets Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive 89 336 EEC Table of Contents DESCHIDH ON O 4 SES 200 A A A A Ad 5 LOS iW aHON as Unp ackin 2 222 c 6 PSZ00 IT 6 A A T 6 Conticuration SWIECDES an ara en 6 Intercom Channel and Program Connections eee eee eene eee eee e eere eret eene essa s ettet tete 6 Desktop or Rackmount Installation eee e cree eee eee eee eee e eee eene ees ettet eese etes essa saos 6 SDECHICAHONS ae A A get M 12 Intercom Channels 2 2 12 General u naeh 12 Balanced Mode set to BAL position s0 000000s00ssuuuenssssssnuunnsssnnsnnunnnsssssnnunnsssnssnnnnnsssssssnennse 12 Unbalanced Mode set to UNBAL position e eee eee eee eee e eene e eere neon es ettet eee
478. tenza qualificato Contattate il servizio di assistenza nel caso l apparecchio presenti danni di qualsiasi tipo ad esempio al cavo di alimentazione o alla spina oppure dovuti alla penetrazione di liq uido o di altro materiale all interno dell apparecchio all esposizione dell apparecchio alla pioggia o all umidit a malfunzionamenti o infine a caduta Non tentate di riparare da soli il prodotto L apertura o la rimozione del coperchio potrebbe esporre l utente a tensioni pericolose o ad ulteriori rischi Vi suggeriamo di contattare la Bose per informazioni relative al centro di assistenza autorizzato piu vicino 12 Per prevenire il pericolo di incendi o scosse elettriche evitate il sovraccarico delle prese a muro delle prolunghe o delle prese multiple di corrente 13 Prestate attenzione che del liquido o altro materiale non penetri all interno del prodotto poich potrebbe venire a contatto con parti sotto tensione o soggette a cor tocircuito con conseguente possibilit di incendi o di scosse elettriche 14 1 marchi delle certificazioni di sicurezza sono apposti sul pannello posteriore del prodotto 15 Non avvicinate all apparecchio alcun tipo di fiamma ad esempio un candeliere acceso 16 11 prodotto deve essere montato in rack e installato in linea con le disposizioni vigen ti in materia edilizia 17 1 prodotto non adatto per l utilizzo in ambito marittimo IIS res 10 11 12 13 14 Important
479. teps on 2 Parameter Range 40dB to OdB Default Value 20dB Output Route 1 Output Route 2 Output Route 3 Output Route 4 Note See Section 9 0 on page 29 for details on router functionality Delay Unit Selectable between milliseconds feet and meters Default Value milliseconds 8 0 UTILITY Button Delay Master Selectable between PRESET and GLOBAL When set to PRESET the delay values will be reset each time a new preset is selected and will match the delay values stored in the original pre set When set to GLOBAL the delay values remain fixed atthe current settings even if a new preset is loaded Default Value PRESET Limiter Master Selectable between PRESET or GLOBAL When set to PRESET the limiter values will be reset each time a new preset is selected and will match the limiter values stored in the original pre set When set to GLOBAL the limiter values remain fixed at the current settings even if a new preset is loaded Default Value PRESET Input Configuration Selectable between Stereo CH1 CH2 sum or CH1 mono Stereo Optimizes input gain for stereo operation CH1 CH2 sum Optimizes the input gain when the controller is used to sum CH1 and 2 to MONO CH1 mono Optimizes the input gain when a single input is used for MONO operation Note When this option is selected CH2 input does not work Default Value Stereo Lock Out Turns user lockout on and off
480. tereo 2 feeds to Subgroups 3 amp 4 O gt When the latching PFL switch is pressed the pre fade post EQ signal is fed in mono to the headphones control room output and meters where it replaces the selected monitor source The PFL AFL LED on the Master section illuminates to warn that a PFL is active The Left and Right meters display the PFL signal in mono Page 12 STEREO EINGANGSKANAL ENCANGSBUCHSEN Diese hochohmigen Eing nge als 6 3 mm Klinkenstecker Buchse ausgelegt sind f r Keyboards Drum Machines Synthesizer Band Maschinen und Returns von Effekt Ger ten vorgesehen Die Eing nge sind symmetrisch ausgelegt d h der Eingang ist rauscharm f r beste Sound Qualit t bei Einsatz professionellen Equipments Es k nnen jedoch auch unsymmetrische Quellen angeschlossen werden Hierzu m ssen die Stecker verl tet sein wie im Abschnitt Anschl sse und Stecker gezeigt und beschrieben Achten Sie bei unsymmetrischen Anschl ssen darauf daB die Verbindungen m glichst kurz sind Hierdurch wird Brummen im Sound System verhindert Soll an einem Stereo Eingangs Kanal eine Mono Quelle angeschlossen werden dann sollte dieser Mono Eingang an die Buchse LEFT angeschlossen werden Beim Anschlu LEFT durchl uft dann das Signal den linken und rechten Kanal GAIN Mit dem GAIN Regler wird der Eingangspegel des Kanals eingestellt Der Regler hat einen weiten Einstellbereich ED rovauzer HF EQ Drehen des Reglers im Uhr
481. th a gooseneck microphone set the Speaker and Panel Mic keys to on and make sure that a goose neck microphone is inserted in the panel microphone connector Receiving Calls When there is an incoming call signal the Call key will flash red There will also be a beep tone in the headphones or speaker if the beep feature 15 activated NOTE The incoming call indication 15 provided only for the currently selected intercom channel in the case of SS 2002 amp SS 2002RM models Turn on the Talk and Listen keys and begin your conversation Turn the keys off when finished NOTE You can turn the talk and listen keys on in either momentary or latched mode For momentary operation press and hold the key For latched operation tap the key to turn it on Then tap it again to turn it off when finished Calling an Intercom Channel 1 SS 2002 amp SS 2002RM only select the desired intercom channel 2 Press and hold the Call key An inaudible call signal will be sent and the Listen key will automatically turn on 3 When you hear a response release the call key and activate the talk key 4 Turn off your Talk and Listen keys to end the conversation 15 Specifications General Power Requirements Phantom Power 24 VDC nominal 175 mA Local Power 12 to 15 VDC 250 mA Dimensions See dimension drawings Environmental Requirements Storage 20 C to 80 096 to 95 RH non condensing Operating 15 C to 60 0 to 95 RH non conden
482. the console and that the internal power supply is operating correctly BARGRAPH METERS 3 colour peak reading BARGRAPH METERS are provided to monitor the four Subgroup outputs and the selected Monitor Phones source 2 Mono Mix or Groups giving you a constant warning of excessive peaks in the signal which might cause overloading Aim to keep the signal within the amber segments at peak levels for best performance Similarly if the output level is too low and hardly registering at all on the meters the level of background noise may become significant Take care to set up the input levels for best performance When any PFL or AFL switch is pressed the L amp R meters automatically switch to show the selected PFL AFL signal on both meters in mono amp vix Pressing the Mix switch routes the post fade Subgroup signals in pairs to the main Mix Groups amp 3 are routed to Mix L Groups 2 amp 4 are routed to Mix R Q MASTER FADERS The MASTER FADERS set the final level of the Subgroup and Mix L amp R out puts These should normally be set close to the 0 mark if the input GAIN settings have been correctly set to give maximum travel on the faders for smoothest control MIX TO MONO Pressing this switch routes the post fade Mix L R outputs to the Mono bus to create a separate mono mix to feed for example an induction loop or centre cluster Note If there are input channels which are routed both to Mix and Mono pressin
483. tieren einen und sicheren Betrieb Daher interessiert es Sie vielleicht was nach demtirechalt vorgang im WVerstarker passiert Softstart Sequenz Die erste Auf gabe hierbei ist das prinr re Energe reservoir aufzuladen ohne einen zu hohen Einschaltstromzu verursachen Ein spezieller Eirechaltwiderstand ermrogicht ausreichend Energie innerhalb von drei Sekunden an de Netz ondensatoren zu liefem In der Zwischerzeit stellt ein schwaches getaktetes Netzteil de Energe zur Verf gung um das Hauptnetzteil zu starten Nach diesen drei Sekunden berbr ckt ein Relais den Einschalt Widerstand und de volle Energie steht ar Verf gurg Die Audo Schaltkreise schalten f r eine Sekunde stumm um Einschaltknackger usche zu unter dr cken Wenn die roten CHIP LEDs erl schen ist der Verst rker betriebsbereit PowerVVave Technologie Hochleistungs Schaltnet2teile ziehen Uber 10000 Watt Spitzenleistung aus den Netzkondensatoren die direkt aus der Netd eitung versorgt werden Konventionelle Verst rker m ssen diese Kondensatoren mit Hilfe eines grofsen Transforretors versorgen was zu h heren Einbr chen bei hohem Strombedarf f hrt den zur Verf gung stehenden Strom begrenzt und Brummen verursacht Die PowerWave Technologie wandelt die Spannungen bei sehr hoher Frequenz was mit wesentlich kleineren Transformatoren zu einer OPERACI N INTERNA Una irrpresionarte tecnolog a se en quer
484. tion Slow Flashing Battery is Low Slow Flashing while charging Unit is Charging Fast Flashing Mute Battery Status Icon The status of the battery is indicated by the battery symbol on the LCD When the battery is fully charged all three segments of the battery symbol will be displayed as shown As fewer battery segments are displayed the lower the battery level as shown When the batteries are almost fully discharged the battery segments and the red LED near the volume control will blink When this occurs less than 5 of the battery life is remaining and the batteries should be immediately replaced or recharged This segment will blink when batteries are low 16 LISTEN TECHNOLOGIES CORPORATION 1 801 233 8992 1 800 330 0891 Fax 1 801 233 8995 Internet www listentech com All specifications are subject to change without notice LT 700 Portable Transmitter Unlocking and Locking the Access Door The front access door can be locked so that the users will not have access to controls or batteries To do this use a pocketknife or small screwdriver to rotate the locks as shown To unlock On both the right and left side unlock by turning slot horizontal as shown To lock both the right and left side Charging Batteries Using SmartCharge 1 The L 700 is unique because it has an automatic battery charger built in That means that when the unit is connected to a wall transfor
485. tion barrier strip Enclosure construction aluminum GENERAL DESCRIPTION The Panaray MA12 modular line array is a 300W loudspeaker As a line array element this product is designed for use in singles and multiples in permanently installed indoor applications The slim profile of the 12 speaker provides an attractive design element As an addition to the Bose line of Panaray loudspeakers this product combines innovative design technology with Bose standards for acoustic quality and performance The MA12 speaker offers the following features One way system for accurate voice and light music reproduction Full range system performance when combined with a Bose bass loudspeaker Line array characteristics that put the sound where you want it Radiation is a band of sound at a constant height to significantly reduce ceiling and floor reflections 1 Full bandwidth pink noise is applied to the 12 speaker and amplified to a level at the loudspeaker terminals corresponding to the long term rated power handling of the speaker The average sound pressure level dB SPL is measured at distances from the speaker in an anechoic environment 2 Full bandwidth pink noise is applied to the MA12 speaker and amplified to a level at the loudspeaker terminals corresponding to1 Watt as referenced to the nominal impedance The average sound pressure level dB SPL is measured at 1 meter from the speaker in an anechoic environment 3 Full
486. tion barrier strip The enclosure of the MA12 speaker module shall be aluminum Its outer dimensions shall be 5 1 D x 4 2 W x 38 7 H 13 cm x 10 7 cm x 98 4 cm Its weight shall be 20 Ib 9kg The loudspeaker system shall be supplied With a separate system controller to be connected before the input s of the system power amplifier s or with an MA12 EQ card to be installed in a Bose M 2150 1600 or 1800 amplifier The loudspeaker shall be the Bose Panaray MA12 modular line array loudspeaker PANARAY MA12 ACCESSORIES The following accessories are available from Bose PC028333 WB MA12 wall mount bracket 0 10 pitch black PC028334 WB MA12 wall mount bracket 0 10 pitch white PC028673 WBP MA12 wall mount bracket 0 10 pitch 90 yaw black PC028674 WBP MA12 wall mount bracket 0 10 pitch 90 yaw white PC028337 CB MA12 coupling bracket black PC028338 CB MA12 coupling bracket white PC030114 PSA 12 stand adapter black PC029388 CVT 12 70V 100V transformer black PC029389 CVT 12 70V 100V transformer white DIMENSIONS PANARAY MA12 SPEAKER DATA For additional information on the MA12 including polar data please refer to the REAR VIEW following documents 1 Panaray MA12 modular line array technical information Ax 6 15 mm 2 Panaray MA12 modular line array technical foundation and discussion These documents
487. tis LED Frontanzeigen f r Power 20 cB 10dB und Protect parallelen und Monobr ckenbetri eb 5 patentierte PowerVVave Netzteile AVANT PROPOS EINF HRUNG INTRODUCCION La l nea de anplificadiores La tecnolog a PowerV Vave y una refinada estructura sonora se han combinado para ofrecere la calidad de estudio con la portabilidad necesaria para el sonido en vivo Estos amplificadores de dos canales con enfriamiento por ventiladores y que ocupan dos espados en un rack ofrecen una incre ble potencia en un corrpacto y resistente amrazn Caracter sticas Lirritacor de picos independerte Hltrodefrecuencdas graves corrpletarrerte seleccionables con la elecci n de atenuaci n entre 30 50 Hz Est reo dos canales modos de operad n para entradas paralelas o puenteadas en mono Entradas balanceadas con conectores XLR y Y4 6 3 Postes de amarre y salidas Neutrik Speakon Controles de gananda con ret n Indicadores LED en el panel frontal para el encendido la se al de entrada niveles de 20 y 10 cB para protecci ry saturaci n entradas paralelas Temolog a de encendido exdusiva de PowerVVave en la fuente de alimentad n INTRODUCTION AVANT PROPOS EINF HRUNG INTRODUCCI N E Z POWER mc N SS
488. to or unlock a channel 8 Operating the LR 300 receiver 22 Audio control instructions 9 Operating the 18 400 and 18 500 receivers 22 Operating the unit 10 Locking into only one channel 23 Selecting a channel to transmit on 10 23 11 800 11 LR 400 and LR 500 Look amp Listen LT 800 troubleshooting 12 LCD display descriptions 23 24 Unlocking and locking the access door 24 Charging batteries using SmartCharge 24 Operating the receiver with a wall transformer 25 LR 300 LR 400 and LR 500 specifications 26 Receiver troubleshooting 21 Preparing the LT 700 for use 13 Operating the unit 14 LR 500 programming 05 Selecting a channel to transmit on 15 Look amp Listen LCD display descriptions 10 LT 700 programming 16 Frequency amp Compatibility Tables Locking into only one channel 16 72 2 28 29 LED 16 ZIBMHZ ZEEZEZEZEZEZEZEZEZEZEZEZEZEZEZE
489. to the centre detented position when not required LF EQ Turn to the right to boost low bass frequencies below 60Hz up to 15dB adding warmth to vocals or extra punch to synths guitars and drums Turn to the left to cut low frequencies by up to I5dB for reducing hum stage rumble or to improve a mushy sound Set the knob to the centre detented position when not required 8 AUX SENDS These are used to set up a separate mixes for FOLDBACK EFFECTS or recording and the combination of each the Aux Send is mixed to the respective Aux Output at the rear of the mixer For Effects it is useful for the signal to fade up and down with the fader this is called POST FADE but for Foldback or Monitor feeds it is important for the send to be independent of the fader this is called PRE FADE AUX SEND 1 This is always PRE FADE and therefore most appropriate for foldback or monitor mixes or external submix Page 10 SPIRIT FOLIO AUX END 2 This is normally POST FADE and would typically be used as an effects send but may be switched globally to PRE FADE using the POST PRE switch on the Master section providing a second foldback or monitor send if required AUX SEND 3 This is always POST FADE for effects sends external submix or for Centre Voice cluster or mono Tape mix 9 This control sets the amount of the channel signal feeding the Right and Left MIX or SUB buses allowing you to move the source smoothly ac
490. tra escondida en los amplifica dores ce la Serie PLX Miles de watios de potenda se mueven a pocos centi netos de sus entradas de bajo nido Los elaborados diagrarres de drauito y una protecd n general le dan la con fianza de que toda esa actividad es precisa y segura Pero qu es lo que real mente ocurre cuando usted presiona el interruptor de encendido Secuencia de encendido suave La prirrera tarea es cargar el receptor prirrario de energ a sin una gran tidad de corriente Una resistencia de entrach pemite tonr s lo la corriente necesaria para cargar el banco de energ a en tres segundos Mientras tanto un interruptor de baja potenda ercience la fuerte principal Despu s de tres segundos se Bloguea la resis tercia de entrach y puede as operar a su hr na potencia E drauito de audio se asilenda por un segundb para elirrinar cualquier ruido de encendido Cuando la luz roja de CLIP se apaga quiere decir que el amplificador est listo para usarse La tecnolog a PowerWave Los aparatos con irterruptores de corrierte alta jalan m s de 10 000 wattios de potenda en picos desde el contenedor deenerga el cual Se alirverta dredarrerte cela l nea de comiente alterna para confiabilidad Los anplificadores con vend onales deben aislar el banco de enero a con grandes transformadores AG loque debilita el flujo de coarrierte provocando una gran p rdida de carga y p
491. tro Deje todo mantenimiento en manos del personal t cnico cualificado ADVERTENCIA Para evitar descargas el ctricas o peligro de incendio no deje expuesto a la lluvia o humedad este aparato Antes de usar este aparato lea m s advertencias en la gu a de operaci n Ce symbole est utilis dans ce manuel pour indiquer l utilisateur la pr sence d une tension dangereuse pouvant tre d amplitude suffisante pour constituer un risque de choc lectrique Ce symbole est utilis dans ce manuel pour indiquer l utilisateur qu il ou qu elle trouvera d importantes instructions concernant l utilisation et l entretien de l appareil dans le paragraphe signal ATTENTION Risques de choc lectrique NE PAS OUVRIR ATTENTION Afin de r duire le risque de choc lectrique ne pas enlever le couvercle Il ne se trouve l int rieur aucune pi ce pouvant tre repar e par l utilisateur Confiez l entretien et la r paration de l appareil un r parateur Peavey agr AVERTISSEMENT Afin de pr venir les risques de d charge lectrique ou de feu n exposez pas cet appareil la pluie ou l humidit Avant d utiliser cet appareil lisez attentivement les avertissements suppl mentaires de ce manuel Dieses Symbol soll den Anwender vor unisolierten gef hrlichen Spannungen innerhalb des Geh uses warnen die von Ausreichender St rke sind um einen elektrischen Schlag verursachen zu k nnen Dieses Symbol soll den Benutzer auf wichtige
492. two step process so that it is very unlikely that microphones will ever be turned off by accident However you may wish to disable the mic kill receive feature at the intercom unit You might do this for example if communications will be of a very critical nature where it 1s absolutely essential the microphone never be remotely deactivated To enable the mic kill receive function set DIP switch 1 to the open position To disable the mic kill function set DIP switch 1 to the closed position Call Signal Compatibility For Audiocom setup leave this switch in the open position and also leave the Balanced Unbalanced switch in the Balanced position For Clear Com setup set DIP switch 2 to the closed position and set the Balanced Unbalanced switch in the Unbalanced position Incoming Call Beep Incoming calls are always indicated by a red flashing call key If you also want incoming call beep in headphones set DIP switch 3 to the Open position default DIP switch 3 must also be in the Open position if you want to activate incoming call beep to the speaker using DIP switch 5 Microphone Type If you will be using a headset telephone style handset or dynamic handheld microphone and the specifications indicate the microphone type is balanced leave DIP switch 4 in the Open default position If the specifications indicate an unbalanced microphone set this switch to the Closed position If you are not sure leave the switch in the Open position f
493. u meee does not show the word turn the MULTI JOG m or use the SKIP keys D until it is displayed 3 If you do not want to proceed with the unfinal izing process press any other key such as the STOP key 4 To start the unfinalizing process press the MULTI JOG control or press the ENTER key 5 If unfinalization has been chosen the NO TOC starts flashing in the display and the word also starts flashing The unit starts down from a time shown on the display depending on the disc and material this value will be between 50 seconds and 1 minute 30 seconds 6 After unfinalization a CD RW indicator changes to a CD RW NO TOC indicator 5 2 Erasing Unfinalizing described above is a special case of erasing a disc It is also possible to erase a track or tracks starting with the last recorded track a whole disc or to refresh a disc Erase procedures are possible only on a CD RW disc Even if a CD RW disc has been finalized selecting an erase procedure will automatically unfinalize it prior to era sure The disc may then have to be re finalized Remember that it is not possible to perform any erase procedures on a CD R disc 5 2 1 Erasing tracks It is possible to erase the last recorded track the last two recorded tracks the last three recorded tracks etc It is not however possible to erase tracks in the middle of the disc 1 With the disc loaded and the uni
494. uctions for later use eFollow all Warnings and Instructions marked on the audio equipment 1 Read Instructions the safety and operating instructions should be read before the product is operated 2 Retain Instructions The safety and operating instructions should be retained for future reference 3 Heed Warnings warnings on the product and in the operating instructions should be adhered to 4 Follow Instructions operating and use instructions should be followed 5 Cleaning Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners Use a damp cloth for clean ing 6 Attachments Do not use attachments not recommended by the product manufacturer as they may cause hazards 7 Water and Moisture Do not use this product near water for example near a bath tub wash bowl kitchen sink or laundry tub in a wet basement or near a swimming pool and the like 8 Accessories Do not place this product on an unstable cart stand tripod bracket or table The product may fall causing serious injury to a child or adult and serious damage to the product Use only with a cart stand tripod bracket or table recommended by the manufacturer or sold with the product Any mounting of the product should follow the manufac turer s instructions and should use a mounting accessory recommended by the manufacturer 9 A product and cart combination shou
495. uencies other than the CD standard sampling frequency of 44 1 kHz Track divisions can be entered manually or can pro duced automatically as a response to the input signal level A recording buffer ensures that even the first milli seconds of a track are recorded and a rehearsal mode allows the precise positioning of track divisions allowing the elimination of false starts or late entries One touch fade ins and fade outs over a specified time allow you to edit program material to your spe cific requirements A multi function multi jog dial is used to set and confirm parameter settings A wireless remote control unit allows control of the CD RW700 from remote locations This product is designed to help you record and reproduce sound works to which you own the copy right or where you have obtained permission from the copyright holder or the rightful licensor Unless you own the copyright or have obtained the appropri 6 TASCAM CD RW700 ate permission from the copyright holder or the right ful licensor your unauthorized recording reproduction or distribution thereof may result in severe criminal penalties under copyright laws and international copyright treaties If you are uncertain about your rights contact your legal advisor Under no circumstances will TEAC Corporation be respon sible for the consequences of any illegal copying per formed using the CD RW700 1 1 About CD R and CD RW discs The CD RW70
496. ug proceed as follows The wire which is coloured Green and Yellow must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked with the letter E or by the earth symbol The wire which is coloured Blue must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked with the letter N The wire which is coloured Brown must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked with the letter L Ensure that these colour codings are followed carefully in the event of the plug being changed To avoid the risk of fire replace the mains fuse only with the correct value fuse as indicated on the power supply Page 3 SPIRIT FOLIO CONNECTING IT UP MIC LEVEL SOURCES BENE DI BOX GUITAR VIA DI BOX y KEYBOARD SYNTHESISER OR SAMPLER DRUM MACHINE SUBMIXER irm Eg MA FOLIO o FERRE PE ON MIC ON DRUM KIT EFFECTS MIC ON ZU GUITAR AMP gt N Mus a VOCAL GRAPHIC EQ i SUPPLY TO MULTITRACK TAPE INPUT CASSETTE OR DAT PLAYBACK EFFECTS Oe ccce it lo COMPRESSOR LIMITER E _ MMMM KEYBOARD SYNTHESISER OR SAMPLER SURROUND FILL VOCAL PA SPEAKERS ARTISTS FOLDBACK SPEAKERS OR FROM
497. ull Range EQ 802 Series loudspeaker bi amped with 502B loudspeaker 802 Series loudspeaker bi amped with MB4 802 Series loudspeaker bi amped with AWCS Note Limiting is assigned to outputs 3 and 4 for protection of the AWCS 802 Series loudspeaker bi amped 112Hz Stacked 802 Series Il loudspeaker EQ Stacked 802 Series Il loudspeakers bi amped with 502B loudpeaker Stacked 802 Series loudspeakers bi amped with MB4 Output 1 502A CH1 Full Range 502A CH1 High 502A CH1 High 502A CH1 High 502A CH1 High Output 1 8021 CH1 Full Range 8021 CH1 High 8021 CH1 High 8021 CH1 High 8021 CH1 High 8021 CH1 Full Range 8021 CH1 High 8021 CH1 High Output 2 502A CH2 Full Range 502A CH2 High 502A CH2 High 502A CH2 High 502A CH2 High Output 2 8021 CH2 Full Range 8021 CH2 High 8021 CH2 High 80211 CH2 High 8021 CH2 High 8021 CH2 Full Range 8021 CH2 High 8021 CH2 High Output 3 502A CH1 Full Range 502B CH1 Low MB4 CH1 Low AWCS CH1 Low 502A CH1 High Output 3 8021 CH1 Full Range 502B CH1 Low MB4 CH1 Low AWCS CH1 Low 8021 CH1 High 8021 CH1 Full Range 502B CH1 Low MB4 CH1 Low Output 4 502A CH2 Full Range 502B CH2 Low MB4 CH2 Low AWCS CH2 Low 502A CH2 High Output 4 8021 CH2 Full Range 502B CH2 Low MB4 CH2 Low AWCS CH2 Low
498. ung kommen oder anderen Gefahren ausgesetzt sein k nnten Wenden Sie sich telefonisch an Bose um die Anschrift eines autorisierten Kundendienstzentrums in Ihrer N he zu erfragen 12 Vermeiden Sie Gefahren durch Br nde oder elektrische Schl ge indem Sie Steckdosen Verlangerungskabel und integrierte Ger testeckdosen nicht berlasten 13 Lassen Sie keine Fl ssigkeiten oder Fremdk rper in das Ger t gelangen sie k nnen unter gef hrliche elektrische Spannung gesetzt werden oder Bauteile kurzschlie en und folglich Br nde und elektrische Schl ge ausl sen 14 Beachten Sie die Sicherheitshinweise auf der Ger ter ckseite 15 Stellen Sie keine offenen Flammen wie brennende Kerzen auf das Ger t 16 Rack Einbau und Installation des Produkts m ssen in bereinstimmung mit den vor Ort geltenden Bauordnungen erfolgen 17 Das Produkt ist nicht f r den Einsatz in Wassern he bestimmt EL gu m Estas marcas de PRECAUCI N podrian estar situadas en la parte trasera del Controlador Digital para Systemas PANARAY El s mbolo de un rel mpago con una flecha dentro de un tri ngulo equil tero avisa al usuario que dentro de la caja del sistema puede haber voltaje de una magnitud suficiente para constituir un riesgo de descarga el ctrica sistema sirven para avisar al usuario de que existen instrucciones de operaci n y El signo de exclamaci n dentro de un tri ngulo equil tero seg n las marcas en el mantenimiento importantes en
499. urez vous cependant que les bau pardeurs pareat accepter toute la puissance de l arrplificeteur Il est possible que des charges dimp dance plus faible ou que des niveaux de signal plus lev s g nerert plus de chaleur Ainsi une charge de 2 ohrrs accompagn e de surcharges constantes tel quiindiqu par l allurrage continue dela DEL CLIP pourrait arrener l arrplificateur r duire le niveau de puissance voire le passage en rrode protection avec mise en sourdine Le mode port nono double l inmp dance de sortie del ampdificateur 40 donc la charge Minimum L cr tage continue pourrait ertrefner la mise en sourdine Si cette condition se pr sentait lors de l utilisation voir la section d pannage de ce manuel BETRIEB L fterc hl Die Liftergeschwindigkeit ist geregelt umimrer einen sicheren Betrieb zu gewahrneisten Blockieren Sie nierrals de Lufteinlafs baw ausstr m ffnungen Die hei e K hlluft verl t tritt aus der Front des Verst rkers aus damit das Rack nicht aufgeheizt wird Stellen Sie sicher dafs ausreichend k hle Luft in das Rack gelangen kann Dies gilt besonders dann wenn andere Ger te wanre K hlluft in das Rackleiten Betriebspegel Die Schutzabschaltung des intemen Tenperaturen Bei nonreler L ftung und Lasten von 4 8 2 kann der Verstarker jedes Signal einschlielich bersteuerungen problemos verarbeiten stellen Sie aber sicher da de a
500. us un appareil connect en insert cet appareil est il bien en fonctionnement e Les faders de mix sont ils au maximum et les faders de voie une position suffisante La voie est elle bien dirig e vers l coute e Latouche MUTE est elle bien rel ch e 2 Latouche de s lection d coute est elle bien enfon c e Une touche PFL AFL est elle enfonc e sur une autre voie Aucun signal en sortie mix e v rifiez que les g n raux sont en haut v rifiez que la touche 2TK REPLACES MIX est relach e Aucun signal en coute e La prise casque est elle branch e 2 Les potentiom tres coute casque sont ils bien r gl s Latouche correspondante de s lection d coute est telle bien enfonc e Distorsion au casque e le casque a t il une imp dance sup rieure 2000 Le niveau coute casque est il suffisant Nota Le impostazioni iniziali vanno considerate solo come punto di partenza Ya ricordato che molti fattori influenzano il suono durante una esecuzione dal vivo ad esempio le quantit di pubblico Ora siete pronti a fare il mixaggio e questo va fatto per gradi ascoltando attentamente ogni componente del mixaggio e osservando i meters per il sovraccarico Se questo si verifica abbassate adeguatamente il fader rela tivo finch livello amp fuori dal segmento rosso oppure rego late il Master Fader Questo assicura un corretto set up Se necessaria maggiore amplificazione re
501. usgang auf dem entsprechenden Kanal ber die Monitor Ausg nge abgeh rt oder auf den Aussteuerungsanzeige abgelesen werden DIR PRE Die Direct Ausg nge der Kan le 1 16 sind normalerweise post fade geschaltet und damit zum Einsatz als Effect Sends oder zum Einstellen des Aufnahmepegels in einer Studio Anwendung vorgesehen F r Live Aufnahmen k nnen die einzelnen Direct Ausg nge durch den DIR PRE Schalter auf pre fade umgeschaltet werden So sind die Direct Ausg nge von den Fader Einstellungen des PA Mixers unbeeinfluBt EQUALIZER Der Equalizer EQ erm glicht eine exakte Einstellung der Frequenz Bander und eignet sich besonders zur Verbesserung des Live PA Sounds Gerade beim Live Sound wird der Klang des Originalsignals z B aufgrund der rtlichen Gegebenheiten oft nicht erreicht da z B nur geringf giges Verst rken oder Abschw chen der Gesangsfrequenzen schon ber die Klarheit des Sounds entscheiden k nnen HF EQ Drehen des Reglers im Uhrzeigersinn verst rkt die Frequenzen ab 12 kHz um bis zu 15 dB und gibt Becken Gesang und elektronischen Instrumenten mehr Klarheit Drehen entgegen gesetzt des Uhrzeigersinns reduziert Zischlaute und andere unerw nschte hochfrequente Anteile im Signal Wenn dieser Frequenzbereich weder verst rkt noch abgeschw cht werden soll mu der Regler in Mittenposition stehen MID EQ HMiDund LMID Jeweils 2 Regler sind f r die HMID und die LMID Sektion vorhanden Mit den oberen Reglern je
502. usgelegt alternativ als Stereo Eing nge einge setzt werden k nnen falls post fade Sendewege notwendig f r Effekte werden sollten LEVEL Mit dem LEVEL Regler wird der Signalpegel eingestellt der zum Mix Bus oder zu den angew hlten Gruppen Bussen geroutet werden soll QD Routing Das Signal des Stereo Kanals kann entweder zu Gruppen Buspaaren wenn Schalterposition oben oder zum Stereo Mix Bus wenn Schalter gedr ckt ger outet werden Der Signalpegel wird mit dem LEVEL Regler eingestellt Stereo steuert die Subgruppen und 2 Stereo 2 steuert Subgruppen 3 und 4 an VOIE D ENTREE STEREO OD EMBASEs sack Ces entr es sur embase jack STEREO sont destin es a des sources telles que des claviers bo tes a rythmes synth tiseurs magn tophones ou effets Les entr es sont SYMETRIQUES pour un meilleur rapport signal bruit et pour du mat riel professionnel mais vous pouvez utiliser des sources ASYMETRIQUES en c blant comme montr la section C blage page 28 de ce manuel dans ce cas gardez des c bles aussi courts que possible Des sources mono peuvent tre employ es en branchant la prise gauche seule ment oun Le potentiom tre de GAIN r gle la sensibilit d entr e de la voie permet tant de s adapter une large gamme de sources niveau ligne ED CORRECTEUR AIGUES Tourn vers la droite ce potentiometre accentue de 5dB les fr quences hautes aigu s I 2kHz ajoutant de la brillance a
503. ut 100 240VAC switching power supply input XLR Wiring Jack balanced XLR Sleeve Pin 1 Ground Tip Pin 2 Hot Ring Pin 3 Cold 10 4 0 Signal Flow The PANARAY system digital controller has the ability to run a single stereo preset a single mono preset or to run in dual mono mode In the following section the controller s signal flow is broken down to provide a better understanding of its full functionality Input Meter 1 CH1 High EQ x High 2 CH2 High Input CH1 over 3 Mono High CH1 Low 4 CH1 Low 5 CH2 Low 6 Mono Low 7 CH1 FR 8 CH2 FR 9 Mono FR 10 CH1 No EQ 11 CH2 No EQ 12 Mono No EQ Output 4 Output 3 Output 2 Output 1 Stereo Operation When a preset is loaded from the stereo bank the EQ crossover blocks both process each input the same way meaning that the parameters are linked The signal then passes through the router section where the CH1 and CH2 inputs are sent to independent output channels for stereo operation Input EQ x High Input CH2 one am CH2 Low Input meter Mono Operation When a preset is loaded from the mono bank the EQ crossover blocks both process each input the same way meaning that the parameters are linked The signal then passes through the router sec tion where the CH1 and CH2 inputs are summed to mono The controller has the ability to sum a stereo signal to mono or it can process a single input for mono operat
504. ut 1 40211 CH1 Full Range 40211 CH1 High 40211 CH1 High 40211 CH1 High 40211 CH1 High 40211 CH1 High Output 2 4021 CH2 Full Range 4021 CH2 High 4021 CH2 High 4021 CH2 High 4021 CH2 High Output 2 40211 CH2 Full Range 40211 CH2 High 4021 CH2 High 4021 CH2 High 4021 CH2 High 4021 CH2 High Output 3 4021 CH1 Full Range 502B CH1 Low MB4 CH1 Low AWCS CH1 Low 4021 CH1 High Output 3 40211 CH1 Full Range 502B CH1 Low 502BEX CH1 Low MB4 CH1 Low AWCS CH1 Low 4021 CH1 High Output 4 4021 CH2 Full Range 502B CH2 Low MB4 CH2 Low AWCS CH2 Low 402i CH2 High 40211 CH2 Full Range 502B CH2 Low 502BEX CH2 Low MB4 CH2 Low AWCS CH2 Low 4021 CH2 High Bose Speaker EQ Preset List Stereo Bank PANARAY 502 A loudspeaker Stereo Presets 502A 502B 502A MB4 502A AWCS 502A HF PANARAY 802 Series Il loudspeaker Stereo Presets 80211 502B 80211 4 802ll AWCS 80211 HF 80215 802IISTK 502B 802IISTK MB4 502A loudspeaker Preset Descriptions 502A loudspeaker Full Range EQ 502A loudspeaker bi amped with 502B 502A loudspeaker bi amped with MB4 502A loudspeaker bi amped with AWCS Note Limiting is assigned to outputs 3 and 4 for protection of the AWCS 502A loudspeaker bi amped 160Hz 802 Series Il loudspeaker Preset Descriptions 802 Series loudspeaker F
505. ut configuration locat ed under the utility button to CH1 mono 3 Connect the PANARAY system digital con troller outputs to your amplifier inputs 4 Turn on your audio source Then turn on your PANARAY system digital controller 5 Select a Speaker EQ on the Panaray controller by pressing the PRESET button and use the Encoder wheel to select the desired speaker EQ 6 Setthe PANARAY system digital controller s input sensitivity In general you should set this parameter to match the output range of the equipment you connect to the controller A digital product has the best signal to noise per formance when operating at OdBFS full scale so you should run the PANARAY system digital controller as close to OdBFS as possible For example If you have a mixer with 4dBU outputs the PANARAY controller input sensitivity should be set to 8dBu This will allow you to reach OdBFS while at the same time providing some additional headroom to account for peaks in program material Set the parameter based on the amount of headroom needed To access the PANARAY system digital controller input sensitivity press the UTILITY button Then press the Arrow DOWN button until you see the fol lowing display Input Sense 20dBu Adjust this parameter with the Encoder wheel to match your audio source s maximum output Input Sense gdBu Next send a signal from your audio source to the PANARAY system digital controller and view the
506. ux qui penents lectriques pour un usage dans une certaine linite de tension eta la directive 93 6 EFC du 22 juillet 1993 qui la directive pr c dente ainsi qU aux sp cifications de la nome harrronis e EN 60065 relative a la s curit pour les appareils lectriques d usage dorrestique et g n ral connect s au r seau lectrique Konfonnitatserkiarung CSC Audio Products Inc erkl rt in alleiniger Verantwortung dafs dieses Produkt der Ratsdirektive 8 336 EEC vom3 Mai 1989 zur Gesetzsshanmonisierung der Mitgliedstaaten betreffend der elektrorragnetischen Kompatibilit t entspricht sowie die Erfordemisse der Einheitlichen Norm EN55013 bez gich Grenzen und Messrrethoden von Rundfunkst rungscharakteristik von Rundfunkenpf ngem und zugeh rigen Ger ten erf llt sowie der Einheitlichen Norm EN55020 bez glich der elektromagnetischen Strahlungssicherheit von Rundfunkenpf ngem und GC Audio Products Inc erkl rt ferner da das oben bezeichnete Produkt der Ratsdirektive 72 23 vormm19 Februar 1973 entspricht in dem die Gesetzsshanmonisierung der Mitgliedstaaten bezogen auf elektrische Ger te zur Benulzung innerhalb bestimmter Spannungsgrenzen festgelegt sind sowie der Ratsdirektive 93 68 EEC vom22 ui 1993 mit Anderungsbestinimungen sowie der Einheitlichen Produktnorm EN60065 entspricht inder Sicherheitsbestirmmungen f r netzbetriebene elektronische und hnliche Ger te f r
507. ux percussions bo tes rythmes synth tiseurs et aux instruments lectroniques Tourn vers la gauche il att nue les fr quences en r duisant le souffle excessif La position neutre est r p r e par un d clic central GRAVES Tourn vers la droite ce potentiom tre accentue de l5dB les basses fr quences graves 60 Hz en ajoutant du punch suppl mentaire aux syn th tiseurs guitares et batteries Tourn vers la gauche il coupe les basses fr quences pour r duire le ronflement la r sonance ou pour claircir un son La position neutre est r p r e par un d clic central ED DEPARTS aux Ceux ci sont employ s pour cr er des m langes s par s de retours musiciens de d parts effets ou l enregistrement Chaque m lange est disponible la sor tie Aux l arri re de la console Les d parts sont toujours ind pendants du fader PRE FADE ce qui convient mieux pour les retours musiciens Notez que les entr es ligne des voies mono peuvent tre utilis es comme entr e st r o si les d parts doivent tre d pendants du fader POST FADE LEVEL Ce potentiom tre rotatif r gle le niveau g n ral du signal envoy vers le mix ou vers une paire de groupes TOUCHE D AFFECTATION En appuyant sur cette touche le signal de voie est dirig vers le mixage st r o Lorsque la touche est rel ch e le signal est envoy vers une paire de sous groupes Le niveau est r gl par le potentiom tre LEVEL Le sign
508. vel of local mains voltage supply for safe uninterrupted operation Use a small screwdriver to prise the fuse carrier from its location in the connector To avoid the risk of fire replace the mains fuse only with the correct value fuse as marked on the rear panel The internal power supply unit contains no user serviceable parts Refer all servicing to a qualified service engineer through the appropriate Spirit dealer Page 2 SICHERHEITSHINWEISE WARNUNG DAS MISCHLPULT MUSS GEERDET SEIN Unter keinen Umst nden darf die Erdleitung von den Hauptanschl ssen getrennt werden Die Verdrahtung der Hauptleitungen stimmen mit folgenden Farbcodes berein GR N GELB oder Markierung E Geh useschutzleiter O BLAU oder Markierung N O BRAUN oder Markierung L Phase Mittelpunktsleiter Achten Sie auch bei einem Steckdosenwechsel auf die Farbcodierung an den Steckkontakten der Steckdose Das Mischpult kann mit 4 unterschiedlichen Netzspannungen betrieben werden Es ist daher sehr wichtig da die eingestellte Netzspannung mit der an der Steckdose anliegenden Netzspannung bereinstimmt Eine falsch eingestellte Netzspannung kann zu einem Defekt am Mischpult f hren Mit einem kleinen Schraubenzieher wird der Sicherungstr ger in richtige Netzposition gebracht Um die Gefahr eines Elektrobrandes zu verhindern mu die zuersetzende Hauptsicherung die auf dem Ger tegeh use angegebenen Absicherungswerte haben
509. wer through to subsequent belt packs that are daisy chained together INITIAL BP 1002 BP 2002 SETUP The channel termination is initially set for balanced operation which is compatible with other Audiocom equipment If the unit is going to be connected to Clear Com equipment one switch and several jumpers must be changed as described in the section on Clear Com Setup in this manual The headset microphone type is initially set for single ended dynamic operation To change the microphone type to balanced dynamic refer to Table 2 for the position of JP9 Y Y Y Y BP 2002 5 BP 1002 Figure 1 BP 2002 amp BP 1002 Connections and Controls 6 connections and Controls EXTERNAL CONNECTIONS amp CONTROLS NOTE The numbers refer to the callouts in Figure 1 1 VoLumE CONTROL Use this control to adjust the 2 headset listen level CHAN BUTTON AND INDICATORS The Chan button only on the BP 2002 allows the user to select which intercom channel is active The yellow indicator next to the 1 or 2 lights to show the active channel Press the Chan button to change the channel selection the yellow indicator for that channel will light CALL BUTTON AND nDICATOR The Call function allows the user to send or receive signals to other devices on the intercom channel selected The Call button operates in two ways Call receive When there is an incoming call signal the indicator is red If Audible Call Al
510. which the unit s rehearsal facilities can be used synchronized recording 4 3 1 Synchronized recording and automatic track divi sion 4 3 2 Automatic track division The purpose of the rehearsal facilities 15 to allow you to override the automatic synchronized recording and track division facilities where necessary Here is an example where this facility may be of value A piece has been recorded on DAT with a verbal count in immediately prior to the first drum beat This count in is not to be recorded as a part of the CD track but the threshold level has been set to a TASCAM CD RW700 23 4 Recording Rehearsal level where the fourth count will trigger recording 24 dB this is the limit of the threshold sensitivity and cannot be adjusted further Drum beat 1 2 3 Sync recording starts here When the rehearsal facility 1s used the source is cued up and played and the first few seconds of the track are sampled and looped The position of the loop can be adjusted This section is looped The MULTI JOG control adjusts the 2o of the loop Op I Drum beat 1 2 3 When this offset has been set synchronized record ing takes place with the start occurring at the new location Drum beat 1 4 PEE E o io Sync recording starts at new point This example shows how the start time can be moved forward in order to
511. y with CD R discs The OPC area is full and no further recording is possible on this disc Finalize the disc Symptom Possible cause and remedy Seen when a CD RW disc OPC area is full and the CD RW700 automatically cleans up the OPC area for further recording These messages indicate an internal error in the unit Consult your dealer or distributor regarding repair facilities 6 2 Specifications Recording media type Recording resolution Recording sampling fre quency CD R CD RW 16 bit linear 44 1 kHz Frequency convertor input 32 kHz 48 kHz Frequency response S N ratio Dynamic range Total harmonic distortion Channel separation Wow amp flutter Analog inputs Nominal input leve 20 Hz 20 kHz playback 0 5 dB recording 1 dB 98 dB playback 92 dB recording 94 dB playback 92 dB recording 0 004 playback 0 005 recording 90 dB playback 1 kHz 80 dB recording 1 kHz Unmeasurable lt 0 001 Unbalanced RCA 10 FS 16 dB ARE an MM Maximum input level 6dBV Input impedance Analog outputs 33 kQ unbalanced Unbalanced RCA Nominal output level 10 dBV FS 16 dB Maximum output level 6 dBV Output impedance Headphone output Output level Digital inputs COAXIAL OPTICAL Digital outputs COAXIAL OPTICAL Voltage requirements Power consumption Dimensions w xh x d Weight Operating temperature Supplied accessories 800 Q unba
512. you find a clear channel If this does not work try a different frequency band i e if you re using 2MHz try 216MHz or vice versa This is accomplished by returning the equipment to Listen at no charge cannot pick up the signal on the receiver Check to make sure the receiver and the transmitter are on the same frequency Also make sure the receiver is in broadcast range of the transmitter can pick up the signal on the receiver but it sounds like it s not tuned in Check to make sure the transmitter and receiver are on exactly the same channel number letter If you re using the LR 300 without an LCD display re scan the channels to find the clearest channel by pressing SEEK see page 22 section 2a for more information I m using another brand of transmitter how do tell which channel to use Refer to Listen s Frequency Compatibility Tables included on pages 28 31 Either adjust the transmitter or the receiver to a common channel There is not sufficient range Make sure you are located as close to the antenna of the transmitter as possible Try to locate the antenna as high as possible and free from obstacles You can also check the squelch setting perhaps it s too sensitive To change this setting refer to instructions on page 25 4 under programming It s confusing for users to have 57 channels when switching between channels Use the programming feature of the LR 500 only to limit the number of channels use
513. ystems the Mic Kill feature is used to turn off any activated microphones on a selected channel The Mic Kill feature is activated when the beltpack receives a 24 kHz signal from the channel In some applications the Mic Kill and Call signal features are not desired and need to be disabled ELIMINATING MIC KILL AND CALL SIGNAL CAUTION TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO THE EQUIPMENT THESE MODIFICATIONS SHOULD ONLY BE MADE BY QUALIFIED TECHNICIANS If desired the Mic Kill and Call signal features can be disabled in the BP 2002 BP 1002 by removing a surface mounted capacitor from the printed circuit board Perform the following 1 Before making changes to the printed circuit board disconnect all power and line connections from the beltpack 2 Refer to Figure 3 and locate C61 on the underside of the printed circuit board 3 Remove capacitor C61 from the printed circuit board RESTORING MIC KILL AND CALL SIGNAL To restore the Mic Kill and Call signal features replace C61 with Telex part number 102879 218 1500 pF 50V capacitor 20 Om 00 mg 000 E _ 000 0000000 000 g e 00 000 500 000 0 g 000000 00 Oo 000000 apia 000000 000000 C61 Big PE 0 00 n Sidetone oo Jud in 0 17 Soooo000000000 qo 0 0000 n O Figure 3 Printed Circuit Board FACTORY SERVICE All equipment returned for repair
514. zeigersinn verst rkt die Frequenzen ab 12 kHz um bis zu 15 dB und gibt Becken Gesang und elektronischen Instrumenten mehr Klarheit Drehen entgegen gesetzt des Uhrzeigersinns reduziert Zischlaute und andere unerw nschte hochfrequente Anteile im Signal Wenn dieser Frequenzbereich weder verst rkt noch abgeschw cht werden soll muf3 der Regler in Mittenposition stehen Diese Klangregelung hat eine sogenannte Kuhschwanz Charakteristik und verst rkt bzw schw cht Frequenzen ab 12 kHz um 15 dB LF EQ Drehen des Reglers im Uhrzeigersinn verst rkt die tiefen Frequenzen bis max 60 Hz um bis zu 15 dB und gibt den zus tzlichen Druck Extra Punch f r Synthesizer Gitarren und Drums Drehen entgegen gesetzt des Uhrzeigersinns reduziert Brummen und Dr hnen Wenn dieser Frequenzbereich weder ver st rkt noch abgeschw cht werden soll mu der Regler in Mittenposition ste hen Diese Klangregelung hat eine sogenannte Kuhschwanz Charakteristik und verst rkt bzw schw cht Frequenzen bei 60 Hz um 15 dB AUX SENDS Die Ausspielwege Aux Sends werden f r separate Abmischungen eingesetzt z B f r den Musiker Monitor Effekte oder f r die Aufnahme und die Kombination jedes Ausspielweges steht ein entsprechender Aux AnschluB 6 3 mm Klinke zur Verf gung Die Aux Sends der Stereo Eingangs Kan le sind immer pre fade da zum Monitoraufbau ein pre fade Signal ben tigt wird Beachten Sie da die Line Eing nge als Mono Kanal Paar a
515. zung durch elektrischen Schlag zu vermeiden sollten Sie das Ger t niemals Regen oder Feuchtig keit aussetzen Explicacion de s mbolos rayo dentro de un triangulo equil tero alerta al usuario de la presenda de voltaje peligroso no aislado dentro del producto que puede tener un nivel suficiente para corstitutuir un riesgo de descarga el ctrica para el usario H signo de exdarrad n insaito en un tri ngulo equil tero alerta a los usuarios de la presenda de instrucdones importantes de fundonamiento y mantenimiento servido en la literatura que acompa a al producto PRECAUCI N RIESGO DE DESCARGA ELECTRICA NO LO ABRA PRECAUCI N Para reducir el riesgo de descarga el ctrica no quite la tapa H usario no debe ajustar los componentes internos Para manteni miento solicite la ayuda de personal cualificado AMSO Para evitar un incendio o una descarga el ctrica no exponga este equipo a la o humedad TABLE CONTENTS V TABLE DES MATIERES INHALTSVERZEICHNIS TABLA DE LAS MATERIAS Explanation graphical symbols 2 Bolicationaessyrbales graahiques Erkl rung der Bilobyrbale Exnilicad noebes rrbolos Tatbleobsrratieres Inhaltsverzeichnis Tatlacblasrraterias D amp darationae Corfonrit T Dedaracionce Corfarricad R ckseite Panal posterior CARACTERISTIQUES ET LEUR UTILISATION AUSSTATTUNG amp EINSTELLUNGEN Lirriteurc r terrert G

Bose® Speaker EQ Preset List – Stereo Bank

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Bose&reg; Speaker EQ Preset List &ndash; Stereo Bank

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Bose® Speaker EQ Preset List – Stereo Bank